This is the multi-page printable view of this section. Click here to print.

Return to the regular view of this page.

Compute

Leveraging the country’s top reliability, we conveniently and elastically provide optimal computing resources tailored to each use case.

1 - Virtual Server

1.1 - Overview

Service Overview

Virtual Server is a cloud computing-optimized virtual server that lets you freely allocate the amount you need at the required time without having to purchase infrastructure resources such as CPU and memory individually. In a cloud environment, you can use resources with optimized performance according to your computing purpose, such as development, testing, and application execution.

Features

  • Easy and convenient computing environment setup: Through a web-based Console, users can easily perform self-service provisioning of Virtual Servers, as well as resource and cost management. If you need to change the capacity of major resources such as CPU or Memory while using a Virtual Server, you can easily scale up or down without operator intervention.

  • Providing various types of services: Provides virtualized vCore/Memory resources according to predefined server types (1~128 vCore).

    • General Virtual Server: Provides commonly used computing specs (up to 16 vCore, 256 GB)
    • High-capacity Virtual Server: Provided when resources larger than the standard Virtual Server spec are needed.
  • Strong Security Implementation: By using the Security Group service, you can control inbound/outbound traffic communicating with the external Internet or other VPCs (Virtual Private Cloud) to securely protect the server. Additionally, real-time monitoring enables stable operation of computing resources.

Service Architecture Diagram

Diagram
Figure. Virtual Server Diagram

Provided features

Virtual Server provides the following features.

  • Auto Provisioning and Management: Provides Virtual Server provisioning, resource management, and cost management functions through a web-based Console. If you need to change the capacity of major resources such as CPU or Memory while using Virtual Server, you can modify the server type immediately using the server type modification feature.
  • Standard Server Types and Image Provision: Provides virtualized vCore/Memory resources according to standard server types, and offers standard OS images.
  • Storage Connection: Provides additional attached storage beyond the OS disk. Block Storage, File Storage, and Object Storage can be attached and used.
  • Network Connection: You can connect the standard subnet/IP settings of the Virtual Server and the Public NAT IP. Provides a local subnet connection for inter-server communication. This can be modified on the detail page.
  • Security Group Application: Use the Security Group service to control inbound and outbound traffic communicating with external internet or other VPCs, thereby securely protecting the server.
  • Monitoring: You can view monitoring information for computing resources such as CPU, Memory, and Disk through the Cloud Monitoring service.
  • Backup and Recovery: You can back up and restore the Virtual Server Image using the Backup service.
  • Cost Management: You can create, stop, or terminate servers as needed, and since billing is based on actual usage time, you can monitor costs according to consumption.
  • ServiceWatch Service Integration: You can monitor data using the ServiceWatch service.

Component

Virtual Server provides standard server types and standard OS images. Users can select and use them according to the desired service scale.

Image

You can create and manage images. The main features are as follows.

  • Image creation: You can create an Image from the configuration of a Virtual Server you are using, and you can also create an Image by uploading your Image file to Object Storage.
  • Create Shared Image: You can create an Image with Visibility set to Private as a Shared Image that can be shared.
  • Share with another Account: You can share the Image with another Account.
  • Refer to the How-to guides > Image document for how to create and use images.

Keypair

To ensure a more secure OS login, we strengthen security by providing a Key Pair instead of the ID/Password entry method. The main features are as follows.

  • Keypair creation: Generate a user credential to connect to the Virtual Server.
  • Retrieve Public Key: You can load a file or manually enter the public key to retrieve it.
  • Refer to the How-to guides > Keypair document for creating and using keypairs.

Server Group

Through Server Group settings, you can position the Block Storage added when creating a Virtual Server close to or distributed across racks and hosts. The main features are as follows.

  • Server Group Creation: You can set Virtual Servers belonging to the same Server Group as Anti-Affinity(Distributed placement), Affinity(Proximate placement), or Partition(Virtual Server and Block Storage distributed placement).
  • Refer to the How-to guides > Server Group document for how to create and use Server Groups.

OS Image provided version

The OS images provided by Virtual Server are as follows

OS Image versionEoS Date
Alma Linux 8.102029-05-31
Alma Linux 9.62025-11-17
Oracle Linux 8.102029-07-31
Oracle Linux 9.62025-11-25
RHEL 8.102029-05-31
RHEL 9.42026-04-30
RHEL 9.62027-05-31
Rocky Linux 8.102029-05-31
Rocky Linux 9.62025-11-30
Ubuntu 22.042027-06-30
Ubuntu 24.042029-06-30
Windows 20192029-01-09
Windows 20222031-10-14
Windows 20162027-01-12
Table. Virtual Server provided OS Image version
Reference
  • Linux operating systems such as Alma Linux and Rocky Linux provide only even Minor versions, except for the final release of a Major version. This policy ensures the stability and consistency of the SCP system. We recommend checking the EOS (End of Support) and EOL (End of Life) dates for the operating system, and, if necessary, applying new or additional individual packages to maintain a stable environment.

Server type

The server types supported by Virtual Server are as follows. For detailed information about server types, see Virtual Server Server Types.

Standard s1v2m4
Category
exampleDetailed description
Server typeStandardProvided server type classifications
  • Standard: Configured with the commonly used standard specifications (vCPU, Memory)
  • High Capacity: Large-capacity server specifications exceeding Standard
Server specificationss1Provided server type classification and generation
  • s1: s denotes a standard specification, and 1 denotes the generation provided by Samsung Cloud Platform v2
  • s2: s denotes a standard specification, and 2 denotes the generation provided by Samsung Cloud Platform v2
  • h2: h denotes a high-capacity server specification, and 2 denotes the generation provided by Samsung Cloud Platform v2
Server specificationsv2Number of vCores
  • v2: 2 virtual cores
Server specificationsm4Memory capacity
  • m4: 4GB Memory
Table. Virtual Server server type

Constraints

Reference
  • When creating a Virtual Server with Rocky Linux or Oracle Linux, additional configuration is required for time synchronization (NTP: Network Time Protocol). For other images, it is set automatically and no separate configuration is needed.
    For more details, refer to Linux NTP Setup.
  • If you created RHEL and Windows Server before August 2025, you need to modify the RHEL Repository and WKMS (Windows Key Management Service) settings.
    For more details, see RHEL Repo and WKMS Configuration.

Preliminary Service

This is a list of services that need to be pre-configured before creating the service. Please refer to the guide provided for each service and prepare in advance.

Service CategoryserviceDetailed description
NetworkingVPCA service that provides an isolated virtual network in a cloud environment
NetworkingSecurity GroupVirtual firewall that controls server traffic
Table. Virtual Server Preliminary Service

1.1.1 - Server Type

Virtual Server server type

Virtual Server provides server types that match the intended use. Server types consist of various combinations such as CPU, Memory, and Network Bandwidth. The host server used for a Virtual Server is determined by the server type selected when creating the Virtual Server. Please choose a server type based on the specifications of the application you plan to run on the Virtual Server.

The server types supported by Virtual Server are as follows.

Standard s1v2m4
Category
exampleDetailed description
Server typeStandardProvided server type classifications
  • Standard: Configured with the commonly used standard specifications (vCPU, Memory)
  • High Capacity: Large-capacity server specifications exceeding Standard
Server specificationss1Provided server type classification and generation
  • s1: s denotes a standard specification, and 1 denotes the generation provided by Samsung Cloud Platform v2
  • s2: s denotes a standard specification, and 2 denotes the generation provided by Samsung Cloud Platform v2
  • h2: h denotes a high-capacity server specification, and 2 denotes the generation provided by Samsung Cloud Platform v2
Server specificationsv2Number of vCores
  • v2: 2 virtual cores
Server specificationsm4Memory capacity
  • m4: 4GB Memory
Table. Virtual Server Server Type format

s1 server type

The s1 server type of Virtual Server is offered with standard specifications (vCPU, Memory) and is suitable for various applications.

  • First generation of Samsung Cloud Platform v2: Intel 3rd generation (Ice Lake) Xeon Gold 6342 Processor with up to 3.3 GHz
  • Supports up to 16 vCPUs and 256 GB of memory
  • Maximum networking speed of 12.5 Gbps
CategoryServer typevCPUMemoryNetwork Bandwidth
Standards1v1m21 vCore2 GBUp to 10 Gbps
Standards1v2m42 vCore4 GBUp to 10 Gbps
Standards1v2m82 vCore8 GBUp to 10 Gbps
Standards1v2m162 vCore16 GBUp to 10 Gbps
Standards1v2m242 vCore24 GBUp to 10 Gbps
Standards1v2m322 vCore32 GBUp to 10 Gbps
Standards1v4m84 vCore8 GBUp to 10 Gbps
Standards1v4m164 vCore16 GBUp to 10 Gbps
Standards1v4m324 vCore32 GBUp to 10 Gbps
Standards1v4m484 vCore48 GBUp to 10 Gbps
Standards1v4m644 vCore64 GBUp to 10 Gbps
Standards1v6m126 vCore12 GBUp to 10 Gbps
Standards1v6m246 vCore24 GBUp to 10 Gbps
Standards1v6m486 vCore48 GBUp to 10 Gbps
Standards1v6m726 vCore72 GBUp to 10 Gbps
Standards1v6m966 vCore96 GBUp to 10 Gbps
Standards1v8m168 vCore16 GBUp to 10 Gbps
Standards1v8m328 vCore32 GBUp to 10 Gbps
Standards1v8m648 vCore64 GBUp to 10 Gbps
Standards1v8m968 vCore96 GBUp to 10 Gbps
Standards1v8m1288 vCore128 GBUp to 10 Gbps
Standards1v10m2010 vCore20 GBUp to 10 Gbps
Standards1v10m4010 vCore40 GBUp to 10 Gbps
Standards1v10m8010 vCore80 GBUp to 10 Gbps
Standards1v10m12010 vCore120 GBUp to 10 Gbps
Standards1v10m16010 vCore160 GBUp to 10 Gbps
Standards1v12m2412 vCore24 GBUp to 12.5 Gbps
Standards1v12m4812 vCore48 GBUp to 12.5 Gbps
Standards1v12m9612 vCore96 GBUp to 12.5 Gbps
Standards1v12m14412 vCore144 GBUp to 12.5 Gbps
Standards1v12m19212 vCore192 GBUp to 12.5 Gbps
Standards1v14m2814 vCore28 GBUp to 12.5 Gbps
Standards1v14m5614 vCore56 GBUp to 12.5 Gbps
Standards1v14m11214 vCore112 GBUp to 12.5 Gbps
Standards1v14m16814 vCore168 GBUp to 12.5 Gbps
Standards1v14m22414 vCore224 GBUp to 12.5 Gbps
Standards1v16m3216 vCore32 GBUp to 12.5 Gbps
Standards1v16m6416 vCore64 GBUp to 12.5 Gbps
Standards1v16m12816 vCore128 GBUp to 12.5 Gbps
Standards1v16m19216 vCore192 GBUp to 12.5 Gbps
Standards1v16m25616 vCore256 GBUp to 12.5 Gbps
Table. Virtual Server Server Type specifications - s1 Server Type

s2 server type

The Virtual Server s2 server type is offered with standard specifications (vCPU, Memory) and is suitable for various applications.

  • Samsung Cloud Platform v2, 2nd generation: Intel 4th‑generation (Sapphire Rapids) Xeon Gold 6448H Processor up to 3.2 GHz
  • Supports up to 16 vCPUs and 256 GB of memory
  • Maximum networking speed of 12.5 Gbps
CategoryServer typeCPU vCoreMemoryNetwork Bandwidth(Gbps)
Standards2v1m21 vCore2 GBUp to 10 Gbps
Standards2v2m42 vCore4 GBUp to 10 Gbps
Standards2v2m82 vCore8 GBUp to 10 Gbps
Standards2v2m162 vCore16 GBUp to 10 Gbps
Standards2v2m242 vCore24 GBUp to 10 Gbps
Standards2v2m322 vCore32 GBUp to 10 Gbps
Standards2v4m84 vCore8 GBUp to 10 Gbps
Standards2v4m164 vCore16 GBUp to 10 Gbps
Standards2v4m324 vCore32 GBUp to 10 Gbps
Standards2v4m484 vCore48 GBUp to 10 Gbps
Standards2v4m644 vCore64 GBUp to 10 Gbps
Standards2v6m126 vCore12 GBUp to 10 Gbps
Standards2v6m246 vCore24 GBUp to 10 Gbps
Standards2v6m486 vCore48 GBUp to 10 Gbps
Standards2v6m726 vCore72 GBUp to 10 Gbps
Standards2v6m966 vCore96 GBUp to 10 Gbps
Standards2v8m168 vCore16 GBUp to 10 Gbps
Standards2v8m328 vCore32 GBUp to 10 Gbps
Standards2v8m648 vCore64 GBUp to 10 Gbps
Standards2v8m968 vCore96 GBUp to 10 Gbps
Standards2v8m1288 vCore128 GBUp to 10 Gbps
Standards2v10m2010 vCore20 GBUp to 10 Gbps
Standards2v10m4010 vCore40 GBUp to 10 Gbps
Standards2v10m8010 vCore80 GBUp to 10 Gbps
Standards2v10m12010 vCore120 GBUp to 10 Gbps
Standards2v10m16010 vCore160 GBUp to 10 Gbps
Standards2v12m2412 vCore24 GBUp to 12.5 Gbps
Standards2v12m4812 vCore48 GBUp to 12.5 Gbps
Standards2v12m9612 vCore96 GBUp to 12.5 Gbps
Standards2v12m14412 vCore144 GBUp to 12.5 Gbps
Standards2v12m19212 vCore192 GBUp to 12.5 Gbps
Standards2v14m2814 vCore28 GBUp to 12.5 Gbps
Standards2v14m5614 vCore56 GBUp to 12.5 Gbps
Standards2v14m11214 vCore112 GBUp to 12.5 Gbps
Standards2v14m16814 vCore168 GBUp to 12.5 Gbps
Standards2v14m22414 vCore224 GBUp to 12.5 Gbps
Standards2v16m3216 vCore32 GBUp to 12.5 Gbps
Standards2v16m6416 vCore64 GBUp to 12.5 Gbps
Standards2v16m12816 vCore128 GBUp to 12.5 Gbps
Standards2v16m19216 vCore192 GBUp to 12.5 Gbps
Standards2v16m25616 vCore256 GBUp to 12.5 Gbps
Table. Virtual Server Server Type specifications - s2 Server Type

h2 Server Type

The h2 server type of Virtual Server is offered with high-capacity specifications and is suitable for applications that require large-scale data processing.

  • Second generation of Samsung Cloud Platform v2: Intel 4th‑generation (Sapphire Rapids) Xeon Gold 6448H processor up to 3.2 GHz
  • Supports up to 128 vCPUs and 1,536 GB of memory
  • Networking speed up to 25 Gbps
CategoryServer typevCPUMemoryNetwork Bandwidth
High Capacityh2v24m4824 vCore48 GBUp to 25 Gbps
High Capacityh2v24m9624 vCore96 GBMaximum 25 Gbps
High Capacityh2v24m19224 vCore192 GBMaximum 25 Gbps
High Capacityh2v24m28824 vCore288 GBMaximum 25 Gbps
High Capacityh2v32m6432 vCore64 GBMaximum 25 Gbps
High Capacityh2v32m12832 vCore128 GBMaximum 25 Gbps
High Capacityh2v32m25632 vCore256 GBMaximum 25 Gbps
High Capacityh2v32m38432 vCore384 GBMaximum 25 Gbps
High Capacityh2v48m9648 vCore96 GBMaximum 25 Gbps
High Capacityh2v48m19248 vCore192 GBMaximum 25 Gbps
High Capacityh2v48m38448 vCore384 GBMaximum 25 Gbps
High Capacityh2v48m57648 vCore576 GBMaximum 25 Gbps
High Capacityh2v64m12864 vCore128 GBMaximum 25 Gbps
High Capacityh2v64m25664 vCore256 GBUp to 25 Gbps
High Capacityh2v64m51264 vCore512 GBMaximum 25 Gbps
High Capacityh2v64m76864 vCore768 GBMaximum 25 Gbps
High Capacityh2v72m14472 vCore144 GBUp to 25 Gbps
High Capacityh2v72m28872 vCore288 GBMaximum 25 Gbps
High Capacityh2v72m57672 vCore576 GBMaximum 25 Gbps
High Capacityh2v72m86472 vCore864 GBMaximum 25 Gbps
High Capacityh2v96m19296 vCore192 GBMaximum 25 Gbps
High Capacityh2v96m38496 vCore384 GBMaximum 25 Gbps
High Capacityh2v96m76896 vCore768 GBMaximum 25 Gbps
High Capacityh2v96m115296 vCore1152 GBMaximum 25 Gbps
High Capacityh2v128m256128 vCore256 GBMaximum 25 Gbps
High Capacityh2v128m512128 vCore512 GBMaximum 25 Gbps
High Capacityh2v128m1024128 vCore1024 GBUp to 25 Gbps
High Capacityh2v128m1536128 vCore1536 GBMaximum 25 Gbps
Table. Virtual Server Server Type specifications - h2 Server Type

1.1.2 - Monitoring Metrics

Cloud Monitoring service termination notice

According to Samsung Cloud Platform’s policy, the Cloud Monitoring service is scheduled to be discontinued in September 2026.
Starting after the September 2026 release, resource monitoring of the Samsung Cloud Platform via Cloud Monitoring will no longer be possible.

With the new alternative service, you can continuously perform resource monitoring by leveraging ServiceWatch released in October 2025.
ServiceWatch provides more modern and powerful features, replacing Cloud Monitoring to deliver a seamless monitoring environment.

Detailed information about ServiceWatch can be found in the ServiceWatch Overview.

Virtual Server Monitoring Metrics

The table below shows the monitoring metrics of Virtual Server that can be viewed through Cloud Monitoring. For detailed usage of Cloud Monitoring, refer to the Cloud Monitoring guide.

Provides basic monitoring metrics even without installing an agent, as shown below table. Please check the Virtual Server monitoring metrics (default). Additionally, the metrics that can be viewed by installing the Agent are in the table below. Virtual Server additional monitoring metrics (Agent installation required)** Please refer to it.

For Windows OS, memory-related metrics can only be viewed after installing the Agent.

Performance itemsDetailed descriptionunit
Memory Total [Basic]bytes of usable memorybytes
Memory Used [Basic]Current memory usage in bytesbytes
Memory Swap In [Basic]bytes of the replaced memorybytes
Memory Swap Out [Basic]bytes of the replaced memorybytes
Memory Free [Basic]bytes of unused memorybytes
Disk Read Bytes [Basic]Read bytesbytes
Disk Read Requests [Basic]Number of read requestscnt
Disk Write Bytes [Basic]write bytesbytes
Disk Write Requests [Basic]Number of write requestscnt
CPU Usage [Basic]Average system CPU usage over 1 minute%
Instance State [Basic]Instance statusstate
Network In Bytes [Basic]Received bytesbytes
Network In Dropped [Basic]Incoming packet dropcnt
Network In Packets [Basic]Number of received packetscnt
Network Out Bytes [Basic]sent bytesbytes
Network Out Dropped [Basic]Transmit packet dropcnt
Network Out Packets [Basic]Number of transmitted packetscnt
Table. Virtual Server Monitoring Metrics (Provided by default)
Performance itemsDetailed descriptionunit
Core Usage [IO Wait]Ratio of CPU time spent in wait state (disk wait)%
Core Usage [System]Proportion of CPU time spent in kernel space%
Core Usage [User]Proportion of CPU time spent in user space%
CPU CoresNumber of CPU cores on the hostcnt
CPU Usage [Active]Percentage of CPU time used other than Idle and IOWait states%
CPU Usage [Idle]It is the proportion of CPU time spent in idle state.%
CPU Usage [IO Wait]This is the proportion of CPU time spent in a waiting state (disk wait).%
CPU Usage [System]Percentage of CPU time used by the kernel%
CPU Usage [User]Percentage of CPU time used in user space%
CPU Usage/Core [Active]Percentage of CPU time used other than Idle and IOWait states%
CPU Usage/Core [Idle]It is the proportion of CPU time spent in idle state.%
CPU Usage/Core [IO Wait]This is the proportion of CPU time spent in a waiting state (disk wait).%
CPU Usage/Core [System]Percentage of CPU time used by the kernel%
CPU Usage/Core [User]Percentage of CPU time used in user space%
DiskCPU Usage [IO Request]Proportion of CPU time during which I/O requests to the device were executed%
Disk Queue Size [Avg]The average queue length of requests executed for the device.num
Disk Read BytesThe number of bytes read per second from the device.bytes
Disk Read Bytes [Delta Avg]Average of system.diskio.read.bytes_delta for individual disksbytes
Disk Read Bytes [Delta Max]Maximum system.diskio.read.bytes_delta of individual disksbytes
Disk Read Bytes [Delta Min]Minimum of system.diskio.read.bytes_delta for individual disksbytes
Disk Read Bytes [Delta Sum]Sum of system.diskio.read.bytes_delta of individual disksbytes
Disk Read Bytes [Delta]Delta of the system.diskio.read.bytes value for each Diskbytes
Disk Read Bytes [Success]Total bytes successfully readbytes
Disk Read RequestsNumber of read requests to the disk device per secondcnt
Disk Read Requests [Delta Avg]Average of system.diskio.read.count_delta for individual diskscnt
Disk Read Requests [Delta Max]Maximum system.diskio.read.count_delta for individual diskscnt
Disk Read Requests [Delta Min]Minimum of system.diskio.read.count_delta for individual diskscnt
Disk Read Requests [Delta Sum]Sum of the system.diskio.read.count_delta of individual diskscnt
Disk Read Requests [Success Delta]Delta of system.diskio.read.count for each Diskcnt
Disk Read Requests [Success]Total number of successful readscnt
Disk Request Size [Avg]It is the average size of requests executed on the device (unit: sectors).num
Disk Service Time [Avg]Average service time (milliseconds) of input requests executed on the device.ms
Disk Wait Time [Avg]Average time taken for requests executed on the supported device.ms
Disk Wait Time [Read]Average disk wait timems
Disk Wait Time [Write]Average disk wait timems
Disk Write Bytes [Delta Avg]Average of system.diskio.write.bytes_delta for each diskbytes
Disk Write Bytes [Delta Max]Maximum system.diskio.write.bytes_delta of individual disksbytes
Disk Write Bytes [Delta Min]Minimum of system.diskio.write.bytes_delta for individual disksbytes
Disk Write Bytes [Delta Sum]Sum of system.diskio.write.bytes_delta for individual disksbytes
Disk Write Bytes [Delta]Delta of the system.diskio.write.bytes value for each Diskbytes
Disk Write Bytes [Success]Total number of bytes successfully writtenbytes
Disk Write RequestsNumber of write requests to the disk device per secondcnt
Disk Write Requests [Delta Avg]Average of system.diskio.write.count_delta for individual diskscnt
Disk Write Requests [Delta Max]Maximum system.diskio.write.count_delta of individual diskscnt
Disk Write Requests [Delta Min]Minimum of system.diskio.write.count_delta for individual diskscnt
Disk Write Requests [Delta Sum]Sum of system.diskio.write.count_delta for individual diskscnt
Disk Write Requests [Success Delta]Delta of system.diskio.write.count for each Diskcnt
Disk Write Requests [Success]Total number of successful writescnt
Disk Writes BytesBytes per second written to the devicebytes
Filesystem Hang Checkfilesystem(local/NFS) hang check(normal:1, abnormal:0)status
Filesystem NodesTotal number of file nodes in the file system.cnt
Filesystem Nodes [Free]It is the total number of available file nodes in the file system.cnt
Filesystem Size [Available]Disk space (bytes) available to unauthorized usersbytes
Filesystem Size [Free]Available disk space (bytes)bytes
Filesystem Size [Total]Total disk space (bytes)bytes
Filesystem UsageUsed disk space percentage%
Filesystem Usage [Avg]Average of individual filesystem.used.pct%
Filesystem Usage [Inode]iNode usage rate%
Filesystem Usage [Max]Maximum among individual filesystem.used.pct%
Filesystem Usage [Min]Min among individual filesystem.used.pct%
Filesystem Usage [Total]-%
Filesystem UsedUsed disk space (bytes)bytes
Filesystem Used [Inode]iNode usagebytes
Memory FreeTotal available memory (bytes)bytes
Memory Free [Actual]Actual usable Memory (bytes)bytes
Memory Free [Swap]Available Swap memorybytes
Memory TotalTotal Memorybytes
Memory Total [Swap]Total Swap memory.bytes
Memory UsagePercentage of used memory%
Memory Usage [Actual]Percentage of memory actually used%
Memory Usage [Cache Swap]cached swap usage%
Memory Usage [Swap]Percentage of used Swap memory%
Memory UsedUsed Memorybytes
Memory Used [Actual]Actual memory used (bytes)bytes
Memory Used [Swap]Used Swap memorybytes
CollisionsNetwork collisioncnt
Network In BytesNumber of received bytesbytes
Network In Bytes [Delta Avg]Average of system.network.in.bytes_delta for individual networksbytes
Network In Bytes [Delta Max]Maximum system.network.in.bytes_delta for each Networkbytes
Network In Bytes [Delta Min]Minimum of system.network.in.bytes_delta for each networkbytes
Network In Bytes [Delta Sum]Sum of system.network.in.bytes_delta for individual networksbytes
Network In Bytes [Delta]Delta of received byte countbytes
Network In DroppedNumber of deleted packets among incoming packetscnt
Network In ErrorsNumber of errors during receptioncnt
Network In PacketsNumber of received packetscnt
Network In Packets [Delta Avg]Average of system.network.in.packets_delta for individual Networkscnt
Network In Packets [Delta Max]Maximum of system.network.in.packets_delta for each Networkcnt
Network In Packets [Delta Min]Minimum of system.network.in.packets_delta for each Networkcnt
Network In Packets [Delta Sum]Sum of system.network.in.packets_delta for individual Networkscnt
Network In Packets [Delta]Delta of received packet countcnt
Network Out BytesNumber of transmitted bytesbytes
Network Out Bytes [Delta Avg]Average of system.network.out.bytes_delta for individual networksbytes
Network Out Bytes [Delta Max]Maximum system.network.out.bytes_delta for each Networkbytes
Network Out Bytes [Delta Min]Minimum of system.network.out.bytes_delta for individual Networksbytes
Network Out Bytes [Delta Sum]Sum of system.network.out.bytes_delta for individual Networksbytes
Network Out Bytes [Delta]Delta of transmitted byte countbytes
Network Out DroppedNumber of deleted packets among outgoing packetscnt
Network Out ErrorsNumber of errors during transmissioncnt
Network Out PacketsNumber of transmitted packetscnt
Network Out Packets [Delta Avg]Average of system.network.out.packets_delta for each Networkcnt
Network Out Packets [Delta Max]Maximum system.network.out.packets_delta for each Networkcnt
Network Out Packets [Delta Min]Minimum of system.network.out.packets_delta for each Networkcnt
Network Out Packets [Delta Sum]Sum of system.network.out.packets_delta for individual networkscnt
Network Out Packets [Delta]Delta of transmitted packet countcnt
Open Connections [TCP]All open TCP connectionscnt
Open Connections [UDP]All open UDP connectionscnt
Port UsageConnectable port utilization%
SYN Sent SocketsNumber of sockets in SYN_SENT state (when connecting from local to remote)cnt
Kernel PID Maxkernel.pid_max valuecnt
Kernel Thread Maxkernel.threads-max valuecnt
Process CPU UsagePercentage of CPU time consumed by the process since the last update%
Process CPU Usage/CorePercentage of CPU time used by the process since the last event%
Process Memory UsageProportion of main memory (RAM) occupied by a process%
Process Memory UsedResident Set size. The amount of memory a process occupies in RAM.bytes
Process PIDprocess pidpid
Process PPIDParent process PIDpid
Processes [Dead]Number of deadProcessescnt
Processes [Idle]idle Processes countcnt
Processes [Running]running Processes countcnt
Processes [Sleeping]sleeping processes countcnt
Processes [Stopped]stopped processes countcnt
Processes [Total]Total number of processescnt
Processes [Unknown]Number of processes whose status cannot be retrieved or is unknowncnt
Processes [Zombie]Number of zombie processescnt
Running Process Usageprocess usage%
Running ProcessesNumber of running processescnt
Running Thread UsageThread usage rate%
Running ThreadsTotal number of threads running in running processescnt
Context Switchescontext switch count (per second)cnt
Load/Core [1 min]The load over the last 1 minute divided by the number of corescnt
Load/Core [15 min]The load over the last 15 minutes divided by the number of corescnt
Load/Core [5 min]The load over the last 5 minutes divided by the number of corescnt
Multipaths [Active]External storage connection path status = active countcnt
Multipaths [Failed]External storage connection path status = failed countcnt
Multipaths [Faulty]External storage connection path status = faulty countcnt
NTP Offset lastsample’s measured offset (time difference between NTP server and local environment)num
Run Queue LengthExecution queue lengthnum
UptimeOS uptime (milliseconds)ms
Context Switchies CPUcontext switch count (per second)cnt
Disk Read Bytes [Sec]Number of bytes read in one second from a Windows logical disk
  • Windows only
cnt
Disk Read Time [Avg]Data read average time (seconds)
  • Windows only
sec
Disk Transfer Time [Avg]Disk average wait time (seconds)
  • Windows only
sec
Disk Write Bytes [Sec]Number of bytes written in one second on a Windows logical disk
  • Windows only
cnt
Disk Write Time [Avg]Average data write time (seconds)
  • Windows only
sec
Pagingfile Usagepaging file usage
  • Windows only
%
Pool Used [Non Paged]Nonpaged Pool usage in kernel memory
  • Windows only
bytes
Pool Used [Paged]Paged Pool usage in kernel memory
  • Windows only
bytes
Process [Running]Number of currently running processes
  • Windows only
cnt
Threads [Running]Number of currently running threads
  • Windows only
cnt
Threads [Waiting]Number of threads waiting for processor time
  • Windows only
cnt
Table. Additional monitoring metrics for Virtual Server (Agent installation required)

1.1.3 - ServiceWatch Metrics

Virtual Server sends metrics to ServiceWatch. The metrics provided by default monitoring are data collected at 5‑minute intervals. If detailed monitoring is enabled, you can view data collected at 1‑minute intervals.

Reference
For how to view metrics in ServiceWatch, refer to the ServiceWatch guide.

See How-to guides > ServiceWatch Enable Detailed Monitoring for instructions on enabling detailed monitoring of Virtual Server.

Basic Metrics

The following are the basic metrics for the Virtual Server namespace.

The indicators whose names are displayed in bold below are the indicators selected as key metrics among the default metrics provided by Virtual Server. The key metrics are used to build service dashboards that are automatically generated for each service in ServiceWatch. They can also be viewed on the Monitoring tab of the Virtual Server detail page.

Each metric provides guidance in the user guide on which statistical value is meaningful to query, and among the meaningful statistics, the values shown in bold text are the primary statistics. In the service dashboard or monitoring tab, you can view primary metrics using these primary statistics.

Performance item (indicator name)Detailed descriptionunitmeaningful statistics
Instance StateInstance status display
  • 1 - Active
  • 0 - Off
None
  • Total
CPU UsageCPU usagePercent
  • Average
  • Maximum
  • Minimum
Disk Read BytesBytes read from block device (bytes)Bytes
  • Total
  • Average
  • Maximum
  • Minimum
Disk Read RequestsNumber of read requests on a block deviceCount
  • Total
  • Average
  • Maximum
  • Minimum
Disk Write BytesWrite capacity (bytes) on block deviceBytes
  • Total
  • Average
  • Maximum
  • Minimum
Disk Write RequestsNumber of write requests on block deviceCount
  • Total
  • Average
  • Maximum
  • Minimum
Network In BytesReceived bytes on the network interfaceBytes
  • Total
  • Average
  • Maximum
  • Minimum
Network In DroppedNumber of packet drops received on the network interfaceCount
  • Total
  • Average
  • Maximum
  • Minimum
Network In PacketsNumber of packets received on the network interfaceCount
  • Total
  • Average
  • Maximum
  • Minimum
Network Out BytesData transmitted on the network interface (bytes)Bytes
  • Total
  • Average
  • Maximum
  • Minimum
Network Out DroppedNumber of packet drops transmitted from the network interfaceCount
  • Total
  • Average
  • Maximum
  • Minimum
Network Out PacketsNumber of packets transmitted on the network interfaceCount
  • Total
  • Average
  • Maximum
  • Minimum
Table. Virtual Server basic metrics
Reference
Refer to the ServiceWatch Agent guide for how to collect metrics using the ServiceWatch Agent.

1.2 - How-to guides

Users can create the service by entering the required information for a Virtual Server and selecting detailed options through the Samsung Cloud Platform Console.

Create Virtual Server

You can create and use a Virtual Server service in the Samsung Cloud Platform Console.

To create a Virtual Server, follow these steps.

  1. Click the All Services > Compute > Virtual Server menu. 1. Navigate to the Service Home page of the Virtual Server.

  2. On the Service Home page, click the Create Virtual Server button. 2. Navigate to the Create Virtual Server page.

  3. On the Virtual Server Creation page, enter the information required to create the service and select detailed options.

    • Select the required information in the Image and version selection area.
      Category
      required status
      Detailed description
      ImageRequiredSelect the provided Image type
      • Standard: Samsung Cloud Platform standard provided Image
        • Alma Linux, Oracle Linux, RHEL, Rocky Linux, Ubuntu, Windows
      • Custom: User-created Image
      • Kubernetes: Image for Kubernetes
        • RHEL, Ubuntu
      • Marketplace: Image subscribed from Marketplace
      Image versionRequiredSelect version of the selected Image
      • Provide version list of the server Image
      Table. Virtual Server Image and version selection input items
    • In the Service Information Input area, enter or select the required information.
      Category
      required status
      Detailed description
      Number of serversRequiredNumber of servers to create concurrently
      • Only numeric input is allowed, and enter a value between 1~100
      Service Type > Server TypeRequiredVirtual Server server type
      • Standard: standard specifications commonly used
      • High Capacity: large‑capacity server specifications beyond Standard
      Service Type > Planned ComputeRequiredPlanned Compute-configured resource status
      • In Use: Number of resources with Planned Compute that are currently in use
      • Configured: Number of resources with Planned Compute configured
      • Coverage Preview: Amount applied per resource by Planned Compute
      • Apply for Planned Compute Service: Go to the Planned Compute service creation page
      Block StorageEssentialBlock Storage settings used by the server according to purpose
      • Basic OS: Area where the OS is installed and used
        • Capacity is entered in Units, and the minimum size varies by OS Image type
          • Alma Linux: Enter a value between 2~1,536
          • Oracle Linux: Enter a value between 7~1,536
          • RHEL: Enter a value between 2~1,536
          • Rocky Linux: Enter a value between 2~1,536
          • Ubuntu: Enter a value between 2~1,536
          • Windows: Enter a value between 4~1,536
        • SSD: High‑performance general volume
        • HDD: General volume
        • SSD/HDD_KMS: Additional encrypted volume using Samsung Cloud Platform KMS (Key Management Service) encryption keys
          • Encryption can be applied only at initial creation and cannot be changed afterward
          • Using the SSD_KMS disk type may cause performance degradation
        • SSD_Provisioned: SSD volume with configurable IOPS and Throughput
      • Additional: Used when extra user space beyond the OS area is needed
        • After selecting Use, enter the storage type and capacity
        • To add storage, click the + button; to delete, click the x button (up to 25 can be added)
        • Capacity is entered in Units, with a value between 1~1,536
          • 1 Unit equals 8 GB, so 8~12,288 GB are created
        • SSD: High‑performance general volume
        • HDD: General volume
        • SSD/HDD_KMS: Additional encrypted volume using Samsung Cloud Platform KMS (Key Management Service) encryption keys
          • Encryption can be applied only at initial creation and cannot be changed afterward
          • Using the SSD_KMS disk type may cause performance degradation
        • SSD/HDD_MultiAttach: Volume that can be attached to two or more servers
        • SSD_Provisioned: SSD volume with configurable IOPS and Throughput
      • Delete on termination: When Delete on Termination is selected, the volume is terminated together with the server
        • A volume with an existing snapshot is not deleted even when Delete on termination is enabled
        • A multi‑attach volume can be deleted only when the server being removed is the last remaining server attached to the volume
      • Max IOPS: Enter a maximum IOPS value between 5,000~20,000
        • Not configurable for disk types HDD, HDD_KMS, HDD_MultiAttach
      • Max Throughput: Enter a maximum Throughput value between 250~1,000
        • Not configurable for disk types HDD, HDD_KMS, HDD_MultiAttach
      Server GroupSelectAfter selecting Use for setting Anti-Affinity (distributed placement), Affinity (proximate placement), Partition (distributed placement of Virtual Server and Block Storage) for servers belonging to the same Server Group
      • , select the Server Group
      • , choose Create New to create the Server Group
      Servers belonging to the same Server Group are placed in a Best Effort manner according to the selected policy
      The policy can be selected among Anti-Affinity (distributed placement), Affinity (proximate placement), Partition (distributed placement of Virtual Server and Block Storage)
      Table. Virtual Server service information input items
      Caution
      When using the Partition (distributed placement of Virtual Server and Block Storage) policy among Server Group policies, you cannot allocate additional Block Storage Volumes after creating a Virtual Server, so create all required Block Storage during the Virtual Server creation step.
    • Required Information Input area, please enter or select the required information.
      Category
      required status
      Detailed description
      Server nameEssentialEnter a name to distinguish the server when the selected number of servers is 1
      • Set the hostname to the entered server name
      • Enter using English letters, numbers, spaces, and special characters (-, _) within 63 characters
      Network Settings > Create New Network PortRequiredSet the network where the Virtual Server will be installed
      • VPC Name: Select a pre‑created VPC
      • General Subnet: Select a pre‑created general Subnet
        • IP can be set to auto‑generate or user‑provided; if input is selected, the user can manually enter the IP
        • NAT: Available only when there is a single server and the VPC is attached to an Internet Gateway. Checking Use allows selection of a NAT IP
        • NAT IP: Select a NAT IP
          • If no NAT IP is available, click the Create New button to generate a Public IP
          • Refresh button to view and select the created Public IP
          • Creating a Public IP incurs charges according to the Public IP pricing policy
      • Local Subnet (optional): Select Use for a local Subnet
        • It is not a required element for creating the service
        • A pre‑created local Subnet must be selected
        • IP can be set to auto‑generate or user‑provided; if input is selected, the user can manually enter the IP
      • Security Group: Settings required to access the server
        • Select: Choose a pre‑created Security Group
        • Create New: If no applicable Security Group exists, it can be created separately in the Security Group service
        • Up to 5 can be selected
        • If no Security Group is set, all connections are blocked by default
        • A Security Group must be configured to allow required connections
      Network Settings > Specify Existing Network PortRequiredSet the network where the Virtual Server will be installed
      • VPC: Select a pre‑created VPC
      • General Subnet: Select a pre‑created general Subnet and port
        • NAT: Available only when there is a single server and the VPC is attached to an Internet Gateway. When enabled, you can select a NAT IP
        • NAT IP: Select a NAT IP
          • If no NAT IP is available to select, click the Create New button to generate a Public IP
          • Refresh button to view and select the created Public IP
      • Local Subnet (Optional): Choose Use for the local Subnet
        • Select a pre‑created local Subnet and port
      KeypairRequiredUser authentication method to use when connecting to the server
      • Default login account list by OS
        • Alma Linux: almalinux
        • Oracle Linux: cloud-user
        • RHEL: cloud-user
        • Rocky Linux: rocky
        • Ubuntu: ubuntu
        • Windows: sysadmin
      Table: Required input fields for Virtual Server
    • Additional Information Input area, please enter or select the required information.
      Category
      required status
      Detailed description
      LockSelectLock usage setting
      • Using the lock prevents actions such as server termination, start, stop, etc., from being executed, preventing misoperations due to mistakes
      Init scriptSelectthe script that runs when the server starts
      • The init script must be written as a Batch script for Windows, a Shell script or cloud‑init for Linux, depending on the Image type.
      • Up to 45,000 bytes can be entered
      tagSelectAdd Tag
      • Up to 50 can be added per resource
      • After clicking the Add Tag button, enter or select Key, Value values
      Table. Virtual Server additional information input fields
  4. Summary Check the detailed information and estimated charges generated in the panel, and click the Create button.

    • Once creation is complete, check the created resources on the Virtual Server List page.
information
  • When entering the server name, if spaces and special characters (_) are used, the OS hostname will have spaces and special characters (_) changed to the special character (-) and be set. * Refer to this when setting the OS hostname.
    • Example: If the server name is ‘server name_01’, the OS hostname is set to ‘server-name-01’.
  • If you need to manage server names uniquely, specify a different server name (Prefix) when creating them.
    • When creating a server, because the numbering does not automatically increment based on the server name (Prefix), a Virtual Server with the same name can be created.
    • Example: If you first create two Virtual Servers using the server name (Prefix) ’test’, ’test-1’ and ’test-2’ will be created. * After that, even if you create two Virtual Servers again using the prefix ’test’, ’test-1’ and ’test-2’ will be created.
Reference
  • If you create a Virtual Server with Rocky Linux or Oracle Linux, additional configuration is required for time synchronization (NTP: Network Time Protocol). * For more details, please refer to Linux NTP 설정하기.
  • If RHEL and Windows Server were created before July 2025, you need to modify the RHEL Repository and WKMS (Windows Key Management Service) settings. For detailed information, refer to RHEL Repo 및 WKMS 설정하기.

Check Virtual Server detailed information

The Virtual Server service allows you to view and edit the entire resource list and detailed information. The Virtual Server Details page includes the Details, Monitoring, Tags, Activity Log tabs.

To view detailed information about the Virtual Server service, follow these steps.

  1. All Services > Compute > Virtual Server menu, click it. 1. Navigate to the Service Home page of the Virtual Server.
  2. On the Service Home page, click the Virtual Server menu. 2. Go to the Virtual Server List page.
  3. On the Virtual Server List page, click the resource to view detailed information. 3. Navigate to the Virtual Server Details page.
    • Virtual Server Details page displays status information and additional feature information, and consists of Details, Monitoring, Tags, Activity Log tabs.
    • For detailed information about Virtual Server Add-on Features, please refer to Virtual Server Management Add-on Features.
      CategoryDetailed description
      Virtual Server statusStatus of a user-created Virtual Server
      • Build: State where a Build command has been received
      • Building: Build in progress
      • Networking: Server creation networking process
      • Scheduling: Server creation scheduling process
      • Block_Device_Mapping: Attaching Block Storage during server creation
      • Spawning: Server creation process is ongoing
      • Active: Available state
      • Powering_off: State when a shutdown request is made
      • Deleting: Server deletion in progress
      • Reboot_Started: Reboot in progress
      • Error: Error state
      • Migrating: Server is being migrated to another host
      • Reboot: Reboot command has been received
      • Rebooting: Restart in progress
      • Rebuild: Rebuild command has been received
      • Rebuilding: State when a Rebuild request is made
      • Rebuild_Spawning: Rebuild process is ongoing
      • Resize: Resize command has been received
      • Resizing: Resize in progress
      • Resize_Prep: State when a server type change is requested
      • Resize_Migrating: Server is being moved to another host while resizing
      • Resize_Migrated: Server has completed moving to another host during resize
      • Resize_Finish: Resize completed
      • Revert_Resize: Resize or migration of the server failed for some reason. The target server is cleaned up and the original server is restarted
      • Shutoff: State when powering off is completed
      • Verity_ Resize: After a server type change request and Resize_Prep, the server type is confirmed or can be reverted
      • Resize_Reverting: State when a server type revert is requested
      • Resize_Confirming: State while confirming the server’s Resize request
      Server controlButtons to change server status
      • Start: Start a stopped server
      • Stop: Stop a running server
      • Restart: Restart a running server
      Image generationCreate a user Image from the current server’s Image
      Console logView console logs of the current server
      Create dumpCreate a dump of the current server
      • Dump file is created inside the Virtual Server
      RebuildThe OS area data and settings of the existing Virtual Server are deleted, and it is rebuilt on a new server
      Service terminationButton to cancel the service
      Table. Virtual Server status information and additional functions

Detailed Information

Virtual Server List page lets you view detailed information of the selected resource and, if needed, modify the information.

CategoryDetailed description
serviceService name
Resource TypeResource Type
SRNUnique resource ID in Samsung Cloud Platform
  • In Virtual Server, it refers to the Virtual Server SRN
Resource nameResource name
  • In the Virtual Server service, it means the Virtual Server name
Resource IDUnique resource ID in the service
ConstructorUser who created the service
Creation date and timeService creation timestamp
ModifierUser who edited the service information
Modification timestampDate and time the service information was modified
Server nameServer name
  • Edit Click the button to change the name
  • When changing the server name, the OS hostname is not changed; only the information within the Samsung Cloud Platform Console is updated
  • Modification is not allowed for Virtual Servers created from other resources
Server typevCPU, memory information display
  • If you need to change to a different server type, click the Edit button to configure
Image nameServer OS Image and version
  • Image selectable by version and build date
LockShow lock usage status
  • If you need to change the Lock property value, click the Edit button to set it
Server groupServer group name to which the server belongs
  • If the server group is not used, it will not be displayed.
Keypair nameServer authentication information set by the user
  • The default login accounts for each OS are as follows.
    • Alma Linux: almalinux
    • Oracle Linux: cloud-user
    • RHEL: cloud-user
    • Rocky Linux: rocky
    • Ubuntu: ubuntu
    • Windows: sysadmin
Planned ComputeResource status with Planned Compute configured
ServiceWatch detailed monitoringServiceWatch detailed monitoring activation status display
  • To enable ServiceWatch detailed monitoring, click the Edit button to configure
  • Not provided for Virtual Servers created in Auto-Scaling Group or Marketplace
NetworkNetwork information of the Virtual Server
  • VPC, standard Subnet, IP and status, Public NAT IP and status, Private NAT IP and status, Virtual IP, Security Group
  • If an IP change is required, click the Edit button to configure
    • Editing is possible only when the Virtual Server status is other than Active or Shutoff
    • For the default port, Default is displayed next to the IP, and it cannot be detached
  • If a Security Group change is required, click the Edit button to configure
  • If a Virtual IP change is required, it can be edited on the Virtual IP Management tab of the Networking > VPC > Subnet Details page
  • Add as a new network port: select a standard Subnet and IP
    • You can select a different standard Subnet within the same VPC
    • IP can be set to auto-generate or manual entry; if manual is selected, the user can directly input the IP
  • Add to an existing network port: select a pre-created standard Subnet and port
Local SubnetLocal Subnet information of the Virtual Server
  • Local Subnet, Local Subnet IP, Security Group name, Virtual IP
  • If a Security Group change is required, you can click the Edit button to configure
  • Add as new network port: select the local Subnet and IP
    • You can select another regular Subnet within the same VPC
    • IP can be set to auto-generated or user input, and if input is selected, the user can directly enter the IP
  • Add to existing network port: select a pre-created local Subnet and port
Block StorageServer-connected Block Storage information
  • Volume ID, Volume Name, Disk Type, Capacity, Connection Information, Type, Delete on termination, Status
  • Add: Connect additional Block Storage when needed
  • Edit Delete on termination: Modify the Delete on termination value of the selected Block Storage in the list
  • More > Detach: Detach the selected Block Storage’s connection
    • Detachment is not possible for OS default Storage
Table. Virtual Server Details Tab Items

Monitoring

You can monitor the ServiceWatch metrics of the resources selected on the Virtual Server List page. In the Monitoring tab, you can view monitoring charts for the Virtual Server, and each chart is based on the available Service Watch metrics.

CategoryDetailed description
Period setting areaSelect the period applied to the chart
  • Metric lookup can be set from now up to a maximum of 455 days
Time Zone Settings SectionSelect time zone for the chart
Reset buttonReset all manipulations and settings made on the chart
Refresh Settings AreaSelect chart refresh interval
  • Refresh button updates the information based on the current time
  • Click the refresh interval to choose the desired period: Off, 10 seconds, 1 minute, 2 minutes, 5 minutes, 15 minutes
Go to the service dashboardNavigate to the ServiceWatch dashboard list screen
MoreDisplay additional tasks for managing charts
graph areaData graph collected over the chart’s applied period
  • Available graph
    • Average CPU Usage (Percent)
    • Average Disk Reads (Bytes)
    • Average Disk Writes (Bytes)
    • Summary Disk Read Requests (Count)
    • Summary Disk Write Requests (Count)
    • Maximum Network In (Bytes)
    • Maximum Network Out (Bytes)
    • Summary Instance State (Any)
  • When the mouse cursor is placed on the graph, a popup displays the time, data value, and metric data information for that point
  • You can drag the mouse to zoom in on a specific area of the graph
  • Clicking a label shown in the legend displays detailed information about that legend in a popup
Table. Virtual Server Monitoring Tab Chart Items
Reference
  • The metrics provided by basic monitoring are data collected at 5‑minute intervals.
  • For detailed information about the ServiceWatch metrics of Virtual Server, refer to Virtual Server ServiceWatch metrics.

Tag

Virtual Server List page lets you view the tag information of the selected resource, and you can add, modify, or delete it.

CategoryDetailed description
Tag listTag list
  • Tag’s Key, Value information can be checked
  • Up to 50 tags can be added per resource
  • When entering a tag, search the existing list of Keys and Values and select
Table. Virtual Server Tag Tab Items

Job History

Virtual Server List page allows you to view the operation history of the selected resource.

CategoryDetailed description
Task History ListResource Change History
  • You can view operation details, operation time, resource type, resource name, operation result, and operator information
  • Operation History List Click the relevant resource in the list. Operation History Details popup window opens.
Table. Virtual Server Operation History Tab Detailed Information Items

Control Virtual Server Operation

If you need to control the operation of a created Virtual Server resource, you can perform the task from the Virtual Server List or Virtual Server Details page. You can start, stop, and restart a running server.

Getting Started with Virtual Server

You can start a Virtual Server that is Shutoff. To start the Virtual Server, follow these steps.

  1. Click the All Services > Compute > Virtual Server menu. 1. Navigate to the Service Home page of the Virtual Server.
  2. On the Service Home page, click the Virtual Server menu. 2. Go to the Virtual Server List page.
  3. Virtual Server List page, click the resource to start among the shutoff servers, and navigate to the Virtual Server Details page.
    • On the Virtual Server List page, you can Start each resource via the right More button.
    • After selecting multiple servers with checkboxes, you can control multiple servers simultaneously using the Start button at the top.
  4. Virtual Server Details page, click the Start button at the top to start the server. 4. Check the status of the modified server in the Status Indicator item.
    • When the Virtual Server start is complete, the server status changes from Shutoff to Active.
    • For detailed information about the Virtual Server status, please refer to Virtual Server Detailed Information.

Stop Virtual Server

You can stop a Virtual Server that is running (Active). To stop the Virtual Server, follow the steps below.

  1. Click the All Services > Compute > Virtual Server menu. 1. Navigate to the Service Home page of the Virtual Server.
  2. On the Service Home page, click the Virtual Server menu. 2. Go to the Virtual Server List page.
  3. On the Virtual Server List page, click the resource to stop among the active servers, and proceed to the Virtual Server Details page.
    • On the Virtual Server List page, you can stop each resource via the right More button.
    • After selecting multiple servers with checkboxes, you can control multiple servers simultaneously using the Stop button at the top.
  4. On the Virtual Server Details page, click the Stop button at the top to start the server. 4. Check the status of the modified server in the Status Indicator item.
    • When the Virtual Server shutdown is complete, the server status changes from Active to Shutoff.
    • For detailed information about the Virtual Server status, please refer to Virtual Server Detailed Information.

Restart Virtual Server

You can restart the created Virtual Server. To restart the Virtual Server, follow these steps.

  1. Click the All Services > Compute > Virtual Server menu. 1. Navigate to the Service Home page of the Virtual Server.
  2. On the Service Home page, click the Virtual Server menu. 2. Go to the Virtual Server List page.
  3. On the Virtual Server List page, click the resource to restart, and go to the Virtual Server Details page.
    • On the Virtual Server list page, you can restart each resource via the right More button.
    • After selecting multiple servers with checkboxes, you can control multiple servers simultaneously using the Restart button at the top.
  4. On the Virtual Server Details page, click the Restart button at the top to start the server. 4. Check the status of the changed server in the Status Display section.
    • During a Virtual Server restart, the server status goes through Rebooting and finally changes to Active.
    • For detailed information about the Virtual Server status, please refer to Virtual Server Detailed Information.

Managing Virtual Server Resources

If you need server control and management functions for the created Virtual Server resources, you can perform tasks on the Virtual Server List or Virtual Server Details page.

Create Image

You can create an image of a running Virtual Server.

Reference

This content explains how to create a user image on a running Virtual Server.

  • On the Virtual Server list or Virtual Server details page, click the Create Image button to create a user Image.
  • Refer to Image Detailed Guide: Creating an Image for the method of creating an Image by uploading an Image file owned by the user.

To create an Image of a Virtual Server, follow these steps.

  1. Click the All Services > Compute > Virtual Server menu. 1. Navigate to the Service Home page of Virtual Server.

  2. On the Service Home page, click the Virtual Server menu. 2. Navigate to the Virtual Server List page.

  3. On the Virtual Server List page, click the resource to create an Image. 3. Navigate to the Virtual Server Details page.

  4. On the Virtual Server Details page, click the Create Image button. 4. Go to the Image creation page.

    • Enter the required information in the Service Information Input area.
      Category
      required status
      Detailed description
      Image nameRequiredthe name of the Image to be created
      • English letters, numbers, spaces, and special characters (-, _) within 200 characters
      Table. Image service information input fields
  5. Check the input information and click the Complete button.

    • When creation is complete, check the created resources on the All Services > Compute > Virtual Server > Image List page.
Information
  • When an Image is created, the generated Image is stored in the Object Storage used as internal storage. * Therefore, a usage fee will be charged for image storage.
  • Since the file system of an Image created from an Active Virtual Server cannot be guaranteed to be intact, it is recommended to stop the server before creating the Image.

Edit Server Type

You can modify the server type of a Virtual Server.

Reference
For the configurable server types offered by Virtual Server, see Virtual Server 서버 타입.

To modify the server type of a Virtual Server, follow these steps.

  1. Click the All Services > Compute > Virtual Server menu. 1. Navigate to the Service Home page of the Virtual Server.
  2. On the Service Home page, click the Virtual Server menu. 2. Go to the Virtual Server List page.
  3. On the Virtual Server List page, click the resource you want to control. 3. Go to the Virtual Server Details page.
  4. On the Virtual Server Details page, check the server status and click the Edit button for the server type. 4. Edit Server Type popup window opens.
  5. Edit Server Type In the popup window, after changing the server type, click the Confirm button.
    • If you modify the Virtual Server’s server type, the Virtual Server status changes to a state related to performing a resize.
    • For detailed information about the Virtual Server status, please refer to Virtual Server Detailed Information.

Service Architecture Diagram

Diagram
Figure. Virtual Server Auto-Scaling Diagram

Provided features

Virtual Server Auto-Scaling provides the following features.

  • Launch Configuration: It is a configuration template used to create a Virtual Server in an Auto-Scaling Group. When creating a Launch Configuration, you set information about the Virtual Server such as the image, server type, Key Pair, Block Storage, etc.
  • Server Count Adjustment: Provides several ways to adjust the number of servers. By using policies, you can add a Virtual Server when load exceeds a threshold and release the Virtual Server when demand is low, maintaining application availability while reducing costs. You can also add and release Virtual Servers according to a predefined schedule, and manually adjust the number of servers in an Auto-Scaling Group as needed.
  • Load Balancer Integration: You can use a Load Balancer to evenly distribute application traffic across Virtual Servers. Whenever a Virtual Server is added or removed, it is automatically registered with or deregistered from the Load Balancer.
  • Network Connection: You can connect the Auto-Scaling Group’s standard subnet, automatic IP allocation, and Public NAT IP. Provides a local subnet connection for inter-server communication.
  • Security Group Application: Security Group is a virtual logical firewall that controls inbound/outbound traffic generated on a Virtual Server. Inbound rules control incoming traffic to the Virtual Server, and outbound rules control outgoing traffic from the Virtual Server.
  • Monitoring: You can view monitoring data such as CPU, Memory, and Disk of Virtual Servers created in an Auto-Scaling Group via the ServiceWatch service. Based on the monitoring data, you can set load thresholds using Auto-Scaling policies, and when thresholds are exceeded, you can add or remove servers.
Reference
The policy of the Auto-Scaling Group will be integrated with ServiceWatch starting March 25, 2026. The policies of an Auto-Scaling Group are created in conjunction with ServiceWatch alarm policies, and alarm policies linked to an Auto-Scaling Group cannot be modified or deleted in ServiceWatch; they can only be managed through the Auto-Scaling Group.

Component

Virtual Server Auto-Scaling creates an Auto-Scaling Group through a Launch Configuration and monitors and manages the servers.

Launch Configuration

This is a Configuration template used to create a Virtual Server in an Auto-Scaling Group. The main features are as follows.

  • Image: Provides OS standard images and Custom images created by the user. Users can select and use them according to the service they wish to configure.
  • Keypair: Provides the Keypair method for secure OS access.
  • Init script: Users can define a script to be executed when the Virtual Server starts.
  • For more details, refer to Launch Configuration Create.
Reference
In Launch Configuration, please refer to the Virtual Server OS Image Provisioning Versions and Virtual Server Server Types for the selectable images and server types.

Auto-Scaling Group

Launch Configuration is used as a pre-configuration template for creating servers. By creating an Auto-Scaling Group, you can adjust and manage the number of servers. The main features are as follows.

  • Launch Configuration: A Configuration template used to create a Virtual Server in an Auto-Scaling Group.
  • Server Count Setting: Virtual Server Auto-Scaling provides several ways to adjust the number of servers in an Auto-Scaling Group.
    • Fixed Server Count Method: When creating an Auto-Scaling Group, this method keeps the default settings using the configured number of servers without any additional schedules or policies. Refer to Create Auto-Scaling Group to set the Min, Desired, and Max server counts.
    • Server Count Manual Adjustment Method: In an Auto-Scaling Group, you can increase or decrease the number of servers by modifying the server count to the desired amount. You can choose whether to manually set the desired server count. Please refer to 서버 수 수정하기.
    • Schedule reservation method: You can schedule daily, weekly, monthly, or one-time, and set the desired number of servers at the specified time. This is useful when you can predict when to scale the number of servers up or down. If you use the schedule method, please refer to Manage Schedules to add and manage schedules.
    • Policy Mode: You can use a policy to dynamically adjust servers. When a monitoring metric exceeds a configured threshold, the number of servers is adjusted. At this time, you can choose one of three methods to adjust the server count: increase or decrease by a specified number, increase or decrease by a specified percentage, or fix the server count to a given value. When servers are started or terminated due to a policy, the monitoring metric (CPU utilization) may temporarily exceed the threshold registered in the policy. However, because this is a brief moment, a cooldown period is set to avoid treating it as an abnormal situation. If you want to use the policy mode, see Managing Policies.
  • Load Balancer: Automatically connects and disconnects to the Load Balancer registered in the Auto-Scaling Group whenever a Virtual Server is added or terminated.
Reference
The Load Balancer of the Auo-Scaling Group will operate in conjunction with the Load Balancer starting in February 2025.

Constraints

The constraints of Virtual Server Auto-Scaling are as follows.

CategoryExplanation
Number of Virtual Servers per Auto-Scaling Group50 or fewer
Number of policies per Auto-Scaling Group12 or fewer
Number of schedules per Auto-Scaling Group20 or fewer
Number of LB server groups and ports per Auto-Scaling Group3 or fewer
Table. Virtual Server Auto-Scaling Group Constraints
Caution
  • If the Image you are using is a discontinued standard Image, Scale-out will not work.
    If the Image you are using is Custom Image, Scale out will continue to operate correctly even after that version is discontinued.
  • We recommend replacing the Launch Configuration with the latest version of the Image or a Custom Image before the current Image reaches end of support.
  • For detailed information about the OS Image provided by Virtual Server, see OS Image Provided Versions.

Prior Service

This is a list of services that must be pre-configured before creating the service. Please refer to the guide provided for each service and prepare in advance.

Service CategoryserviceDetailed description
NetworkingVPCA service that provides an isolated virtual network in a cloud environment
NetworkingSecurity GroupVirtual firewall that controls server traffic
Table. Virtual Server Auto-Scaling Prerequisite Service

2.1.1 - Monitoring Metrics

information
The Auto-Scaling Group policy will be linked with the ServiceWatch alarm policy starting March 25, 2026. Please refer to Virtual Server Auto-Scaling > ServiceWatch Metrics.
Cloud Monitoring service termination notice

According to Samsung Cloud Platform’s policy, the Cloud Monitoring service is scheduled to be discontinued in September 2026.
Accordingly, after the September 2026 release, resource monitoring of the Samsung Cloud Platform via Cloud Monitoring will no longer be possible.

With the new alternative service, you can continuously perform resource monitoring by using ServiceWatch, released in October 2025.
ServiceWatch provides more modern and powerful features, replacing Cloud Monitoring to deliver a smooth monitoring environment.

Detailed information about ServiceWatch is available in the ServiceWatch Overview.

Virtual Server Auto-Scaling is a service provided for Virtual Servers that offers individual Virtual Server monitoring metrics and monitoring metrics provided by policies based on Cloud Monitoring.

Virtual Server Monitoring Metrics

The table below shows the monitoring metrics of Virtual Server that can be viewed through Cloud Monitoring. For detailed usage of Cloud Monitoring, refer to the Cloud Monitoring guide.

Memory-related metrics are not provided for Windows OS.

Performance itemsDetailed descriptionunit
Memory Total [Basic]bytes of usable memorybytes
Memory Used [Basic]bytes of currently used memorybytes
Memory Swap In [Basic]bytes of the replaced memorybytes
Memory Swap Out [Basic]bytes of the replaced memorybytes
Memory Free [Basic]bytes of unused memorybytes
Disk Read Bytes [Basic]Read bytesbytes
Disk Read Requests [Basic]Number of read requestscnt
Disk Write Bytes [Basic]write bytesbytes
Disk Write Requests [Basic]Number of write requestscnt
CPU Usage [Basic]Average system CPU usage over 1 minute%
Instance State [Basic]Instance statusstate
Network In Bytes [Basic]Received bytesbytes
Network In Dropped [Basic]Incoming packet dropcnt
Network In Packets [Basic]Number of received packetscnt
Network Out Bytes [Basic]sent bytesbytes
Network Out Dropped [Basic]Transmit packet dropcnt
Network Out Packets [Basic]Number of transmitted packetscnt
Table. Virtual Server Monitoring Metrics (Provided by default)

Monitoring metrics provided by Cloud Monitoring-based policies

The table below shows the monitoring metrics provided by the policy of a Cloud Monitoring‑based Auto‑Scaling Group. For detailed information on policy settings based on Cloud Monitoring, see 정책 관리하기.

Performance itemsDetailed descriptionunit
CPU Usage [Basic]Average system CPU usage over 1 minute%
Memory Used [Basic]bytes of currently used memorybytes
Network In Bytes [Basic]Received bytesbytes
Network In Packets [Basic]Number of received packetscnt
Network Out Bytes [Basic]sent bytesbytes
Network Out Packets [Basic]Number of transmitted packetscnt
Table. Monitoring metrics provided by Cloud Monitoring-based policies

2.1.2 - ServiceWatch Metrics

Virtual Server Auto-Scaling is a service provided for Virtual Servers that offers individual Virtual Server monitoring metrics and monitoring metrics supplied by ServiceWatch-based policies.

Virtual Server Monitoring Metrics

The basic metrics provided by Virtual Server can be found in ServiceWatch > Virtual Server Basic Metrics.

Reference
For checking metrics in ServiceWatch, refer to the ServiceWatch guide.

ServiceWatch monitoring metrics provided by the Auto-Scaling Group policy

The table below shows the ServiceWatch monitoring metrics provided by the Auto-Scaling Group policy. For detailed information on configuring Auto-Scaling Group policies, see Managing Policies.

Performance itemsDetailed descriptionunit
CPU UsageCPU usagePercent
Network In BytesReceived bytes on the network interfaceBytes
Network In PacketsNumber of packets received on the network interfaceCount
Network Out BytesData transmitted on the network interface (bytes)Bytes
Network Out PacketsNumber of packets transmitted on the network interfaceCount
Table. ServiceWatch monitoring metrics provided by the Auto-Scaling Group policy

2.2 - How-to guides

Users can create the service by entering the required information for an Auto-Scaling Group and selecting detailed options through the Samsung Cloud Platform Console.

Create Auto-Scaling Group

You can create and use the Auto-Scaling Group service from the Samsung Cloud Platform Console.

Reference
To create an Auto-Scaling Group, you need to create a Launch Configuration in advance. Please refer to Create Launch Configuration.

To create an Auto-Scaling Group, follow these steps.

  1. Click the All Services > Compute > Virtual Server menu. Navigate to the Service Home page of Virtual Server.

  2. Click the Auto-Scaling Group menu. You will be taken to the Auto-Scaling Group List page.

  3. On the Auto-Scaling Group List page, click the Create Auto-Scaling Group button. You will be taken to the Create Auto-Scaling Group page.

  4. On the Auto-Scaling Group Creation page, enter the information required to create the service.

    • In the Launch Configuration area, select the Launch Configuration.
      • Launch Configuration creation button can be clicked to create a new Launch Configuration.
    • Enter or select the required information in the Service Information Input area.
      Category
      Whether required
      Detailed description
      Auto-Scaling Group nameRequiredAuto-Scaling Group name
      • Manage servers of the same type and purpose as a group
      Server nameRequiredServer name to be created within the Auto-Scaling Group
      • The server name is automatically assigned as a combination of the entered server name and a sequence, serving as an identifier to distinguish servers created within the Auto-Scaling Group.
      Number of serversRequiredNumber of servers to create in the Auto-Scaling Group
      • Enter a value between 0 and 20 (Min≤Desired≤Max)
      • Min: Set the minimum number of servers the Auto-Scaling Group should maintain
      • Desired: Set the target number of servers within the Auto-Scaling Group; also indicates the number of servers initially created when the Auto-Scaling Group is created
      • Max: Set the maximum number of servers the Auto-Scaling Group can maintain
      • After creating the Auto-Scaling Group, you can adjust the settings using the Edit button. For details, see Modify Server Count
      Desired server count manual settingSelectionSelect whether to manually change the Desired number of servers
      Network Settings > Network SettingsRequiredNetwork settings for Auto-Scaling Group
      • Select the desired VPC and standard Subnet
      • IP can only be auto-generated.
      • When you select local Subnet, you can choose the desired local Subnet, and IP can only be auto-generated
      Network Settings > Security GroupSelectionTo allow required connections, you need to configure a Security Group
      • If you do not configure a Security Group, all inbound and outbound traffic will be blocked according to the default rule (Any/Deny)
      • For Linux servers, allow SSH traffic
      • For Windows servers, allow RDP traffic
      • Even after creating an Auto-Scaling Group, configure it using the modify button. For details, refer to Configure Security Group
      Load BalancerSelectionConnect the Auto-Scaling Group to a Load Balancer
      • Register the Auto-Scaling Group’s servers as members of the LB server group
      • LB server group: Select a LB server group that exists in the chosen VPC
      • Port: Enter a value between 1 and 65,534
      • Press the + button to add an LB server group (up to a total of three LB server groups and ports are allowed)
      • LB server groups that use Weighted Round Robin or Weighted Least Connection load balancing cannot be selected
      • Draining Timeout value: After checking Draining Timeout as Enabled, you can set the Draining Timeout value
        • Draining Timeout: The waiting period before removing a server from the Load Balancer
          • Since sessions may remain connected to the server, setting a Draining Timeout and waiting allows safe session termination
        • If the Load Balancer is unused, Draining Timeout cannot be set
        • The default is 300 seconds; you can enter a value from 1 second up to 3,600 seconds.
      Table. Auto-Scaling Group service information input items
    • In the Scaling policy setting area, set the scaling policy.
      • For detailed information on policy settings, refer to Add Policy.
        Category
        Required
        Detailed description
        Current settingSelectionSet scaling policy now
        • Add Policy button click shows policy information input fields
        Set laterSelectionAfter creating an Auto-Scaling Group, set policies on the detail information page
        Table. Auto-Scaling Group scaling policy configuration items
    • In the Notification Settings area, configure the notification recipients and notification method.
      • For detailed information on notification settings, see Add Notification.
        Category
        Required?
        Detailed description
        Current settingSelectionSet the notification recipients and notification method now
        • Click the Add Notification button to open the Add Notification popup
        • For detailed information about notification settings, see the details
        • In the notification recipients list, click the Edit button to modify the notification information
        Set laterSelectionAfter creating an Auto-Scaling Group, set the notification recipients and notification method on the details page.
        Table. Auto-Scaling Group notification configuration items
    • In the Additional Information Input area, enter or select the required information.
      Category
      Required status
      Detailed description
      Status checkSelectionCheck the status of Virtual Server and Load Balancer and replace servers that are Unhealthy
      • Virtual Server status check: Enabled is the default and cannot be changed
      • Load Balancer status check: Enabled only when a Load Balancer is connected in the service information input area
      • Grace period: Set the time to defer status checks until the newly added server operates normally
        • Enter 0 to disable the status check grace period
      tagSelectionAdd Tag
      • Up to 50 per resource can be added
      • After clicking the Add Tag button, enter or select Key, Value values
      Table. Auto-Scaling Group additional information input fields
      Caution
      A server that the user changes to Stop is not considered Unhealthy, so even when using the health check feature, the server will not be replaced.
  5. Summary Check the detailed information and estimated billing amount generated in the panel, and click the Create button.

    • When creation is complete, check the created Auto-Scaling Group on the Auto-Scaling Group list page.

Check detailed information of Auto-Scaling Group

Auto-Scaling Group service allows you to view and edit the full resource list and detailed information. The Auto-Scaling Group Details page is composed of Details, Policies, Schedule, Virtual Server, Load Balancer, Tags, Operation History tabs.

To view detailed information about the Auto-Scaling Group, follow these steps.

  1. Click the All Services > Compute > Virtual Server menu. Navigate to the Service Home page of Virtual Server.
  2. Click the Auto-Scaling Group menu. You will be taken to the Auto-Scaling Group List page.
  3. On the Auto-Scaling Group List page, click the resource to view detailed information. You will be taken to the Auto-Scaling Group Details page.
    • Auto-Scaling Group Details page displays status information and additional feature information, and consists of Details, Policies, Schedule, Virtual Server, Load Balancer, Tags, Activity History tabs.
      CategoryDetailed description
      Auto-Scaling Group statusStatus of the Auto-Scaling Group created by the user
      • Creating: Creating Auto-Scaling Group
      • In Service: Serviceable state
      • Scale In: Scale In in progress
      • Scale Out: Scale Out in progress
      • Cool Down: Cooling down
      • Terminating: Terminating Auto-Scaling Group
      • Attach to LB: Attaching to Load Balancer
      • Detach from LB: Detaching from Load Balancer
      Delete Auto-Scaling GroupButton to delete Auto-Scaling Group
      Table. Auto-Scaling Group status information and additional features

Detailed Information

Auto-Scaling Group List page lets you view detailed information of the selected resource and modify it if necessary.

CategoryDetailed description
serviceService name
Resource TypeResource Type
SRNUnique resource ID in Samsung Cloud Platform
  • In Auto-Scaling Group, it refers to the Auto-Scaling Group SRN
Resource nameResource name
  • In Auto-Scaling Group, it refers to the Auto-Scaling Group name
Resource IDUnique resource ID in the service
constructorUser who created the service
Creation date and timeService creation date and time
editorUser who edited the service information
Modification dateDate and time the service information was modified
Auto-Scaling Group nameAuto-Scaling Group name
Launch Configuration nameWhen creating an Auto-Scaling Group, the selected Launch Configuration name
  • the image template used when the Auto-Scaling Group creates a Virtual Server
Number of serversCurrent number of instances in the Auto-Scaling Group and the configured Min, Desired, Max instance counts
Manually set the desired number of serversDesired server count manual setting enable/disable
VPCVPC information of the Auto-Scaling Group
General SubnetGeneral Subnet and NAT IP usage information for the Auto-Scaling Group
Local SubnetLocal Subnet of Auto-Scaling Group
Security GroupAuto-Scaling Group’s Security Group
Status checkWhether to use the replacement function for Virtual Server and Load Balancer in Unhealthy state
  • Virtual Server: Enabled is the default and cannot be changed
  • Load Balancer: Indicates usage when a Load Balancer is attached
    • Enabled*: When a Load Balancer is connected and health check is used
    • Disabled: When a Load Balancer is connected and health check is not used
    • Enabled (does not operate because no LB is currently connected): When a Load Balancer is connected and health check is enabled, but the Load Balancer has been detached
    • -: When no Load Balancer is connected
  • Grace period: Time to defer health checks
    • If set to 0, the health check grace period is not used
  • Edit button can be clicked to set the Load Balancer health check usage and Grace period. For details, see 상태 체크 변경하기
Table. Auto-Scaling Group Details – Details Tab Items
Caution
A server that the user changes to Stop is not considered Unhealthy, so even when using the health check feature, the server will not be replaced.

Policy

On the Auto-Scaling Group List page, you can view the policy list of the selected resource and, if needed, add or manage policies.

CategoryDetailed description
CategoryPolicy Type
  • Scale In: return servers
  • Scale Out: increase server count
Policy NameName for policy-specific categorization
Execution conditionsConditions to trigger the policy
  • Statistic: Method to calculate the Metric Type
    • Average: Average of servers in the Auto-Scaling Group
    • Min: Minimum value among servers in the Auto-Scaling Group
    • Max: Maximum value among servers in the Auto-Scaling Group
  • Metric Type: CPU Usage, Memory Usage, Network In(Bytes), Network Out(Bytes), Network In(Packets), Network Out(Packets)
  • Operator: >= > <= <
  • Threshold: Threshold corresponding to the Metric Type
  • Period: Continuous duration required to trigger the condition (the condition must be continuously satisfied for N minutes for the policy to execute)
execution unitMethod of executing the policy
  • Policy Type: Select the type of policy to execute
    • Increase or decrease the number of servers by a specified count: Increase or return the server count to Target Value
    • Increase or decrease the number of servers by a specified ratio: Increase or return by the Target Value ratio
    • Fix the number of servers to the entered value: Fix the server count according to the Target Value
  • Target Value: The number or ratio to apply the selected Policy Type
Cool downThe waiting time (seconds) when a server is started or terminated due to a policy
  • The default is 300 seconds, and it can be set from a minimum of 1 second up to a maximum of 3,600 seconds
More > EditModify the policy information
More > EnableEnable this policy
  • Selectable only when the policy is disabled
More > DisableDisable the policy
  • Can be selected only when the policy is active
Table. Auto-Scaling Group Details - Policy Tab Items
Reference
For policy management and policy example explanations, please refer to Policy Management.

Schedule

On the Auto-Scaling Group List page, you can view the schedule list of the selected resource and, if necessary, add or manage schedules.

CategoryDetailed description
NameSchedule name
MinMinimum number of servers set in the schedule
DesiredNumber of target servers set in the schedule
MaxMaximum number of servers set in the schedule
periodSchedule execution frequency
  • Set to one of daily/weekly/monthly/once
Date/Day of WeekSchedule execution date or day of week
  • Date/day selected according to the schedule interval
Execution timeSchedule execution time
time zoneSchedule execution time window
statusSchedule status
More > EditEdit the schedule information
More > ActivateActivate this schedule
  • Can be selected only when the schedule is disabled
More > DisableDeactivate this schedule
  • Can be selected only when the schedule is active
Add scheduleAdd a new schedule
DeleteDelete the selected schedule from the list
Table. Auto-Scaling Group Details – Schedule Tab Items

Reference
For detailed information about schedule management, see Schedule Management.

Virtual Server

Auto-Scaling Group List You can view the Virtual Server list of the selected resource on the page.

CategoryDetailed description
Server nameIf you click the Server Name of the server created in the Auto-Scaling Group
  • , you will be taken to the Virtual Server Details page
IPIP assigned to the server
Creation date and timeThe date and time the server was created
statusResult of status check for Virtual Server and Load Balancer
  • Healthy: When both Virtual Server and Load Balancer are in Healthy state
  • Unhealthy: When one or more of Virtual Server or Load Balancer are in Unhealthy state
    • Unhealthy: Including cases where one or more of the three Load Balancer server groups connected to the Virtual Server are Unhealthy
    • The cause of Unhealthy can be identified in the Work History tab
Table. Auto-Scaling Group Details - Virtual Server Tab Items

Load Balancer

On the Auto-Scaling Group List page, you can view the Load Balancer list of the selected resource, and, if needed, add or manage Load Balancers.

CategoryDetailed description
Draining TimeoutDraining Timeout usage
  • When you click the Edit button, set the Draining Timeout usage
  • If it is already in use, change the time
  • If the Load Balancer is not in use, Draining Timeout cannot be configured.
Load BalancerLoad Balancer usage
  • Edit button sets the Load Balancer usage
  • If already in use, add or change the Load Balancer
  • Up to three LB server groups can be added
Load Balancer > Load Balancer nameLoad Balancer name to attach to the Auto-Scaling Group
Load Balancer > LB server groupLB server group of the Load Balancer
  • LB server groups that use Weighted Round Robin or Weighted Least Connection load balancing cannot be selected
Load Balancer > PortPort registered as a member in the LB server group
Table. Auto-Scaling Group Details - Load Balancer tab items
Reference

Notification

Auto-Scaling Group List page allows you to view the notification recipients and notification methods for the selected resource.

CategoryDetailed description
Notification recipientName of the notification recipient
emailNotification recipient’s email
Create serverWhether to send notifications when a server creation-related alert occurs
  • On success: Whether to send when creation succeeds
  • On failure: Send when creation fails
Server terminationWhether to send a notification when a server termination-related alert occurs
  • Success: Whether to send when termination succeeds
  • Failure: Send when termination fails
When the policy execution condition is satisfiedWhether to generate a notification when the policy execution condition is satisfied
statusNotification activation status
  • Active: Enabled
More > EditEdit the notification information
Show more > EnableEnable this notification information
  • Selectable only when the notification is disabled
More > DisableDisable this notification information
  • Selectable only when the notification is active
Add notificationAdd a new notification
DeleteDelete the selected notification from the list
Table. Auto-Scaling Group Details - Notification Tab Items
Reference
For details on notification settings, refer to Manage Notifications.

tag

Auto-Scaling Group List page lets you view the tag information of selected resources, and add, modify, or delete them.

CategoryDetailed description
Tag listTag list
  • You can view the Key and Value information of the tag
  • Up to 50 tags can be added per resource
  • When entering a tag, you can search and select from the list of previously created Keys and Values
Table. Auto-Scaling Group Details - Tag Tab Items

Work History

You can view the operation history of the selected resource on the Auto-Scaling Group List page.

CategoryDetailed description
Task History ListResource Change History
  • Operation Time, Resource ID, Resource Name, Operation Details, Event Topic, Operation Result, Check operator information
Table. Auto-Scaling Group Details - Task History Tab Items

Auto-Scaling Group Managing Resources

If you need to manage a created Auto-Scaling Group, you can perform actions on the Auto-Scaling Group Details page.

Edit Launch Configuration

You can modify the Launch Configuration of an Auto-Scaling Group.

Reference
Even if you modify the Launch Configuration, it will not affect servers that are already part of the Auto-Scaling Group; the changes will only apply to servers created thereafter. To apply the updated Launch Configuration to all servers in the Auto-Scaling Group, set the server count (Desired) to 0 to delete the existing servers, then adjust the server count (Desired) to the desired quantity.

To modify the Launch Configuration of an Auto-Scaling Group, follow these steps.

  1. Click the All Services > Compute > Virtual Server menu. Navigate to the Service Home page of Virtual Server.

  2. Click the Auto-Scaling Group menu. You will be taken to the Auto-Scaling Group list page.

  3. On the Auto-Scaling Group List page, click the resource you want to edit the Launch Configuration for. You will be taken to the Auto-Scaling Group Details page.

  4. Launch Configuration name. Click the Edit button. The Launch Configuration Edit popup opens. You can view the list of selectable Launch Configurations.

    Category
    Detailed description
    Launch Configuration nameLaunch Configuration name
    imageLaunch Configuration OS Image
    Server typeLaunch Configuration server type
    Block StorageLaunch Configuration Block Storage Settings
    Number of Auto-Scaling GroupsNumber of Auto-Scailg Groups with Launch Configuration applied
    View DetailsButton to view Launch Configuration details
    Table. Launch Configuration list items

  5. In the Launch Configuration Edit popup, select the Launch Configuration to modify, then click the Confirm button. The Launch Configuration Edit Notification popup opens. Check the message in the Launch Configuration Edit Notification popup and click the Confirm button.

Edit server count

You can modify the number of servers in the Auto-Scaling Group.

Reference
The maximum configurable number of servers is 50. However, when a Load Balancer is present, servers not connected to the Load Balancer are excluded.

To modify the number of servers in an Auto-Scaling Group, follow these steps.

  1. Click the All Services > Compute > Virtual Server menu. Navigate to the Service Home page of Virtual Server.
  2. Click the Auto-Scaling Group menu. You will be taken to the Auto-Scaling Group list page.
  3. On the Auto-Scaling Group List page, click the resource to edit the server count. You will be taken to the Auto-Scaling Group Details page.
  4. Click the Edit button for server count. The Edit Server Count popup opens.
  5. Modify Server Count In the popup window, after entering the required fields, click the Confirm button.
    Category
    Required
    Detailed description
    Number of servers > MinRequiredMinimum number of servers to modify
    • Set the number of servers that the Auto-Scaling Group should maintain at a minimum
    Number of servers > DesiredRequiredTarget server count to modify
    • Set the target server count within the Auto-Scaling Group
    Number of servers > MaxRequiredTarget number of servers to modify
    • Set the maximum number of servers the Auto-Scailg Group can maintain
    Table. Auto-Scailg Group server count modification items

Terminate Virtual Server Created by Auto-Scaling Group

Virtual Servers created in an Auto-Scaling Group can be terminated by clicking the terminate button on the Virtual Server’s detail page or by modifying the server count.

Warning
  • Be careful, as data cannot be recovered after terminating the service.
  • To cancel the service, first disconnect the File Storage and disable the Lock. If the File Storage is connected or a Lock is set, you cannot cancel the Virtual Server.
Reference
  • If you terminate a Virtual Server created in an Auto-Scaling Group, the associated Load Balancer is automatically detached.
  • When a Virtual Server is terminated, the status of the attached Storage is as follows.
    • If Delete on termination is not set: the volume will not be deleted even if the Virtual Server is terminated.
    • When Delete on termination is set: terminating the Virtual Server deletes the volume. However, if a Snapshot exists, the volume is not deleted even when Delete on termination is set.
    • Multi attach volume: It can be deleted only when the server you are deleting is the last remaining server attached to the volume.

Cancel on the Virtual Server detail page

To cancel a Virtual Server on the Virtual Server detail page, follow these steps.

  1. Click the All Services > Compute > Virtual Server menu. Navigate to the Service Home page of Virtual Server.
  2. On the Service Home page, click the Virtual Server menu. You will be taken to the Virtual Server List page.
  3. On the Virtual Server List page, select the Virtual Server created by the Auto-Scaling Group. Navigate to the Virtual Server Details page.
  4. Click the Cancel Service button on the Virtual Server Details page. A popup confirming the server termination will appear.
  5. Click the Confirm button. Server termination is complete.

Cancel by adjusting the server count

To cancel a Virtual Server by modifying the server count, follow the steps below.

  1. Click the All Services > Compute > Virtual Server menu. Navigate to the Service Home page of Virtual Server.
  2. Click the Auto-Scaling Group menu. Navigate to the Auto-Scaling Group List page.
  3. On the Auto-Scaling Group List page, click the resource to terminate the Virtual Server. You will be taken to the Auto-Scaling Group Details page.
  4. Click the Edit button of the Server Count item. The Server Count Edit popup opens.
  5. Server Count Edit In the popup window, after reducing the Desired number, click the Confirm button. As the Desired server count is adjusted, the Virtual Server will be terminated.
Notice
  • If Desired server count manual setting is set to unused, you cannot modify the Desired server count. To modify the Desired server count, see Desired server count manual setting modification.
  • When a Virtual Server is terminated, the Desired server count remains unchanged, and scale‑out proceeds according to the Desired check batch.

Modify manual setting of desired server count

You can manually change the Desired server count of the Auto-Scaling Group.

Reference
Desired server count manual setting use not selected, you cannot modify the Desired server count in the server count edit of the details. Desired server count is automatically adjusted by checking the Virtual Server status every 10 minutes.

To modify the manual setting of the Desired server count for an Auto-Scaling Group, follow these steps.

  1. Click the All Services > Compute > Virtual Server menu. Navigate to the Service Home page of Virtual Server.
  2. Click the Auto-Scaling Group menu. You will be taken to the Auto-Scaling Group List page.
  3. On the Auto-Scaling Group List page, click the resource to manually change the Desired server count. You will be taken to the Auto-Scaling Group Details page.
  4. Click the Edit button for the server count. The Desired server count manual setting popup opens.
  5. Desired server count manual setting After selecting whether to use it in the popup window, click the Confirm button.

Configure Security Group

You can configure the Security Group of an Auto-Scaling Group.

Reference
Even if you modify the Security Group, the change does not apply to servers already created in the Auto-Scaling Group; it only takes effect for servers created thereafter. To apply the updated Security Group to all servers in the Auto-Scaling Group, set the server count (Desired) to 0 to delete all existing servers, then adjust the server count (Desired) to the desired quantity.

Follow these steps to configure the Security Group of an Auto-Scaling Group.

  1. Click the All Services > Compute > Virtual Server menu. Navigate to the Service Home page of Virtual Server.

  2. Click the Auto-Scaling Group menu. You will be taken to the Auto-Scaling Group List page.

  3. On the Auto-Scaling Group List page, click the resource to configure the Security Group. You will be taken to the Auto-Scaling Group Details page.

  4. Click the Edit button for Security Group. Security Group Edit popup opens. You can view the list of selectable Security Groups.

    CategoryDetailed description
    Security Group nameSecurity Group name
    Table. Security Group list items

  5. Security Group edit In the popup window, after selecting the Security Group, click the Confirm button. Security Group edit notification popup opens. Check the message of the Security Group edit notification popup and click the Confirm button.

Change status check

You can configure it to check the status of Virtual Server and Load Balancer and automatically replace servers that are in an Unhealthy state.

Caution
  • The Load Balancer status check feature can only be used when a Load Balancer is in use.
  • A server that the user changes to Stop is not considered Unhealthy, so even if you use the health check feature, the server will not be replaced.
To change whether the Load Balancer health check feature of an Auto-Scaling Group is enabled, follow the steps below.

  1. Click the All Services > Compute > Virtual Server menu. Go to the Service Home page of Virtual Server.
  2. Click the Auto-Scaling Group menu. Go to the Auto-Scaling Group list page.
  3. On the Auto-Scaling Group List page, click the resource for which you want to change the Load Balancer health check function. You will be taken to the Auto-Scaling Group Details page.
  4. Click the Edit button of Status Check. Status Check Edit popup window opens.
  5. Status Check Edit In the popup, choose whether to enable Load Balancer Status Check.
  6. After entering the Grace period, click the Confirm button.
    • If you do not want to use the grace period, set the grace period to 0.

Manage Additional Information for Auto-Scaling Group

You can set the Load Balancer of an Auto-Scaling Group to enabled and select the LB server group. For an Auto-Scaling Group that is using a Load Balancer, you can change it to disabled.

Modify Load Balancer Draining Timeout

You can set the Load Balancer Draining Timeout of an Auto-Scaling Group.

Reference

The Draining Timeout is the time to wait before detaching a server from the Load Balancer.

  • Because sessions may remain connected to the server, setting a Draining Timeout and waiting allows you to clean up sessions more safely.
  • If the Load Balancer is unused, Draining Timeout cannot be set.
  • The default is 300 seconds, and it can be set from a minimum of 1 second up to a maximum of 3,600 seconds.

To set the Load Balancer Draining Timeout of an Auto-Scaling Group, follow these steps.

  1. Click the All Services > Compute > Virtual Server menu. Navigate to the Service Home page of Virtual Server.
  2. Click the Auto-Scaling Group menu. You will be taken to the Auto-Scaling Group List page.
  3. Auto-Scaling Group List page, click the resource to set the Load Balancer Draining Timeout. You will be taken to the Auto-Scaling Group Details page.
  4. Click the Load Balancer tab. You will be taken to the Load Balancer list page.
  5. Click the Edit button for Draining Timeout. The Draining Timeout Edit popup opens.
  6. Draining Timeout Edit In the popup window, select whether to use Draining Timeout, and enter the Draining Timeout duration (seconds).
  7. Draining Timeout Edit After verifying the input values in the popup window, click the Confirm button. Draining Timeout Edit Notification popup window opens. Check the message in the notification popup and click the Confirm button.

Using Load Balancer

You can modify the Load Balancer of an Auto-Scaling Group. To configure the Load Balancer of an Auto-Scaling Group, follow these steps.

Reference
  • When a server in the Auto-Scaling Group is created, it is automatically added as a member of the selected Load Balancer’s LB server group, and when the server is terminated, it is removed from the LB server group’s members.
  • If Draining Timeout is used, after waiting for the Draining Timeout (seconds), the server is removed from the LB server group’s members.
  • When a Member is separated due to Load Balancer modification, it waits in the Detach from LB state; when a Member is separated due to Scale In, it waits in the Scale In state.
  1. Click the All Services > Compute > Virtual Server menu. Navigate to the Service Home page of Virtual Server.
  2. Click the Auto-Scaling Group menu. Navigate to the Auto-Scaling Group List page.
  3. On the Auto-Scaling Group List page, click the resource that will use the Load Balancer. Navigate to the Auto-Scaling Group Details page.
  4. Click the Load Balancer tab. You will be taken to the Load Balancer list page.
  5. Click the Edit button of the Load Balancer. The Load Balancer Edit popup opens.
  6. Load Balancer Edit Please select whether to use it in the popup. Selecting Use allows you to choose a Load Balancer.
    CategoryDetailed description
    LB server groupLB server group name
    • Select the LB server group that is created in the selected VPC
    • LB server groups that use Weighted Round Robin or Weighted Least Connection load balancing cannot be selected
    PortPort information of the LB server group
    • When registering as a member of the LB server group, enter the required port information in the registration details.
    • Enter a value between 1 and 65,534
    Table. Load Balancer list items
    • Click the + button to add an LB server group. Up to three are allowed. Click the X button to remove the added Load Balancer.
  7. Check the Load Balancer list and click the Confirm button. Load Balancer Modification Notification popup opens. Verify the message in the notification popup and click the Confirm button.
Caution
  • Please be careful, as separating or connecting servers from the Load Balancer may affect the service.
  • If Draining Timeout is in use, setting the Load Balancer to unused or removing some of the attached Load Balancers with the X button will not detach immediately. After waiting for the Draining Timeout (seconds), the server is detached from the Load Balancer. At that time, the Auto-Scaling Group remains in the Detach from LB state.
Reference

Not Using Load Balancer

You can modify the Auto-Scaling Group’s Load Balancer to be unused. To set the Auto-Scaling Group’s Load Balancer to unused, follow these steps.

Caution
  • Please be careful as there may be service impact when separating or connecting servers from the Load Balancer.
  • If Draining Timeout is in use, setting the Load Balancer to unused or removing some of the attached Load Balancers with the X button will not detach immediately. After waiting for the Draining Timeout (seconds), the server is detached from the Load Balancer. At that time, the Auto-Scaling Group remains in the Detach from LB state.
  1. Click the All Services > Compute > Virtual Server menu. Go to the Service Home page of Virtual Server.
  2. Click the Auto-Scaling Group menu. You will be taken to the Auto-Scaling Group List page.
  3. On the Auto-Scaling Group List page, click the resource to change the Load Balancer to unused. You will be taken to the Auto-Scaling Group Details page.
  4. Click the Load Balancer tab. You will be taken to the Load Balancer list page.
  5. Click the Edit button of the Load Balancer. The Load Balancer Edit popup opens.
  6. Load Balancer edit Choose whether to use it in the popup window. If you deselect Use, Load Balancer will no longer be used.
  7. Use deselection, and click the Confirm button. Load Balancer Modification Notification popup opens. Verify the message in the notification popup and click the Confirm button.

Delete Auto-Scaling Group

Deleting an unused Auto-Scaling Group can reduce operational costs. However, terminating an Auto-Scaling Group may cause the running service to stop immediately, so you should thoroughly consider the impact of service interruption before proceeding with the termination.

Caution
Please note that data cannot be recovered after deleting the service.

To terminate an Auto-Scaling Group, follow these steps.

  1. Click the All Services > Compute > Virtual Server menu. Navigate to the Service Home page of Virtual Server.
  2. Click the Auto-Scaling Group menu. Navigate to the Auto-Scaling Group List page.
  3. On the Auto-Scaling Group List page, click the resource to terminate. Navigate to the Auto-Scaling Group Details page.
  4. Click the Auto-Scaling Group Delete button.
  5. After the deletion is complete, verify that the resource has been removed on the Auto-Scaling Group List page.

2.2.1 - Launch Configuration

To create an Auto-Scaling Group, a Launch Configuration must be created in advance.

Create Launch Configuration

You can create and use the Launch Configuration service in the Samsung Cloud Platform Console.

To create a Launch Configuration, follow these steps.

  1. Click the All Services > Compute > Virtual Server menu. Navigate to the Service Home page of Virtual Server.

  2. Click the Launch Configuration menu. Navigate to the Launch Configuration List page.

  3. On the Launch Configuration list page, click the Create Launch Configuration button. You will be taken to the Create Launch Configuration page.

  4. On the Launch Configurationp Creation page, in the Image and Version Selection area, select the required information and click the Next button.

    Reference
    Please refer to the server type in Virtual Server OS Image Provisioning Versions for images selectable in Launch Configuration.

  5. Enter the required information in the Service Information Input area of the Launch Configurationp Creation page.

    Category
    Required status
    Detailed description
    Launch Configuration nameRequiredLaunch Configuration name
    • Name used to distinguish the Launch Configuration
    Service Type > Server TypeRequiredLaunch Configuration server type
    • Standard: Standard specifications commonly used
    • High Capacity: Large-scale server specifications beyond Standard
    Block StorageRequiredConfigure Block Storage according to the purpose of the Launch Configuration
    • Basic OS: The area where the OS is installed and used
      • Enter the size in Units, and the minimum size varies depending on the OS image type
        • Alma Linux: Enter a value between 2 and 1,536
        • Oracle Linux: Enter a value between 5 and 1,536
        • RHEL: Enter a value between 2 and 1,536
        • Rocky Linux: Enter a value between 2 and 1,536
        • Ubuntu: Enter a value between 1 and 1,536
        • Windows: Enter a value between 4 and 1,536
      • SSD: High‑performance general volume
      • HDD: General volume
      • SSD/HDD_KMS: Additional encrypted volume using Samsung Cloud Platform KMS (Key Management System) encryption keys
        • Encryption can be applied only at initial creation and cannot be changed afterward
        • Performance degradation occurs when using the SSD_KMS disk type
    • Additional: Use when extra space beyond the OS area is needed
      • After selecting Use, enter the storage type and size
      • Click the + button to add storage, or the x button to delete (up to 25 can be added)
      • Enter the size in Units, with a value between 1 and 1,536
        • Since 1 Unit equals 8 GB, this creates 8 GB to 12,288 GB
      • SSD: High‑performance general volume
      • HDD: General volume
      • SSD/HDD_KMS: Additional encrypted volume using Samsung Cloud Platform KMS (Key Management System) encryption keys
        • Encryption can be applied only at initial creation and cannot be changed afterward
        • Performance degradation occurs when using the SSD_KMS disk type
      • SSD_MultiAttach: Volume that can be attached to more than one server
    KeypairRequiredSelect the user authentication method for the Launch Configuration
    • Server authentication information for accessing the servers created by generating an Auto-Scaling Group with a Launch Configuration
    • New creation: Create a new one if a new Keypair is required
    • Default login account list by OS
      • Alma Linux: almalinux
      • RHEL: cloud-user
      • Rocky Linux: rocky
      • Ubuntu: ubuntu
      • Windows: sysadmin
    File Storage SettingsSelectionScale-out/Scale-in can be set to automatically connect File Storage
    • Volume: After clicking the Select button, choose the Volume to use in the Select File Storage popup
    • Up to 5 can be selected
    • The selected Volume can be deleted by clicking the X button
    Table. Launch Configuration service information input items

  6. On the Launch Configuration Creation page, after entering information in the Additional Information Input area, click the Next button.

    Category
    Required
    Detailed description
    Init ScriptSelectionScript that runs when the server of an Auto Scaling Group using a Launch Configuration starts
    • Enter within 45,000 bytes
    • The init script must be a batch script for Windows, a shell script for Linux, or cloud‑init, depending on the selected image.
    tagSelectionAdd Tag
    • Up to 50 can be added per resource
    • After clicking the Add Tag button, enter or select Key, Value values
    Table. Launch Configuration additional information input fields

  7. Verify creation information Check the information you entered on the page and the estimated amount, and click the Create button.

    • When creation is complete, verify the created Launch Configuration on the Launch Configuration List page.

View Launch Configuration Details

The Launch Configuration service allows you to view and edit the full list of resources and detailed information. Launch Configuration Details page consists of Details, Tags, Activity Log tabs.

To view detailed information of the Launch Configuration, follow these steps.

  1. Click the All Services > Compute > Virtual Server menu. Navigate to the Service Home page of Virtual Server.
  2. Click the Launch Configuration menu. Navigate to the Launch Configuration List page.
  3. On the Launch Configuration List page, click the resource you want to view detailed information for. You will be taken to the Launch Configuration Details page.
    • Launch Configuration Details At the top of the page, status information and additional feature information are displayed, and it consists of Details, Tags, Activity History tabs.
      CategoryDetailed description
      Launch Configuration statusUser-created Launch Configuration status
      • Active: Available
      Delete Launch ConfigurationDelete Launch Configuration button
      Table. Launch Configuration status information and additional features

Detailed information

Launch Configuration list page allows you to view detailed information of the selected resource and edit the information if needed.

CategoryDetailed description
serviceService name
Resource TypeResource Type
SRNUnique resource ID in Samsung Cloud Platform
  • In Launch Configuration, it refers to the Launch Configuration SRN
Resource nameResource name
  • In a Launch Configuration, it refers to the Launch Configuration name
Resource IDUnique resource ID in the service
constructorUser who created the service
Creation date and timeService creation date and time
editorUser who edited the service information
Modification dateDate and time the service information was modified
Launch Configuration nameLaunch Configuration name
imageWhen creating a Launch Configuration, the selected image name
  • . This is the OS image used when launching servers in the Auto Scaling Group that uses this Launch Configuration.
Number of Auto-Scaling GroupsNumber of Auto Scaling Groups using a Launch Configuration
Server typeServer type set in Launch Configuration
Block StorageBlock Storage information per server configured in the Launch Configuration
  • type, capacity, kind
KeypairServer authentication information set in the Launch Configuration
  • Keypair information used to connect to the servers of the Auto Scaling Group that uses this Launch Configuration
Init ScriptThe Init Script set in the Launch Configuration
  • is the script that runs when a server in an Auto-Scaling Group using that Launch Configuration starts.
File Storage SettingsFile Storage Volume name set in the Launch Configuration
  • Click the Volume name to view detailed File Storage information
Table. Launch Configuration Details Tab Items

tag

Launch Configuration List page lets you view the tag information of the selected resource, and you can add, modify, or delete it.

CategoryDetailed description
Tag listTag list
  • You can view the Key and Value information of the tag
  • Up to 50 tags can be added per resource
  • When entering a tag, you can search and select from the list of previously created Keys and Values
Table. Launch Configuration Tag Tab Items

Work History

You can view the operation history of the selected resource on the Launch Configuration List page.

CategoryDetailed description
Task History ListResource Change History
  • Operation Time, Resource ID, Resource Name, Operation Details, Event Topic, Operation Result, Check Operator Information
Table. Launch Configuration Job History Tab Detailed Information Items

Delete Launch Configuration

Deleting unused Launch Configurations can reduce operational costs. However, terminating a Launch Configuration may cause running services to stop immediately, so you should carefully consider the impact of service interruption before proceeding with the termination.

Caution
Please be careful, as data cannot be recovered after deletion.

To delete a Launch Configuration, follow these steps.

  1. Click the All Services > Compute > Virtual Server menu. Navigate to the Service Home page of Virtual Server.
  2. Click the Launch Configuration menu. Go to the Launch Configuration List page.
  3. On the Launch Configuration List page, click the resource to be terminated. Navigate to the Launch Configuration Details page.
  4. Launch Configuration Delete Click the button.
  5. After deletion is complete, verify on the Launch Configuration List page that the resource has been removed.
Caution
A Launch Configuration attached to an Auto-Scaling Group cannot be deleted. Please delete the Launch Configuration after first deleting the Auto-Scaling Group.

2.2.2 - Manage Policy

You can dynamically adjust the number of servers in an Auto-Scaling Group based on monitoring metrics. When the metric exceeds the threshold you set, the server count is adjusted. At that time, you can choose one of three methods to adjust the server count: increase or decrease by a specified number, increase or decrease by a specified percentage, or fix the server count to a given value. When servers are launched or terminated due to a policy, the monitoring metric, such as CPU utilization, may temporarily exceed the threshold registered in the policy. However, because this is a brief moment, a cooldown period is set to avoid treating it as an abnormal condition. You can add and manage policies for an Auto-Scaling Group created in the Samsung Cloud Platform Console.

Add Policy

You can add policies to an Auto-Scaling Group. To add a policy to an Auto-Scaling Group, follow these steps.

  1. Click the All Services > Compute > Virtual Server menu. Navigate to the Service Home page of Virtual Server.

  2. Click the Auto-Scaling Group menu. You will be taken to the Auto-Scaling Group List page.

  3. Auto-Scaling Group List page, click the resource you want to view detailed information for. You will be taken to the Auto-Scaling Group Details page.

  4. Click the Policy Tab. You will be taken to the Policy Tab page.

  5. Click the Add Policy button. The Add Policy popup window opens.

    Category
    Required
    Detailed description
    CategoryRequiredPolicy Category
    • Scale In: return server count
    • Scale Out: increase server count
    Policy NameRequiredName for policy-specific categorization
    Execution conditionsRequiredConditions to execute the policy
    • Statistic: How to calculate the Metric Type
      • Average: Average of servers in the Auto-Scaling Group
      • Min: Minimum value among servers in the Auto-Scaling Group
      • Max: Maximum value among servers in the Auto-Scaling Group
    • Metric Type: CPU Usage, Network In(bytes), Network Out(bytes), Network In(Packets), Network Out(Packets)
    • Operator: >= > <= <
    • Threshold: Threshold corresponding to the Metric Type
    • Period: Continuous duration required to trigger the condition (the condition must be continuously satisfied for N minutes for the policy to execute)
    execution unitRequiredPolicy execution method
    • Policy Type: Select the type of policy to execute.
      • Increase or decrease the number of servers by a specified count: Increase or decrease the server count to the Target Value
      • Increase or decrease the number of servers by a specified ratio: Increase or decrease by the Target Value ratio
      • Fix the number of servers to the entered value: Fix the server count according to the Target Value
    • Target Value: The number or ratio to apply for the selected Policy Type
    cooldownRequiredThe waiting time (seconds) when a server is started or terminated due to a policy
    • The default is 300 seconds, and it can be set between a minimum of 60 seconds and a maximum of 3,600 seconds.
    Table. Add Policy Popup Items
    Reference

    Policy > Cooldown Settings

    • When a server is started or terminated due to a policy, it waits for the configured cooldown period. Temporarily, the monitoring metric CPU utilization may exceed the threshold defined in the policy. However, because this is a transient moment rather than a condition for adjusting the number of servers, it is not considered an abnormal situation, and the system waits by applying the cooldown time.
    guide

    Policy execution operates within the configured Min/Max server count range.

    • Even if you input values outside the Min/Max server count range—such as increasing, returning, or fixing the number of servers—it operates within the configured Min/Max server count.
    • Example: When the minimum number of servers is 3, even if you set the server count fixed to 1, the server count does not drop to 1 and remains at the minimum of 3.

  6. Add Policy After entering the required values in the popup window, click the Confirm button. The added policy can be viewed in the Policy List.

Policy creation example

The following is an explanation of the policy example. Please refer to it when creating a policy.

Policy example description 1
CategoryExecution Conditionsexecution unitcooldown
Scale OutAverage CPU Usage >= 60% occurs for 1 minuteIncrease the server count by the specified number, incrementing by one unit.300 seconds
Table. Auto-Scaling Group policy example 1
  • If the average CPU usage of the servers in the Auto-Scaling Group exceeds 60% for one minute, a server is added one at a time.
  • When a server is added, the cooldown period is 300 seconds, and during this time, no server addition or removal due to policy occurs.
  • After the cooldown period ends, the policy execution conditions are checked again.
Policy example description 2
CategoryExecution Conditionsexecution unitcooldown
Scale InMin CPU Usage <= 5% occurs for 1 minuteScale the number of servers up or down by the specified ratio, returning 50%.300 seconds
Table. Auto-Scaling Group policy example 2
  • If the minimum CPU usage of servers in the Auto-Scaling Group remains below 5% for 1 minute, 50% of the current servers will be terminated.
  • When a server is terminated, the cooldown period is 300 seconds, and during this time, no server additions or removals occur due to policy.
  • After the cooldown period ends, the policy execution conditions are checked again.
Policy example description 3
CategoryExecution ConditionsExecution Unitcooldown
Scale OutMax CPU Usage >= 90% occurs for 1 minuteFix the number of servers to 5 based on the entered value300 seconds
Table. Auto-Scaling Group policy example 3
  • If the maximum CPU usage among the servers in the Auto-Scaling Group exceeds 90% for 1 minute and the current number of servers is less than 5, servers will be created up to a total of 5.
  • During server creation, the cooldown period is 300 seconds, and no server additions or removals due to policy occur during the cooldown period.
  • After the cooldown period ends, the policy execution conditions are checked again.

Edit Policy

You can modify the policies of an Auto-Scaling Group. To modify the policies of an Auto-Scaling Group, follow these steps.

  1. Click the All Services > Compute > Virtual Server menu. Navigate to the Service Home page of Virtual Server.

  2. Click the Auto-Scaling Group menu. Navigate to the Auto-Scaling Group List page.

  3. Auto-Scaling Group List page, click the resource to view detailed information. You will be taken to the Auto-Scaling Group Details page.

  4. Click the Policy Tab. You will be taken to the Policy Tab page.

  5. Click the More > Edit button for the policy you want to modify. The Policy Edit Popup opens.

    Category
    Required
    Detailed description
    CategoryRequiredPolicy Classification
    • Scale In: Return server count
    • Scale Out: Increase server count
    Policy NameRequiredName for policy-specific categorization
    Execution conditionsRequiredConditions to execute the policy
    • Statistic: Method to calculate the Metric Type
      • Average: Average of servers in the Auto-Scaling Group
      • Min: Minimum value among servers in the Auto-Scaling Group
      • Max: Maximum value among servers in the Auto-Scaling Group
    • Metric Type: CPU Usage, Network In(bytes), Network Out(bytes), Network In(Packets), Network Out(Packets)
    • Operator: >= > <= <
    • Threshold: Threshold corresponding to the Metric Type
    • Period: Continuous duration (in minutes) that triggers the execution condition
    execution unitRequiredPolicy execution method
    • Policy Type: Select the type of policy to execute.
      • Increase or decrease the number of servers by a specified count: Increase or reduce the server count to the Target Value
      • Increase or decrease the number of servers by a specified ratio: Increase or reduce by the Target Value ratio
      • Fix the number of servers to the entered value: Fix the server count according to the Target Value
    • Target Value: The number or ratio to execute the selected Policy Type
    Cool downRequiredThe waiting time (seconds) when a server is started or terminated due to a policy
    • The default is 300 seconds, and it can be set from a minimum of 1 second up to a maximum of 3,600 seconds
    Table. Policy edit popup items

  6. Edit Policy In the popup window, after entering the required values, click the Confirm button.

Policy addition and modification constraints

When adding or modifying a policy, constraints exist based on the policy classification, execution conditions, and the scope of those conditions. Below is an example of constraints for the policy. Refer to the constraint examples to add or modify the policy.

Example 1 - Need to check for duplicate registration of policy classification/execution conditions

Policy classification (Scale Out or Scale In) and execution condition (Metric type) cannot be registered redundantly with the same values.

Policy classificationPolicy NameExecution Condition(Statistic)Execution condition(Metric type)Execution condition range
Scale OutScaleOutPolicyAverageCPU Usage>= 60%
Table. Policy Constraint Example 1 - Pre-registration Policy

If a policy is registered as above, you cannot add a policy with the category (Scale Out) execution condition (Metric type=CPU Usage) or modify it to that condition.

Example 2 - Need to verify the execution condition range for execution conditions (Metric type) and execution conditions (Statistic) according to policy classification

When the policy type (Scale Out or Scale In) differs, duplicate registration of the execution condition range (Comparison operator + Threshold) is not allowed for the same execution condition (Metric type) and execution condition (Statistic).

Policy classificationPolicy NameExecution condition(Statistic)Execution condition(Metric type)Execution condition range
Scale OutScaleOutPolicyAverageCPU Usage>= 60%
Table. Policy Constraint Example 2 - Pre-registration Policy

If a policy is registered as shown above, you cannot add a policy as below or modify it under the following conditions.
If the average CPU Usage is 60% or higher, a Scale Out policy is already registered; therefore, registering a Scale In policy when the average CPU Usage is 60% or lower would duplicate the 60% execution condition and cannot be added.

Policy ClassificationPolicy NameExecution Condition(Statistic)Execution condition(Metric type)Execution condition range
Scale InAddUpdatePolicyAverageCPU Usage<= 60%
Table. Policy Constraint Example 2 - Non-Addable Policy

Example 3 - Need to verify the execution condition range for execution conditions (Metric type) and execution conditions (Statistic) according to policy classification

When the policy classification (Scale Out or Scale In) differs, duplicate registration of the execution condition range (Comparison operator + Threshold) is not allowed for the same execution condition (Metric type) and execution condition (Statistic).

Policy classificationPolicy NameExecution condition(Statistic)Execution condition (Metric type)Execution condition range
Scale InScaleInPolicyAverageCPU Usage<= 10%
Table. Policy Constraint Example 3 - Pre-registration Policy

If a policy is registered as shown above, you cannot add a policy as below or modify it under the following conditions.
When the average CPU Usage is 10% or less, a Scale In policy is already registered; therefore, if the average CPU Usage is less than 60% / 60% or less / 10% or more / exceeds 9%, you cannot register a Scale Out policy because the execution condition ranges would overlap.

Policy classificationPolicy NameExecution Condition(Statistic)Execution condition(Metric type)Execution condition range
Scale OutAddUpdatePolicy1AverageCPU Usage< 60%
Scale OutAddUpdatePolicy2AverageCPU Usage<= 60%
Scale OutAddUpdatePolicy3AverageCPU Usage>= 10%
Scale OutAddUpdatePolicy4AverageCPU Usage> 9%
Table. Policy constraint example 3 – non‑addable policy

Example 4 - Execution conditions (Metric type) and execution conditions (Statistic) can be registered according to the execution condition range based on policy classification

If the policy type (Scale Out or Scale In) differs, you can register when the execution condition (Metric type) is the same but the execution condition (Statistic) is different, or when the execution condition range (Comparison operator + Threshold) does not overlap.

Policy classificationPolicy NameExecution Condition(Statistic)Execution condition (Metric type)Execution Condition Range
Scale OutScaleOutPolicyAverageCPU Usage>= 60%
Table. Policy Constraint Example 4 - Pre-registration Policy

If a policy is already registered as shown above, you can add a policy as below or modify it with the following conditions. Registration is possible when the execution condition ranges do not overlap, or when the execution condition (Statistic) differs.

Policy classificationPolicy NameExecution Condition(Statistic)Execution condition (Metric type)Execution condition range
Scale InAddUpdatePolicy1AverageCPU Usage<= 10%
Scale InAddUpdatePolicy2MinCPU Usage<= 60%
Table. Policy constraint example 4 – Addable policy

Delete Policy

You can delete a policy of an Auto-Scaling Group. To delete a policy of an Auto-Scaling Group, follow these steps.

  1. Click the All Services > Compute > Virtual Server menu. Navigate to the Service Home page of Virtual Server.
  2. Click the Auto-Scaling Group menu. Navigate to the Auto-Scaling Group List page.
  3. Auto-Scaling Group List page: click the resource you want to view details for. You will be taken to the Auto-Scaling Group Details page.
  4. Click the Policy Tab. You will be taken to the Policy Tab page.
  5. Select the policy to delete and click the Delete button. The Policy Deletion Confirmation popup opens.
  6. Policy Deletion Confirmation Check the popup window and click the Confirm button.

2.2.3 - Manage Schedule

You can schedule reservations daily, weekly, monthly, or one-time, and set the desired number of servers at the specified time. This is useful when you can predict when you need to decrease or increase the number of servers.

Add schedule

You can add a schedule to an Auto-Scaling Group. To add a schedule to an Auto-Scaling Group, follow these steps.

  1. Click the All Services > Compute > Virtual Server menu. Navigate to the Service Home page of Virtual Server.
  2. Click the Auto-Scaling Group menu. Navigate to the Auto-Scaling Group List page.
  3. Auto-Scaling Group List page, click the resource you want to view detailed information for. You will be taken to the Auto-Scaling Group Details page.
  4. Click the Schedule Tab. You will be taken to the Schedule Tab page.
  5. Click the Add Schedule button. The Add Schedule popup window opens.
    Category
    required
    Detailed description
    Schedule nameRequiredName to distinguish by schedule
    Select server countRequiredSelect the number of servers to adjust when executing the schedule
    • Min: The minimum number of servers the Auto-Scailg Group should maintain
    • Desired: The target number of servers within the Auto-Scailg Group
    • Max: The maximum number of servers the Auto-Scailg Group can maintain
    Enter the number of serversRequiredEnter the value for the selected number of servers
    • Min value: Enter a value between 0 and 50. (Min≤Desired≤Max)
    • Desired value: Enter a value between 0 and 50. (Min≤Desired≤Max)
    • Max value: Enter a value between 0 and 50. (Min≤Desired≤Max)
    PeriodRequiredSchedule execution frequency
    • Daily: You can set the Start date, End date, and Permanent options for a daily schedule. You can also set the Time and Time zone
    • Weekly: You can set the Start date, End date, Permanent options, and the Time and Time zone. You can also select the Day of week on which the weekly schedule will run.
    • Monthly: You can set the Start date, End date, Permanent options, and the Time and Time zone. You can also enter the Date on which the monthly schedule will run
    • One-time: You can set the Time and Time zone. You can also set the Date on which the one-time schedule will run
    Start dateSelectionSet schedule start date
    • Cannot set a date earlier than the current date. The default is the current date.
    End dateSelectionSet schedule end date
    • Cannot set a date earlier than the current date. The default is the current date plus 7 days.
    permanentSelectionWhen configuring permanently, set the schedule end date to 9999-12-31
    timeRequiredSchedule execution time setting
    • Can be set in 30‑minute increments. Times earlier than the current date or current time cannot be set
    time zoneRequiredSchedule execution time zone (example: Asia/Seoul (GMT +09:00))
    day of the weekRequiredWhen Period is set to Weekly, select the Day of the week to execute the schedule
    DateRequired
    • When Period is set to Monthly, enter the Date on which the schedule will run
      • Enter one or more values from -31 to 31, excluding 0. (Example: 3,4,5)
    • When Period is set to Once, set the Date on which the schedule will run
      • Setting a date earlier than the current date is not allowed. The default is the current date.
    Table. Schedule addition popup items
  6. Add Schedule After entering the required values in the popup window, click the Confirm button.
  7. Add Schedule Confirmation After checking the message in the popup window, click the Confirm button.
Reference

If you select the schedule frequency as monthly, you must enter the schedule execution date, Date. Refer to the information below to register the schedule.

  • If you input a number greater than 0, it represents the day of the month.
    • Example: If you enter 1, you get August 1, September 1, …, December 1
  • If you enter a number less than 0, the calculation starts from the end of each month.
    • Entering -1 means the last day of each month.
      • Example: August 31, September 30, …, December 31
    • If you enter -2, it means the day before the last day of each month.
      • Example: August 30, September 29, …, December 30
    • Since the last day of each month varies—31, 30, 29, or 28 days—we allow calculation from the end of the month using negative numbers, as shown above, to handle schedules that need to run on the month’s final day.
Information
  • When the schedule runs, if the Min server count set in the schedule is greater than the Desired server count, or if the Max server count is less than the Desired server count, the Desired server count is also adjusted.
  • If there are schedules with overlapping execution times, they may not run correctly. Please try to avoid overlapping execution times as much as possible.

Modify schedule

You can modify the schedule of an Auto-Scaling Group. To modify the schedule of an Auto-Scaling Group, follow these steps.

  1. Click the All Services > Compute > Virtual Server menu. Navigate to the Service Home page of Virtual Server.
  2. Click the Auto-Scaling Group menu. Navigate to the Auto-Scaling Group List page.
  3. On the Auto-Scaling Group List page, click the resource for which you want to view detailed information. You will be taken to the Auto-Scaling Group Details page.
  4. Click the Schedule Tab. You will be taken to the Schedule Tab page.
  5. Click the More > Edit button of the schedule you want to modify. The Edit Schedule popup window will open.
    Category
    required
    Detailed description
    Schedule nameRequiredName to distinguish by schedule
    Select number of serversRequiredSelect the number of servers to adjust when executing the schedule
    • Min: The minimum number of servers the Auto-Scailg Group should maintain
    • Desired: The target number of servers within the Auto-Scailg Group
    • Max: The maximum number of servers the Auto-Scailg Group can maintain
    Enter number of serversRequiredEnter the value for the selected number of servers
    • Min value: Enter a value between 0 and 50. (Min≤Desired≤Max)
    • Desired value: Enter a value between 0 and 50. (Min≤Desired≤Max)
    • Max value: Enter a value between 0 and 50. (Min≤Desired≤Max)
    periodRequiredSchedule execution frequency
    • Daily: You can set the Start Date and End Date, and Permanent setting for the daily schedule. You can also set the Time and Time Zone
    • Weekly: You can set the Start Date and End Date, Permanent setting, and the Time and Time Zone. You can also select the Day of Week for the Weekly schedule to run.
    • Monthly: You can set the Start Date and End Date, Permanent setting, and the Time and Time Zone. You can also enter the Date for the Monthly schedule to run.
    • Once: You can set the Time and Time Zone. You can also set the Date for the Once schedule to run
    Start dateSelectionSet schedule start date
    • Cannot set a date earlier than the current date. The default is the current date.
    End dateSelectionSet schedule end date
    • Cannot set a date earlier than the current date. The default is the current date plus 7 days.
    PermanentSelectionWhen configuring permanently, set the schedule end date to 9999-12-31.
    timeRequiredSchedule execution time setting
    • Can be set in 30‑minute increments. Times earlier than the current date or current time cannot be set
    time zoneRequiredSchedule execution time zone (example: Asia/Seoul (GMT +09:00))
    day of the weekRequiredWhen Period is weekly, select the day of the week to run the schedule.
    DateRequired
    • When Period is set to Monthly, enter the Date on which the schedule will run
      • Enter one or more values from -31 to 31, excluding 0. (Example: 3,4,5)
    • When Period is set to Once, set the Date on which the schedule will run
      • Cannot set a date earlier than the current date. The default is the current date.
    Table. Schedule edit popup items
  6. Schedule Edit After entering the required values in the popup window, click the Confirm button.
  7. Schedule Modification Confirmation After checking the message in the popup window, click the Confirm button.

Delete schedule

You can delete the schedule of an Auto-Scaling Group. To delete the schedule of an Auto-Scaling Group, follow these steps.

  1. Click the All Services > Compute > Virtual Server menu. Navigate to the Service Home page of Virtual Server.
  2. Click the Auto-Scaling Group menu. You will be taken to the Auto-Scaling Group List page.
  3. On the Auto-Scaling Group List page, click the resource for which you want to view detailed information. You will be taken to the Auto-Scaling Group Details page.
  4. Click the Schedule Tab. You will be taken to the Schedule Tab page.
  5. Select the schedule to delete and click the Delete button. Schedule Deletion Confirmation popup will open.
  6. Schedule Deletion Confirmation Check the popup window and click the Confirm button.

2.2.4 - Manage Notification

You can designate a notification recipient and send alert messages via E‑mail or SMS for specific situations.

Reference
  • The notification method (E-mail or SMS) can be set on the Notification Settings page by selecting Notification Target as Service > Virtual Server Auto-Scaling.
  • For details on editing notification settings, refer to Edit Notification Settings.

Add notification

You can add notifications to an Auto-Scaling Group. To add notifications to an Auto-Scaling Group, follow these steps.

  1. Click the All Services > Compute > Virtual Server menu. Navigate to the Service Home page of Virtual Server.
  2. Click the Auto-Scaling Group menu. You will be taken to the Auto-Scaling Group List page.
  3. On the Auto-Scaling Group List page, click the resource to which you want to add notification information. You will be taken to the Auto-Scaling Group Details page.
  4. Click the Notification Tab. You will be taken to the Notification Tab page.
  5. Click the Add Notification button. The Add Notification popup opens.
  6. Add Notification After entering the required values in the popup window, click the Confirm button.
    CategoryDetailed description
    Notification timingNotification timing when an Auto-Scaling Group alert occurs
    • Server creation, Server termination, Server creation failure, Server termination failure, When policy execution conditions are met
    • Multiple selection allowed
    Notification recipientUser who will receive the notification when an alert occurs
    • Click the Add Notification Recipient button to select a user
    • Only Samsung Cloud Platform users can be selected as recipients
    Table. Notification items
Caution
When adding a notification recipient, verify that an email address exists and add it. Only users with login history (users who have registered an email or mobile phone number) can receive notifications.
  1. Add Notification Confirmation After checking the message in the popup window, click the Confirm button.

Edit Notification

You can modify the notification settings of an Auto-Scaling Group. To modify the notification settings of an Auto-Scaling Group, follow these steps.

  1. Click the All Services > Compute > Virtual Server menu. Navigate to the Service Home page of Virtual Server.
  2. Click the Auto-Scaling Group menu. Navigate to the Auto-Scaling Group List page.
  3. On the Auto-Scaling Group List page, click the resource to edit the notification information. You will be taken to the Auto-Scaling Group Details page.
  4. Click the Notification Tab. You will be taken to the Notification Tab page.
  5. In the notification list, click the More > Edit button for the notification you want to modify. The Edit Notification popup window will open.
  6. Edit Notification After editing the notification information in the popup window, click the Confirm button.
    CategoryDetailed description
    Notification timingNotification timing when an Auto-Scaling Group alert occurs
    • Server creation, Server termination, Server creation failure, Server termination failure, When policy execution conditions are met
    • Multiple selection allowed
    Table. Notification edit items
  7. Edit Notification Confirmation After checking the message in the popup window, click the Confirm button.

Delete Notification

You can delete notifications for an Auto-Scaling Group. To delete notifications for an Auto-Scaling Group, follow these steps.

  1. Click the All Services > Compute > Virtual Server menu. Navigate to the Service Home page of Virtual Server.
  2. Click the Auto-Scaling Group menu. You will be taken to the Auto-Scaling Group List page.
  3. On the Auto-Scaling Group List page, click the resource to edit the notification information. You will be taken to the Auto-Scaling Group Details page.
  4. Click the Notification Tab. You will be taken to the Notification Tab page.
  5. In the notification list, select the notification you want to delete, then click the Delete button. The Delete Notification Confirmation popup will open.
  6. Delete Notification Confirmation Review the popup window and click the Confirm button.

2.3 - API Reference

API Reference

2.4 - CLI Reference

CLI Reference

2.5 - Release Note

Virtual Server Auto-Scaling

2026.03.19
FEATURE Virtual Server and Load Balancer status check feature and other feature additions
  • The Virtual Server and Load Balancer status check feature has been added.
    • Check the status of Virtual Server and Load Balancer and automatically replace servers that are in an Unhealthy state.
  • You can attach File Storage to a Launch Configuration.
    • When creating a Launch Configuration, you can attach up to five File Storage Volumes.
  • You can monitor data by integrating with the ServiceWatch service.
2025.10.23
FEATURE Virtual Server cancellation feature improvement
  • The termination feature for Virtual Servers created in an Auto-Scaling Group has been improved.
    • When a Virtual Server is terminated, the Load Balancer is automatically detached.
    • The Desired server count remains unchanged, and scale-out is performed according to the Desired check batch.
2025.07.01
FEATURE New feature added
  • Added a notification feature to Virtual Server Auto-Scaling.
    • You can add notification settings in the creation or detail screen of an Auto-Scaling Group.
  • You can set scaling policies when creating an Auto-Scaling Group.
  • Added a Metric Type to the Auto-Scaling Group policy.
    • Add: Memory Usage, Network In(bytes), Network Out(bytes), Network In(Packets), Network Out(Packets)
  • You can set the Draining Timeout when connecting to a Load Balancer.
  • In an Auto-Scaling Group, up to 50 Virtual Servers can be connected, and up to 3 LB server groups and ports can be attached.
2025.02.27
FEATURE Virtual Server Auto Scaling-Load Balancer service integration release and NAT configuration feature addition
  • Virtual Server Auto-Scaling feature change
    • It will be released in conjunction with the Load Balancer service launching in February 2025.
    • The NAT configuration feature has been added to the Auto-Scaling Group.
  • Samsung Cloud Platform Common Feature Changes
    • Account, IAM, Service Home, tags, and other common CX changes have been applied.
2024.11.19
NEW Virtual Server Auto Scaling service official version release
  • Virtual Server Auto-Scaling creates an Auto-Scaling Group through a Launch Configuration and monitors and manages the servers.
  • Provides a scheduling method that allows setting the desired number of servers at a specified time, and a policy method that adjusts the number of servers based on CPU utilization.

3 - GPU Server

3.1 - Overview

Service Overview

GPU Server is a virtualized computing service that lets you freely allocate and use infrastructure resources such as CPU, GPU, and memory provided by the server, without having to purchase them individually, and allocate as much as needed at the required time. It is suitable for tasks that require fast computation speed, such as AI model experimentation, prediction, and inference in a cloud environment, and you can flexibly select and use resources with optimized performance based on the type and scale of the work. The GPU Server provides the following features.

Provided Features

  • GPU Server Management: Through a web-based console, users can directly Self Service create, delete, and modify GPU Server provisioning, monitoring, and billing.
  • Product offerings by GPU quantity: Depending on the project’s purpose and scale, you can freely select the number of H100/A100 GPUs to configure a virtual server.
  • High‑Performance GPU Provision: We provide a high‑performance GPU server at physical‑server level using a pass‑through method.
  • Storage Connection: Provides additional attached storage besides the OS disk. * You can connect and use Block Storage, File Storage, and Object Storage.
  • Strong Security Application: Use the Security Group service to control inbound/outbound traffic exchanged with the external internet or other VPC(Virtual Private Cloud), securely protecting the server.
  • Monitoring: You can view monitoring information such as the status of computing resources—including CPU, Memory, Disk, and GPU—through the Cloud Monitoring service.
  • Network Configuration Management: The server’s subnet/IP can be easily changed from the values set at initial creation. * NAT IP provides a management feature that lets you enable or disable it as needed.
  • Key Pair method: To ensure a secure OS access method, we provide a Key Pair method instead of ID/PW login.
  • Image Management: You can create and manage Custom Images, and it provides sharing functionality between projects.
  • ServiceWatch Service Integration Offering: You can monitor data through the ServiceWatch service.

Component

GPU Server provides GPUs, NVSwitch, and NVLink on top of virtualized computing resources.

caution
  • NVSwitch can only be enabled and used for instance types that allocate eight GPUs on a single GPU server.

Specifications by GPU Type

GPU (Graphic Processing Unit) performs the calculations needed to create images that compose the computer screen, and because it is specialized for parallel processing, it can handle large amounts of data quickly, processing large-scale parallel operations such as artificial intelligence (AI) and data analysis.

The following are the specifications of the GPU Types offered by the GPU Server service.

CategoryA100 TypeH100 TypeB300 Type
GPU ArchitectureNVIDIA AmpereNVIDIA HopperNVIDIA Blackwell Ultra
GPU Memory80 GiB80 GiB268 GiB
GPU Transistors54 billion 7N TSMC80 billion 4N TSMC208 billion 4NP TSMC
FP16 Tensor Core (Dense)312 TFLOPs989 TFLOPs2.25 PFLOPs
FP8 Tensor Core (Dense)Not supported1,979 TFLOPs4.5 PFLOPs
FP4 Tensor Core (Dense)UnsupportedNot supported13.5 PFLOPs
GPU Memory Bandwidth2,039 GB/s HBM2e3,352 GB/s HBM38 TB/s HBM3e
NVLink performanceNVLink 3NVLink 4NVLink 5
NVLink Signaling Rate25 GB/s (x12)25 GB/s (x18)50 GB/s (x18)
NVSwitch GPU-to-GPU bandwidth600 GB/s900 GB/s1.8 TB/s
Total NVSwitch aggregate bandwidth4.8 TB/s7.2 TB/s14.4 TB/s
Table. Specifications by GPU Type

Server type

The server types offered by the GPU Server are as follows. For detailed information about the server types provided by GPU Server, refer to GPU Server 서버 타입.

CategoryServer typeCPU vCoreMemory(GB)Number of GPUs
GPU-A100-1g1v16a1162341
GPU-A100-1g1v32a2324682
GPU-A100-1g1v64a4649364
GPU-A100-1g1v128a81281,8728
GPU-H100-2g2v12h1122341
GPU-H100-2g2v24h2244682
GPU-H100-2g2v48h4489364
GPU-H100-2g2v96h8961,8728
GPU-B300-3g3v16b1164801
GPU-B300-3g3v32b2329602
GPU-B300-3g3v64b4641,9204
GPU-B300-3g3v128b81283,8408
Table. GPU Server server type

OS and GPU driver version

The operating systems (OS) supported by the GPU Server are as follows. Note that GPUs of type B300 are supported only from a specific GPU version onward, so please be careful when selecting images.

OSOS versionGPU driver versionServer type classification
Ubuntu24.04580.126.20GPU-B300-3, GPU-H100-2, GPU-A100-1
Ubuntu24.04570.195.03GPU-H100-2, GPU-A100-1
Ubuntu22.04535.183.06GPU-H100-2, GPU-A100-1
RHEL9.6580.126.20GPU-B300-3, GPU-H100-2, GPU-A100-1
RHEL8.10580.126.20GPU-B300-3, GPU-H100-2, GPU-A100-1
RHEL8.10535.183.06GPU-H100-2, GPU-A100-1
Table. GPU Server OS and GPU driver version

Preceding Service

This is a service that must be installed in advance before creating this service. Please prepare by referring to the user guide provided in advance.

Service CategoryserviceDetailed description
NetworkingVPCA service that provides an isolated virtual network in a cloud environment
NetworkingSecurity GroupVirtual firewall that controls server traffic
Table. GPU Server Preliminary Service

3.1.1 - Server type

GPU Server server type

GPU servers are categorized by the GPU type they provide, and the GPU used in a GPU server is determined by the server type selected when creating the GPU server. Please select the server type based on the specifications of the application you want to run on the GPU server.

The server types supported by the GPU Server are as follows.

GPU-H100-2 g2v12h1
Category
exampleDetailed description
Server typeGPU-H100-2Provided server type classification
  • GPU-H100-2
    • GPU-H100 indicates the provided GPU type
    • 2 indicates the generation
  • GPU-A100-1
    • GPU-A100 indicates the provided GPU type
    • 1 indicates the generation
Server specificationsg2Provided server type classification and generation
  • g2
    • g means GPU server specification
    • 2 means generation
Server specificationsv12Number of vCores
  • v2: 2 virtual cores
Server specificationsh1GPU type and quantity
  • h1
    • h means GPU-H100
    • 1 means one GPU
  • a2
    • a means GPU-A100
    • 2 means two GPUs
Table. GPU Server server type format

g1 server type

The g1 server type is a GPU Server that uses the NVIDIA A100 Tensor Core GPU, suitable for high-performance applications.

  • Up to 8 NVIDIA A100 Tensor Core GPUs provided
  • Equipped with 6,912 CUDA cores and 432 Tensor cores per GPU
  • Supports up to 128 vCPUs and 1,920 GB of memory
  • Networking speed up to 40 Gbps
  • 600 GB/s GPU and NVIDIA NVSwitch P2P communication
CategoryServer typeGPUCPUMemoryGPU MemoryNetwork Bandwidth
GPU-A100-1g1v16a1116 vCore234 GB80 GiBMaximum 20 Gbps
GPU-A100-1g1v32a2232 vCore468 GB160 GiBUp to 20 Gbps
GPU-A100-1g1v64a4464 vCore936 GB320 GiBMaximum 40 Gbps
GPU-A100-1g1v128a88128 vCore1,872 GB640 GiBMaximum 40 Gbps
Table. GPU Server server type > GPU-A100-1 server type

g2 server type

The g2 server type is a GPU Server that uses the NVIDIA H100 Tensor Core GPU, making it suitable for high-performance applications.

  • Up to 8 NVIDIA H100 Tensor Core GPUs provided
  • Equipped with 16,896 CUDA cores and 528 Tensor cores per GPU
  • Supports up to 96 vCPUs and 1,920 GB of memory
  • Networking speed up to 40 Gbps
  • 900 GB/s GPU and NVIDIA NVSwitch P2P communication
CategoryServer typeGPUCPUMemoryGPU MemoryNetwork Bandwidth
GPU-H100-2g2v12h1112 vCore234 GB80 GiBUp to 20 Gbps
GPU-H100-2g2v24h2224 vCore468 GB160 GiBUp to 20 Gbps
GPU-H100-2g2v48h4448 vCore936 GB320 GiBMaximum 40 Gbps
GPU-H100-2g2v96h8896 vCore1,872 GB640 GiBMaximum 40 Gbps
Table. GPU Server server type > GPU-H100-2 server type

g3 server type

The g3 server type is a GPU Server that uses the NVIDIA B300 Tensor Core GPU, making it suitable for high-performance applications.

  • Up to 8 NVIDIA B300 Tensor Core GPUs provided
  • Equipped with 20,480 CUDA cores and 640 Tensor cores per GPU
  • Supports up to 128 vCPUs and 3,840 GB of memory.
  • Maximum 40 Gbps networking speed
  • 1.8 TB/s GPU and NVIDIA NVSwitch P2P communication
CategoryServer typeGPUCPUMemoryGPU MemoryNetwork Bandwidth
GPU-B300-3g3v16b1116 vCore480 GB268 GiBUp to 20 Gbps
GPU-B300-3g3v32b2232 vCore960 GB536 GiBUp to 20 Gbps
GPU-B300-3g3v64b4464 vCore1,920 GB1,072 GiBUp to 40 Gbps
GPU-B300-3g3v128b88128 vCore3,840 GB2,144 GiBMaximum 40 Gbps
Table. GPU Server server type > GPU-B300-3 server type

3.1.2 - Monitoring Metrics

Cloud Monitoring service termination notice

According to Samsung Cloud Platform’s policy, the Cloud Monitoring service is scheduled to be discontinued in September 2026.
Accordingly, after the September 2026 release, resource monitoring of the Samsung Cloud Platform via Cloud Monitoring will no longer be possible.

With the new alternative service, you can continuously perform resource monitoring by leveraging ServiceWatch released in October 2025.
ServiceWatch provides more modern and powerful features, replacing Cloud Monitoring to deliver a seamless monitoring environment.

If you are collecting metrics and logs through the Cloud Monitoring Agent, you need to switch to the ServiceWatch Agent.

For detailed information about ServiceWatch, please refer to ServiceWatch Overview.
Detailed information about ServiceWatch Agent can be found in the ServiceWatch Agent.

GPU Server Monitoring Metrics

The table below shows the monitoring metrics of the GPU server that can be viewed through Cloud Monitoring.

Even without installing the Agent, it provides basic monitoring metrics and the table below. Please check the GPU Server monitoring metrics (provided by default). Additionally, the metrics that can be viewed by installing the Agent are in the table. Please refer to the additional monitoring metrics for GPU Server (Agent installation required).

For detailed usage of Cloud Monitoring, refer to the Cloud Monitoring guide.

Performance Item NameExplanationunit
Memory Total [Basic]bytes of usable memorybytes
Memory Used [Basic]bytes of currently used memorybytes
Memory Swap In [Basic]bytes of the replaced memorybytes
Memory Swap Out [Basic]bytes of the replaced memorybytes
Memory Free [Basic]bytes of unused memorybytes
Disk Read Bytes [Basic]Read bytesbytes
Disk Read Requests [Basic]Number of read requestscnt
Disk Write Bytes [Basic]write bytesbytes
Disk Write Requests [Basic]Number of write requestscnt
CPU Usage [Basic]Average system CPU usage over 1 minute%
Instance State [Basic]Instance statusstate
Network In Bytes [Basic]Received bytesbytes
Network In Dropped [Basic]Incoming packet dropcnt
Network In Packets [Basic]Number of received packetscnt
Network Out Bytes [Basic]sent bytesbytes
Network Out Dropped [Basic]Transmit packet dropcnt
Network Out Packets [Basic]Number of transmitted packetscnt
Table. GPU Server Basic Monitoring Metrics (Provided by Default)
Performance Item NameExplanationunit
GPU CountNumber of GPUscnt
GPU Memory UsageMemory usage rate%
GPU Memory UsedMemory usageMB
GPU TemperatureGPU temperature
GPU Usageutilization%
GPU Usage [Avg]Overall average GPU utilization (%)%
GPU Power CapMaximum power capacity of the GPUW
GPU Power UsageCurrent GPU power usageW
GPU Memory Usage [Avg]GPU Memory Uti. AVG%
GPU Count in useNumber of GPUs in use by jobs on the nodecnt
Execution Status for nvidia-smiResult of running the nvidia-smi commandstatus
Core Usage [IO Wait]Ratio of CPU time spent in wait state (disk wait)%
Core Usage [System]Proportion of CPU time spent in kernel space%
Core Usage [User]Proportion of CPU time spent in user space%
CPU CoresNumber of CPU cores on the hostcnt
CPU Usage [Active]Percentage of CPU time used, excluding Idle and IOWait states%
CPU Usage [Idle]It is the proportion of CPU time spent in idle state.%
CPU Usage [IO Wait]The proportion of CPU time spent in a waiting state (disk wait).%
CPU Usage [System]Percentage of CPU time used by the kernel%
CPU Usage [User]Percentage of CPU time used in user space.%
CPU Usage/Core [Active]Percentage of CPU time used other than Idle and IOWait states%
CPU Usage/Core [Idle]It is the proportion of CPU time spent in idle state.%
CPU Usage/Core [IO Wait]This is the proportion of CPU time spent in a waiting state (disk wait).%
CPU Usage/Core [System]Percentage of CPU time used by the kernel%
CPU Usage/Core [User]Percentage of CPU time used in user space.%
Disk CPU Usage [IO Request]Proportion of CPU time during which I/O requests to the device were executed%
Disk Queue Size [Avg]The average queue length of requests executed for the device.num
Disk Read BytesThe number of bytes read per second from the device.bytes
Disk Read Bytes [Delta Avg]Average of system.diskio.read.bytes_delta for individual disksbytes
Disk Read Bytes [Delta Max]Maximum system.diskio.read.bytes_delta of individual disksbytes
Disk Read Bytes [Delta Min]Minimum system.diskio.read.bytes_delta of individual disksbytes
Disk Read Bytes [Delta Sum]Sum of the system.diskio.read.bytes_delta of individual disksbytes
Disk Read Bytes [Delta]Delta of the system.diskio.read.bytes value for each diskbytes
Disk Read Bytes [Success]Total number of bytes successfully read.bytes
Disk Read RequestsNumber of read requests to the disk device per secondcnt
Disk Read Requests [Delta Avg]Average of the system.diskio.read.count_delta for individual diskscnt
Disk Read Requests [Delta Max]Maximum system.diskio.read.count_delta for individual diskscnt
Disk Read Requests [Delta Min]Minimum of system.diskio.read.count_delta for individual diskscnt
Disk Read Requests [Delta Sum]Sum of system.diskio.read.count_delta for individual diskscnt
Disk Read Requests [Success Delta]Delta of system.diskio.read.count for each diskcnt
Disk Read Requests [Success]Total number of successful readscnt
Disk Request Size [Avg]The average size of requests executed on the device (unit: sectors).num
Disk Service Time [Avg]Average service time (milliseconds) of input requests executed on the device.ms
Disk Wait Time [Avg]Average time taken for requests executed on the supported device.ms
Disk Wait Time [Read]Average disk wait timems
Disk Wait Time [Write]Average disk wait timems
Disk Write Bytes [Delta Avg]Average of system.diskio.write.bytes_delta for each diskbytes
Disk Write Bytes [Delta Max]Maximum system.diskio.write.bytes_delta of individual disksbytes
Disk Write Bytes [Delta Min]Minimum of system.diskio.write.bytes_delta for individual disksbytes
Disk Write Bytes [Delta Sum]Sum of system.diskio.write.bytes_delta for individual disksbytes
Disk Write Bytes [Delta]Delta of the system.diskio.write.bytes value for each diskbytes
Disk Write Bytes [Success]Total number of bytes successfully written.bytes
Disk Write RequestsNumber of write requests to the disk device per secondcnt
Disk Write Requests [Delta Avg]Average of system.diskio.write.count_delta for individual diskscnt
Disk Write Requests [Delta Max]Maximum system.diskio.write.count_delta for individual diskscnt
Disk Write Requests [Delta Min]Minimum of system.diskio.write.count_delta for individual diskscnt
Disk Write Requests [Delta Sum]Sum of the system.diskio.write.count_delta of individual diskscnt
Disk Write Requests [Success Delta]Delta of system.diskio.write.count for each diskcnt
Disk Write Requests [Success]Total number of successful writescnt
Disk Writes BytesIt is the number of bytes per second written to the device.bytes
Filesystem Hang Checkfilesystem (local/NFS) hang check (normal:1, abnormal:0)status
Filesystem NodesIt is the total number of file nodes in the file system.cnt
Filesystem Nodes [Free]It is the total number of available file nodes in the file system.cnt
Filesystem Size [Available]Disk space (bytes) available to unauthorized usersbytes
Filesystem Size [Free]Available disk space (bytes)bytes
Filesystem Size [Total]Total disk space (bytes)bytes
Filesystem UsageUsed disk space percentage%
Filesystem Usage [Avg]Average of individual filesystem.used.pct values%
Filesystem Usage [Inode]inode usage%
Filesystem Usage [Max]Maximum among individual filesystem.used.pct%
Filesystem Usage [Min]minimum among individual filesystem.used.pct%
Filesystem Usage [Total]-%
Filesystem UsedUsed disk space (bytes)bytes
Filesystem Used [Inode]inode usagebytes
Memory FreeTotal amount of available memory (bytes).bytes
Memory Free [Actual]Actual usable memory (bytes).bytes
Memory Free [Swap]Available swap memory.bytes
Memory Totaltotal memorybytes
Memory Total [Swap]Total swap memory.bytes
Memory UsagePercentage of used memory%
Memory Usage [Actual]Percentage of memory actually used%
Memory Usage [Cache Swap]cached swap usage rate%
Memory Usage [Swap]Percentage of used swap memory%
Memory Usedused memorybytes
Memory Used [Actual]Actual memory used (bytes).bytes
Memory Used [Swap]Swap memory used.bytes
CollisionsNetwork collisioncnt
Network In BytesNumber of received bytesbytes
Network In Bytes [Delta Avg]Average of system.network.in.bytes_delta for individual networksbytes
Network In Bytes [Delta Max]Maximum of system.network.in.bytes_delta for each networkbytes
Network In Bytes [Delta Min]Minimum system.network.in.bytes_delta for each networkbytes
Network In Bytes [Delta Sum]Sum of system.network.in.bytes_delta for individual networksbytes
Network In Bytes [Delta]Delta of received byte countbytes
Network In DroppedNumber of deleted packets among incoming packetscnt
Network In ErrorsNumber of errors during receptioncnt
Network In PacketsNumber of received packetscnt
Network In Packets [Delta Avg]Average of system.network.in.packets_delta for each networkcnt
Network In Packets [Delta Max]Maximum of system.network.in.packets_delta for each networkcnt
Network In Packets [Delta Min]Minimum of system.network.in.packets_delta for individual networkscnt
Network In Packets [Delta Sum]Sum of system.network.in.packets_delta for individual networkscnt
Network In Packets [Delta]Delta of received packet countcnt
Network Out BytesNumber of transmitted bytesbytes
Network Out Bytes [Delta Avg]Average of system.network.out.bytes_delta for each networkbytes
Network Out Bytes [Delta Max]Maximum of system.network.out.bytes_delta for individual networksbytes
Network Out Bytes [Delta Min]Minimum of system.network.out.bytes_delta for individual networksbytes
Network Out Bytes [Delta Sum]Sum of system.network.out.bytes_delta for individual networksbytes
Network Out Bytes [Delta]Delta of transmitted byte countbytes
Network Out DroppedNumber of deleted packets among outgoing packets.cnt
Network Out ErrorsNumber of errors during transmissioncnt
Network Out PacketsNumber of transmitted packetscnt
Network Out Packets [Delta Avg]Average of system.network.out.packets_delta for each networkcnt
Network Out Packets [Delta Max]Maximum of system.network.out.packets_delta for each networkcnt
Network Out Packets [Delta Min]Minimum of system.network.out.packets_delta for each networkcnt
Network Out Packets [Delta Sum]Sum of system.network.out.packets_delta for individual networkscnt
Network Out Packets [Delta]Delta of transmitted packet countcnt
Open Connections [TCP]All open TCP connectionscnt
Open Connections [UDP]All open UDP connectionscnt
Port UsageAvailable port usage rate%
SYN Sent SocketsNumber of sockets in SYN_SENT state (when connecting from local to remote)cnt
Kernel PID Maxkernel.pid_max valuecnt
Kernel Thread Maxkernel.threads-max valuecnt
Process CPU UsagePercentage of CPU time consumed by the process since the last update.%
Process CPU Usage/CorePercentage of CPU time used by the process since the last event.%
Process Memory UsageProportion of main memory (RAM) occupied by a process%
Process Memory UsedResident Set size. The amount of memory a process occupies in RAM.bytes
Process PIDprocess pidPID
Process PPIDparent process PIDPID
Processes [Dead]Number of dead processescnt
Processes [Idle]Number of idle processescnt
Processes [Running]Number of running processescnt
Processes [Sleeping]Number of sleeping processescnt
Processes [Stopped]stopped processes countcnt
Processes [Total]Total number of processescnt
Processes [Unknown]Number of processes with an unsearchable or unknown statuscnt
Processes [Zombie]Zombie processes countcnt
Running Process Usageprocess usage rate%
Running ProcessesNumber of running processescnt
Running Thread UsageThread usage rate%
Running ThreadsTotal number of threads running in running processescnt
Context Switchescontext switch count (per second)cnt
Load/Core [1 min]The load over the last 1 minute divided by the number of corescnt
Load/Core [15 min]The load over the last 15 minutes divided by the number of corescnt
Load/Core [5 min]The load over the last 5 minutes divided by the number of corescnt
Multipaths [Active]External storage connection path status = active countcnt
Multipaths [Failed]External storage connection path status = failed countcnt
Multipaths [Faulty]External storage connection path status = faulty countcnt
NTP Offsetmeasured offset of the last sample (the time difference between the NTP server and the local environment)num
Run Queue LengthExecution queue lengthnum
UptimeOS uptime (milliseconds).ms
Context SwitchiesCPU context switch count (per second)cnt
Disk Read Bytes [Sec]Number of bytes read from a Windows logical disk in 1 secondcnt
Disk Read Time [Avg]Average data read time (seconds)sec
Disk Transfer Time [Avg]Disk average wait timesec
Disk UsageDisk usage%
Disk Write Bytes [Sec]Number of bytes written in one second on a Windows logical diskcnt
Disk Write Time [Avg]Average data write time (seconds)sec
Pagingfile UsagePaging file usage%
Pool Used [Non Paged]Nonpaged Pool usage in kernel memorybytes
Pool Used [Paged]Paged Pool usage in kernel memorybytes
Process [Running]Number of currently running processescnt
Threads [Running]Number of currently running threadscnt
Threads [Waiting]Number of threads waiting for processor timecnt
Table. Additional monitoring metrics for GPU Server (Agent installation required)

3.1.3 - ServiceWatch Metrics

The GPU Server sends metrics to ServiceWatch. The metrics provided by default monitoring are data collected at 5‑minute intervals. If detailed monitoring is enabled, you can view data collected at 1‑minute intervals.

information
  • The basic and detailed monitoring of the GPU Server are provided with the same metrics as the Virtual Server, and the namespace is also provided as Virtual Server.
  • GPU-related metrics are provided through ServiceWatch Agent, and for instructions on collecting metrics using ServiceWatch Agent, refer to the ServiceWatch Agent guide.
Reference
For how to view metrics in ServiceWatch, refer to the ServiceWatch guide.

Refer to How-to guides > ServiceWatch Detailed Monitoring Activation for how to enable detailed monitoring of the GPU Server.

Basic Metrics

The following are the basic metrics for the Virtual Server namespace.

The indicators whose names are displayed in bold below are the key indicators selected among the basic indicators provided by Virtual Server. The key metrics are used to build service dashboards that are automatically created for each service in ServiceWatch.

Each metric indicates through the user guide which statistical value is meaningful to view for that metric, and among the meaningful statistics, the statistical values shown in bold text are the primary statistics. In the service dashboard, you can view primary metrics using the primary statistical values.

Performance itemsDetailed descriptionunitmeaningful statistics
Instance StateInstance status display
  • 1 - Active
  • 0 - Off
None
  • Total
CPU UsageCPU usagePercent
  • Average
  • Maximum
  • Minimum
Disk Read BytesBytes read from block device (bytes)Bytes
  • Total
  • Average
  • Maximum
  • Minimum
Disk Read RequestsNumber of read requests on a block deviceCount
  • Total
  • Average
  • Maximum
  • Minimum
Disk Write BytesWrite capacity (bytes) on block deviceBytes
  • Total
  • Average
  • Maximum
  • Minimum
Disk Write RequestsNumber of write requests on block deviceCount
  • Total
  • Average
  • Maximum
  • Minimum
Network In BytesReceived bytes (capacity) on the network interfaceBytes
  • Total
  • Average
  • Maximum
  • Minimum
Network In DroppedNumber of packet drops received on the network interfaceCount
  • Total
  • Average
  • Maximum
  • Minimum
Network In PacketsNumber of packets received on the network interfaceCount
  • Total
  • Average
  • Maximum
  • Minimum
Network Out BytesData transmitted on the network interface (bytes)Bytes
  • Total
  • Average
  • Maximum
  • Minimum
Network Out DroppedNumber of packet drops transmitted from the network interfaceCount
  • Total
  • Average
  • Maximum
  • Minimum
Network Out PacketsNumber of packets transmitted on the network interfaceCount
  • Total
  • Average
  • Maximum
  • Minimum
Table. Virtual Server Basic Metrics

3.2 - How-to guides

Users can create the service by entering the required GPU Server information and selecting detailed options through the Samsung Cloud Platform Console.

Creating a GPU Server

You can create and use a GPU Server service from the Samsung Cloud Platform Console.

To create a GPU server, follow the steps below.

  1. Click the All Services > Compute > GPU Server menu. You will be taken to the Service Home page of GPU Server.

  2. On the Service Home page, click the GPU Server Creation button. You will be taken to the GPU Server Creation page.

  3. On the GPU Server Creation page, enter the information required to create the service and select detailed options.

    • Select the required information in the Image and Version Selection area.
      Category
      Required status
      Detailed description
      ImageRequiredSelect the type of Image provided
      • Standard: Samsung Cloud Platform standard provided Image
        • RHEL, Ubuntu
      • Custom: User-created Image
      • Kubernetes: Image for Kubernetes
        • Ubuntu
      Image versionRequiredSelect the version of the chosen Image
      • Provides a list of versions for the offered server Image
      Table. GPU Server image and version selection input fields
    • Service Information Input area, enter or select the required information.
      Category
      Required status
      Detailed description
      Number of serversRequiredNumber of GPU Server servers to create concurrently
      • Only numeric input is allowed, enter a value between 1 and 100
      Service Type > Server TypeRequiredGPU Server server type
      • Indicates the specifications of a GPU-type server, allowing selection of servers with 1, 2, 4, or 8 GPUs
      Service Type > Planned ComputeSelectionResource status with Planned Compute configured
      • In Use: Number of resources with Planned Compute that are currently in use
      • Configured: Number of resources with Planned Compute configured
      • Coverage Preview: Amount applied per resource by Planned Compute
      • Apply for Planned Compute Service: Navigate to the Planned Compute service application page
      Block StorageRequiredConfigure the Block Storage used by the GPU Server according to its purpose
      • Basic: The area where the OS is installed and used
        • Capacity can be entered in units (the minimum capacity varies depending on the OS image type)
          • RHEL: Values between 3 and 1,536 can be entered
          • Ubuntu: Values between 3 and 1,536 can be entered
        • SSD: High‑performance general volume
        • HDD: General volume
        • SSD/HDD_KMS: Additional encrypted volume using Samsung Cloud Platform KMS (Key Management System) encryption keys
          • Encryption can be applied only at initial creation (cannot be changed after creation)
          • Performance degradation occurs when using the SSD_KMS disk type
        • SSD_Provisioned: SSD volume with configurable IOPS and throughput
      • Additional: Used when the user needs extra space beyond the OS area
        • After selecting Use, enter the storage type and capacity
        • To add storage, click the + button (up to 25 can be added); to delete, click the x button
        • Capacity can be entered in units, with values between 1 and 1,536
          • Since 1 Unit equals 8 GB, this creates 8 GB to 12,288 GB
        • SSD: High‑performance general volume
        • HDD: General volume
        • SSD/HDD_KMS: Additional encrypted volume using Samsung Cloud Platform KMS (Key Management System) encryption keys
          • Encryption can be applied only at initial creation (cannot be changed after creation)
          • Performance degradation may occur when using the SSD_KMS disk type
        • HDD/SSD_MultiAttach: Volume that can be attached to two or more servers
        • SSD_Provisioned: SSD volume with configurable IOPS and throughput
      • Delete on termination: If Delete on Termination is set to Enabled, the volume is terminated together with the server
        • Volumes with existing snapshots are not deleted even if Delete on termination is set to Enabled
        • A multi‑attach volume can be deleted only when the server being removed is the last remaining server attached to the volume
      Max IOPSRequiredEnter a maximum IOPS value between 5,000~20,000
      • Can be set only when disk type is SSD_Provisioned
      Max ThroughputRequiredEnter the maximum Throughput value between 250~1,000
      • Disk type can be set only when it is SSD_Provisioned
      Table. GPU Server Service Configuration Items
    • In the Required Information Input area, enter or select the necessary information.
      Category
      required or not
      Detailed description
      Server nameRequiredEnter a name to distinguish the server when the selected number of servers is 1
      • Set the hostname using the entered server name
      • Enter within 63 characters using letters, numbers, spaces, and special characters (- _)
      Server name PrefixRequiredEnter a Prefix to distinguish each server generated when the selected number of servers is 2 or more
      • Automatically generated in the form of user input value (prefix) + ‘-#
      • Enter within 59 characters using letters, numbers, spaces, and special characters (-, _)
      Network Settings > Create New Network PortRequiredConfigure the network where the GPU Server will be installed
      • Select a pre‑created VPC.
      • General Subnet: Select a pre‑created general Subnet
        • IP can be set to auto‑generate or manual entry; if manual is chosen, the user can directly input the IP
        • NAT: Available only when there is a single server and the VPC is attached to an Internet Gateway. Checking Use enables selection of a NAT IP
        • NAT IP: Select a NAT IP
          • If no NAT IP is available, click the Create New button to generate a Public IP
          • Click the Refresh button to view and select the created Public IP
          • Creating a Public IP incurs charges according to the Public IP pricing policy
      • Local Subnet (optional): Choose Use for a local Subnet
        • It is not a required element for creating the service
        • A pre‑created local Subnet must be selected
        • IP can be set to auto‑generate or manual entry; selecting Manual allows the user to input the IP directly
        • Security Group: Settings required to access the server
          • Select: Choose a pre‑created Security Group
          • Create New: If no applicable Security Group exists, you can create one separately in the Security Group service
          • Up to 5 can be selected
          • If no Security Group is set, all connections are blocked by default
          • You must configure a Security Group to allow required connections
      Network Settings > Existing Network Port AssignmentRequiredSet the network where the GPU server will be installed
      • Select a pre-created VPC
      • General Subnet: Select a pre-created general Subnet and Port
        • NAT: Available only when there is a single server and the VPC is connected to an Internet Gateway. When you check to use it, you can select a NAT IP.
        • NAT IP: Select a NAT IP
          • If there is no NAT IP to select, click the Create New button to generate a Public IP
          • Click the Refresh button to view and select the created Public IP
      • Local Subnet (optional): Select Use for the local Subnet
        • Select a pre-created local Subnet and Port
      KeypairRequiredUser authentication methods to use when connecting to the server
      • New creation: Create a new keypair if one is needed
      • Default login accounts by OS
        • RHEL: cloud-user
        • Ubuntu: ubuntu
      Table. Required input fields for GPU Server
    • Enter or select the required information in the Additional Information Input area.
      Category
      Required
      Detailed description
      LockSelectionLock usage setting
      • When Lock is enabled, it prevents actions such as server termination, start, and stop from being executed, thereby avoiding malfunctions caused by mistakes
      Init scriptSelectionScript executed when the server starts
      • The init script must be written as a Batch script for Windows, a Shell script for Linux, or cloud‑init, depending on the image type.
      • Up to 45,000 bytes can be entered
      tagSelectionAdd Tag
      • Up to 50 can be added per resource
      • After clicking the Add Tag button, enter or select Key, Value values
      Table. GPU Server additional information input fields
  4. Summary Check the detailed information and estimated billing amount generated in the panel, and click the Create button.

    • Once creation is complete, check the created resources on the GPU Server List page.

Check GPU Server detailed information

GPU Server service allows you to view and edit the full resource list and detailed information. GPU Server Details page consists of Details, Tags, Job History tabs.

To view detailed information about the GPU Server service, follow these steps.

  1. Click the All Services > Compute > GPU Server menu. You will be taken to the Service Home page of GPU Server.
  2. On the Service Home page, click the GPU Server menu. You will be taken to the GPU Server List page.
  3. On the GPU Server List page, click the resource you want to view details for. You will be taken to the GPU Server Details page.
    • GPU Server Details page displays status information and additional feature information, and is composed of Details, Tags, Activity History tabs.
    • GPU Server Additional Features for detailed information, please refer to GPU Server Management Additional Features.
      CategoryDetailed description
      GPU Server statusStatus of user-created GPU Server
      • Build: State where the Build command has been received
      • Building: Build in progress
      • Networking: Server creation networking process
      • Scheduling: Server creation scheduling process
      • Block_Device_Mapping: Connecting Block Storage during server creation
      • Spawning: Server creation process is ongoing
      • Active: Available state
      • Powering_off: State when a stop request is made
      • Deleting: Server deletion in progress
      • Reboot_Started: Reboot in progress
      • Error: Error state
      • Migrating: Server migrating to another host
      • Reboot: State where the Reboot command has been received
      • Rebooting: Rebooting
      • Rebuild: State where the Rebuild command has been received
      • Rebuilding: State during Rebuild request
      • Rebuild_Spawning: Rebuild process is ongoing
      • Resize: State where the Resize command has been received
      • Resizing: Resizing in progress
      • Resize_Prep: State when a server type change is requested
      • Resize_Migrating: Server is migrating to another host while resizing
      • Resize_Migrated: Server has completed migration to another host during resizing
      • Resize_Finish: Resize completed
      • Revert_Resize: Resize or migration of the server failed for some reason. The target server is cleaned up and the original server is restarted
      • Shutoff: State when powering off is completed
      • Verity_Resize: After Resize_Prep following a server type change request, the server type is confirmed or can be reverted
      • Resize_Reverting: State when a server type revert is requested
      • Resize_Confirming: State confirming the server’s Resize request
      Server controlButtons to change server status
      • Start: start a stopped server
      • Stop: stop a running server
      • Restart: restart a running server
      Image generationCreate a custom user image from the current server image
      Console logView console logs of the current server
      • You can view the console logs output by the current server. For more details, see Check console logs.
      Create dumpGenerate a dump of the current server
      • The dump file is created inside the GPU Server
      • For detailed dump creation instructions, refer to Create Dump
      RebuildAll data and settings of the existing server are deleted, and a new server is configured
      Service terminationCancel service button
      Table. GPU Server status information and additional features
Notice
When using the mig feature, after the GPU Server’s Rebooting state has finished, you need to recheck the mig settings.

Detailed Information

GPU Server List page lets you view detailed information of the selected resource and edit it if needed.

CategoryDetailed description
serviceService name
Resource TypeResource Type
SRNUnique resource ID in Samsung Cloud Platform
  • In the GPU Server service, it refers to the GPU Server SRN
Resource nameResource Name
  • In the GPU Server service, it refers to the GPU Server name
Resource IDUnique resource ID in the service
constructorUser who created the service
Creation date and timeService creation date and time
editorUser who edited the service information
Modification dateDate and time the service information was modified
Server nameServer name
Server typevCPU, memory, GPU information display
  • If you need to change to a different server type, click the Edit button to configure
image nameService OS image and version
LockIndicates whether Lock is used or not
  • If you need to change the Lock attribute value, click the Edit button to set it
Keypair nameServer authentication information set by the user
Planned ComputeResource status with Planned Compute configured
LLM EndpointURL for using LLM
ServiceWatch Detailed MonitoringWhen enabled, data monitoring is possible in the ServiceWatch service
  • You can set the activation status by clicking the Edit button
NetworkNetwork information of the GPU Server
  • VPC name, standard Subnet name, IP, NAT IP, NAT IP status, Security Group name
  • If you need to change the NAT IP value, click the Edit button to configure
  • If you need to change the Security Group, click the Edit button to configure
  • Add as new network: select a standard Subnet and IP
    • You can select a different standard Subnet within the same VPC
    • IP can be either auto-generated or manually entered; if you choose manual entry, you can input the IP directly
  • Add using existing port: select a pre-created standard Subnet and port
Local SubnetLocal Subnet information of the GPU Server
  • Local Subnet name, Local Subnet IP, Security Group name
  • If you need to change the Security Group, you can configure it by clicking the Edit button
  • Add to New Network: select a local Subnet and IP
    • You can select a different local Subnet within the same VPC
    • IP can be Auto-generated or manually entered; selecting Input allows the user to directly enter the IP
  • Add Existing Port: select a pre-created local Subnet and port
Block StorageInformation of Block Storage attached to the server
  • Volume ID, Volume Name, Type, Capacity, Connection Info, Category, Delete on termination, Status
  • Add: Additional Block Storage can be attached if needed
  • Edit Delete on termination: Modify the Delete on termination value
  • More > Detach: Detach the selected Block Storage from the list
Table. GPU Server detailed information tab items
Caution
When using ServiceWatch detailed monitoring, additional fees apply.

tag

GPU Server List page allows you to view the tag information of the selected resource, and you can add, modify, or delete it.

CategoryDetailed description
Tag listTag list
  • You can view the Key and Value information of the tag
  • Up to 50 tags can be added per resource
  • When entering a tag, you can search and select from the list of previously created Keys and Values
Table. GPU Server Tag Tab Items

Job History

You can view the job history of the selected resource on the GPU Server List page.

CategoryDetailed description
Task History ListResource Change History
  • Operation Time, Resource ID, Resource Name, Operation Details, Event Topic, Operation Result, Check Operator Information
Table. Work History Tab Detailed Information Items

Control GPU Server Operation

If you need to control the operation of a created GPU Server resource, you can perform the task on the GPU Server List or GPU Server Details page. You can start, stop, and restart a running server.

Getting Started with GPU Server

You can start a shutoff GPU Server. To start a GPU Server, follow the steps below.

  1. Click the All Services > Compute > GPU Server menu. You will be taken to the Service Home page of the GPU Server.
  2. On the Service Home page, click the GPU Server menu. You will be taken to the GPU Server List page.
  3. On the GPU Server List page, click the resource you want to start among the shutoff servers, and navigate to the GPU Server Details page.
    • GPU Server List page allows you to Start each resource via the right More button.
    • After selecting multiple servers with checkboxes, you can control multiple servers simultaneously using the Start button at the top.
  4. GPU Server Details page, click the Start button at the top to start the server. In the Status Display section, verify the updated server status.
    • When the GPU Server startup is complete, the server status changes from Shutoff to Active.
    • For detailed information about the GPU Server status, refer to GPU Server detailed information.

Stopping the GPU Server

You can stop a running (Active) GPU Server. To stop the GPU Server, follow the steps below.

  1. Click the All Services > Compute > GPU Server menu. You will be taken to the Service Home page of GPU Server.
  2. On the Service Home page, click the GPU Server menu. You will be taken to the GPU Server List page.
  3. On the GPU Server List page, click the resource to stop among the servers that are running (Active), and navigate to the GPU Server Details page.
    • On the GPU Server List page, you can Stop each resource via the right More button.
    • After selecting multiple servers with checkboxes, you can control multiple servers simultaneously using the Stop button at the top.
  4. GPU Server Details page, click the Stop button at the top to start the server. Check the changed server status in the Status Display item.
    • When the GPU server shutdown is complete, the server status changes from Active to Shutoff.
    • For detailed information about the GPU Server status, please refer to GPU Server Detailed Information.

Restart GPU Server

You can restart the created GPU Server. To restart the GPU Server, follow the steps below.

  1. Click the All Services > Compute > GPU Server menu. You will be taken to the Service Home page of GPU Server.
  2. On the Service Home page, click the GPU Server menu. You will be taken to the GPU Server List page.
  3. On the GPU Server List page, click the resource to restart and go to the GPU Server Details page.
    • On the GPU Server list page, you can restart each resource using the right More button.
    • After selecting multiple servers with checkboxes, you can control multiple servers simultaneously using the Restart button at the top.
  4. GPU Server Details on the page, click the Restart button at the top to start the server. Check the updated server status in the Status Display field.
    • During a GPU Server restart, the server status goes through Rebooting and finally changes to Active.
    • For detailed information about the GPU Server status, refer to GPU Server detailed information.

GPU Server resource management

If you need server control and management functions for the created GPU Server resources, you can perform the tasks on the GPU Server Resource List or GPU Server Details page.

Create Image

You can create an image of a running GPU server.

Reference

This guide explains how to create a custom user image from the image of a running GPU server.

  • On the GPU Server List or GPU Server Details page, click the Create Image button to create a user Custom Image.

To create an image of the GPU Server, follow these steps.

  1. Click the All Services > Compute > GPU Server menu. Navigate to the Service Home page of the GPU Server.

  2. On the Service Home page, click the GPU Server menu. You will be taken to the GPU Server List page.

  3. On the GPU Server List page, click the resource to create an Image. You will be taken to the GPU Server Details page.

  4. Click the Create Image button on the GPU Server Details page. You will be taken to the Image Creation page.

    • Enter the required information in the Service Information Input area.
      Category
      Required status
      Detailed description
      image nameRequiredEnter the name of the image to be created
      • using English letters, numbers, spaces, and special characters (- _) within 200 characters
      Table. Image service information input fields
  5. Check the input information and click the Create button.

    • When creation is complete, check the created resources on the All Services > Compute > GPU Server > Image List page.
Notice
  • When you create an Image, the generated Image is stored in the Object Storage used as internal storage. Therefore, Object Storage usage fees are applied.
  • Since the file system of an image created from an active GPU server cannot be guaranteed to be intact, it is recommended to stop the server before creating the image.

Enabling detailed monitoring for ServiceWatch

By default, the GPU Server is linked to the basic monitoring of the ServiceWatch and Virtual Server namespaces. You can enable detailed monitoring as needed to identify operational issues more quickly and take action. For detailed information about ServiceWatch, see ServiceWatch Overview.

Note
The GPU Server provides basic and detailed monitoring in the same namespace as the Virtual Server. GPU Server’s GPU metrics will be provided by the ServiceWatch Agent. (Planned for December 2025)
Caution
Basic monitoring is provided free of charge, but enabling detailed monitoring incurs additional fees. Please be aware when using it.

To enable detailed ServiceWatch monitoring on the GPU Server, follow these steps.

  1. Click the All Services > Compute > GPU Server menu. You will be taken to the Service Home page of GPU Server.
  2. On the Service Home page, click the GPU Server menu. You will be taken to the GPU Server List page.
  3. On the GPU Server List page, click the resource to enable ServiceWatch detailed monitoring. You will be taken to the GPU Server Details page.
  4. On the GPU Server Details page, click the ServiceWatch detailed monitoring Edit button. You will be taken to the ServiceWatch Detailed Monitoring Edit popup.
  5. ServiceWatch Detailed Monitoring Edit In the popup window, select Enable, review the instructions, and click the Confirm button.
  6. On the GPU Server Details page, check the ServiceWatch detailed monitoring items.

Disable detailed monitoring of ServiceWatch

Caution
For cost efficiency, detailed monitoring needs to be disabled. Keep detailed monitoring enabled only when absolutely necessary, and disable it for the rest.

To disable detailed monitoring of ServiceWatch on the GPU Server, follow these steps.

  1. Click the All Services > Compute > GPU Server menu. You will be taken to the Service Home page of GPU Server.
  2. On the Service Home page, click the GPU Server menu. You will be taken to the GPU Server List page.
  3. GPU Server List page, click the resource to disable ServiceWatch detailed monitoring. Navigate to the GPU Server Details page.
  4. GPU Server Details page, click the ServiceWatch detailed monitoring Edit button. You will be taken to the ServiceWatch detailed monitoring Edit popup.
  5. ServiceWatch Detailed Monitoring Edit In the popup window, after deselecting Enabled, review the guidance message and click the Confirm button.
  6. On the GPU Server Details page, view the ServiceWatch detailed monitoring items.

GPU Server Management Additional Features

GPU Server can view Console logs, generate Dumps, and perform Rebuilds for server management. To view Console logs, generate Dumps, or Rebuild a GPU Server, follow the steps below.

Check console log

You can view the current console log of the GPU Server.

To view the console logs of the GPU server, follow these steps.

  1. Click the All Services > Compute > GPU Server menu. You will be taken to the GPU Server’s Service Home page.
  2. On the Service Home page, click the GPU Server menu. You will be taken to the GPU Server List page.
  3. On the GPU Server List page, click the resource to view the console log. You will be taken to the GPU Server Details page.
  4. On the GPU Server Details page, click the Console Log button. You will be taken to the Console Log popup.
  5. Console Log Verify the console log displayed in the popup window.

Create Dump

To create a dump file on the GPU Server, follow these steps.

  1. Click the All Services > Compute > GPU Server menu. You will be taken to the Service Home page of GPU Server.
  2. On the Service Home page, click the GPU Server menu. You will be taken to the GPU Server List page.
  3. GPU Server List page, click the resource to view detailed information. You will be taken to the GPU Server Details page.
  4. On the GPU Server Details page, click the Create Dump button.
    • The dump file is created inside the GPU server.

Perform Rebuild

You can delete all data and settings of the existing GPU Server and rebuild it on a new server.

Follow these steps to perform a Rebuild of the GPU Server.

  1. Click the All Services > Compute > GPU Server menu. You will be taken to the Service Home page of GPU Server.
  2. On the Service Home page, click the GPU Server menu. You will be taken to the GPU Server List page.
  3. GPU Server List page, click the resource to perform Rebuild. GPU Server Details page will be displayed.
  4. On the GPU Server Details page, click the Rebuild button.
    • During a GPU Server Rebuild, the server status changes to Rebuilding, and when the Rebuild is complete, it returns to its state before the Rebuild.
    • For detailed information about the GPU Server status, refer to Check GPU Server details.

Terminate GPU Server

If you terminate an unused GPU Server, you can reduce operating costs. However, terminating a GPU Server may cause the running service to stop immediately, so you should carefully consider the impact of service interruption before proceeding with the termination.

Caution
Please note that data cannot be recovered after terminating the service.

To cancel the GPU Server, follow the steps below.

  1. Click the All Services > Compute > GPU Server menu. Go to the GPU Server’s Service Home page.
  2. On the Service Home page, click the GPU Server menu. You will be taken to the GPU Server List page.
  3. On the GPU Server List page, select the resource to cancel and click the Cancel Service button.
    • The termination of attached storage depends on the Delete on termination setting, so refer to Termination constraints.
  4. After termination is complete, check on the GPU Server List page whether the resources have been terminated.

Cancellation constraints

When a GPU Server termination request cannot be processed, a popup will provide guidance. Please refer to the cases below.

Cancellation not possible
  • If File Storage is connected please disconnect the File Storage connection first.
  • When the LB Pool is connected, please disconnect the LB Pool connection first.
  • If Lock is set please change the Lock setting to disabled and try again.

Termination of attached storage depends on the Delete on termination setting.

Delete on termination setting-specific deletion
  • Whether the volume is deleted also depends on the Delete on termination setting.
    • Delete on termination If not set: Even if you terminate the GPU Server, the volume will not be deleted.
    • When Delete on termination is set: If you terminate the GPU Server, the associated volume will be deleted.
  • Volumes that have snapshots will not be deleted even if Delete on termination is set.
  • A Multi‑attach volume can be deleted only when the server being deleted is the last remaining server attached to the volume.

3.2.1 - Manage Image

Users can create the service by entering the required information for the Image service within the GPU Server service and selecting detailed options through the Samsung Cloud Platform Console.

Create Image

You can create an image of a running GPU Server. To create an image of a GPU Server, please refer to Image Creation.

Check Image detailed information

Image service allows you to view and edit the full resource list and detailed information. The Image Details page consists of Detailed Information, Tags, Operation History tabs.

To view detailed information of the Image service, follow these steps.

  1. Click the All Services > Compute > GPU Server menu. You will be taken to the Service Home page of GPU Server.
  2. On the Service Home page, click the Image menu. You will be taken to the Image list page.
  3. On the Image List page, click the resource to view detailed information. You will be taken to the Image Detail page.
    • Image Details page displays status information and additional feature information, and consists of Details, Tags, Activity Log tabs.
      CategoryDetailed description
      Image statusStatus of user-created Image
      • Active: Available state
      • Queued: Image has been uploaded and is waiting for processing after creation
      • Importing: Image has been uploaded and is currently being processed after creation
      Share with another accountImage can be shared with another Account
      • The Image’s Visibility must be set to Shared in order to be shared with another Account
      Delete imageButton to delete the Image
      • Once the Image is deleted, it cannot be restored
      Table. GPU Server Image status information and additional features

Detailed Information

Image list page lets you view detailed information of the selected resource and modify it if necessary.

CategoryDetailed description
serviceService name
Resource TypeResource Type
SRNUnique resource ID in Samsung Cloud Platform
  • refers to the SRN of a GPU Server Image
Resource nameImage name
Resource IDImage ID
constructorUser who created the Image
Creation date and timeImage creation timestamp
editorUser who edited the Image
Modification dateImage modification timestamp
image nameImage name
Minimum diskMinimum disk capacity (GB) of the Image
  • If you need to modify the minimum disk, click the Edit button to set it
Minimum RAMMinimum RAM size (GB) of the Image
OS typeOS type of the image
OS hash algorithmOS hash algorithm method
VisibilityDisplay access permissions for the image
  • Private can be used only within the project, and Shared can be shared across projects
ProtectedSelect whether image deletion is prohibited
  • Checking Use can prevent accidental deletion of images
  • This setting can be changed after the image is created
image file URLImage file URL uploaded when generating an image
  • GPU Server detail page does not display images created through the image generation menu
Sharing statusCurrent status of sharing images with another Account
  • Approved Account ID: ID of the Account for which sharing is approved
  • Modification date and time: The date and time when sharing was requested to another Account; if the sharing status changes from Pending to Accepted, it is updated to that date and time
  • Status: Approved status
    • Accepted: sharing is approved and active
    • Pending: awaiting approval
  • Stop sharing: sharing has been stopped
  • Select the Account ID to stop sharing from the list, then click the Stop sharing button at the top of the list to stop sharing all at once
Table. Image detailed information tab items

tag

On the Image List page, you can view the tag information of the selected resource and add, modify, or delete it.

CategoryDetailed description
Tag listTag list
  • You can view the Key and Value information of the tag
  • Up to 50 tags can be added per resource
  • When entering a tag, you can search and select from the list of previously created Keys and Values
Table. Image tag tab items

Job History

You can view the operation history of the selected resource on the Image List page.

CategoryDetailed description
Task History ListResource Change History
  • Operation Time, Resource ID, Resource Name, Operation Details, Event Topic, Operation Result, Check Operator Information
Table. GPU Server Image Job History Tab Detailed Information Items

Image Resource Management

Describes the control and management functions of the generated Image.

Share to another Account

To share an Image with another Account, follow the steps below.

  1. Log in to the account to be shared and click the All Services > Compute > GPU Server menu. Go to the GPU Server’s Service Home page.
  2. On the Service Home page, click the Image menu. You will be taken to the Image List page.
  3. On the Image List page, click the Image you want to control. You will be taken to the Image Details page.
  4. Click the Share to another Account button. Navigate to the Share image to another Account page.
    • Share with another Account feature allows you to share an Image with another Account. To share an Image with another Account, the Image’s Visibility must be Shared.
  5. Share image to another Account page, enter the required information, and click the Done button.
    Category
    Required
    Detailed description
    image name-Name of the image to share
    • Input not allowed
    Image ID-Shareable image ID
    • Input not allowed
    Shared Account IDRequiredEnter another Account ID to share
    • English letters, numbers, special characters- within 64 characters
    Table. Required input fields for sharing images to another Account
  6. You can view the information in the sharing status of the Image Details page.
    • When the request is first made, the status is Pending, and it changes to Accepted once approval is completed by the account receiving the share.
Notice
Only images created by uploading an image file from the current user can be shared with another Account. If you create a Custom Image from the image of a running GPU Server, it cannot be shared with another Account, and this feature will be provided in the future, so please note.

Receive sharing from another Account

To receive an Image shared from another Account, follow these steps.

  1. Log in to the account to be shared and click the All Services > Compute > GPU Server menu. Navigate to the GPU Server’s Service Home page.
  2. On the Service Home page, click the Image menu. You will be taken to the Image List page.
  3. On the Image List page, click the Receive Image Share button. You will be taken to the Receive Image Share popup.
  4. Receive Image Sharing In the popup window, enter the Image’s resource ID you want to receive, and click the Confirm button.
  5. When image sharing is complete, you can view the shared Image in the Image list.

Delete Image

You can delete unused Images. However, since an Image cannot be recovered after deletion, you should carefully consider the impact before performing the deletion.

Caution
Please note that data cannot be recovered after deleting the service.

To delete the Image, follow these steps.

  1. Click the All Services > Compute > GPU Server menu. Go to the GPU Server’s Service Home page.
  2. On the Service Home page, click the Image menu. You will be taken to the Image List page.
  3. Image list page, select the resource to delete, and click the Delete button.
    • On the Image List page, select multiple Image check boxes and click the Delete button at the top of the resource list.
  4. After deletion is complete, verify on the Image list page that the resource has been removed.

3.2.2 - Manage Keypair

Users can create the service by entering the required Keypair information within the GPU Server service and selecting detailed options through the Samsung Cloud Platform Console.

Create a Keypair

You can create and use the Keypair service while using the GPU Server service in the Samsung Cloud Platform Console.

To create a keypair, follow these steps.

  1. Click the All Services > Compute > GPU Server menu. You will be taken to the Service Home page of GPU Server.
  2. On the Service Home page, click the Keypair menu. You will be taken to the Keypair List page.
  3. On the Keypair List page, click the Keypair Create button. You will be taken to the Keypair Create page.
    • Enter the required information in the Service Information Input area.
      Category
      Required
      Detailed description
      Keypair nameRequiredEnter the name of the Keypair to create
      • using English letters, numbers, spaces, and special characters (-, _) within 255 characters
      Keypair typeRequiredssh
      Table. Keypair service information input fields
    • Additional Information Input area, please enter or select the required information.
      Category
      Required status
      Detailed description
      tagSelectionAdd Tag
      • Up to 50 can be added per resource
      • After clicking the Add Tag button, enter or select Key, Value values
      Table. Keypair additional information input fields
      Caution
      • After creation is complete, you can download the Key only once. Since reissuance is not possible, make sure it has been downloaded.
      • Store the downloaded Private Key in a safe place.
  4. Check the input information and click the Create button.
    • After creation is complete, check the created resources on the Keypair List page.

View detailed information of the Keypair

The Keypair service allows you to view and edit the full resource list and detailed information. Keypair Details page consists of Details, Tags, Activity Log tabs.

To view detailed information about a keypair, follow these steps.

  1. Click the All Services > Compute > GPU Server menu. You will be taken to the Service Home page of GPU Server.
  2. On the Service Home page, click the Keypair menu. You will be taken to the Keypair List page.
  3. On the Keypair List page, click the resource to view its details. You will be taken to the Keypair Details page.
    • Keypair Details page displays status information and additional feature information, and consists of Details, Tags, Activity Log tabs.

Detailed Information

Keypair List page allows you to view detailed information of the selected resource and edit the information if needed.

CategoryDetailed description
serviceService name
Resource TypeResource Type
SRNUnique resource ID in Samsung Cloud Platform
  • In Keypair, it refers to the Keypair SRN
Resource nameKeypair name
Resource IDKeypair’s unique resource ID
constructorUser who created the keypair
Creation date and timeKeypair creation timestamp
editorUser who modified the keypair information
Modification dateDate and time the keypair information was modified
Keypair nameKeypair name
FingerprintA unique value for identifying the key
User IDUser ID of the keypair creator
public keyPublic key information
Table. Keypair detailed information tab items

tag

On the Keypair List page, you can view the tag information of the selected resource, and add, modify, or delete it.

CategoryDetailed description
Tag listTag list
  • You can view the Key and Value information of the tag
  • Up to 50 tags can be added per resource
  • When entering a tag, you can search and select from the list of previously created Keys and Values
Table. Keypair Tag Tab Items

Job History

On the Keypair List page, you can view the operation history of the selected resource.

CategoryDetailed description
Task History ListResource Change History
  • Operation Time, Resource ID, Resource Name, Operation Details, Event Topic, Operation Result, Check operator information
Table. Keypair operation history tab detailed information items

Keypair Resource Management

Describes the control and management functions of a keypair.

Get public key

To retrieve the public key, follow these steps.

  1. Click the All Services > Compute > GPU Server menu. You will be taken to the Service Home page of GPU Server.

  2. On the Service Home page, click the Keypair menu. You will be taken to the Keypair List page.

  3. On the Keypair List page, click the More button at the top and then click the Import Public Key button. You will be taken to the Import Public Key page.

    • Enter or select the required information in the Required Information Input area.
      Category
      Required
      Detailed description
      Keypair nameRequiredName of the Keypair to create
      Keypair typeRequiredssh
      public keyRequiredEnter public key
      • Load file: Select the Attach file button to attach the public key file
        • Only files with the following extension (.pem) can be attached
      • Enter public key: Paste the copied public key value
        • The public key value can be copied from the Keypair Details page
      Table. Required input fields for retrieving the public key
  4. Review the entered information and click the Complete button.

    • Once creation is complete, check the created resources on the Keypair List page.

Delete Keypair

You can delete unused Keypairs. However, once a Keypair is deleted it cannot be recovered, so please review the impact thoroughly beforehand before proceeding with deletion.

Caution
Please note that data cannot be recovered after deleting the service.

To delete a keypair, follow these steps.

  1. Click the All Services > Compute > GPU Server menu. Go to the Service Home page of GPU Server.
  2. On the Service Home page, click the Keypair menu. You will be taken to the Keypair List page.
  3. On the Keypair List page, select the resource to delete, and click the Delete button.
  • On the Keypair List page, select multiple Keypair check boxes and click the Delete button at the top of the resource list.
  1. After deletion is complete, check the Keypair List page to confirm that the resource has been removed.

3.2.3 - Use Multi-instance GPU on GPU Server

After creating a GPU Server, you can enable the MIG (Multi-instance GPU) feature on the GPU Server’s VM (Guest OS) and create an instance for use.

NVIDIA Multi-instance GPU Introduction

NVIDIA Multi-instance GPU (hereafter referred to as MIG) supports safely partitioning a GPU into GPU instances and running CUDA applications starting with the NVIDIA Ampere architecture. Through this, multiple users can each utilize different GPU resources to achieve optimal GPU utilization. This feature is especially useful for workloads that do not fully utilize the GPU’s computing capacity, and users can run multiple workloads in parallel to maximize utilization.

Using Multi-instance GPU feature

To use the MIG feature, create an NVIDIA GPU Server on the Samsung Cloud Platform, then enable and disable MIG. The order of applying and removing MIG is as follows.

MIG application order
Enable MIG → Create GPU Instance → Create Compute Instance → Use MIG
MIG release order
Delete Compute Instance → Delete GPU Instance → Disable MIG feature (deactivate)
Reference
  • MIG can be used on Samsung Cloud Platform’s next-generation GPU Server or MNGC (Multi-node GPU Cluster).
  • For system requirements to use MIG, refer to the NVIDIA Multi-Instance GPU User Guide.

Applying and Using MIG

After activating the MIG and creating an Instance to assign tasks, the tasks proceed in the following order.

MIG application order
Enable MIG → Create GPU Instance → Create Compute Instance → Use MIG
Note
The example of applying MIG is explained based on an A100 GPU server.

Activate MIG

  1. Check the GPU status on the VM Instance (GuestOS) before applying MIG.

    • Check whether MIG mode is Disabled.
      Color mode
      $ nvidia-smi
      Mon Sep 27 08:37:08 2021
      +-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
      | NVIDIA-SMI 470.57.02    Driver Version: 470.57.02    CUDA Version: 11.4 |
      | -------------------------------+----------------------+---------------------- |
      | GPU  Name        Persistence-M | Bus-Id        Disp.A | Volatile Uncorr. ECC |
      | Fan  Temp  Perf  Pwr:Usage/Cap | Memory-Usage | GPU-Util  Compute M. |
      |  |  | MIG M. |
      | ===============================+======================+====================== |
      | 0  NVDIA A100-SXM...  Off | 00000000:05:00.0 Off | 0 |
      | N/A   32C   P0    59W / 400W | 0MiB / 81251MiB | 0%      Default |
      |  |  | Disabled |
      +-------------------------------+----------------------+----------------------+
      
      +-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
      | Processes: |
      | GPU   GI   CI       PID   Type   Process name                   GPU Memory |
      | ID   ID                                                   Usage |
      | ============================================================================= |
      | No running processes found |
      +-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
      $ nvidia-smi
      Mon Sep 27 08:37:08 2021
      +-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
      | NVIDIA-SMI 470.57.02    Driver Version: 470.57.02    CUDA Version: 11.4 |
      | -------------------------------+----------------------+---------------------- |
      | GPU  Name        Persistence-M | Bus-Id        Disp.A | Volatile Uncorr. ECC |
      | Fan  Temp  Perf  Pwr:Usage/Cap | Memory-Usage | GPU-Util  Compute M. |
      |  |  | MIG M. |
      | ===============================+======================+====================== |
      | 0  NVDIA A100-SXM...  Off | 00000000:05:00.0 Off | 0 |
      | N/A   32C   P0    59W / 400W | 0MiB / 81251MiB | 0%      Default |
      |  |  | Disabled |
      +-------------------------------+----------------------+----------------------+
      
      +-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
      | Processes: |
      | GPU   GI   CI       PID   Type   Process name                   GPU Memory |
      | ID   ID                                                   Usage |
      | ============================================================================= |
      | No running processes found |
      +-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
      Code block. nvidia-smi command - Check GPU disabled status (1)
      Color mode
      $ nvidia-smi –L
      GPU 0: NVIDIA A100-SXM-80GB (UUID: GPU-c956838f-494a-92b2-6818-56eb28fe25e0)
      $ nvidia-smi –L
      GPU 0: NVIDIA A100-SXM-80GB (UUID: GPU-c956838f-494a-92b2-6818-56eb28fe25e0)
      Code block. nvidia-smi command - Check GPU disabled status (2)
  2. Enable MIG (Enable) for each GPU on the VM Instance (GuestOS) and reboot the VM Instance.

    Color mode
    $ nvidia-smi –I 0 –mig 1
    Enabled MIG mode for GPU 00000000:05:00.0
    All done.
    
    # reboot
    $ nvidia-smi –I 0 –mig 1
    Enabled MIG mode for GPU 00000000:05:00.0
    All done.
    
    # reboot
    Code block. nvidia-smi command - enable MIG

Reference

When using a GPU and configuring MIG, you may encounter the following warning message. If the warning appears, check whether any programs are running on the GPU.

Warning: MIG mode is in pending enable state for GPU 00000000:05:00.0: In use by another client. 00000000:05:00.0 is currently being used by one or more other processes (e.g. CUDA application or a monitoring application such as another instance of nvidia-smi).
  1. Check the GPU status after applying MIG on the VM Instance(GuestOS).
    • Check whether MIG mode is Enabled.
      Color mode
      $ nvidia-smi
      Mon Sep 27 09:44:33 2021
      +-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
      | NVIDIA-SMI 470.57.02    Driver Version: 470.57.02    CUDA Version: 11.4 |
      | -------------------------------+----------------------+---------------------- |
      | GPU  Name        Persistence-M | Bus-Id        Disp.A | Volatile Uncorr. ECC |
      | Fan  Temp  Perf  Pwr:Usage/Cap | Memory-Usage | GPU-Util  Compute M. |
      |  |  | MIG M. |
      | ===============================+======================+====================== |
      | 0  NVDIA A100-SXM...  Off | 00000000:05:00.0 Off | On |
      | N/A   32C   P0    59W / 400W | 0MiB / 81251MiB | 0%      Default |
      |  |  | Enabled |
      +-------------------------------+----------------------+----------------------+
      +-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
      | MIG devices: |
      +-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
      | GPU  GI  CI  MIG | Memory-Usage | Vol | Shared |
      | ID  ID  Dev | BAR1-Usage | SM     Unc | CE  ENC  DEC  OFA  JPG |
      |  |  | ECC |  |
      | ============================================================================= |
      | No MIG devices found |
      +-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
      +-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
      | Processes: |
      | GPU   GI   CI       PID   Type   Process name                   GPU Memory |
      | ID   ID                                                   Usage |
      | ============================================================================= |
      | No running processes found |
      +-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
      $ nvidia-smi
      Mon Sep 27 09:44:33 2021
      +-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
      | NVIDIA-SMI 470.57.02    Driver Version: 470.57.02    CUDA Version: 11.4 |
      | -------------------------------+----------------------+---------------------- |
      | GPU  Name        Persistence-M | Bus-Id        Disp.A | Volatile Uncorr. ECC |
      | Fan  Temp  Perf  Pwr:Usage/Cap | Memory-Usage | GPU-Util  Compute M. |
      |  |  | MIG M. |
      | ===============================+======================+====================== |
      | 0  NVDIA A100-SXM...  Off | 00000000:05:00.0 Off | On |
      | N/A   32C   P0    59W / 400W | 0MiB / 81251MiB | 0%      Default |
      |  |  | Enabled |
      +-------------------------------+----------------------+----------------------+
      +-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
      | MIG devices: |
      +-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
      | GPU  GI  CI  MIG | Memory-Usage | Vol | Shared |
      | ID  ID  Dev | BAR1-Usage | SM     Unc | CE  ENC  DEC  OFA  JPG |
      |  |  | ECC |  |
      | ============================================================================= |
      | No MIG devices found |
      +-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
      +-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
      | Processes: |
      | GPU   GI   CI       PID   Type   Process name                   GPU Memory |
      | ID   ID                                                   Usage |
      | ============================================================================= |
      | No running processes found |
      +-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
      Code block. nvidia-smi command - Check GPU activation status (1)
      Color mode
      $ nvidia-smi –L
      GPU 0: NVIDIA A100-SXM-80GB (UUID: GPU-c956838f-494a-92b2-6818-56eb28fe25e0)
      $ nvidia-smi –L
      GPU 0: NVIDIA A100-SXM-80GB (UUID: GPU-c956838f-494a-92b2-6818-56eb28fe25e0)
      Code block. nvidia-smi command - Check GPU activation status (2)

GPU Instance creation

If you have enabled MIG and verified its status, you can create a GPU Instance.

  1. Check the list of MIG GPU Instance profiles that can be created.
    Color mode
    $ nvidia-smi mig -i [GPU ID] -lgip
    $ nvidia-smi mig -i [GPU ID] -lgip
    Code block. nvidia-smi command - view MIG GPU Instance profile list
Color mode
$ nvidia-smi mig -i 0 -lgip
+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
| GPU instance profiles: |
| GPU   Name             ID    Instances   Memory     P2P    SM    DEC   ENC |
| Free/Total   GiB              CE    JPEG  OFA |
| ============================================================================= |
| 0 MIG 1g.10gb        19    7/7         9.50       No     14     0     0 |
| 1     0     0 |
+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
| 0 MIG 1g.10gb+me     20    1/1         9.50       No     14     0     0 |
| 1     1     1 |
+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
| 0 MIG 2g.20gb        14    3/3         19.50      No     28     1     0 |
| 2     0     0 |
+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
| 0 MIG 3g.40gb         9    2/2         39.50      No     42     2     0 |
| 3     0     0 |
+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
| 0 MIG 4g.40gb         5    1/1         39.50      No     56     2     0 |
| 4     0     0 |
+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
| 0 MIG 7g.80gb         0    1/1         79.25      No     98     0     0 |
| 7     1     1 |
+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
$ nvidia-smi mig -i 0 -lgip
+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
| GPU instance profiles: |
| GPU   Name             ID    Instances   Memory     P2P    SM    DEC   ENC |
| Free/Total   GiB              CE    JPEG  OFA |
| ============================================================================= |
| 0 MIG 1g.10gb        19    7/7         9.50       No     14     0     0 |
| 1     0     0 |
+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
| 0 MIG 1g.10gb+me     20    1/1         9.50       No     14     0     0 |
| 1     1     1 |
+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
| 0 MIG 2g.20gb        14    3/3         19.50      No     28     1     0 |
| 2     0     0 |
+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
| 0 MIG 3g.40gb         9    2/2         39.50      No     42     2     0 |
| 3     0     0 |
+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
| 0 MIG 4g.40gb         5    1/1         39.50      No     56     2     0 |
| 4     0     0 |
+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
| 0 MIG 7g.80gb         0    1/1         79.25      No     98     0     0 |
| 7     1     1 |
+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
Code block. MIG GPU Instance profile list
Reference
Refer to the NVIDIA Multi-Instance GPU User Guide for GPU Instance profiles.
  1. After creating a MIG GPU Instance, check it.
    • Create GPU Instance

      Color mode
      $ nvidia-smi mig -i [GPU ID] -cgi [Profile ID]
      $ nvidia-smi mig -i [GPU ID] -cgi [Profile ID]
      code block. nvidia-smi command - GPU Instance creation
      Color mode
      $ nvidia-smi mig -i 0 -cgi 0
      Successfully created GPU instance ID 0 on GPU 0 using profile MIG 7g.80gb (ID 0)
      $ nvidia-smi mig -i 0 -cgi 0
      Successfully created GPU instance ID 0 on GPU 0 using profile MIG 7g.80gb (ID 0)
      Code block. nvidia-smi command - Example of creating a GPU Instance

    • Check GPU Instance

      Color mode
      $ nvidia-smi mig -i [GPU ID] -lgi
      $ nvidia-smi mig -i [GPU ID] -lgi
      code block. nvidia-smi command - check GPU Instance
      Color mode
      $ nvidia-smi mig -i 0 -lgi
      +--------------------------------------------------------+
      | GPU instances: |
      | GPU   Name               Profile  Instance  Placement |
      | ID       ID      Start:Size |
      | ======================================================== |
      | 0  MIG 7g.80gb            0        0         0:8 |
      +--------------------------------------------------------+
      $ nvidia-smi mig -i 0 -lgi
      +--------------------------------------------------------+
      | GPU instances: |
      | GPU   Name               Profile  Instance  Placement |
      | ID       ID      Start:Size |
      | ======================================================== |
      | 0  MIG 7g.80gb            0        0         0:8 |
      +--------------------------------------------------------+
      Code block. nvidia-smi command - example of checking GPU Instance

Compute Instance creation

If you have created a GPU Instance, you can create a Compute Instance.

  1. Check the MIG Compute Instance profiles you can create.

    Color mode
    $ nvidia-smi mig -i [GPU ID] -gi [GPU Instance ID] -lcip
    $ nvidia-smi mig -i [GPU ID] -gi [GPU Instance ID] -lcip
    Code block. nvidia-smi command - Check MIG Compute Instance profile
    Color mode
    $ nvidia-smi mig -i 0 -gi 0 -lcip
    +---------------------------------------------------------------------------------+
    | Compute instance profiles: |
    | GPU     GPU     Name            Profile  Instances   Exclusive      Shared |
    | GPU   Instance                     ID    Free/Total     SM       DEC  ENC  OFA |
    | ID                                                       CE   JPEG |
    | ================================================================================= |
    | 0      0      MIG 1c.7g.80gb     0      7/5           14       5    0    1 |
    | 7    1 |
    +---------------------------------------------------------------------------------+
    | 0      0      MIG 2c.7g.80gb     1      3/3           28       5    0    1 |
    | 7    1 |
    +---------------------------------------------------------------------------------+
    | 0      0      MIG 3c.7g.80gb     2      2/2           42       5    0    1 |
    | 7    1 |
    +---------------------------------------------------------------------------------+
    | 0      0      MIG 4c.7g.80gb     3      1/1           56       5    0    1 |
    | 7    1 |
    +---------------------------------------------------------------------------------+
    | 0      0      MIG 7g.80gb        4*     1/1           98       5    0    1 |
    | 7    1 |
    +---------------------------------------------------------------------------------+
    $ nvidia-smi mig -i 0 -gi 0 -lcip
    +---------------------------------------------------------------------------------+
    | Compute instance profiles: |
    | GPU     GPU     Name            Profile  Instances   Exclusive      Shared |
    | GPU   Instance                     ID    Free/Total     SM       DEC  ENC  OFA |
    | ID                                                       CE   JPEG |
    | ================================================================================= |
    | 0      0      MIG 1c.7g.80gb     0      7/5           14       5    0    1 |
    | 7    1 |
    +---------------------------------------------------------------------------------+
    | 0      0      MIG 2c.7g.80gb     1      3/3           28       5    0    1 |
    | 7    1 |
    +---------------------------------------------------------------------------------+
    | 0      0      MIG 3c.7g.80gb     2      2/2           42       5    0    1 |
    | 7    1 |
    +---------------------------------------------------------------------------------+
    | 0      0      MIG 4c.7g.80gb     3      1/1           56       5    0    1 |
    | 7    1 |
    +---------------------------------------------------------------------------------+
    | 0      0      MIG 7g.80gb        4*     1/1           98       5    0    1 |
    | 7    1 |
    +---------------------------------------------------------------------------------+
    Code block. Example of MIG Compute Instance profile list

  2. Create and verify a MIG Compute Instance.

    • MIG Compute Instance creation
      Color mode
      $ nvidia-smi mig -i [GPU ID] -gi [GPU Instance ID] -cci [Compute Profile ID]
      $ nvidia-smi mig -i [GPU ID] -gi [GPU Instance ID] -cci [Compute Profile ID]
      code block. nvidia-smi command - Create MIG Compute Instance
      Color mode
      $ nvidia-smi mig -i 0 -gi 0 -cci 4
      Successfully created compute instance ID 0 on GPU instance ID 0 using profile MIG 7g.80gb(ID 4)
      $ nvidia-smi mig -i 0 -gi 0 -cci 4
      Successfully created compute instance ID 0 on GPU instance ID 0 using profile MIG 7g.80gb(ID 4)
      Code block. nvidia-smi command - Example of creating a MIG Compute Instance
    • Check MIG Compute Instance
      Color mode
      $ nvidia-smi mig -i [GPU ID] -gi [GPU Instance ID] –lci
      $ nvidia-smi mig -i [GPU ID] -gi [GPU Instance ID] –lci
      code block. nvidia-smi command - check MIG Compute Instance
      Color mode
      $ nvidia-smi mig -i 0 -gi 0 –lci
      +-----------------------------------------------------------------+
      | Compute instance profiles: |
      | GPU     GPU     Name            Profile  Instances   Placement |
      | GPU   Instance                     ID      ID        Start:Size |
      | ID |
      | ================================================================= |
      | 0      0      MIG 7g.80gb         4       0            0:7 |
      +-----------------------------------------------------------------+
      $ nvidia-smi mig -i 0 -gi 0 –lci
      +-----------------------------------------------------------------+
      | Compute instance profiles: |
      | GPU     GPU     Name            Profile  Instances   Placement |
      | GPU   Instance                     ID      ID        Start:Size |
      | ID |
      | ================================================================= |
      | 0      0      MIG 7g.80gb         4       0            0:7 |
      +-----------------------------------------------------------------+
      Code block. Example of checking MIG Compute Instance
      Color mode
      $ nvidia-smi –L
      GPU 0: NVIDIA A100-SXM-80GB (UUID: GPU-c956838f-494a-92b2-6818-56eb28fe25e0)
        MIG 7g.80gb     Device  0: (UUID: MIG-53e20040-758b-5ecb-948e-c626d03a9a32)
      $ nvidia-smi –L
      GPU 0: NVIDIA A100-SXM-80GB (UUID: GPU-c956838f-494a-92b2-6818-56eb28fe25e0)
        MIG 7g.80gb     Device  0: (UUID: MIG-53e20040-758b-5ecb-948e-c626d03a9a32)
      Code block. nvidia-smi command - Check GPU status (1)
      Color mode
      $ nvidia-smi
      Mon Sep 27 09:52:17 2021
      +-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
      | NVIDIA-SMI 470.57.02    Driver Version: 470.57.02    CUDA Version: 11.4 |
      | -------------------------------+----------------------+---------------------- |
      | GPU  Name        Persistence-M | Bus-Id        Disp.A | Volatile Uncorr. ECC |
      | Fan  Temp  Perf  Pwr:Usage/Cap | Memory-Usage | GPU-Util  Compute M. |
      |  |  | MIG M. |
      | ===============================+======================+====================== |
      | 0  NVDIA A100-SXM...  Off | 00000000:05:00.0 Off | On |
      | N/A   32C   P0    49W / 400W | 0MiB / 81251MiB | N/A      Default |
      |  |  | Enabled |
      +-------------------------------+----------------------+----------------------+
      
      +-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
      | MIG devices: |
      +-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
      | GPU  GI  CI  MIG | Memory-Usage | Vol | Shared |
      | ID  ID  Dev | BAR1-Usage | SM     Unc | CE  ENC  DEC  OFA  JPG |
      |  |  | ECC |  |
      | ============================================================================= |
      | 0    0   0    0 | 0MiB / 81251MiB | 98      0 | 7   0    5    1    1 |
      |  | 1MiB / 13107... |  |  |
      +-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
      +-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
      | Processes: |
      | GPU   GI   CI       PID   Type   Process name                   GPU Memory |
      | ID   ID                                                   Usage |
      | ============================================================================= |
      | No running processes found |
      +-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
      $ nvidia-smi
      Mon Sep 27 09:52:17 2021
      +-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
      | NVIDIA-SMI 470.57.02    Driver Version: 470.57.02    CUDA Version: 11.4 |
      | -------------------------------+----------------------+---------------------- |
      | GPU  Name        Persistence-M | Bus-Id        Disp.A | Volatile Uncorr. ECC |
      | Fan  Temp  Perf  Pwr:Usage/Cap | Memory-Usage | GPU-Util  Compute M. |
      |  |  | MIG M. |
      | ===============================+======================+====================== |
      | 0  NVDIA A100-SXM...  Off | 00000000:05:00.0 Off | On |
      | N/A   32C   P0    49W / 400W | 0MiB / 81251MiB | N/A      Default |
      |  |  | Enabled |
      +-------------------------------+----------------------+----------------------+
      
      +-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
      | MIG devices: |
      +-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
      | GPU  GI  CI  MIG | Memory-Usage | Vol | Shared |
      | ID  ID  Dev | BAR1-Usage | SM     Unc | CE  ENC  DEC  OFA  JPG |
      |  |  | ECC |  |
      | ============================================================================= |
      | 0    0   0    0 | 0MiB / 81251MiB | 98      0 | 7   0    5    1    1 |
      |  | 1MiB / 13107... |  |  |
      +-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
      +-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
      | Processes: |
      | GPU   GI   CI       PID   Type   Process name                   GPU Memory |
      | ID   ID                                                   Usage |
      | ============================================================================= |
      | No running processes found |
      +-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
      Code block. nvidia-smi command - Check GPU status (2)

Using MIG

  1. Use the MIG Instance to perform the Job.
    • Example of task execution
      Color mode
      $ docker run --gpus '"device=[GPU ID]:[MIG ID]"' -rm nvcr.io/nvidia/cuda nvidia-smi
      $ docker run --gpus '"device=[GPU ID]:[MIG ID]"' -rm nvcr.io/nvidia/cuda nvidia-smi
      Code block. Task execution example
    • You can see an example of the work performed as follows.
      Color mode
      $ docker run --gpus '"device=0:0"' -rm -it --network=host --shm-size=1g --ipc=host -v /root/.ssh/:/root/.ssh
      
      ================
      == TensorFlow ==
      ================
      
      NVIDIA Release 21.08-tf1 (build 26012104)
      TensorFlow Version 1.15.5
      
      Container image Copyright (c) 2021, NVIDIA CORPORATION. All right reserved.
      ...
      
      # Run Python process
      root@d622a93c9281:/workspace# python /workspace/nvidia-examples/cnn/resnet.py --num_iter 100
      ...
      PY 3.8.10 (default, Jun 2 2021, 10:49:15)
      [GCC 9.4.0]
      TF 1.15.5
      ...
      $ docker run --gpus '"device=0:0"' -rm -it --network=host --shm-size=1g --ipc=host -v /root/.ssh/:/root/.ssh
      
      ================
      == TensorFlow ==
      ================
      
      NVIDIA Release 21.08-tf1 (build 26012104)
      TensorFlow Version 1.15.5
      
      Container image Copyright (c) 2021, NVIDIA CORPORATION. All right reserved.
      ...
      
      # Run Python process
      root@d622a93c9281:/workspace# python /workspace/nvidia-examples/cnn/resnet.py --num_iter 100
      ...
      PY 3.8.10 (default, Jun 2 2021, 10:49:15)
      [GCC 9.4.0]
      TF 1.15.5
      ...
      Code block. Operation result
  2. Check the GPU usage. (Create JOB process)
    • When the job runs, you can see that a process is allocated to the MIG device and its utilization increases.
      Color mode
      $ nvidia-smi mig -i [GPU ID] -gi [GPU Instance ID] -lcip
      $ nvidia-smi mig -i [GPU ID] -gi [GPU Instance ID] -lcip
      code block. nvidia-smi command - check GPU utilization
    • You can check the GPU usage as shown below.
      Color mode
      +-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
      | MIG devices: |
      +-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
      | GPU  GI  CI  MIG | Memory-Usage | Vol | Shared |
      | ID  ID  Dev | BAR1-Usage | SM     Unc | CE  ENC  DEC  OFA  JPG |
      |  |  | ECC |  |
      | ============================================================================= |
      | 0    0   0    0 | 66562MiB / 81251MiB | 98      0 | 7   0    5    1    1 |
      |  | 5MiB / 13107... |  |  |
      +-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
      +-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
      | Processes: |
      | GPU   GI   CI       PID   Type   Process name                   GPU Memory |
      | ID   ID                                                   Usage |
      | ============================================================================= |
      | 0     0    0     17483      C   python                           66559MiB |
      +-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
      +-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
      | MIG devices: |
      +-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
      | GPU  GI  CI  MIG | Memory-Usage | Vol | Shared |
      | ID  ID  Dev | BAR1-Usage | SM     Unc | CE  ENC  DEC  OFA  JPG |
      |  |  | ECC |  |
      | ============================================================================= |
      | 0    0   0    0 | 66562MiB / 81251MiB | 98      0 | 7   0    5    1    1 |
      |  | 5MiB / 13107... |  |  |
      +-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
      +-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
      | Processes: |
      | GPU   GI   CI       PID   Type   Process name                   GPU Memory |
      | ID   ID                                                   Usage |
      | ============================================================================= |
      | 0     0    0     17483      C   python                           66559MiB |
      +-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
      Code block. Example of checking GPU utilization.

Delete and release MIG Instance

Follow these steps to delete the MIG instance and detach the MIG.

MIG release order
Delete Compute Instance → Delete GPU Instance → Disable MIG feature (deactivate)

Compute Instance Delete

  • Delete the Compute Instance.
    Color mode
    $ nvidia-smi mig -i [GPU ID] -gi [GPU Instance ID] –dci
    $ nvidia-smi mig -i [GPU ID] -gi [GPU Instance ID] -ci [Compute Instance] –dci
    $ nvidia-smi mig -i [GPU ID] -gi [GPU Instance ID] –dci
    $ nvidia-smi mig -i [GPU ID] -gi [GPU Instance ID] -ci [Compute Instance] –dci
    Code block. nvidia-smi command - Delete Compute Instance
    Color mode
    $ nvidia-smi mig -i 0 -gi 0 –lci
    +-----------------------------------------------------------------+
    | Compute instance profiles: |
    | GPU     GPU     Name            Profile  Instances   Placement |
    | GPU   Instance                     ID      ID        Start:Size |
    | ID |
    | ================================================================= |
    | 0      0      MIG 7g.80gb         4       0            0:7 |
    +-----------------------------------------------------------------+
    $ nvidia-smi mig -i 0 -gi 0 –lci
    +-----------------------------------------------------------------+
    | Compute instance profiles: |
    | GPU     GPU     Name            Profile  Instances   Placement |
    | GPU   Instance                     ID      ID        Start:Size |
    | ID |
    | ================================================================= |
    | 0      0      MIG 7g.80gb         4       0            0:7 |
    +-----------------------------------------------------------------+
    code block. Example of checking MIG Compute Instance
    Color mode
    $ nvidia-smi mig -i 0 -gi 0 –dci
    Successfully destroyed compute instance ID  0 from GPU instance ID  0
    $ nvidia-smi mig -i 0 -gi 0 –dci
    Successfully destroyed compute instance ID  0 from GPU instance ID  0
    Code block. Compute Instance deletion example
    Color mode
    $ nvidia-smi mig -i 0 -gi 0 –lci
    No compute instances found: Not found
    $ nvidia-smi mig -i 0 -gi 0 –lci
    No compute instances found: Not found
    Code block. Confirm Compute Instance deletion

Delete GPU Instance

  • Delete the GPU Instance.
    Color mode
    $ nvidia-smi mig -i [GPU ID] –dgi
    $ nvidia-smi mig -i [GPU ID] -gi [GPU Instance ID] –dgi
    $ nvidia-smi mig -i [GPU ID] –dgi
    $ nvidia-smi mig -i [GPU ID] -gi [GPU Instance ID] –dgi
    Code block. nvidia-smi command - Delete GPU Instance
    Color mode
    $ nvidia-smi mig -i 0 -lgi
    +--------------------------------------------------------+
    | GPU instances: |
    | GPU   Name               Profile  Instance  Placement |
    | ID       ID      Start:Size |
    | ======================================================== |
    | 0  MIG 7g.80gb            0        0         0:8 |
    +--------------------------------------------------------+
    $ nvidia-smi mig -i 0 -lgi
    +--------------------------------------------------------+
    | GPU instances: |
    | GPU   Name               Profile  Instance  Placement |
    | ID       ID      Start:Size |
    | ======================================================== |
    | 0  MIG 7g.80gb            0        0         0:8 |
    +--------------------------------------------------------+
    Code block. nvidia-smi command - Example of checking GPU Instance
    Color mode
    $ nvidia-smi mig -i 0 -dgi
    Successfully destroyed GPU instance ID  0 from GPU  0
    $ nvidia-smi mig -i 0 -dgi
    Successfully destroyed GPU instance ID  0 from GPU  0
    Code block. nvidia-smi command - GPU Instance deletion example
    Color mode
    $ nvidia-smi mig -i 0 -lgi
    No GPU instances found: Not found
    $ nvidia-smi mig -i 0 -lgi
    No GPU instances found: Not found
    code block. nvidia-smi command - example of deleting a GPU Instance

Disable MIG feature (deactivation)

  • After disabling MIG (Disable), reboot.
    Color mode
    $ nvidia-smi -mig 0
    Disabled MIG Mode for GPU 00000000:05:00.0
    
    All done.
    $ nvidia-smi -mig 0
    Disabled MIG Mode for GPU 00000000:05:00.0
    
    All done.
    Code block. nvidia-smi command - disable MIG
    Color mode
    $ nvidia-smi
    Mon Sep 30 05:18:28 2021
    +-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
    | NVIDIA-SMI 470.57.02    Driver Version: 470.57.02    CUDA Version: 11.4 |
    | -------------------------------+----------------------+---------------------- |
    | GPU  Name        Persistence-M | Bus-Id        Disp.A | Volatile Uncorr. ECC |
    | Fan  Temp  Perf  Pwr:Usage/Cap | Memory-Usage | GPU-Util  Compute M. |
    |  |  | MIG M. |
    | ===============================+======================+====================== |
    | 0  NVDIA A100-SXM...  Off | 00000000:05:00.0 Off | 0 |
    | N/A   33C   P0    60W / 400W | 0MiB / 81251MiB | 0%      Default |
    |  |  | Disabled |
    +-------------------------------+----------------------+----------------------+
    +-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
    | MIG devices: |
    +-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
    | GPU  GI  CI  MIG | Memory-Usage | Vol | Shared |
    | ID  ID  Dev | BAR1-Usage | SM     Unc | CE  ENC  DEC  OFA  JPG |
    |  |  | ECC |  |
    | ============================================================================= |
    | No MIG devices found |
    +-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
    +-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
    | Processes: |
    | GPU   GI   CI       PID   Type   Process name                   GPU Memory |
    | ID   ID                                                   Usage |
    | ============================================================================= |
    | No running processes found |
    +-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
    $ nvidia-smi
    Mon Sep 30 05:18:28 2021
    +-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
    | NVIDIA-SMI 470.57.02    Driver Version: 470.57.02    CUDA Version: 11.4 |
    | -------------------------------+----------------------+---------------------- |
    | GPU  Name        Persistence-M | Bus-Id        Disp.A | Volatile Uncorr. ECC |
    | Fan  Temp  Perf  Pwr:Usage/Cap | Memory-Usage | GPU-Util  Compute M. |
    |  |  | MIG M. |
    | ===============================+======================+====================== |
    | 0  NVDIA A100-SXM...  Off | 00000000:05:00.0 Off | 0 |
    | N/A   33C   P0    60W / 400W | 0MiB / 81251MiB | 0%      Default |
    |  |  | Disabled |
    +-------------------------------+----------------------+----------------------+
    +-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
    | MIG devices: |
    +-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
    | GPU  GI  CI  MIG | Memory-Usage | Vol | Shared |
    | ID  ID  Dev | BAR1-Usage | SM     Unc | CE  ENC  DEC  OFA  JPG |
    |  |  | ECC |  |
    | ============================================================================= |
    | No MIG devices found |
    +-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
    +-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
    | Processes: |
    | GPU   GI   CI       PID   Type   Process name                   GPU Memory |
    | ID   ID                                                   Usage |
    | ============================================================================= |
    | No running processes found |
    +-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
    Code block. nvidia-smi command - check GPU status

3.2.4 - Use NVSwitch on GPU Server

After creating a GPU Server, you can enable the NVSwitch feature on the GPU Server’s VM (Guest OS) and use fast GPU-to-GPU P2P communication.

Caution
Only the GPU Server (8 GPU) and Multi-node GPU Cluster of Samsung Cloud Platform are connected with NVSwitch and NVLink.

Exploring NVIDIA NVSwitch for Multi GPU

NVLink expands I/O by directly connecting multiple GPUs within a server both bidirectionally and GPU-to-GPU. Using NVSwitch, you can connect all GPUs in a server with full NVLink bandwidth.

Checking NVSwitch operation

Check the NVIDIA Fabric Manager, NVIDIA NVLink topology, and NVIDIA NVLink Status on the GPU server.

Reference
The example for checking NVSwitch operation is explained using the A100 GPU Server (g1v128a8) as a reference.

NVIDIA Fabric Manager operating status

Verify that active (running) is displayed when operating normally.

~$ systemctl status nvidia-fabricmanager
Color mode
nvidia-fabricmanager.service - NVIDIA fabric manager service
     Loaded: loaded (/lib/systemd/system/nvidia-fabricmanager.service; enabled; vendor preset: enabled)
     Active: active (running) since Mon 2026-02-02 16:23:27 KST; 32min ago
   Main PID: 2191 (nv-fabricmanage)
      Tasks: 18 (limit: 629145)
     Memory: 18.0M
        CPU: 33.461s
     CGroup: /system.slice/nvidia-fabricmanager.service
             └─2191 /usr/bin/nv-fabricmanager -c /usr/share/nvidia/nvswitch/fabricmanager.cfg
nvidia-fabricmanager.service - NVIDIA fabric manager service
     Loaded: loaded (/lib/systemd/system/nvidia-fabricmanager.service; enabled; vendor preset: enabled)
     Active: active (running) since Mon 2026-02-02 16:23:27 KST; 32min ago
   Main PID: 2191 (nv-fabricmanage)
      Tasks: 18 (limit: 629145)
     Memory: 18.0M
        CPU: 33.461s
     CGroup: /system.slice/nvidia-fabricmanager.service
             └─2191 /usr/bin/nv-fabricmanager -c /usr/share/nvidia/nvswitch/fabricmanager.cfg
Code block. Check NVIDIA Fabric Manager status

Check NVIDIA NVLink topology

Check the NVIDIA NVLink topology.

~$ nvidia-smi topo -m
Color mode
nvidia-smi topo -m
        GPU0    GPU1    GPU2    GPU3    GPU4    GPU5    GPU6    GPU7    CPU Affinity    NUMA Affinity   GPU NUMA ID
GPU0     X      NV12    NV12    NV12    NV12    NV12    NV12    NV12    0-127   0-7             N/A
GPU1    NV12     X      NV12    NV12    NV12    NV12    NV12    NV12    0-127   0-7             N/A
GPU2    NV12    NV12     X      NV12    NV12    NV12    NV12    NV12    0-127   0-7             N/A
GPU3    NV12    NV12    NV12     X      NV12    NV12    NV12    NV12    0-127   0-7             N/A
GPU4    NV12    NV12    NV12    NV12     X      NV12    NV12    NV12    0-127   0-7             N/A
GPU5    NV12    NV12    NV12    NV12    NV12     X      NV12    NV12    0-127   0-7             N/A
GPU6    NV12    NV12    NV12    NV12    NV12    NV12     X      NV12    0-127   0-7             N/A
GPU7    NV12    NV12    NV12    NV12    NV12    NV12    NV12     X      0-127   0-7             N/A

Legend:

  X    = Self
  SYS  = Connection traversing PCIe as well as the SMP interconnect between NUMA nodes (e.g., QPI/UPI)
  NODE = Connection traversing PCIe as well as the interconnect between PCIe Host Bridges within a NUMA node
  PHB  = Connection traversing PCIe as well as a PCIe Host Bridge (typically the CPU)
  PXB  = Connection traversing multiple PCIe bridges (without traversing the PCIe Host Bridge)
  PIX  = Connection traversing at most a single PCIe bridge
  NV#  = Connection traversing a bonded set of # NVLinks
nvidia-smi topo -m
        GPU0    GPU1    GPU2    GPU3    GPU4    GPU5    GPU6    GPU7    CPU Affinity    NUMA Affinity   GPU NUMA ID
GPU0     X      NV12    NV12    NV12    NV12    NV12    NV12    NV12    0-127   0-7             N/A
GPU1    NV12     X      NV12    NV12    NV12    NV12    NV12    NV12    0-127   0-7             N/A
GPU2    NV12    NV12     X      NV12    NV12    NV12    NV12    NV12    0-127   0-7             N/A
GPU3    NV12    NV12    NV12     X      NV12    NV12    NV12    NV12    0-127   0-7             N/A
GPU4    NV12    NV12    NV12    NV12     X      NV12    NV12    NV12    0-127   0-7             N/A
GPU5    NV12    NV12    NV12    NV12    NV12     X      NV12    NV12    0-127   0-7             N/A
GPU6    NV12    NV12    NV12    NV12    NV12    NV12     X      NV12    0-127   0-7             N/A
GPU7    NV12    NV12    NV12    NV12    NV12    NV12    NV12     X      0-127   0-7             N/A

Legend:

  X    = Self
  SYS  = Connection traversing PCIe as well as the SMP interconnect between NUMA nodes (e.g., QPI/UPI)
  NODE = Connection traversing PCIe as well as the interconnect between PCIe Host Bridges within a NUMA node
  PHB  = Connection traversing PCIe as well as a PCIe Host Bridge (typically the CPU)
  PXB  = Connection traversing multiple PCIe bridges (without traversing the PCIe Host Bridge)
  PIX  = Connection traversing at most a single PCIe bridge
  NV#  = Connection traversing a bonded set of # NVLinks
Code block. Check NVIDIA NVLink topology

Check NVIDIA NVLink Status

Check the NVIDIA NVLink Status.

~$ nvidia-smi topo -m
Color mode
GPU 1: NVIDIA A100-SXM4-80GB (UUID: GPU-64a2f685-bb12-c4af-105c-0726ece9c8d7)
         Link 0: 25 GB/s
         Link 1: 25 GB/s
         Link 2: 25 GB/s
         Link 3: 25 GB/s
         Link 4: 25 GB/s
         Link 5: 25 GB/s
         Link 6: 25 GB/s
         Link 7: 25 GB/s
         Link 8: 25 GB/s
         Link 9: 25 GB/s
         Link 10: 25 GB/s
         Link 11: 25 GB/s
GPU 2: NVIDIA A100-SXM4-80GB (UUID: GPU-2269851b-71cd-f6c7-50c5-ba1525cf3ce8)
         Link 0: 25 GB/s
         Link 1: 25 GB/s
         Link 2: 25 GB/s
         Link 3: 25 GB/s
         Link 4: 25 GB/s
         Link 5: 25 GB/s
         Link 6: 25 GB/s
         Link 7: 25 GB/s
         Link 8: 25 GB/s
         Link 9: 25 GB/s
         Link 10: 25 GB/s
         Link 11: 25 GB/s
GPU 3: NVIDIA A100-SXM4-80GB (UUID: GPU-4c397bbf-95fc-5c29-918a-a429cbe45a7a)
         Link 0: 25 GB/s
         Link 1: 25 GB/s
         Link 2: 25 GB/s
         Link 3: 25 GB/s
         Link 4: 25 GB/s
         Link 5: 25 GB/s
         Link 6: 25 GB/s
         Link 7: 25 GB/s
         Link 8: 25 GB/s
         Link 9: 25 GB/s
         Link 10: 25 GB/s
         Link 11: 25 GB/s
GPU 4: NVIDIA A100-SXM4-80GB (UUID: GPU-0e350204-9fb6-2cbe-538e-8f7849658eb8)
         Link 0: 25 GB/s
         Link 1: 25 GB/s
         Link 2: 25 GB/s
         Link 3: 25 GB/s
         Link 4: 25 GB/s
         Link 5: 25 GB/s
         Link 6: 25 GB/s
         Link 7: 25 GB/s
         Link 8: 25 GB/s
         Link 9: 25 GB/s
         Link 10: 25 GB/s
         Link 11: 25 GB/s
GPU 5: NVIDIA A100-SXM4-80GB (UUID: GPU-45f0c453-4760-edd4-3af9-25c5ea7473a5)
         Link 0: 25 GB/s
         Link 1: 25 GB/s
         Link 2: 25 GB/s
         Link 3: 25 GB/s
         Link 4: 25 GB/s
         Link 5: 25 GB/s
         Link 6: 25 GB/s
         Link 7: 25 GB/s
         Link 8: 25 GB/s
         Link 9: 25 GB/s
         Link 10: 25 GB/s
         Link 11: 25 GB/s
GPU 6: NVIDIA A100-SXM4-80GB (UUID: GPU-38409794-bb34-430e-3c50-90b42cb2bb72)
         Link 0: 25 GB/s
         Link 1: 25 GB/s
         Link 2: 25 GB/s
         Link 3: 25 GB/s
         Link 4: 25 GB/s
         Link 5: 25 GB/s
         Link 6: 25 GB/s
         Link 7: 25 GB/s
         Link 8: 25 GB/s
         Link 9: 25 GB/s
         Link 10: 25 GB/s
         Link 11: 25 GB/s
GPU 7: NVIDIA A100-SXM4-80GB (UUID: GPU-3fb478aa-801b-eb64-55c2-0ffc3f2ce404)
         Link 0: 25 GB/s
         Link 1: 25 GB/s
         Link 2: 25 GB/s
         Link 3: 25 GB/s
         Link 4: 25 GB/s
         Link 5: 25 GB/s
         Link 6: 25 GB/s
         Link 7: 25 GB/s
         Link 8: 25 GB/s
         Link 9: 25 GB/s
         Link 10: 25 GB/s
         Link 11: 25 GB/s
GPU 1: NVIDIA A100-SXM4-80GB (UUID: GPU-64a2f685-bb12-c4af-105c-0726ece9c8d7)
         Link 0: 25 GB/s
         Link 1: 25 GB/s
         Link 2: 25 GB/s
         Link 3: 25 GB/s
         Link 4: 25 GB/s
         Link 5: 25 GB/s
         Link 6: 25 GB/s
         Link 7: 25 GB/s
         Link 8: 25 GB/s
         Link 9: 25 GB/s
         Link 10: 25 GB/s
         Link 11: 25 GB/s
GPU 2: NVIDIA A100-SXM4-80GB (UUID: GPU-2269851b-71cd-f6c7-50c5-ba1525cf3ce8)
         Link 0: 25 GB/s
         Link 1: 25 GB/s
         Link 2: 25 GB/s
         Link 3: 25 GB/s
         Link 4: 25 GB/s
         Link 5: 25 GB/s
         Link 6: 25 GB/s
         Link 7: 25 GB/s
         Link 8: 25 GB/s
         Link 9: 25 GB/s
         Link 10: 25 GB/s
         Link 11: 25 GB/s
GPU 3: NVIDIA A100-SXM4-80GB (UUID: GPU-4c397bbf-95fc-5c29-918a-a429cbe45a7a)
         Link 0: 25 GB/s
         Link 1: 25 GB/s
         Link 2: 25 GB/s
         Link 3: 25 GB/s
         Link 4: 25 GB/s
         Link 5: 25 GB/s
         Link 6: 25 GB/s
         Link 7: 25 GB/s
         Link 8: 25 GB/s
         Link 9: 25 GB/s
         Link 10: 25 GB/s
         Link 11: 25 GB/s
GPU 4: NVIDIA A100-SXM4-80GB (UUID: GPU-0e350204-9fb6-2cbe-538e-8f7849658eb8)
         Link 0: 25 GB/s
         Link 1: 25 GB/s
         Link 2: 25 GB/s
         Link 3: 25 GB/s
         Link 4: 25 GB/s
         Link 5: 25 GB/s
         Link 6: 25 GB/s
         Link 7: 25 GB/s
         Link 8: 25 GB/s
         Link 9: 25 GB/s
         Link 10: 25 GB/s
         Link 11: 25 GB/s
GPU 5: NVIDIA A100-SXM4-80GB (UUID: GPU-45f0c453-4760-edd4-3af9-25c5ea7473a5)
         Link 0: 25 GB/s
         Link 1: 25 GB/s
         Link 2: 25 GB/s
         Link 3: 25 GB/s
         Link 4: 25 GB/s
         Link 5: 25 GB/s
         Link 6: 25 GB/s
         Link 7: 25 GB/s
         Link 8: 25 GB/s
         Link 9: 25 GB/s
         Link 10: 25 GB/s
         Link 11: 25 GB/s
GPU 6: NVIDIA A100-SXM4-80GB (UUID: GPU-38409794-bb34-430e-3c50-90b42cb2bb72)
         Link 0: 25 GB/s
         Link 1: 25 GB/s
         Link 2: 25 GB/s
         Link 3: 25 GB/s
         Link 4: 25 GB/s
         Link 5: 25 GB/s
         Link 6: 25 GB/s
         Link 7: 25 GB/s
         Link 8: 25 GB/s
         Link 9: 25 GB/s
         Link 10: 25 GB/s
         Link 11: 25 GB/s
GPU 7: NVIDIA A100-SXM4-80GB (UUID: GPU-3fb478aa-801b-eb64-55c2-0ffc3f2ce404)
         Link 0: 25 GB/s
         Link 1: 25 GB/s
         Link 2: 25 GB/s
         Link 3: 25 GB/s
         Link 4: 25 GB/s
         Link 5: 25 GB/s
         Link 6: 25 GB/s
         Link 7: 25 GB/s
         Link 8: 25 GB/s
         Link 9: 25 GB/s
         Link 10: 25 GB/s
         Link 11: 25 GB/s
Code block. Check NVIDIA NVLink status

3.2.5 - Install ServiceWatch Agent

Users can install the ServiceWatch Agent on a GPU server to collect custom metrics and logs.

Reference
Collecting custom metrics/logs via the ServiceWatch Agent is currently available only on Samsung Cloud Platform For Enterprise. It will also be available in other offerings in the future.
Caution
Metric collection through the ServiceWatch Agent is classified as custom metrics and, unlike the default metrics collected from each service, incurs charges; therefore, we recommend removing or disabling unnecessary metric collection settings.

ServiceWatch Agent

There are two main types of agents that need to be installed on a GPU server to collect custom metrics and logs for ServiceWatch. It is a Prometheus Exporter and Open Telemetry Collector.

CategoryDetailed description
Prometheus ExporterProvide metrics of a specific application or service in a format that Prometheus can scrape
  • To collect OS metrics from servers, you can use Node Exporter for Linux servers and Windows Exporter for Windows servers, depending on the OS type.
Open Telemetry CollectorActs as a centralized collector that gathers telemetry data such as metrics and logs from distributed systems, processes (filtering, sampling, etc.) it, and exports it to multiple backends (e.g., Prometheus, Jaeger, Elasticsearch, etc.)
  • Exports data to the ServiceWatch Gateway so that ServiceWatch can collect metric and log data.
Table. Explanation of Prometheus Exporter and Open Telemetry Collector
Caution

If you have configured a Kubernetes Engine on a GPU server, please check GPU metrics using the metrics provided by the Kubernetes Engine.

  • If you install the DCGM Exporter on a GPU server configured with Kubernetes Engine, it may not operate correctly.

Pre-configuration for Using ServiceWatch Agent

To utilize the ServiceWatch Agent, please refer to Prerequisite Settings for ServiceWatch Agent and prepare the prerequisite settings.

Install Prometheus Exporter for GPU metrics (for Ubuntu)

Install the Prometheus Exporter for collecting metrics from the GPU server according to the steps below.

Verify NVDIA Driver Installation

  • Check the installed NVDIA Driver.
    Color mode
    nvidia-smi --query-gpu driver_version --format csv
    nvidia-smi --query-gpu driver_version --format csv
    Code block. NVDIA Driver version check command
    Color mode
    driver_version
    535.183.06
    ...
    535.183.06
    driver_version
    535.183.06
    ...
    535.183.06
    Code block. NVDIA Driver version check example

NVSwitch Configuration and Query (NSCQ) Library Installation

Reference
The NVSwitch Configuration and Query (NSCQ) Library is required for Hopper or earlier generation GPUs.
Information
The installation commands below can be used in an environment with internet access. If you are in an environment without internet access, you must download libnvdia-nscq from https://developer.download.nvidia.com/compute/cuda/repos/ and upload it.
  1. Install cuda-keyring.

    Color mode
    wget https://developer.download.nvidia.com/compute/cuda/repos/<distro>/<arch>/cuda-keyring_1.1-1_all.deb
    wget https://developer.download.nvidia.com/compute/cuda/repos/<distro>/<arch>/cuda-keyring_1.1-1_all.deb
    code block. NSCQ library download command
    Color mode
    sudo dpkg -i cuda-keyring_1.1-1_all.deb
    apt update
    sudo dpkg -i cuda-keyring_1.1-1_all.deb
    apt update
    Code block. NSCQ library installation command
    Color mode
    nvidia-smi --query-gpu driver_version --format csv
    nvidia-smi --query-gpu driver_version --format csv
    Code block. NVDIA Driver version check command
    Color mode
    driver_version
    535.183.06
    ...
    
    535.183.06
    driver_version
    535.183.06
    ...
    
    535.183.06
    code block. Example of checking NVDIA driver version

  2. Install libnvidia-nscq.

    Color mode
    apt-cache policy libnvidia-nscq-535
    apt-cache policy libnvidia-nscq-535
    Code block. NSCQ library apt-cache command
    Color mode
    libnvidia-nscq-535:
      Installed: (none)
      Candidate: 535.247.01-1
      Version table:
         535.247.01-1 600
            600 https://developer.download.nvidia.com/compute/cuda/repos/ubuntu2204/x86_64  Packages
    ...
            600 https://developer.download.nvidia.com/compute/cuda/repos/ubuntu2204/x86_64  Packages
         535.216.01-1 600
            600 https://developer.download.nvidia.com/compute/cuda/repos/ubuntu2204/x86_64  Packages
         535.183.06-1 600  # Install the version that matches the driver
            600 https://developer.download.nvidia.com/compute/cuda/repos/ubuntu2204/x86_64  Packages
         535.183.01-1 600
    
            600 https://developer.download.nvidia.com/compute/cuda/repos/ubuntu2204/x86_64  Packages
         535.54.03-1 600
            600 https://developer.download.nvidia.com/compute/cuda/repos/ubuntu2204/x86_64  Packages
    libnvidia-nscq-535:
      Installed: (none)
      Candidate: 535.247.01-1
      Version table:
         535.247.01-1 600
            600 https://developer.download.nvidia.com/compute/cuda/repos/ubuntu2204/x86_64  Packages
    ...
            600 https://developer.download.nvidia.com/compute/cuda/repos/ubuntu2204/x86_64  Packages
         535.216.01-1 600
            600 https://developer.download.nvidia.com/compute/cuda/repos/ubuntu2204/x86_64  Packages
         535.183.06-1 600  # Install the version that matches the driver
            600 https://developer.download.nvidia.com/compute/cuda/repos/ubuntu2204/x86_64  Packages
         535.183.01-1 600
    
            600 https://developer.download.nvidia.com/compute/cuda/repos/ubuntu2204/x86_64  Packages
         535.54.03-1 600
            600 https://developer.download.nvidia.com/compute/cuda/repos/ubuntu2204/x86_64  Packages
    Code block. NSCQ library apt-cache command result
    Color mode
    apt install libnvidia-nscq-535=535.183.06-1
    apt install libnvidia-nscq-535=535.183.06-1
    Code block. NSCQ library installation command

information

It must be installed with the same version as the NVDIA Driver.

  • Example) driver version: 535.183.06, libnvdia-nscq version: 535.183.06-1

NVSwitch Device Monitoring API(NVSDM) Library Installation

Reference
For GPU architectures after Blackwell, installing the NVSDM Library is required. NVDIA Driver versions below 560 do not provide the NVSDM Library.
  • Install the NVSDM library.
    Color mode
    apt-cache policy libnvsdm
    apt-cache policy libnvsdm
    Code block. NVSDM library apt-cache command
    Color mode
    libnvsdm:
      Installed: (none)
      Candidate: 580.105.08-1
      Version table:
         580.105.08-1 600
            600 https://developer.download.nvidia.com/compute/cuda/repos/ubuntu2204/x86_64  Packages
         580.95.05-1 600
            600 https://developer.download.nvidia.com/compute/cuda/repos/ubuntu2204/x86_64  Packages
         580.82.07-1 600
            600 https://developer.download.nvidia.com/compute/cuda/repos/ubuntu2204/x86_64  Packages
         580.65.06-1 600
            600 https://developer.download.nvidia.com/compute/cuda/repos/ubuntu2204/x86_64  Packages
    libnvsdm:
      Installed: (none)
      Candidate: 580.105.08-1
      Version table:
         580.105.08-1 600
            600 https://developer.download.nvidia.com/compute/cuda/repos/ubuntu2204/x86_64  Packages
         580.95.05-1 600
            600 https://developer.download.nvidia.com/compute/cuda/repos/ubuntu2204/x86_64  Packages
         580.82.07-1 600
            600 https://developer.download.nvidia.com/compute/cuda/repos/ubuntu2204/x86_64  Packages
         580.65.06-1 600
            600 https://developer.download.nvidia.com/compute/cuda/repos/ubuntu2204/x86_64  Packages
    Code block. NVSDM library apt-cache command result
    Color mode
    apt install libnvsdm=580.105.08-1
    apt install libnvsdm=580.105.08-1
    Code block. Install NVSDM library

Install NVIDIA DCGM (for Ubuntu)

Install the DCGM Exporter according to the steps below.

  1. DCGM(datacenter-gpu-manager) Installation
  2. datacenter-gpu-manager-exporter installation
  3. DCGM Service Activation and Start

DCGM(datacenter-gpu-manager) Installation

refers to a specific version of NVIDIA’s Data Center GPU Manager (DCGM) tool, which is a package for managing and monitoring NVIDIA data center GPUs. In particular, cuda12 indicates that this management tool is installed for the CUDA 12 version, and datacenter-gpu-manager-4 refers to the 4.x version of DCGM. This tool provides a variety of features, including GPU status monitoring, diagnostics, alert system, and power/clock management.

  1. Check the CUDA version.
    Color mode
    nvidia-smi | grep CUDA
    nvidia-smi | grep CUDA
    Code block. Check CUDA version
    Color mode
    | NVIDIA-SMI 535.183.06             Driver Version: 535.183.06     CUDA Version: 12.2 |
    | NVIDIA-SMI 535.183.06             Driver Version: 535.183.06     CUDA Version: 12.2 |
    Code block. Example of CUDA version check result
    Color mode
    CUDA_VERSION=12
    CUDA_VERSION=12
    Code block. CUDA version setting command
  2. Install datacenter-gpu-manager-cuda.
    Color mode
    apt install datacenter-gpu-manager-4-cuda${CUDA_VERSION}
    apt install datacenter-gpu-manager-4-cuda${CUDA_VERSION}
    Code block. datacenter-gpu-manager-cuda installation command

Install datacenter-gpu-manager-exporter

It is a tool that, based on NVIDIA Data Center GPU Manager (DCGM), collects various GPU metrics such as GPU usage, memory usage, temperature, and power consumption, and exposes them for use in monitoring systems like Prometheus.

  1. Install datacenter-gpu-manager-exporter.
    Color mode
    apt install datacenter-gpu-manager-exporter
    apt install datacenter-gpu-manager-exporter
    Code block. datacenter-gpu-manager-exporter installation command
  2. Check the DCGM Exporter configuration file.
    Color mode
    cat /usr/lib/systemd/system/nvidia-dcgm-exporter.service | grep ExecStart
    cat /usr/lib/systemd/system/nvidia-dcgm-exporter.service | grep ExecStart
    Code block. Command to check the datacenter-gpu-manager-exporter configuration file
    Color mode
    ExecStart=/usr/bin/dcgm-exporter -f /etc/dcgm-exporter/default-counters.csv
    ExecStart=/usr/bin/dcgm-exporter -f /etc/dcgm-exporter/default-counters.csv
    code block. Example of verification result for the datacenter-gpu-manager-exporter configuration file
  3. When installing the DCGM Exporter, review the provided configuration and remove # for the required metrics, and add # for the unnecessary metrics.
    Color mode
    vi /etc/dcgm-exporter/default-counters.csv
    ## Example ##
    ...
    DCGM_FI_PROF_PIPE_TENSOR_ACTIVE, gauge, Ratio of cycles the tensor (HMMA) pipe is active.
    DCGM_FI_PROF_DRAM_ACTIVE,        gauge, Ratio of cycles the device memory interface is active sending or receiving data.
    # DCGM_FI_PROF_PIPE_FP64_ACTIVE,   gauge, Ratio of cycles the fp64 pipes are active.
    # DCGM_FI_PROF_PIPE_FP32_ACTIVE,   gauge, Ratio of cycles the fp32 pipes are active.
    ...
    vi /etc/dcgm-exporter/default-counters.csv
    ## Example ##
    ...
    DCGM_FI_PROF_PIPE_TENSOR_ACTIVE, gauge, Ratio of cycles the tensor (HMMA) pipe is active.
    DCGM_FI_PROF_DRAM_ACTIVE,        gauge, Ratio of cycles the device memory interface is active sending or receiving data.
    # DCGM_FI_PROF_PIPE_FP64_ACTIVE,   gauge, Ratio of cycles the fp64 pipes are active.
    # DCGM_FI_PROF_PIPE_FP32_ACTIVE,   gauge, Ratio of cycles the fp32 pipes are active.
    ...
    Code block. Example of datacenter-gpu-manager-exporter metric configuration
Reference
See DCGM Exporter Metrics for the metrics that can be collected with the GPU DCGM Exporter and how to configure them.
Caution
Since metric collection through the ServiceWatch Agent is classified as custom metrics and incurs charges unlike the default collected metrics, unnecessary metric collection must be removed or disabled to avoid excessive charges.

Enable and start DCGM service

  1. Enable and start the nvdia-dcgm service.

    Color mode
    systemctl enable --now nvidia-dcgm
    systemctl enable --now nvidia-dcgm
    Code block. nvdia-dcgm service activation and start command

  2. Enable and start the nvdia-dcgm-exporter service.

    Color mode
    systemctl enable --now nvidia-dcgm-exporter
    systemctl enable --now nvidia-dcgm-exporter
    Code block. nvdia-dcgm-exporter service activation and start command

information
If you have completed the DCGM Exporter setup, you must install the Open Telemetry Collector provided by ServiceWatch to finish configuring the ServiceWatch Agent.
For more details, refer to ServiceWatch > ServiceWatch Agent 사용하기.

Install Prometheus Exporter for GPU metrics (for RHEL)

Install the ServiceWatch Agent to collect metrics from the GPU server according to the steps below.

NVDIA Driver installation verification (for RHEL)

  1. Check the installed NVDIA Driver.
    Color mode
    nvidia-smi --query-gpu driver_version --format csv
    nvidia-smi --query-gpu driver_version --format csv
    Code block. NVDIA Driver version check command
    Color mode
    driver_version
    535.183.06
    ...
    
    535.183.06
    driver_version
    535.183.06
    ...
    
    535.183.06
    Code block. Example of checking NVDIA Driver version

NVSwitch Configuration and Query (NSCQ) Library installation (for RHEL)

Reference

The NVSwitch Configuration and Query (NSCQ) Library is required for Hopper or earlier generation GPUs.

  • For RHEL, verify that libnvdia-nscq is installed and install it if necessary.
information
The installation commands below can be executed in an environment with internet access. If you are in an environment without internet access, you must download libnvdia-nscq from https://developer.download.nvidia.com/compute/cuda/repos/ and upload it.
  1. Checking the libnvdia-nscq package.

    Color mode
    rpm -qa | grep libnvidia-nscq libnvidia-nscq-535-535.183.06-1.x86_64
    rpm -qa | grep libnvidia-nscq libnvidia-nscq-535-535.183.06-1.x86_64
    Code block. Check NSCQ library package

  2. Add the CUDA Repository to DNF.

    Color mode
    dnf config-manager --add-repo https://developer.download.nvidia.com/compute/cuda/repos/rhel8/x86_64/cuda-rhel8.repo
    dnf config-manager --add-repo https://developer.download.nvidia.com/compute/cuda/repos/rhel8/x86_64/cuda-rhel8.repo
    Code block. Add DNF Repository

  3. NVDIA Driver status reset

    Color mode
    dnf module reset nvidia-driver
    dnf module reset nvidia-driver
    Code block. Initialize the state of the NVIDIA Driver DNF module
    Color mode
    Updating Subscription Management repositories.
    Last metadata expiration check: 0:03:15 ago on Wed 19 Nov 2025 01:23:48 AM EST.
    Dependencies resolved.
    =============================================
    Package Architecture Version Repository Size
    =============================================
    Disabling module profiles:
    nvidia-driver/default
    nvidia-driver/fm
    Resetting modules:
    nvidia-driver
    
    Transaction Summary
    =============================================
    
    Is this ok [y/N]: y
    Updating Subscription Management repositories.
    Last metadata expiration check: 0:03:15 ago on Wed 19 Nov 2025 01:23:48 AM EST.
    Dependencies resolved.
    =============================================
    Package Architecture Version Repository Size
    =============================================
    Disabling module profiles:
    nvidia-driver/default
    nvidia-driver/fm
    Resetting modules:
    nvidia-driver
    
    Transaction Summary
    =============================================
    
    Is this ok [y/N]: y
    Code block. Example of the status initialization result of the NVIDIA Driver DNF module.

  4. Enable the NVDIA Driver module.

    Color mode
    dnf module enable nvidia-driver:535-open
    dnf module enable nvidia-driver:535-open
    code block. NVDIA Driver module activation
    Color mode
    Updating Subscription Management repositories.
    Last metadata expiration check: 0:04:22 ago on Wed 19 Nov 2025 01:23:48 AM EST.
    Dependencies resolved.
    =============================================
    Package Architecture Version Repository Size
    =============================================
    Enabling module streams:
    nvidia-driver 535-open
    
    Transaction Summary
    =============================================
    
    Is this ok [y/N]: y
    Updating Subscription Management repositories.
    Last metadata expiration check: 0:04:22 ago on Wed 19 Nov 2025 01:23:48 AM EST.
    Dependencies resolved.
    =============================================
    Package Architecture Version Repository Size
    =============================================
    Enabling module streams:
    nvidia-driver 535-open
    
    Transaction Summary
    =============================================
    
    Is this ok [y/N]: y
    Code block. Example of NVDIA Driver module activation result

  5. Check the libnvdia-nscq module list.

    Color mode
    dnf list libnvidia-nscq-535 --showduplicates
    dnf list libnvidia-nscq-535 --showduplicates
    Code block. Check libnvdia-nscq module list

  6. Install libnvdia-nscq.

    Color mode
    dnf install libnvidia-nscq-535-535.183.06-1
    dnf install libnvidia-nscq-535-535.183.06-1
    code block. libnvdia-nscq installation command

NVSwitch Device Monitoring API(NVSDM) Library Installation (for RHEL)

Reference
For GPU architectures after Blackwell, installing the NVSDM Library is required. NVDIA Driver versions below 560 do not provide the NVSDM Library.
  1. Check the NVSDM library module list.

    Color mode
    dnf list libnvsdm --showduplicates
    dnf list libnvsdm --showduplicates
    Code block. Check NVSDM library module list
    Color mode
    libnvsdm:
      Installed: (none)
      Candidate: 580.105.08-1
      Version table:
         580.105.08-1 600
            600 https://developer.download.nvidia.com/compute/cuda/repos/ubuntu2204/x86_64  Packages
         580.95.05-1 600
            600 https://developer.download.nvidia.com/compute/cuda/repos/ubuntu2204/x86_64  Packages
         580.82.07-1 600
            600 https://developer.download.nvidia.com/compute/cuda/repos/ubuntu2204/x86_64  Packages
         580.65.06-1 600
            600 https://developer.download.nvidia.com/compute/cuda/repos/ubuntu2204/x86_64  Packages
    libnvsdm:
      Installed: (none)
      Candidate: 580.105.08-1
      Version table:
         580.105.08-1 600
            600 https://developer.download.nvidia.com/compute/cuda/repos/ubuntu2204/x86_64  Packages
         580.95.05-1 600
            600 https://developer.download.nvidia.com/compute/cuda/repos/ubuntu2204/x86_64  Packages
         580.82.07-1 600
            600 https://developer.download.nvidia.com/compute/cuda/repos/ubuntu2204/x86_64  Packages
         580.65.06-1 600
            600 https://developer.download.nvidia.com/compute/cuda/repos/ubuntu2204/x86_64  Packages
    Code block. Example of NVSDM library module list verification results.

  2. Install libnvsdm.

    Color mode
    dnf install libnvsdm-580.105.08-1
    dnf install libnvsdm-580.105.08-1
    Code block. Install NVSDM library
    Color mode
    Updating Subscription Management repositories.
    Last metadata expiration check: 0:08:18 ago on Wed 19 Nov 2025 01:05:28 AM EST.
    Dependencies resolved.
    =========================================================================
    Package Architecture Version Repository Size
    =========================================================================
    Installing:
    libnvsdm x86_64 580.105.08-1 cuda-rhel8-x86_64 675 k
    Installing dependencies:
    infiniband-diags x86_64 48.0-1.el8 rhel-8-for-x86_64-baseos-rpms 323 k
    libibumad x86_64 48.0-1.el8 rhel-8-for-x86_64-baseos-rpms 34 k
    
    Transaction Summary
    =========================================================================
    Install 3 Packages
    
    Total download size: 1.0 M
    Installed size: 3.2 M
    Is this ok [y/N]: y
    Updating Subscription Management repositories.
    Last metadata expiration check: 0:08:18 ago on Wed 19 Nov 2025 01:05:28 AM EST.
    Dependencies resolved.
    =========================================================================
    Package Architecture Version Repository Size
    =========================================================================
    Installing:
    libnvsdm x86_64 580.105.08-1 cuda-rhel8-x86_64 675 k
    Installing dependencies:
    infiniband-diags x86_64 48.0-1.el8 rhel-8-for-x86_64-baseos-rpms 323 k
    libibumad x86_64 48.0-1.el8 rhel-8-for-x86_64-baseos-rpms 34 k
    
    Transaction Summary
    =========================================================================
    Install 3 Packages
    
    Total download size: 1.0 M
    Installed size: 3.2 M
    Is this ok [y/N]: y
    Code block. Example of the NVSDM library installation command result

Install NVIDIA DCGM (for RHEL)

Install Node Exporter according to the steps below.

  1. DCGM(datacenter-gpu-manager) Installation
  2. datacenter-gpu-manager-exporter installation
  3. DCGM Service Activation and Start

DCGM(datacenter-gpu-manager) Installation (for RHEL)

refers to a specific version of NVIDIA’s Data Center GPU Manager (DCGM) tool, which is a package for managing and monitoring NVIDIA data center GPUs. In particular, cuda12 indicates that this management tool is installed for the CUDA 12 version, and datacenter-gpu-manager-4 refers to the 4.x version of DCGM. This tool provides various features, including GPU status monitoring, diagnostics, alert system, and power/clock management.

  1. Add the CUDA repository to DNF.
    Color mode
    dnf config-manager --add-repo https://developer.download.nvidia.com/compute/cuda/repos/rhel8/x86_64/cuda-rhel8.repo
    dnf config-manager --add-repo https://developer.download.nvidia.com/compute/cuda/repos/rhel8/x86_64/cuda-rhel8.repo
    code block. Add DNF Repository
  2. Check the CUDA version.
    Color mode
    nvidia-smi | grep CUDA
    nvidia-smi | grep CUDA
    Code block. Check CUDA version
    Color mode
    | NVIDIA-SMI 535.183.06             Driver Version: 535.183.06     CUDA Version: 12.2 |
    | NVIDIA-SMI 535.183.06             Driver Version: 535.183.06     CUDA Version: 12.2 |
    Code block. Example of CUDA version check result
    Color mode
    CUDA_VERSION=12
    CUDA_VERSION=12
    Code block. CUDA version setting command
  3. Check the list of datacenter-gpu-manager-cuda modules.
    Color mode
    dnf list datacenter-gpu-manager-4-cuda${CUDA_VERSION} --showduplicates
    dnf list datacenter-gpu-manager-4-cuda${CUDA_VERSION} --showduplicates
    Code block. Check the datacenter-gpu-manager-cuda module list
    Color mode
    Updating Subscription Management repositories.
    Unable to read consumer identity
    
    This system is not registered with an entitlement server. You can use subscription-manager to register.
    
    Last metadata expiration check: 0:00:34 ago on Wed 19 Nov 2025 12:26:56 AM EST.
    Available Packages
    datacenter-gpu-manager-4-cuda12.x86_64   1:4.0.0-1    cuda-rhel8-x86_64
    datacenter-gpu-manager-4-cuda12.x86_64   1:4.1.0-1    cuda-rhel8-x86_64
    datacenter-gpu-manager-4-cuda12.x86_64   1:4.1.1-1    cuda-rhel8-x86_64
    datacenter-gpu-manager-4-cuda12.x86_64   1:4.2.0-1    cuda-rhel8-x86_64
    datacenter-gpu-manager-4-cuda12.x86_64   1:4.2.2-1    cuda-rhel8-x86_64
    datacenter-gpu-manager-4-cuda12.x86_64   1:4.2.3-1    cuda-rhel8-x86_64
    datacenter-gpu-manager-4-cuda12.x86_64   1:4.2.3-2    cuda-rhel8-x86_64
    datacenter-gpu-manager-4-cuda12.x86_64   1:4.3.0-1    cuda-rhel8-x86_64
    datacenter-gpu-manager-4-cuda12.x86_64   1:4.3.1-1    cuda-rhel8-x86_64
    datacenter-gpu-manager-4-cuda12.x86_64   1:4.4.0-1    cuda-rhel8-x86_64
    datacenter-gpu-manager-4-cuda12.x86_64   1:4.4.1-1    cuda-rhel8-x86_64
    datacenter-gpu-manager-4-cuda12.x86_64   1:4.4.2-1    cuda-rhel8-x86_64
    Updating Subscription Management repositories.
    Unable to read consumer identity
    
    This system is not registered with an entitlement server. You can use subscription-manager to register.
    
    Last metadata expiration check: 0:00:34 ago on Wed 19 Nov 2025 12:26:56 AM EST.
    Available Packages
    datacenter-gpu-manager-4-cuda12.x86_64   1:4.0.0-1    cuda-rhel8-x86_64
    datacenter-gpu-manager-4-cuda12.x86_64   1:4.1.0-1    cuda-rhel8-x86_64
    datacenter-gpu-manager-4-cuda12.x86_64   1:4.1.1-1    cuda-rhel8-x86_64
    datacenter-gpu-manager-4-cuda12.x86_64   1:4.2.0-1    cuda-rhel8-x86_64
    datacenter-gpu-manager-4-cuda12.x86_64   1:4.2.2-1    cuda-rhel8-x86_64
    datacenter-gpu-manager-4-cuda12.x86_64   1:4.2.3-1    cuda-rhel8-x86_64
    datacenter-gpu-manager-4-cuda12.x86_64   1:4.2.3-2    cuda-rhel8-x86_64
    datacenter-gpu-manager-4-cuda12.x86_64   1:4.3.0-1    cuda-rhel8-x86_64
    datacenter-gpu-manager-4-cuda12.x86_64   1:4.3.1-1    cuda-rhel8-x86_64
    datacenter-gpu-manager-4-cuda12.x86_64   1:4.4.0-1    cuda-rhel8-x86_64
    datacenter-gpu-manager-4-cuda12.x86_64   1:4.4.1-1    cuda-rhel8-x86_64
    datacenter-gpu-manager-4-cuda12.x86_64   1:4.4.2-1    cuda-rhel8-x86_64
    Code block. Example of checking the list of datacenter-gpu-manager-cuda modules.
  4. Install datacenter-gpu-manager-cuda.
    Color mode
    dnf install datacenter-gpu-manager-4-cuda${CUDA_VERSION}
    dnf install datacenter-gpu-manager-4-cuda${CUDA_VERSION}
    Code block. Install datacenter-gpu-manager-cuda
    Color mode
    Updating Subscription Management repositories.
    Unable to read consumer identity
    
    This system is not registered with an entitlement server. You can use subscription-manager to register.
    
    Last metadata expiration check: 0:07:12 ago on Wed 19 Nov 2025 12:26:56 AM EST.
    Dependencies resolved.
    ===================================================================================================
     Package                                       Architecture   Version     Repository          Size
    ===================================================================================================
    Installing:
     datacenter-gpu-manager-4-cuda12               x86_64         1:4.4.2-1   cuda-rhel8-x86_64   554 M
    Installing dependencies:
     datacenter-gpu-manager-4-core                 x86_64         1:4.4.2-1   cuda-rhel8-x86_64   9.9 M
    Installing weak dependencies:
     datacenter-gpu-manager-4-proprietary          x86_64         1:4.4.2-1   cuda-rhel8-x86_64   5.3 M
     datacenter-gpu-manager-4-proprietary-cuda12   x86_64         1:4.4.2-1   cuda-rhel8-x86_64   289 M
    
    Transaction Summary
    ====================================================================================================
    Install  4 Packages
    ...
    Is this ok [y/N]: y
    Updating Subscription Management repositories.
    Unable to read consumer identity
    
    This system is not registered with an entitlement server. You can use subscription-manager to register.
    
    Last metadata expiration check: 0:07:12 ago on Wed 19 Nov 2025 12:26:56 AM EST.
    Dependencies resolved.
    ===================================================================================================
     Package                                       Architecture   Version     Repository          Size
    ===================================================================================================
    Installing:
     datacenter-gpu-manager-4-cuda12               x86_64         1:4.4.2-1   cuda-rhel8-x86_64   554 M
    Installing dependencies:
     datacenter-gpu-manager-4-core                 x86_64         1:4.4.2-1   cuda-rhel8-x86_64   9.9 M
    Installing weak dependencies:
     datacenter-gpu-manager-4-proprietary          x86_64         1:4.4.2-1   cuda-rhel8-x86_64   5.3 M
     datacenter-gpu-manager-4-proprietary-cuda12   x86_64         1:4.4.2-1   cuda-rhel8-x86_64   289 M
    
    Transaction Summary
    ====================================================================================================
    Install  4 Packages
    ...
    Is this ok [y/N]: y
    Code block. Example of datacenter-gpu-manager-cuda installation result

datacenter-gpu-manager-exporter installation (for RHEL)

It is a tool that, based on NVIDIA Data Center GPU Manager (DCGM), collects various GPU metrics such as GPU usage, memory usage, temperature, and power consumption, and exposes them for use in monitoring systems like Prometheus.

  1. Add the CUDA Repository to DNF. 1. (If you have already performed this command, proceed to the next step.)

    Color mode
    dnf config-manager --add-repo https://developer.download.nvidia.com/compute/cuda/repos/rhel8/x86_64/cuda-rhel8.repo
    dnf config-manager --add-repo https://developer.download.nvidia.com/compute/cuda/repos/rhel8/x86_64/cuda-rhel8.repo
    Code block. Add DNF Repository

  2. Check the CUDA version. 2. (If you have already performed this command, proceed to the next step.)

    Color mode
    nvidia-smi | grep CUDA
    nvidia-smi | grep CUDA
    Code block. Check CUDA version
    Color mode
    | NVIDIA-SMI 535.183.06             Driver Version: 535.183.06     CUDA Version: 12.2 |
    | NVIDIA-SMI 535.183.06             Driver Version: 535.183.06     CUDA Version: 12.2 |
    Code block. Example of CUDA version check result
    Color mode
    CUDA_VERSION=12
    CUDA_VERSION=12
    Code block. CUDA version setting command

  3. Check the datacenter-gpu-manager-exporter module list.

    Color mode
    dnf list datacenter-gpu-manager-exporter --showduplicates
    dnf list datacenter-gpu-manager-exporter --showduplicates
    Code block. Check the list of datacenter-gpu-manager-exporter modules
    Color mode
    Updating Subscription Management repositories.
    Unable to read consumer identity
    
    This system is not registered with an entitlement server. You can use subscription-manager to register.
    
    Last metadata expiration check: 0:02:11 ago on Wed 19 Nov 2025 12:26:56 AM EST.
    Available Packages
    datacenter-gpu-manager-exporter.x86_64   4.0.1-1   cuda-rhel8-x86_64
    datacenter-gpu-manager-exporter.x86_64   4.1.0-1   cuda-rhel8-x86_64
    datacenter-gpu-manager-exporter.x86_64   4.1.1-1   cuda-rhel8-x86_64
    datacenter-gpu-manager-exporter.x86_64   4.1.3-1   cuda-rhel8-x86_64
    datacenter-gpu-manager-exporter.x86_64   4.5.0-1   cuda-rhel8-x86_64
    datacenter-gpu-manager-exporter.x86_64   4.5.1-1   cuda-rhel8-x86_64
    datacenter-gpu-manager-exporter.x86_64   4.5.2-1   cuda-rhel8-x86_64
    datacenter-gpu-manager-exporter.x86_64   4.6.0-1   cuda-rhel8-x86_64
    Updating Subscription Management repositories.
    Unable to read consumer identity
    
    This system is not registered with an entitlement server. You can use subscription-manager to register.
    
    Last metadata expiration check: 0:02:11 ago on Wed 19 Nov 2025 12:26:56 AM EST.
    Available Packages
    datacenter-gpu-manager-exporter.x86_64   4.0.1-1   cuda-rhel8-x86_64
    datacenter-gpu-manager-exporter.x86_64   4.1.0-1   cuda-rhel8-x86_64
    datacenter-gpu-manager-exporter.x86_64   4.1.1-1   cuda-rhel8-x86_64
    datacenter-gpu-manager-exporter.x86_64   4.1.3-1   cuda-rhel8-x86_64
    datacenter-gpu-manager-exporter.x86_64   4.5.0-1   cuda-rhel8-x86_64
    datacenter-gpu-manager-exporter.x86_64   4.5.1-1   cuda-rhel8-x86_64
    datacenter-gpu-manager-exporter.x86_64   4.5.2-1   cuda-rhel8-x86_64
    datacenter-gpu-manager-exporter.x86_64   4.6.0-1   cuda-rhel8-x86_64
    code block. Example of checking the module list of datacenter-gpu-manager-exporter

  4. Install datacenter-gpu-manager-cuda. dcgm-exporter 4.5.X requires glibc 2.34 or newer, but because RHEL 9 provides glibc 2.34, we install it by specifying version 4.1.3-1.

    Color mode
    dnf install datacenter-gpu-manager-exporter-4.1.3-1
    dnf install datacenter-gpu-manager-exporter-4.1.3-1
    Code block. Install datacenter-gpu-manager-cuda
    Color mode
    Updating Subscription Management repositories.
    Unable to read consumer identity
    
    This system is not registered with an entitlement server. You can use subscription-manager to register.
    
    Last metadata expiration check: 0:07:12 ago on Wed 19 Nov 2025 12:26:56 AM EST.
    Dependencies resolved.
    ====================================================================================================
     Package                                       Architecture   Version     Repository          Size
    ====================================================================================================
    Installing:
     datacenter-gpu-manager-exporter               x86_64         4.1.3-1     cuda-rhel8-x86_64   26 M
    
    
    Is this ok [y/N]: y
    Updating Subscription Management repositories.
    Unable to read consumer identity
    
    This system is not registered with an entitlement server. You can use subscription-manager to register.
    
    Last metadata expiration check: 0:07:12 ago on Wed 19 Nov 2025 12:26:56 AM EST.
    Dependencies resolved.
    ====================================================================================================
     Package                                       Architecture   Version     Repository          Size
    ====================================================================================================
    Installing:
     datacenter-gpu-manager-exporter               x86_64         4.1.3-1     cuda-rhel8-x86_64   26 M
    
    
    Is this ok [y/N]: y
    Code block. Example of datacenter-gpu-manager-cuda installation result
    Color mode
    cat /usr/lib/systemd/system/nvidia-dcgm-exporter.service | grep ExecStart
    cat /usr/lib/systemd/system/nvidia-dcgm-exporter.service | grep ExecStart
    Code block. datacenter-gpu-manager-exporter configuration file
    Color mode
    ExecStart=/usr/bin/dcgm-exporter -f /etc/dcgm-exporter/default-counters.csv
    ExecStart=/usr/bin/dcgm-exporter -f /etc/dcgm-exporter/default-counters.csv
    Code block. Example of the result of checking the datacenter-gpu-manager-exporter configuration file.

  5. When installing the DCGM Exporter, review the provided configuration and remove # for required metrics, and add # for unnecessary metrics.

    Color mode
    vi /etc/dcgm-exporter/default-counters.csv
    ## Example ##
    ...
    DCGM_FI_PROF_PIPE_TENSOR_ACTIVE, gauge, Ratio of cycles the tensor (HMMA) pipe is active.
    DCGM_FI_PROF_DRAM_ACTIVE,        gauge, Ratio of cycles the device memory interface is active sending or receiving data.
    # DCGM_FI_PROF_PIPE_FP64_ACTIVE,   gauge, Ratio of cycles the fp64 pipes are active.
    # DCGM_FI_PROF_PIPE_FP32_ACTIVE,   gauge, Ratio of cycles the fp32 pipes are active.
    ...
    vi /etc/dcgm-exporter/default-counters.csv
    ## Example ##
    ...
    DCGM_FI_PROF_PIPE_TENSOR_ACTIVE, gauge, Ratio of cycles the tensor (HMMA) pipe is active.
    DCGM_FI_PROF_DRAM_ACTIVE,        gauge, Ratio of cycles the device memory interface is active sending or receiving data.
    # DCGM_FI_PROF_PIPE_FP64_ACTIVE,   gauge, Ratio of cycles the fp64 pipes are active.
    # DCGM_FI_PROF_PIPE_FP32_ACTIVE,   gauge, Ratio of cycles the fp32 pipes are active.
    ...
    Code block. Example of datacenter-gpu-manager-exporter metric configuration

Reference
Refer to DCGM Exporter Metrics for the metrics that can be collected with the GPU DCGM Exporter and how to configure them.
Caution
Since metric collection through the ServiceWatch Agent is classified as custom metrics and incurs charges unlike the default collected metrics, unnecessary metric collection must be removed or disabled to avoid excessive charges.

Enable and start DCGM service (for RHEL)

  1. Activating and starting the nvdia-dcgm service.

    Color mode
    systemctl enable --now nvidia-dcgm
    systemctl enable --now nvidia-dcgm
    Code block. nvdia-dcgm service activation and start command

  2. Enable and start the nvdia-dcgm-exporter service.

    Color mode
    systemctl enable --now nvidia-dcgm-exporter
    systemctl enable --now nvidia-dcgm-exporter
    Code block. nvdia-dcgm-exporter service activation and start command

guide
If you have completed the DCGM Exporter configuration, you must install the Open Telemetry Collector provided by ServiceWatch and finish setting up the ServiceWatch Agent.
For more details, refer to ServiceWatch > Using ServiceWatch Agent.

DCGM Exporter metric

DCGM Exporter Key Metrics

Among the metrics provided by the DCGM Exporter, the main GPU metrics are as follows.

CategoryDCGM FieldPrometheus Metric TypeSummary
ClocksDCGM_FI_DEV_SM_CLOCKgaugeSM clock frequency (in MHz)
ClocksDCGM_FI_DEV_MEM_CLOCKgaugeMemory clock frequency (in MHz)
TemperatureDCGM_FI_DEV_GPU_TEMPgaugeGPU temperature (in C)
PowerDCGM_FI_DEV_POWER_USAGEgaugePower draw (in W)
UtilizationDCGM_FI_DEV_GPU_UTILgaugeGPU utilization (in %)
UtilizationDCGM_FI_DEV_MEM_COPY_UTILgaugeMemory utilization (in %)
Memory UsageDCGM_FI_DEV_FB_FREEgaugeFrame buffer memory free (in MiB)
Memory UsageDCGM_FI_DEV_FB_USEDgaugeFrame buffer memory used (in MiB)
NvlinkDCGM_FI_DEV_NVLINK_BANDWIDTH_TOTAL(8 GPU only)counterTotal number of NVLink bandwidth counters for all lanes
Table. Major GPU metrics provided by DCGM Exporter

DCGM Exporter metric collection configuration

Please refer to the default metrics of DCGM Exporter at DCGM Exporter > 기본 지표.

  • Besides the default configuration, remove # from default-counters.csv for any additional metrics you want to set.
  • For default metrics you do not wish to collect, add # or delete the corresponding entry.
Color mode
# Format
# If line starts with a '#' it is considered a comment
# DCGM FIELD, Prometheus metric type, help message

# Clocks
DCGM_FI_DEV_SM_CLOCK, gauge, SM clock frequency (in MHz).
DCGM_FI_DEV_MEM_CLOCK, gauge, Memory clock frequency (in MHz).

# Temperature
DCGM_FI_DEV_MEMORY_TEMP, gauge, Memory temperature (in C).
DCGM_FI_DEV_GPU_TEMP,    gauge, GPU temperature (in C).

# Power
DCGM_FI_DEV_POWER_USAGE,              gauge, Power draw (in W).
DCGM_FI_DEV_TOTAL_ENERGY_CONSUMPTION, counter, Total energy consumption since boot (in mJ).

# PCIE
# DCGM_FI_PROF_PCIE_TX_BYTES,  counter, Total number of bytes transmitted through PCIe TX via NVML.
# DCGM_FI_PROF_PCIE_RX_BYTES,  counter, Total number of bytes received through PCIe RX via NVML.
...
# Format
# If line starts with a '#' it is considered a comment
# DCGM FIELD, Prometheus metric type, help message

# Clocks
DCGM_FI_DEV_SM_CLOCK, gauge, SM clock frequency (in MHz).
DCGM_FI_DEV_MEM_CLOCK, gauge, Memory clock frequency (in MHz).

# Temperature
DCGM_FI_DEV_MEMORY_TEMP, gauge, Memory temperature (in C).
DCGM_FI_DEV_GPU_TEMP,    gauge, GPU temperature (in C).

# Power
DCGM_FI_DEV_POWER_USAGE,              gauge, Power draw (in W).
DCGM_FI_DEV_TOTAL_ENERGY_CONSUMPTION, counter, Total energy consumption since boot (in mJ).

# PCIE
# DCGM_FI_PROF_PCIE_TX_BYTES,  counter, Total number of bytes transmitted through PCIe TX via NVML.
# DCGM_FI_PROF_PCIE_RX_BYTES,  counter, Total number of bytes received through PCIe RX via NVML.
...
code block. default-counters.csv configuration example

3.3 - API Reference

API Reference

3.4 - CLI Reference

CLI Reference

3.5 - Release Note

GPU Server

2026.03.19
FEATURE Add Kubernetes image and SSD_Provisioned disk type
  • Add Kubernetes image
    • When creating a GPU Server, you can select the Kubernetes image (Ubuntu).
  • An SSD volume with configurable IOPS and throughput has been added.
    • When creating Block Storage, you can select the SSD_Provisioned disk type.
    • You can set the maximum IOPS and Throughput values.
2025.10.23
FEATURE Add new features and provide ServiceWatch service integration functionality
  • Provision of ServiceWatch service integration
    • You can monitor data through the ServiceWatch service.
  • When creating a GPU server, you can select a RHEL image.
  • Keypair management feature has been added.
    • You can generate a keypair for use, or retrieve a public key and apply it.
2025.07.01
FEATURE Add GPU Server feature, change Image sharing method, and add GPU Server usage guide
  • Add GPU Server feature
    • The IP, Public NAT IP, and Private NAT IP configuration features have been added.
    • An LLM Endpoint is provided for LLM usage.
  • The method for sharing images between accounts has changed.
    • You can create a new Image for sharing and share it.
  • Add GPU Server usage guide
2025.04.28
FEATURE Add OS image
  • GPU Server RHEL OS and GPU driver versions have been added.
2025.02.27
FEATURE Common feature change
  • Add GPU Server feature
    • NAT configuration feature has been added to the GPU Server.
  • Samsung Cloud Platform Common Feature Changes
    • Account, IAM, Service Home, tags, and other common CX changes have been applied.
2024.10.01
NEW GPU Server service official version release
  • We have officially launched the GPU Server service.
  • We have launched a virtualization computing service that lets you allocate and use infrastructure resources such as CPU, GPU, and memory provided by the server as needed, without having to purchase them individually.

4 - Bare Metal Server

4.1 - Overview

Service Overview

Bare Metal Server does not use virtualization technology and is a high-performance cloud computing service that can allocate and use physically separated computing resources such as CPU and memory exclusively. It is not affected by other cloud users, allowing you to reliably operate performance-sensitive services.

Features

  • Easy and convenient computing environment setup: Through the web-based Console, you can easily handle everything from Bare Metal Server provisioning to resource management and cost management. You can receive a server with standard specs (CPU, Memory, Disk) allocated exclusively and use it immediately.

  • Providing High-Performance Computing Environment: We provide servers suitable for workloads that require large capacity and high performance—such as real-time (Real-Time) systems, HPC (High Performance Computing), and servers that demand excessive I/O usage—in a physically isolated environment.

  • Efficient Service Delivery: Ensure performance and stability through optimal server selection and in-house testing. Customers can choose the optimal resources that fit their service environment from the various specifications of Bare Metal Servers offered by Samsung Cloud Platform.

Service Architecture Diagram

Diagram
Figure. Bare Metal Server Diagram

Provided features

Bare Metal Server provides the following features.

  • Auto Provisioning (Auto Provisioning) and Management: Through the web-based Console, you can easily provision Bare Metal Servers, manage resources, and control costs.
  • Providing various types of server types and OS images: Provides CPU, Memory, and Disk resources of standard server types, and offers a variety of standard OS images.
  • Storage Connection: Provides additional attached storage beyond the OS disk. You can connect and use Block Storage, File Storage, and Object Storage.
  • Network Connection: You can connect the standard subnet/IP settings of a Bare Metal Server and a Public NAT IP. Provides a local subnet connection for inter-server communication. This can be modified on the detail page.
  • Monitoring: You can view monitoring information such as CPU, Memory, and Disk, which are computing resources, through Cloud Monitoring. To use the Cloud Monitoring service for Bare Metal Server, you must install the Agent. Please be sure to install the Agent for stable Bare Metal Server service usage. For more details, see Bare Metal Server Monitoring Metrics.
  • Backup and Recovery: You can back up and restore the Bare Metal Server’s filesystem using the Backup service.
  • Efficient Cost Management: You can easily create or terminate servers as needed, and because billing is based on actual usage time, you can use it cost‑effectively in various unpredictable situations.
  • Local disk partition creation You can create and use up to 10 local disk partitions.
  • Terraform Provisioning: Provides an IaC environment using Terraform.

Components

Bare Metal Server provides various standard OS images and standard server types. Users can select and use them according to the scale of the service they want to configure.

OS Image provided version

The OS images supported by Bare Metal Server are as follows

OS Image versionEoS Date
Oracle Linux 9.62032-06-30
RHEL 8.102029-05-31
RHEL 9.42026-04-30
RHEL 9.62027-05-31
Rocky Linux 8.102029-05-31
Rocky Linux 9.62025-11-30
Ubuntu 22.042027-06-30
Ubuntu 24.042029-06-30
Windows 20192029-01-09
Windows 20222031-10-14
Table. Bare Metal Server provided OS Image version
Reference
  • Oracle Linux, RHEL, and Rocky Linux only provide even-numbered minor versions. Check the OS Image’s EOS (End of Support)/EOL (End of Life) Date.
  • To ensure stable OS operation, apply new or additional individual packages yourself.

Server type

The server types supported by Bare Metal Server are as follows. For detailed information about the server types supported by Bare Metal Server, see Bare Metal Server Server Types.

s3v16m64_metal
CategoryexampleDetailed description
Server generations3Provided server categories and generations
  • s3: s means the standard, commonly used standard specification (vCPU, Memory) configuration, and 1 denotes the generation
CPU vCorev16Number of vCores
  • v16: Allocated vCores are twice the number of physical cores
    • 16 vCores correspond to 8 physical cores
    • Provided with Hyperthreading enabled by default, which can be disabled when creating a service
Memorym64Memory capacity
  • m64: 64GB Memory
Table. Bare Metal Server server type

Preceding Service

This is a list of services that must be pre-configured before creating the service. Please refer to the guide provided for each service and prepare in advance.

Service CategoryserviceDetailed description
NetworkingVPCA service that provides an isolated virtual network in a cloud environment
Table. Bare Metal Server Pre-service

4.1.1 - Server Type

Bare Metal Server server type

Bare Metal Server provides server types that suit the intended use. Server types are composed of various combinations such as CPU and Memory. The server used for a Bare Metal Server is determined by the server type selected when creating the Bare Metal Server. Please select a server type based on the specifications of the application you intend to run on the Bare Metal Server.

The server types supported by Bare Metal Server are as follows.

s3v16m64_metal
Category
exampleDetailed description
Server generations3Provided server categories and generations
  • s3
    • s means standard specification
    • 3 means generation
  • h3
    • h means high-capacity server specification
    • 3 means generation
CPU vCorev16Number of vCores
  • v16: Allocated vCores are twice the number of physical cores
    • 16 vCores correspond to 8 physical cores
    • Hyper-Threading is enabled by default, and can be disabled when creating a service
Memorym64Memory Capacity
  • m64: 64GB Memory
Table. Bare Metal Server Server Type format

s4/h4 server type

The Bare Metal Server s4 server type is offered with standard specifications (vCPU, Memory) and, because it receives physically isolated resources, it is suitable for high-performance applications. Additionally, the Bare Metal Server h4 server type is offered with high-capacity specifications and is suitable for high-performance applications that require large-scale data processing.

  • Supports a total of five vCPU options (16, 32, 64, 96, 128 vCore)
    • Intel 6th Generation (Granite Rapids) Processor
  • Supports up to 64 physical cores, 128 vCPUs, and 2,048 GB of memory
  • Provides two internal disks up to 1.92 TB each (for OS use)
Server typePhysical CPUvCPUMemoryCPU TypeInternal Disk(OS)
s4v16m64_metal8 Core16 vCore64 GBIntel Xeon 6507P up to 4.3 GHz480GB * 2EA
s4v16m128_metal8 Core16 vCore128 GBIntel Xeon 6507P up to 4.3 GHz480GB * 2EA
s4v16m256_metal8 Core16 vCore256 GBIntel Xeon 6507P with a maximum frequency of 4.3 GHz480GB * 2EA
h4v32m128_metal16 Core32 vCore128 GBIntel Xeon 6517P up to 4.0 GHz960GB * 2EA
h4v32m256_metal16 Core32 vCore256 GBIntel Xeon 6517P up to 4.0 GHz960GB * 2EA
h4v32m512_metal16 Core32 vCore512 GBIntel Xeon 6517P up to 4.0 GHz960GB * 2EA
h4v64m256_metal32 Core64 vCore256 GBIntel Xeon 6737P up to 4.0 GHz1.92TB * 2EA
h4v64m512_metal32 Core64 vCore512 GBIntel Xeon 6737P up to 4.0 GHz1.92TB * 2EA
h4v64m1024_metal32 Core64 vCore1024 GBIntel Xeon 6737P up to 4.0 GHz1.92TB * 2EA
h4v96m512_metal48 Core96 vCore512 GBIntel Xeon 6520P up to 3.4 GHz1.92TB * 2EA
h4v96m768_metal48 Core96 vCore768 GBIntel Xeon 6520P with a maximum frequency of 3.4 GHz1.92TB * 2EA
h4v96m2048_metal48 Core96 vCore2048 GBIntel Xeon 6520P up to 3.4 GHz1.92TB * 2EA
h4v128m512_metal64 Core128 vCore512 GBIntel Xeon 6737P up to 4.0 GHz1.92TB * 2EA
h4v128m1024_metal64 Core128 vCore1024 GBIntel Xeon 6737P up to 4.0 GHz1.92TB * 2EA
h4v128m2048_metal64 Core128 vCore2048 GBIntel Xeon 6737P up to 4.0 GHz1.92TB * 2EA
Table. Bare Metal Server Server Type specifications > s4/h4 server type

s3/h3 server type

The Bare Metal Server s3 server type is offered with standard specifications (vCPU, Memory) and is suitable for high‑performance applications because it receives physically isolated resources. Additionally, the Bare Metal Server h3 server type is offered with high-capacity specifications and is suitable for high-performance applications that require large-scale data processing.

  • Supports a total of five vCPU options (16, 32, 64, 96, 128 vCore)
    • Intel 4th Generation (Sapphire Rapids) Processor
  • Supports up to 64 physical cores, 128 vCPUs, and 2,048 GB of memory.
  • Provides two internal disks up to 1.92 TB (for OS use)
Server typePhysical CPUvCPUMemoryCPU TypeInternal Disk(OS)
s3v16m64_metal8 Core16 vCore64 GBIntel Xeon Gold 6434 up to 4.1 GHz480 GB * 2EA
s3v16m128_metal8 Core16 vCore128 GBIntel Xeon Gold 6434 up to 4.1 GHz480 GB * 2EA
s3v16m256_metal8 Core16 vCore256 GBIntel Xeon Gold 6434 up to 4.1 GHz480 GB * 2EA
h3v32m128_metal16 Core32 vCore128 GBIntel Xeon Gold 6444Y up to 4.0 GHz960 GB * 2EA
h3v32m256_metal16 Core32 vCore256 GBIntel Xeon Gold 6444Y up to 4.0 GHz960 GB * 2EA
h3v32m512_metal16 Core32 vCore512 GBIntel Xeon Gold 6444Y up to 4.0 GHz960 GB * 2EA
h3v64m256_metal32 Core64 vCore256 GBIntel Xeon Gold 6448H up to 3.2 GHz1.92 TB * 2EA
h3v64m512_metal32 Core64 vCore512 GBIntel Xeon Gold 6448H up to 3.2 GHz1.92 TB * 2EA
h3v64m1024_metal32 Core64 vCore1024 GBIntel Xeon Gold 6448H up to 3.2 GHz1.92 TB * 2EA
h3v96m384_metal48 Core96 vCore384 GBIntel Xeon Gold 6442Y, up to 3.3 GHz1.92 TB * 2EA
h3v96m768_metal48 Core96 vCore768 GBIntel Xeon Gold 6442Y up to 3.3 GHz1.92 TB * 2EA
h3v96m1536_metal48 Core96 vCore1536 GBIntel Xeon Gold 6442Y, up to 3.3 GHz1.92 TB * 2EA
h3v128m512_metal64 Core128 vCore512 GBIntel Xeon Gold 6448H up to 3.2 GHz1.92 TB * 2EA
h3v128m1024_metal64 Core128 vCore1024 GBIntel Xeon Gold 6448H up to 3.2 GHz1.92 TB * 2EA
h3v128m2048_metal64 Core128 vCore2048 GBIntel Xeon Gold 6448H up to 3.2 GHz1.92 TB * 2EA
Table. Bare Metal Server Server Type specifications > s3/h3 server type

s2/h2 server type

Notice
s2/h2 Server Type has been discontinued for new applications. It does not affect the services you are currently using.

The Bare Metal Server s2 server type is offered with standard specifications (vCPU, Memory) and, because it receives physically isolated resources, it is suitable for high-performance applications.

Additionally, the Bare Metal Server h2 server type is offered with high-capacity specifications and is suitable for high-performance applications that require large-scale data processing.

  • Supports five vCPU options (16, 24, 32, 72, 96 vCore)
    • Intel 3rd‑Generation (Ice Lake) Processor
  • Supports up to 48 physical cores, 96 vCPUs, and 1,024 GB of memory.
  • Provides two internal disks up to 1.92 TB for OS use
Server typePhysical CPUvCPUMemoryCPU TypeInternal Disk(OS)
s2v16m64_metal8 Core16 vCore64 GBIntel Xeon Gold 6334 with a maximum frequency of 3.6 GHz480 GB * 2EA
s2v16m128_metal8 Core16 vCore128 GBIntel Xeon Gold 6334 with a maximum frequency of 3.6 GHz480 GB * 2EA
s2v16m256_metal8 Core16 vCore256 GBIntel Xeon Gold 6334 with a maximum frequency of 3.6 GHz480 GB * 2EA
h2v24m96_metal12 Core24 vCore96 GBIntel Xeon Gold 5317 up to 3.4 GHz960 GB * 2EA
h2v24m192_metal12 Core24 vCore192 GBIntel Xeon Gold 5317 up to 3.4 GHz960 GB * 2EA
h2v24m384_metal12 Core24 vCore384 GBIntel Xeon Gold 5317 up to 3.4 GHz960 GB * 2EA
h2v32m128_metal16 Core32 vCore128 GBIntel Xeon Gold 6346 with a maximum frequency of 3.6 GHz960 GB * 2EA
h2v32m256_metal16 Core32 vCore256 GBIntel Xeon Gold 6346 up to 3.6 GHz960 GB * 2EA
h2v32m512_metal16 Core32 vCore512 GBIntel Xeon Gold 6346 up to 3.6 GHz960 GB * 2EA
h2v72m256_metal36 Core72 vCore256 GBIntel Xeon Gold 6354, up to 3.6 GHz1.92 TB * 2EA
h2v72m512_metal36 Core72 vCore512 GBIntel Xeon Gold 6354 with a maximum frequency of 3.6 GHz1.92 TB * 2EA
h2v72m1024_metal36 Core72 vCore1024 GBIntel Xeon Gold 6354 with a maximum frequency of 3.6 GHz1.92 TB * 2EA
h2v96m384_metal48 Core96 vCore384 GBIntel Xeon Gold 6342 up to 3.3 GHz1.92 TB * 2EA
h2v96m768_metal48 Core96 vCore768 GBIntel Xeon Gold 6342 up to 3.3 GHz1.92 TB * 2EA
Table. Bare Metal Server Server Type specifications > s2/h2 server type

4.1.2 - Monitoring Metrics

Cloud Monitoring service termination notice

According to Samsung Cloud Platform’s policy, the Cloud Monitoring service is scheduled to be discontinued in September 2026.
Accordingly, after the September 2026 release, resource monitoring of the Samsung Cloud Platform via Cloud Monitoring will no longer be possible.

With the new alternative service, you can continuously perform resource monitoring by leveraging ServiceWatch released in October 2025.
ServiceWatch provides more modern and powerful features, replacing Cloud Monitoring to deliver a seamless monitoring environment.

If you are collecting metrics and logs through the Cloud Monitoring Agent, you need to switch to the ServiceWatch Agent.

For detailed information about ServiceWatch, please refer to ServiceWatch Overview.
Detailed information about ServiceWatch Agent can be found in the ServiceWatch Agent.

Bare Metal Server Monitoring Metrics

The table below shows the monitoring metrics of Bare Metal Server that can be viewed through Cloud Monitoring.

Guide
Bare Metal Server requires the user to install the Agent through the guide in order to view monitoring metrics. Before using the reliable Bare Metal Server service, please be sure to install the Agent. For instructions on installing the Agent and detailed usage of Cloud Monitoring, refer to the Cloud Monitoring guide.
Performance itemsDetailed descriptionunit
Core Usage [IO Wait]Ratio of CPU time spent in wait state (disk wait)%
Core Usage [System]Proportion of CPU time spent in kernel space%
Core Usage [User]Proportion of CPU time spent in user space%
CPU CoresNumber of CPU cores on the hostcnt
CPU Usage [Active]Percentage of CPU time used, excluding Idle and IOWait states%
CPU Usage [Idle]It is the proportion of CPU time spent in idle state.%
CPU Usage [IO Wait]Ratio of CPU time spent in wait state (disk wait)%
CPU Usage [System]Percentage of CPU time used by the kernel%
CPU Usage [User]Percentage of CPU time used in user space%
CPU Usage/Core [Active]Percentage of CPU time used other than Idle and IOWait states%
CPU Usage/Core [Idle]Ratio of CPU time spent in idle state%
CPU Usage/Core [IO Wait]Ratio of CPU time spent in wait state (disk wait)%
CPU Usage/Core [System]Percentage of CPU time used by the kernel%
CPU Usage/Core [User]Percentage of CPU time used in user space%
Disk CPU Usage [IO Request]Proportion of CPU time during which I/O requests to the device were executed%
Disk Queue Size [Avg]Average queue length of requests executed for the devicenum
Disk Read BytesBytes per second read from the devicebytes
Disk Read Bytes [Delta Avg]Average of system.diskio.read.bytes_delta for individual disksbytes
Disk Read Bytes [Delta Max]Maximum system.diskio.read.bytes_delta of individual disksbytes
Disk Read Bytes [Delta Min]minimum system.diskio.read.bytes_delta of individual disksbytes
Disk Read Bytes [Delta Sum]Sum of system.diskio.read.bytes_delta of individual disksbytes
Disk Read Bytes [Delta]Delta of the system.diskio.read.bytes value for each Diskbytes
Disk Read Bytes [Success]Total bytes successfully readbytes
Disk Read RequestsNumber of read requests to the disk device per secondcnt
Disk Read Requests [Delta Avg]Average of system.diskio.read.count_delta for individual diskscnt
Disk Read Requests [Delta Max]Maximum system.diskio.read.count_delta for individual diskscnt
Disk Read Requests [Delta Min]Minimum of individual Disks’ system.diskio.read.count_deltacnt
Disk Read Requests [Delta Sum]Sum of system.diskio.read.count_delta for individual diskscnt
Disk Read Requests [Success Delta]Delta of system.diskio.read.count for each Diskcnt
Disk Read Requests [Success]Total number of successful readscnt
Disk Request Size [Avg]Average size of requests executed on the device (unit: sectors)num
Disk Service Time [Avg]Average service time (ms) of input requests executed on the devicems
Disk Wait Time [Avg]Average time taken for requests executed on the device to be supportedms
Disk Wait Time [Read]Average disk wait timems
Disk Wait Time [Write]Disk average wait timems
Disk Write Bytes [Delta Avg]Average of system.diskio.write.bytes_delta for individual disksbytes
Disk Write Bytes [Delta Max]Maximum system.diskio.write.bytes_delta of individual disksbytes
Disk Write Bytes [Delta Min]Minimum of system.diskio.write.bytes_delta for individual disksbytes
Disk Write Bytes [Delta Sum]Sum of system.diskio.write.bytes_delta of individual disksbytes
Disk Write Bytes [Delta]individual Disk’s system.diskio.write.bytes value deltabytes
Disk Write Bytes [Success]Total bytes successfully writtenbytes
Disk Write RequestsNumber of write requests to the disk device per secondcnt
Disk Write Requests [Delta Avg]Average of system.diskio.write.count_delta for individual diskscnt
Disk Write Requests [Delta Max]Maximum system.diskio.write.count_delta of individual diskscnt
Disk Write Requests [Delta Min]Minimum of system.diskio.write.count_delta for individual diskscnt
Disk Write Requests [Delta Sum]Sum of system.diskio.write.count_delta of individual diskscnt
Disk Write Requests [Success Delta]Delta of system.diskio.write.count for each Diskcnt
Disk Write Requests [Success]Total number of successful writescnt
Disk Writes BytesBytes per second written to the devicebytes
Filesystem Hang Checkfilesystem(local/NFS) hang check (normal:1, abnormal:0)status
Filesystem NodesTotal number of file nodes in the file systemcnt
Filesystem Nodes [Free]Total number of available file nodes in the file systemcnt
Filesystem Size [Available]Disk space (bytes) available to unauthorized usersbytes
Filesystem Size [Free]Available disk space (bytes)bytes
Filesystem Size [Total]Total disk space (bytes)bytes
Filesystem UsageUsed disk space percentage%
Filesystem Usage [Avg]Average of individual filesystem.used.pct%
Filesystem Usage [Inode]inode usage%
Filesystem Usage [Max]Maximum among individual filesystem.used.pct%
Filesystem Usage [Min]minimum among individual filesystem.used.pct%
Filesystem Usage [Total]Total filesystem usage%
Filesystem UsedUsed disk space (bytes)bytes
Filesystem Used [Inode]inode usagebytes
Memory FreeTotal amount of available memory (bytes). Memory used by system cache and buffers is not included.bytes
Memory Free [Actual]Actual usable memory (bytes).bytes
Memory Free [Swap]Available swap memory.bytes
Memory Totaltotal memorybytes
Memory Total [Swap]Total swap memory.bytes
Memory UsagePercentage of used memory%
Memory Usage [Actual]Percentage of memory actually used%
Memory Usage [Cache Swap]cached swap usage%
Memory Usage [Swap]Percentage of used swap memory%
Memory Usedused memorybytes
Memory Used [Actual]Actual used memory (bytes). The value obtained by subtracting used memory from total memory.bytes
Memory Used [Swap]Used swap memorybytes
CollisionsNetwork collisioncnt
Network In BytesNumber of received bytesbytes
Network In Bytes [Delta Avg]Average of system.network.in.bytes_delta for each networkbytes
Network In Bytes [Delta Max]Maximum of system.network.in.bytes_delta for each networkbytes
Network In Bytes [Delta Min]Minimum of system.network.in.bytes_delta for each networkbytes
Network In Bytes [Delta Sum]Sum of system.network.in.bytes_delta for individual networksbytes
Network In Bytes [Delta]Delta of received byte countbytes
Network In DroppedNumber of deleted packets among incoming packetscnt
Network In ErrorsNumber of errors during receptioncnt
Network In PacketsNumber of received packetscnt
Network In Packets [Delta Avg]Average of system.network.in.packets_delta for each networkcnt
Network In Packets [Delta Max]Maximum of system.network.in.packets_delta for each networkcnt
Network In Packets [Delta Min]Minimum of system.network.in.packets_delta for each networkcnt
Network In Packets [Delta Sum]Sum of system.network.in.packets_delta for individual networkscnt
Network In Packets [Delta]Delta of received packet countcnt
Network Out BytesNumber of transmitted bytesbytes
Network Out Bytes [Delta Avg]Average of system.network.out.bytes_delta for each networkbytes
Network Out Bytes [Delta Max]Maximum of system.network.out.bytes_delta for individual networksbytes
Network Out Bytes [Delta Min]Minimum of system.network.out.bytes_delta for individual networksbytes
Network Out Bytes [Delta Sum]Sum of system.network.out.bytes_delta for individual networksbytes
Network Out Bytes [Delta]Delta of transmitted byte countbytes
Network Out DroppedNumber of deleted packets among outgoing packetscnt
Network Out ErrorsNumber of errors during transmissioncnt
Network Out PacketsNumber of transmitted packetscnt
Network Out Packets [Delta Avg]Average of system.network.out.packets_delta for each networkcnt
Network Out Packets [Delta Max]Maximum of system.network.out.packets_delta for each networkcnt
Network Out Packets [Delta Min]Minimum of system.network.out.packets_delta for each networkcnt
Network Out Packets [Delta Sum]Sum of system.network.out.packets_delta for individual networkscnt
Network Out Packets [Delta]Delta of transmitted packet countcnt
Open Connections [TCP]All open TCP connectionscnt
Open Connections [UDP]All open UDP connectionscnt
Port UsageAvailable port usage rate%
SYN Sent SocketsNumber of sockets in SYN_SENT state (when connecting from local to remote)cnt
Kernel PID Maxkernel.pid_max valuecnt
Kernel Thread Maxkernel.threads-max valuecnt
Process CPU UsagePercentage of CPU time consumed by the process since the last update%
Process CPU Usage/CorePercentage of CPU time used by the process since the last event%
Process Memory UsageThe proportion of main memory (RAM) occupied by a process%
Process Memory UsedResident Set size. The amount of memory a process occupies in RAM.bytes
Process PIDprocess pidpid
Process PPIDParent process PIDpid
Processes [Dead]Number of dead processescnt
Processes [Idle]Number of idle processescnt
Processes [Running]Number of running processescnt
Processes [Sleeping]sleeping processes countcnt
Processes [Stopped]number of stopped processescnt
Processes [Total]Total number of processescnt
Processes [Unknown]Number of processes with an unknown or unsearchable statuscnt
Processes [Zombie]zombie processes countcnt
Running Process Usageprocess usage%
Running ProcessesNumber of running processescnt
Running Thread UsageThread usage%
Running ThreadsTotal number of threads running in running processescnt
Context Switchescontext switch count (per second)cnt
Load/Core [1 min]The load over the last 1 minute divided by the number of corescnt
Load/Core [15 min]The load over the last 15 minutes divided by the number of corescnt
Load/Core [5 min]The load over the last 5 minutes divided by the number of corescnt
Multipaths [Active]External storage connection path status = active countcnt
Multipaths [Failed]External storage connection path status = failed countcnt
Multipaths [Faulty]External storage connection path status = faulty countcnt
NTP Offsetmeasured offset of the last sample (the time difference between the NTP server and the local environment)num
Run Queue LengthExecution queue lengthnum
UptimeOS uptime (uptime). (milliseconds)ms
Context SwitchiesCPU context switch count (per second)cnt
Disk Read Bytes [Sec]Bytes read per second from the Windows logical diskcnt
Disk Read Time [Avg]Average data read time (seconds)sec
Disk Transfer Time [Avg]Disk average wait timesec
Disk UsageDisk usage%
Disk Write Bytes [Sec]Number of bytes written in one second on a Windows logical diskcnt
Disk Write Time [Avg]Average data write time (seconds)sec
Pagingfile UsagePaging file usage%
Pool Used [Non Paged]Nonpaged Pool usage in kernel memorybytes
Pool Used [Paged]Paged Pool usage in kernel memorybytes
Process [Running]Number of currently running processescnt
Threads [Running]Current number of running threadscnt
Threads [Waiting]Number of threads waiting for processor timecnt
Table. Bare Metal Server monitoring metrics (available when the Agent is installed)

4.2 - How-to guides

Users can create the service by entering the required information for a Bare Metal Server and selecting detailed options through the Samsung Cloud Platform Console.

Create Bare Metal Server

You can create and use the Bare Metal Server service from the Samsung Cloud Platform Console.

To create a Bare Metal Server, follow these steps.

  1. Click the All Services > Compute > Bare Metal Server menu. Navigate to the Service Home page of the Bare Metal Server.
  2. On the Service Home page, click the Create Bare Metal Server button. You will be taken to the Create Bare Metal Server page.
  3. On the Bare Metal Server Creation page, enter the information required to create the service and select detailed options.
    • Select the required information in the Image and Version Selection area.
      Category
      Required status
      Detailed description
      imageRequiredSelect the type of image provided
      • RHEL
      • Rocky Linux
      • Ubuntu
      • Windows
      Image versionRequiredSelect version of the chosen image
      • Provide a list of versions for the supplied server image
      Table. Bare Metal Server image and version input fields
    • Enter or select the required information in the Service Information Input area.
      Category
      Required status
      Detailed description
      Number of serversRequiredNumber of Bare Metal Server instances to create simultaneously
      • Only numeric input is allowed, and it must be between 1 and 5
      Service Type > Server TypeRequiredBare Metal Server server type
      • Select the desired vCPU, Memory, Disk specifications
      Service Type > Planned ComputeRequiredStatus of resources with Planned Compute configured
      • In Use: Number of resources with Planned Compute that are currently in use
      • Configured: Number of resources with Planned Compute configured
      • Coverage Preview: Amount applied per resource by Planned Compute
      • Create Planned Compute Service: Go to the Planned Compute application page
      Automation accountRequiredAutomatically create an account to provide automation features after creating a Bare Metal Server
      • This account is used only for inter-system interfaces
      • The password is encrypted and cannot be accessed from outside the system
      • If the account is deleted, network changes and some automation functions may be restricted
      Table. Bare Metal Server Service Information Input Items
    • In the Required Information Input area, enter or select the necessary information.
      Category
      Required
      Detailed description
      Administrator accountRequiredSet the administrator account and password to be used when connecting to the server
      • RHEL and Ubuntu OS are provided with a fixed root account
      • For Windows OS, enter 5 to 20 characters using lowercase letters and numbers
        • Administrator Not allowed
      Server nameRequiredWhen the selected number of servers is 1, enter a name to distinguish the Bare Metal Server
      • Set the hostname to the entered server name
      • Start with a lowercase English letter, and use lowercase letters, numbers, and special characters (-) to enter between 3 and 15 characters
      • Must not end with a special character (-)
      Server name PrefixRequiredEnter a prefix to distinguish each Bare Metal Server generated when the selected number of servers is 2 or more
      • Automatically generated in the form of user input value (prefix) + ‘-###
      • Must start with a lowercase English letter and be 3 to 15 characters long, using lowercase letters, numbers, and special characters (-)
      • Must not end with a special character (-)
      Network SettingsRequiredSet the network where the Bare Metal Server will be installed
      • Select a pre‑created VPC
      • General Subnet: Select a pre‑created general Subnet
        • IP can be set to auto‑generate or user input, and if input is selected, the user enters the IP manually
      • NAT: Available only when there is a single server and the VPC is attached to an Internet Gateway
        • Checking the option allows selection of a NAT IP
      • NAT IP: Select a NAT IP
        • If no NAT IP is available, click the Create New button to generate a Public IP
        • Refresh button to view and select the created Public IP
        • Creating a Public IP incurs charges according to the Public IP pricing policy
      • Local Subnet (optional): Choose to use a local Subnet
        • It is not a required element for creating the service
        • Select a pre‑created local Subnet
        • IP can be set to auto‑generate or user input, and if input is selected, the user enters the IP manually
      Table. Required information input fields for Bare Metal Server
Warning

Please use a firewall, etc., to control traffic access for the Bare Metal Server. Security Groups are not provided.
Bare Metal Server’s firewall can only be used to control traffic between the Bare Metal Server and Virtual Server. To use the Bare Metal Server’s firewall, follow the steps below.

  1. Separate the VPC of Bare Metal Server: Separate them so that Bare Metal Server and Virtual Server do not use the same VPC.
  2. Create Transit Gateway: Create a Transit Gateway.
    • Integration between the Virtual Server’s VPC and the Bare Metal Server’s VPC uses a Transit Gateway.
    • When creating a Transit Gateway integration in the VPC of a Bare Metal Server, you must also create the Bare Metal Server’s firewall.
  3. Firewall Rule registration: Add a rule to the Bare Metal Server’s firewall.
  1. On the Bare Metal Server Creation page, in the Additional Information Input area, enter or select the required information.
    Category
    Required
    Detailed description
    Local disk partitionSelectionSet usage of local disk partitions
    • Up to 10 partitions can be created, including the root partition
    • Up to 90% of total capacity can be used
    • After checking Use, partition information can be set
    • Set root partition information
      • Partition type: flat or lvm selectable
      • Partition name: enter partition name
        • Partition type can be entered only when it is lvm
        • Enter up to 15 characters starting with a letter and containing letters, numbers, and special characters (-_)
      • Partition size: enter at least 50 GB
      • Filesystem type: select according to the image used
        • For RHEL, Rocky Linux: xfs, ext4
        • For Ubuntu: ext4, xfs, btrfs
        • For SLES: btrfs, xfs, ext4
      • Mount point: start with special character / and include letters, numbers, and special characters (-_) up to 15 characters
        • Filesystem type cannot be entered when it is swap
      • Available capacity: 90% of the default disk capacity provided when selecting a server
        • When setting Partition size, the remaining capacity is automatically calculated and displayed
        • The total size of partition disks cannot exceed the available capacity
    • Set additional partition information
      • Partition type: flat or lvm selectable
      • Partition name: enter partition name
        • Partition type can be entered only when it is lvm
        • Enter up to 15 characters starting with a letter and containing letters, numbers, and special characters (-_)
      • Partition size: enter at least 1 GB
      • Filesystem type: select according to the image used>
        • For RHEL, Rocky Linux: xfs, ext4, swap
        • For Ubuntu: ext4, xfs, btrfs, swap
        • For SLES: btrfs, xfs, ext4, swap
      • Mount point: start with special character / and include letters, numbers, and special characters (-_) up to 15 characters
        • Filesystem type cannot be entered when it is swap
      • Available capacity: 90% of the default disk capacity provided when selecting a server
        • When setting Partition size, the remaining capacity is automatically calculated and displayed
        • The total size of partition disks cannot exceed the available capacity
    Placement GroupSelectionServers belonging to the same Placement group are distributed across different racks
    • Provides distributed placement for up to two servers belonging to the same Placement group
      • For distributed placement of three or more servers, add additional Placement groups
    • Applicable only at initial creation and cannot be modified afterward
    • If you terminate the last server in a Placement group, that Placement group is automatically deleted
    LockSelectionUsing a lock prevents accidental actions that could terminate, start, or stop the server.
    Hyper ThreadingSelectionSet the logical core count to operate at twice the number of physical cores
    • To turn off Hyper-Threading, clear the checkbox
    • Cannot be changed after server creation
    Init ScriptSelectionScript to run when the server starts
    • The Init Script must be selected differently depending on the image type
      • For Windows: select Batch Script
      • For Linux: Shell Script
    Table. Bare Metal Server additional information entry fields
  2. Summary Check the detailed information and estimated billing amount generated in the panel, and click the Create button.
    • Once creation is complete, check the created resources on the Bare Metal Server List page.

Bare Metal Server Check detailed information

Bare Metal Server service allows you to view and edit the full resource list and detailed information. The Bare Metal Server Details page consists of Details, Tags, Activity Log tabs.

To view detailed information about the Bare Metal Server, follow these steps.

  1. All Services > Compute > Bare Metal Server Click the menu. Navigate to the Service Home page of Bare Metal Server.
  2. On the Service Home page, click the Bare Metal Server menu. You will be taken to the Bare Metal Server List page.
  3. Bare Metal Server List page, click the resource to view detailed information. You will be taken to the Bare Metal Server Details page.
    • The Bare Metal Server Details page displays status information and additional feature information, and consists of Details, Tags, Activity Log tabs.
      CategoryDetailed description
      Bare Metal Server statusStatus of user-created Bare Metal Server
      • Creating: state while the server is being created
      • Running:: state after creation, ready for use
      • Editing:: state while IP is being changed
      • Unknown: error state
      • Starting: state while the server is starting
      • Stopping: state while the server is stopping
      • Stopped: state after the server has stopped
      • Terminating: state while termination is in progress
      • Terminated: state after termination is complete
      Server controlButton to change server status
      • Start: Start a stopped server
      • Stop: Stop a running server
      Service terminationCancel service button
      Table. Bare Metal Server status information and additional features

Detailed Information

Bare Metal Server List page lets you view detailed information of the selected resource and modify it if necessary.

CategoryDetailed description
serviceService name
Resource TypeResource Type
SRNUnique resource ID in Samsung Cloud Platform
  • In Bare Metal Server, it refers to the Bare Metal Server SRN
Resource nameResource Name
  • In Bare Metal Server, it refers to the server name
Resource IDUnique resource ID in the service
constructorUser who created the service
Creation date and timeService creation date and time
editorUser who edited the service information
Modification dateDate and time the service information was modified
Server nameServer name
Image/VersionServer OS image and version
Server typeDisplay vCPU and memory information
Planned ComputeResource status with Planned Compute configured
LockDisplay whether Lock is enabled or disabled
  • When Lock is enabled, it prevents server termination/start/stop operations, avoiding actions caused by mistakes.
  • If you need to change the Lock attribute value, click the Edit button to configure.
Hyper ThreadingIndicates whether Hyper Threading is enabled/disabled
  • Hyper Threading is a setting that makes the logical core count operate at twice the number of physical cores
NetworkNetwork information of the Bare Metal Server
  • VPC, standard Subnet, IP and status, Public NAT IP and status, Private NAT IP and status
  • If you need to change the IP, click the Edit button to configure
Local SubnetLocal Subnet information of the Bare Metal Server
  • Local Subnet name, Local Subnet IP, Vlan ID, Interface Name
  • If you need to add a local Subnet, click the Add button to configure
Block StorageBlock Storage information connected to the server
  • Volume name, disk type, capacity, status
  • Clicking the Add button takes you to the Block Storage creation screen
Init ScriptView the Init Script content entered when creating the server
Table. Bare Metal Server detailed information tab items

tag

On the Bare Metal Server List page, you can view the tag information of the selected resource, and add, modify, or delete it.

CategoryDetailed description
Tag listTag list
  • You can view the Key and Value information of the tag
  • Up to 50 tags can be added per resource
  • When entering a tag, you can search and select from the list of previously created Keys and Values
Table. Bare Metal Server Tag Tab Items

Job History

Bare Metal Server List page allows you to view the operation history of the selected resource.

CategoryDetailed description
Task History ListResource Change History
  • Operation Time, Resource ID, Resource Name, Operation Details, Event Topic, Operation Result, Check Operator Information
Table. Bare Metal Server Work History Tab Detailed Information Items

Bare Metal Server Resource Management

If you need server control and management functions for the created Bare Metal Server resources, you can perform the tasks on the Bare Metal Server List or Bare Metal Server Details page.

Bare Metal Server Operation Control

You can start, stop, and restart a running Bare Metal Server.

To control the operation of a Bare Metal Server, follow these steps.

  1. Click the All Services > Compute > Bare Metal Server menu. You will be taken to the Service Home page of the Bare Metal Server.
  2. On the Service Home page, click the Bare Metal Server menu. You will be taken to the Bare Metal Server List page.
  3. Bare Metal Server List page allows you to select multiple servers and control them simultaneously using the Start and Stop buttons at the top of the table.
    • Bare Metal Server Details page also allows you to start and stop the server.
  4. On the Bare Metal Server List page, click the resource to control its operation and navigate to the Bare Metal Server Details page.
  5. Check the server status and complete the changes using each Server Management button.
    • Start: Starts a stopped server.
    • Stop: Stops the running server.
Notice

When a Bare Metal Server is stopped, the server’s power is turned off.

  • Since it may affect running applications or storage, we recommend shutting down the OS before stopping.
  • After shutting down the OS, be sure to also stop it in the Console.
Unable to control operation
  • If a Bare Metal Server cannot be started when a start request is made, see the following.
    • When lock is set: Change the lock setting to disabled, then try again.
    • If the Bare Metal Server’s status is not Stopped: Change the Bare Metal Server’s status to Stopped, then try again.
  • If a stop request for a Bare Metal Server cannot be fulfilled, see the following.
    • When Lock is set: Change the Lock setting to disabled, then try again.
    • If the Bare Metal Server’s status is not Running: Change the Bare Metal Server’s status to Running, then try again.

Add Block Storage

You can add Block Storage to a Bare Metal Server.

To add Block Storage, follow the steps below.

  1. Click the All Services > Compute > Bare Metal Server menu. Navigate to the Service Home page of the Bare Metal Server.
  2. Click the Bare Metal Server menu on the Service Home page. You will be taken to the Bare Metal Server List page.
  3. On the Bare Metal Server List page, click the server to which you want to add Block Storage. You will be taken to the Bare Metal Server Details page.
  4. On the Bare Metal Server Details page, click the Add button in the Block Storage section.
  5. When the popup confirming the addition of Block Storage opens, click the Confirm button. You will be taken to the Block Storage (BM) Creation page.
  6. On the Block Storage(BM) Creation page, enter the information required to create the service and create a Block Storage.
  7. Go to the Bare Metal Server Details page where Block Storage was added and verify that Block Storage has been added.
Caution
After creating a Block Storage, you cannot increase its capacity.

Terminate Bare Metal Server

Terminating an unused Bare Metal Server can reduce operating costs. However, terminating a Bare Metal Server may cause the running service to stop immediately, so you should proceed with termination only after fully considering the impact of service interruption.

Caution
Please note that data cannot be recovered after terminating the service.
Warning
If you terminate servers one by one that have Block Storage (BM) attached, the servers will be terminated but the attached Block Storage (BM) will not, so terminate it directly from the Block Storage (BM).

To terminate a Bare Metal Server, follow the steps below.

  1. Click the All Services > Compute > Bare Metal Server menu. Navigate to the Service Home page of the Bare Metal Server.
  2. Click the Bare Metal Server menu on the Service Home page. You will be taken to the Bare Metal Server List page.
  3. Bare Metal Server List page, select the resource to terminate, and click the Terminate Service button.
    • You can select multiple resources and delete them simultaneously.
    • You can also delete it by clicking the Service Termination button on the Bare metal Server Details page of the resource to be terminated.
  4. When termination is complete, verify on the Bare Metal Server list page that the resource has been terminated.

Cancellation constraints

If termination is not possible when requesting cancellation of a Bare Metal Server, a popup will inform you. Please refer to the cases below.

Cancellation not possible
  • When Block Storage(BM) is attached (simultaneous termination of two or more servers): Please detach the Block Storage(BM) first.

  • When File Storage is connected: First disconnect the File Storage connection.

  • When Lock is set: Change the Lock setting to disabled, then try again.

  • If there are resources connected to Backup Agent or Load Balancer: First disconnect the connections of those resources.

  • If resource management tasks for the Bare Metal Server are in progress on the same account: After the Bare Metal Server resource management task is completed, please try again.

  • If the Bare Metal Server’s status is not Running or Stopped: Change the Bare Metal Server’s status to Running or Stopped, then try again.

  • If the selection includes a server that cannot be terminated simultaneously: Select only resources that can be terminated and try again.

Configure local Subnet

After completing the creation of a Bare Metal Server, when adding a local Subnet on the Bare Metal Server Details page, the user must directly configure the network settings of the local Subnet.

first connection(kr-west)

There is no local Subnet currently connected to the Bare Metal Server, and if you are adding the first connection, follow the guide below.

Caution

This guide applies to kr-west (Korea West) when adding the first local Subnet connection to the server.

Linux - Configuring Subnet on Ubuntu

To add a local Subnet and configure the network on an Ubuntu operating system, follow these steps.

  1. On the Bare Metal Server Details page, check the Interface Name.

  2. Retrieve the network configuration information.

    Color mode
    [root@localhost ~]# vi /etc/netplan/50-cloud-init.yaml
    network:
    ethernets:
     ens2f1:
     match:
     macaddress: 68:05:ca:d4:09:91
     mtu: 1500
     set-name: ens2f1
     ens4f1:
     match:
     macaddress: 68:05:ca:d4:09:01
     mtu: 1500
     set-name: ens4f1
    [root@localhost ~]# vi /etc/netplan/50-cloud-init.yaml
    network:
    ethernets:
     ens2f1:
     match:
     macaddress: 68:05:ca:d4:09:91
     mtu: 1500
     set-name: ens2f1
     ens4f1:
     match:
     macaddress: 68:05:ca:d4:09:01
     mtu: 1500
     set-name: ens4f1
    Code block. View network configuration file

  3. After adding a new VLAN, set the IP for the bonding configuration.

    • Replace the ID and IP in the example code with the assigned ID and IP.
      Color mode
      [root@localhost ~]# vi /etc/netplan/50-cloud-init.yaml
      network:
          bonds:
              bond-mgt:
                  interfaces:
                  - ens2f1      // **Bare Metal Server Details** page: enter the Interface Name you verified.
                  - ens4f1      // **Bare Metal Server Details** page: enter the Interface Name you verified.
                  mtu: 1500
                  parameters:
                      mii-monitor-interval: 100
                      mode: active-backup
                      transmit-hash-policy: layer2
          ethernets:
              ens2f1:
                  match:
                  macaddress: 68:05:ca:d4:09:91
                  mtu: 1500
                  set-name: ens2f1
              ens4f1:
                  match:
                  macaddress: 68:05:ca:d4:09:01
                  mtu: 1500
                  set-name: ens4f1
          vlans:
              bond-mgt.20:   // Enter the Vlan ID you verified in the SCP Console instead of 20.
              addresses:
                  - 192.168.0.10/24 // Set it to the local Subnet IP confirmed in the SCP Console.
                  id: 20    // Set it to the VLAN ID verified in the SCP Console.
                  link: bond-mgt
                  mtu: 1500
      [root@localhost ~]# vi /etc/netplan/50-cloud-init.yaml
      network:
          bonds:
              bond-mgt:
                  interfaces:
                  - ens2f1      // **Bare Metal Server Details** page: enter the Interface Name you verified.
                  - ens4f1      // **Bare Metal Server Details** page: enter the Interface Name you verified.
                  mtu: 1500
                  parameters:
                      mii-monitor-interval: 100
                      mode: active-backup
                      transmit-hash-policy: layer2
          ethernets:
              ens2f1:
                  match:
                  macaddress: 68:05:ca:d4:09:91
                  mtu: 1500
                  set-name: ens2f1
              ens4f1:
                  match:
                  macaddress: 68:05:ca:d4:09:01
                  mtu: 1500
                  set-name: ens4f1
          vlans:
              bond-mgt.20:   // Enter the Vlan ID you verified in the SCP Console instead of 20.
              addresses:
                  - 192.168.0.10/24 // Set it to the local Subnet IP confirmed in the SCP Console.
                  id: 20    // Set it to the VLAN ID verified in the SCP Console.
                  link: bond-mgt
                  mtu: 1500
      Code block. IP configuration
  4. Apply the changes to the system.

    Color mode
    # netplan apply
    # netplan apply
    Code block. Apply changes

  5. Check the interface status.

    Color mode
    # ip a
    or
    # bash /usr/local/bin/ip.sh
    # ip a
    or
    # bash /usr/local/bin/ip.sh
    Code block. Interface lookup

Linux – Configuring Subnet on CentOS/Red Hat

After adding a local Subnet on a CentOS/Red Hat operating system, follow these steps to configure the network.

Caution
If you set the interface name incorrectly, be careful because the IP information currently in use may be deleted.
  1. On the Bare Metal Server Details page, check the Interface Name.

  2. Modify the following command and execute it.

    Color mode
    #!/usr/bin/bash
    
    IP_ADDR="10.1.1.3/24"   // Set the local Subnet IP as verified in the Console.
    VLAN_ID="7"             // Set the Vlan ID you verified in the console.
    
    BOND_NAME="bond-mgt"
    BOND_IF_name1="ens2f1"  // **Bare Metal Server Details** Enter the Interface Name as shown on the page.
    BOND_IF_name2="ens4f0"  // **Bare Metal Server Details** page, enter the Interface Name you verified.
    
    
    # Delete Connection
    nmcli con down "Bond ${BOND_NAME}"
    nmcli con del  "Bond ${BOND_NAME}"
    
    nmcli con down "System ${BOND_IF_name1}"
    nmcli con down "System ${BOND_IF_name2}"
    
    nmcli con del  "System ${BOND_IF_name1}"
    nmcli con del  "System ${BOND_IF_name2}"
    
    
    # Create Bonding
    nmcli con add con-name ${BOND_NAME} type bond ifname ${BOND_NAME}
    nmcli conn mod ${BOND_NAME} con-name "Bond ${BOND_NAME}"
    nmcli conn mod "Bond ${BOND_NAME}" ipv4.method    disabled
    nmcli conn mod "Bond ${BOND_NAME}" ipv6.method    ignore
    nmcli conn mod "Bond ${BOND_NAME}" connect.autoconnect yes
    
    nmcli conn mod "Bond ${BOND_NAME}" +bond.options mode=active-backup      \
                                       +bond.options xmit_hash_policy=layer2
                                       +bond.options miimon=100
                                       +bond.options num_grat_arp=1          \
                                       +bond.options downdelay=0
                                       +bond.options updelay=0
    
    # Assign bond-slave
    nmcli conn add type bond-slave ifname ${BOND_IF_name1}  con-name "${BOND_IF_name1}" master ${BOND_NAME}
    nmcli conn mod ${BOND_IF_name1} con-name "System ${BOND_IF_name1}"
    
    nmcli conn add type bond-slave ifname ${BOND_IF_name2}  con-name "${BOND_IF_name2}" master ${BOND_NAME}
    nmcli conn mod ${BOND_IF_name2} con-name "System ${BOND_IF_name2}"
    
    # Connection UP
    nmcli conn up   "Bond ${BOND_NAME}"
    # add vlan
    nmcli conn add type vlan ifname "${BOND_NAME}.${VLAN_ID}" con-name "${BOND_NAME}.${VLAN_ID}" id ${VLAN_ID} dev ${BOND_NAME}
    nmcli con  mod ${BOND_NAME}.${VLAN_ID} con-name "Vlan ${BOND_NAME}.${VLAN_ID}"
    nmcli con  mod "Vlan ${BOND_NAME}.${VLAN_ID}" ipv4.addresses ${IP_ADDR}
    nmcli con  mod "Vlan ${BOND_NAME}.${VLAN_ID}" ipv4.method manual
    nmcli con  mod "Vlan ${BOND_NAME}.${VLAN_ID}" ipv6.method "ignore"
    nmcli con  mod "Vlan ${BOND_NAME}.${VLAN_ID}" connect.autoconnect yes
    nmcli con  up  "Vlan ${BOND_NAME}.${VLAN_ID}"
    nmcli      device reapply ${BOND_NAME}.${VLAN_ID}
    #!/usr/bin/bash
    
    IP_ADDR="10.1.1.3/24"   // Set the local Subnet IP as verified in the Console.
    VLAN_ID="7"             // Set the Vlan ID you verified in the console.
    
    BOND_NAME="bond-mgt"
    BOND_IF_name1="ens2f1"  // **Bare Metal Server Details** Enter the Interface Name as shown on the page.
    BOND_IF_name2="ens4f0"  // **Bare Metal Server Details** page, enter the Interface Name you verified.
    
    
    # Delete Connection
    nmcli con down "Bond ${BOND_NAME}"
    nmcli con del  "Bond ${BOND_NAME}"
    
    nmcli con down "System ${BOND_IF_name1}"
    nmcli con down "System ${BOND_IF_name2}"
    
    nmcli con del  "System ${BOND_IF_name1}"
    nmcli con del  "System ${BOND_IF_name2}"
    
    
    # Create Bonding
    nmcli con add con-name ${BOND_NAME} type bond ifname ${BOND_NAME}
    nmcli conn mod ${BOND_NAME} con-name "Bond ${BOND_NAME}"
    nmcli conn mod "Bond ${BOND_NAME}" ipv4.method    disabled
    nmcli conn mod "Bond ${BOND_NAME}" ipv6.method    ignore
    nmcli conn mod "Bond ${BOND_NAME}" connect.autoconnect yes
    
    nmcli conn mod "Bond ${BOND_NAME}" +bond.options mode=active-backup      \
                                       +bond.options xmit_hash_policy=layer2
                                       +bond.options miimon=100
                                       +bond.options num_grat_arp=1          \
                                       +bond.options downdelay=0
                                       +bond.options updelay=0
    
    # Assign bond-slave
    nmcli conn add type bond-slave ifname ${BOND_IF_name1}  con-name "${BOND_IF_name1}" master ${BOND_NAME}
    nmcli conn mod ${BOND_IF_name1} con-name "System ${BOND_IF_name1}"
    
    nmcli conn add type bond-slave ifname ${BOND_IF_name2}  con-name "${BOND_IF_name2}" master ${BOND_NAME}
    nmcli conn mod ${BOND_IF_name2} con-name "System ${BOND_IF_name2}"
    
    # Connection UP
    nmcli conn up   "Bond ${BOND_NAME}"
    # add vlan
    nmcli conn add type vlan ifname "${BOND_NAME}.${VLAN_ID}" con-name "${BOND_NAME}.${VLAN_ID}" id ${VLAN_ID} dev ${BOND_NAME}
    nmcli con  mod ${BOND_NAME}.${VLAN_ID} con-name "Vlan ${BOND_NAME}.${VLAN_ID}"
    nmcli con  mod "Vlan ${BOND_NAME}.${VLAN_ID}" ipv4.addresses ${IP_ADDR}
    nmcli con  mod "Vlan ${BOND_NAME}.${VLAN_ID}" ipv4.method manual
    nmcli con  mod "Vlan ${BOND_NAME}.${VLAN_ID}" ipv6.method "ignore"
    nmcli con  mod "Vlan ${BOND_NAME}.${VLAN_ID}" connect.autoconnect yes
    nmcli con  up  "Vlan ${BOND_NAME}.${VLAN_ID}"
    nmcli      device reapply ${BOND_NAME}.${VLAN_ID}
    Code block. IP configuration script

  3. Check the interface status.

    Color mode
    # ip a
    or
    # bash /usr/local/bin/ip.sh
    # ip a
    or
    # bash /usr/local/bin/ip.sh
    Code block. Interface lookup

Configuring Subnet on Windows

After adding a local Subnet on the Windows operating system, follow these steps to configure the network.

  1. Windows Start icon, right-click it, then run the Windows PowerShell(Administrator) program.

  2. On the Bare Metal Server Details page, check the Interface Name.

  3. Run ncpa.cpl from the Windows Run menu.

    Figure

  4. Check whether the interface is enabled, and enable it if necessary.

    • Activate the Interface Name confirmed on the Bare Metal Server Details page.
      Figure
  5. Create a teaming.

    Color mode
    PS C:\> New-NetLbfoTeam Name bond-mgt TeamMembers ens2f1,ens4f1
    PS C:\> Set-NetLbfoTeam Name bond-mgt LoadBalancingAlgorithm Dynamic
    PS C:\> New-NetLbfoTeam Name bond-mgt TeamMembers ens2f1,ens4f1
    PS C:\> Set-NetLbfoTeam Name bond-mgt LoadBalancingAlgorithm Dynamic
    Code block. Create Teaming
    Figure

  6. After adding a new VLAN, configure the IP.

    • Enter the VLAN ID and local Subnet IP verified on the Bare Metal Server Details page.
      Color mode
      PS C:\> Add-NetLbfoTeamNIC -Team bond_bond-mgt -VlanID 20 -Name bond-mgt.20
      PS C:\> Get-NetAdapter
      PS C:\> netsh interface ip set address bond-mgt.20 static 192.168.0.10/24
      PS C:\> Add-NetLbfoTeamNIC -Team bond_bond-mgt -VlanID 20 -Name bond-mgt.20
      PS C:\> Get-NetAdapter
      PS C:\> netsh interface ip set address bond-mgt.20 static 192.168.0.10/24
      Code block. Windows IP configuration
  7. In the Windows Run menu, execute ncpa.cpl to check the interface status.

First connection(kr-south)

If there is no local Subnet already connected to the Bare Metal Server and you are adding the first connection, follow the guide below.

Caution

This guide is for kr-south(Korea region) when adding the first local Subnet connection to the server.

Linux - Configuring Subnet on Ubuntu

To add a local Subnet and configure the network on an Ubuntu operating system, follow these steps.

  1. After adding a new VLAN, set the IP.

    • Change the ID and IP in the example code to the assigned ID and IP.
      Color mode
      [root@localhost ~]# vi /etc/netplan/50-cloud-init.yaml
      network:
          bonds:
              bond-mgt:
                  interfaces:
                  - ens2f1
                  - ens4f1
                  mtu: 1500
                  parameters:
                      mii-monitor-interval: 100
                      mode: active-backup
                      transmit-hash-policy: layer2
          ethernets:
              ens2f1:
                  match:
                  macaddress: 68:05:ca:d4:09:91
                  mtu: 1500
                  set-name: ens2f1
              ens4f1:
                  match:
                  macaddress: 68:05:ca:d4:09:01
                  mtu: 1500
                  set-name: ens4f1
          vlans:
              bond-mgt.20:
              addresses:
                  - 192.168.0.10/24
                  id: 20
                  link: bond-mgt
                  mtu: 1500
          vlans:
              bond-mgt.21: // Enter the VLAN ID you verified in the console instead of 21.
              addresses:
                  - 192.168.0.20/24 // Set it to the local Subnet IP you verified in the Console.
                  id: 21    // Set to the VLAN ID verified in the console.
                  link: bond-mgt
                  mtu: 1500
      [root@localhost ~]# vi /etc/netplan/50-cloud-init.yaml
      network:
          bonds:
              bond-mgt:
                  interfaces:
                  - ens2f1
                  - ens4f1
                  mtu: 1500
                  parameters:
                      mii-monitor-interval: 100
                      mode: active-backup
                      transmit-hash-policy: layer2
          ethernets:
              ens2f1:
                  match:
                  macaddress: 68:05:ca:d4:09:91
                  mtu: 1500
                  set-name: ens2f1
              ens4f1:
                  match:
                  macaddress: 68:05:ca:d4:09:01
                  mtu: 1500
                  set-name: ens4f1
          vlans:
              bond-mgt.20:
              addresses:
                  - 192.168.0.10/24
                  id: 20
                  link: bond-mgt
                  mtu: 1500
          vlans:
              bond-mgt.21: // Enter the VLAN ID you verified in the console instead of 21.
              addresses:
                  - 192.168.0.20/24 // Set it to the local Subnet IP you verified in the Console.
                  id: 21    // Set to the VLAN ID verified in the console.
                  link: bond-mgt
                  mtu: 1500
      Code block. Add VLAN and configure IP
  2. Apply the changes to the system.

    Color mode
    # netplan apply
    # netplan apply
    Code block. Reflect changes.

  3. Check the interface status.

    Color mode
    # ip a
    or
    # bash /usr/local/bin/ip.sh
    # ip a
    or
    # bash /usr/local/bin/ip.sh
    Code block. Interface lookup

Linux – Configuring Subnet on CentOS/Red Hat

After adding a local Subnet on a CentOS/Red Hat operating system, follow these steps to configure the network.

Caution
Be careful, as adding a local subnet or misconfiguring the network may delete the IP information currently in use.
  1. Check the Bond Name for the local Subnet.
    Color mode
    # sh /usr/local/bin/ip.sh
    # sh /usr/local/bin/ip.sh
    Code block. Verify bonding
  2. Modify the following command and execute it.
    Color mode
    #!/usr/bin/bash
    
    IP_ADDR="10.1.1.3/24"   // Set the local Subnet IP as observed in the console.
    VLAN_ID="7"             // Set the Vlan ID you verified in the console.
    
    BOND_NAME="bond-mgt" // Set the Bond Name identified in step 1.
    
    # add vlan
    nmcli conn add type vlan ifname "${BOND_NAME}.${VLAN_ID}" con-name "${BOND_NAME}.${VLAN_ID}" id ${VLAN_ID} dev ${BOND_NAME}
    nmcli con  mod ${BOND_NAME}.${VLAN_ID} con-name "Vlan ${BOND_NAME}.${VLAN_ID}"
    nmcli con  mod "Vlan ${BOND_NAME}.${VLAN_ID}" ipv4.addresses ${IP_ADDR}
    nmcli con  mod "Vlan ${BOND_NAME}.${VLAN_ID}" ipv4.method manual
    nmcli con  mod "Vlan ${BOND_NAME}.${VLAN_ID}" ipv6.method "ignore"
    nmcli con  mod "Vlan ${BOND_NAME}.${VLAN_ID}" connect.autoconnect yes
    nmcli con  up  "Vlan ${BOND_NAME}.${VLAN_ID}"
    
    nmcli      device reapply ${BOND_NAME}.${VLAN_ID}
    #!/usr/bin/bash
    
    IP_ADDR="10.1.1.3/24"   // Set the local Subnet IP as observed in the console.
    VLAN_ID="7"             // Set the Vlan ID you verified in the console.
    
    BOND_NAME="bond-mgt" // Set the Bond Name identified in step 1.
    
    # add vlan
    nmcli conn add type vlan ifname "${BOND_NAME}.${VLAN_ID}" con-name "${BOND_NAME}.${VLAN_ID}" id ${VLAN_ID} dev ${BOND_NAME}
    nmcli con  mod ${BOND_NAME}.${VLAN_ID} con-name "Vlan ${BOND_NAME}.${VLAN_ID}"
    nmcli con  mod "Vlan ${BOND_NAME}.${VLAN_ID}" ipv4.addresses ${IP_ADDR}
    nmcli con  mod "Vlan ${BOND_NAME}.${VLAN_ID}" ipv4.method manual
    nmcli con  mod "Vlan ${BOND_NAME}.${VLAN_ID}" ipv6.method "ignore"
    nmcli con  mod "Vlan ${BOND_NAME}.${VLAN_ID}" connect.autoconnect yes
    nmcli con  up  "Vlan ${BOND_NAME}.${VLAN_ID}"
    
    nmcli      device reapply ${BOND_NAME}.${VLAN_ID}
    Code block. IP configuration script
  3. Check the interface status.
    Color mode
    # ip a
    or
    # bash /usr/local/bin/ip.sh
    # ip a
    or
    # bash /usr/local/bin/ip.sh
    Code block. Interface lookup

Configuring Subnet on Windows

After adding a local Subnet on the Windows operating system, follow these steps to configure the network.

  1. Windows Start icon, right-click it, then run the Windows PowerShell(Administrator) program.

  2. Check the Teaming name for the local Subnet.

    Color mode
    PS C:\> Get-NetAdapter
    PS C:\> Get-NetAdapter
    Code block. Check Windows interface

  3. After adding a new VLAN, configure the IP.

    • Enter the Teaming name verified in step 2, and the Vlan ID and local Subnet IP verified in the Console.
      Color mode
      PS C:\> Add-NetLbfoTeamNIC -Team bond_bond-mgt -VlanID 20 -Name bond-mgt.20
      PS C:\> Get-NetAdapter
      PS C:\> netsh interface ip set address bond-mgt.20 static 192.168.0.10/24
      PS C:\> Add-NetLbfoTeamNIC -Team bond_bond-mgt -VlanID 20 -Name bond-mgt.20
      PS C:\> Get-NetAdapter
      PS C:\> netsh interface ip set address bond-mgt.20 static 192.168.0.10/24
      code block. Create Teaming
  4. Run ncpa.cpl from the Windows Run menu to check the interface status.

    Figure

Add second connection (kr-west, kr-south)

If there is a local subnet connected to the Bare Metal Server, the guide for the second additional connection is below.

Since a Bonding was already created when connecting the first local Subnet, there is no need to create a Bonding when connecting the second local Subnet.

Please refer to the details below.

Notice
This is a guide that can be applied commonly to kr-west and kr-south.

Linux - Setting up Subnet on Ubuntu

To add a local Subnet and configure the network on an Ubuntu operating system, follow these steps.

  1. After adding a new VLAN, configure the IP.

    • Change the ID and IP in the example code to the assigned ID and IP.
      Color mode
      [root@localhost ~]# vi /etc/netplan/50-cloud-init.yaml
      network:
          bonds:
              bond-mgt:
                  interfaces:
                  - ens2f1
                  - ens4f1
                  mtu: 1500
                  parameters:
                      mii-monitor-interval: 100
                      mode: active-backup
                      transmit-hash-policy: layer2
          ethernets:
              ens2f1:
                  match:
                  macaddress: 68:05:ca:d4:09:91
                  mtu: 1500
                  set-name: ens2f1
              ens4f1:
                  match:
                  macaddress: 68:05:ca:d4:09:01
                  mtu: 1500
                  set-name: ens4f1
          vlans:
              bond-mgt.20:
              addresses:
                  - 192.168.0.10/24
                  id: 20
                  link: bond-mgt
                  mtu: 1500
          vlans:
              bond-mgt.21: // Enter the VLAN ID you verified on the console instead of 21.
              addresses:
                  - 192.168.0.20/24 // Set it to the local Subnet IP verified in the console.
                  id: 21    // Set it to the VLAN ID verified in the console.
                  link: bond-mgt
                  mtu: 1500
      [root@localhost ~]# vi /etc/netplan/50-cloud-init.yaml
      network:
          bonds:
              bond-mgt:
                  interfaces:
                  - ens2f1
                  - ens4f1
                  mtu: 1500
                  parameters:
                      mii-monitor-interval: 100
                      mode: active-backup
                      transmit-hash-policy: layer2
          ethernets:
              ens2f1:
                  match:
                  macaddress: 68:05:ca:d4:09:91
                  mtu: 1500
                  set-name: ens2f1
              ens4f1:
                  match:
                  macaddress: 68:05:ca:d4:09:01
                  mtu: 1500
                  set-name: ens4f1
          vlans:
              bond-mgt.20:
              addresses:
                  - 192.168.0.10/24
                  id: 20
                  link: bond-mgt
                  mtu: 1500
          vlans:
              bond-mgt.21: // Enter the VLAN ID you verified on the console instead of 21.
              addresses:
                  - 192.168.0.20/24 // Set it to the local Subnet IP verified in the console.
                  id: 21    // Set it to the VLAN ID verified in the console.
                  link: bond-mgt
                  mtu: 1500
      Code block. Add VLAN and configure IP
  2. Apply the changes to the system.

    Color mode
    # netplan apply
    # netplan apply
    Code block. Reflect changes

  3. Check the interface status.

    Color mode
    # ip a
    or
    # bash /usr/local/bin/ip.sh
    # ip a
    or
    # bash /usr/local/bin/ip.sh
    Code block. Interface lookup

Linux – Setting Subnet on CentOS/Red Hat

After adding a local Subnet on a CentOS/Red Hat operating system, follow these steps to configure the network.

Caution
Be careful, as adding a local subnet or misconfiguring the network may delete the IP information currently in use.
  1. Verify the Bond Name for the local Subnet.
    Color mode
    # sh /usr/local/bin/ip.sh
    # sh /usr/local/bin/ip.sh
    Code block. Verify bonding
  2. Modify the following command and execute it.
    Color mode
    #!/usr/bin/bash
    
    IP_ADDR="10.1.1.3/24"   // Set the local Subnet IP as observed in the console.
    VLAN_ID="7"             // Set the Vlan ID as observed in the console.
    
    BOND_NAME="bond-mgt" // Set the Bond Name confirmed in step 1.
    
    # add vlan
    nmcli conn add type vlan ifname "${BOND_NAME}.${VLAN_ID}" con-name "${BOND_NAME}.${VLAN_ID}" id ${VLAN_ID} dev ${BOND_NAME}
    nmcli con  mod ${BOND_NAME}.${VLAN_ID} con-name "Vlan ${BOND_NAME}.${VLAN_ID}"
    nmcli con  mod "Vlan ${BOND_NAME}.${VLAN_ID}" ipv4.addresses ${IP_ADDR}
    nmcli con  mod "Vlan ${BOND_NAME}.${VLAN_ID}" ipv4.method manual
    nmcli con  mod "Vlan ${BOND_NAME}.${VLAN_ID}" ipv6.method "ignore"
    nmcli con  mod "Vlan ${BOND_NAME}.${VLAN_ID}" connect.autoconnect yes
    nmcli con  up  "Vlan ${BOND_NAME}.${VLAN_ID}"
    
    nmcli      device reapply ${BOND_NAME}.${VLAN_ID}
    #!/usr/bin/bash
    
    IP_ADDR="10.1.1.3/24"   // Set the local Subnet IP as observed in the console.
    VLAN_ID="7"             // Set the Vlan ID as observed in the console.
    
    BOND_NAME="bond-mgt" // Set the Bond Name confirmed in step 1.
    
    # add vlan
    nmcli conn add type vlan ifname "${BOND_NAME}.${VLAN_ID}" con-name "${BOND_NAME}.${VLAN_ID}" id ${VLAN_ID} dev ${BOND_NAME}
    nmcli con  mod ${BOND_NAME}.${VLAN_ID} con-name "Vlan ${BOND_NAME}.${VLAN_ID}"
    nmcli con  mod "Vlan ${BOND_NAME}.${VLAN_ID}" ipv4.addresses ${IP_ADDR}
    nmcli con  mod "Vlan ${BOND_NAME}.${VLAN_ID}" ipv4.method manual
    nmcli con  mod "Vlan ${BOND_NAME}.${VLAN_ID}" ipv6.method "ignore"
    nmcli con  mod "Vlan ${BOND_NAME}.${VLAN_ID}" connect.autoconnect yes
    nmcli con  up  "Vlan ${BOND_NAME}.${VLAN_ID}"
    
    nmcli      device reapply ${BOND_NAME}.${VLAN_ID}
    Code block. IP configuration script
  3. Check the interface status.
    Color mode
    # ip a
    or
    # bash /usr/local/bin/ip.sh
    # ip a
    or
    # bash /usr/local/bin/ip.sh
    Code block. Interface lookup

Configuring Subnet on Windows

After adding a local Subnet on the Windows operating system, follow these steps to configure the network.

  1. Windows Start icon, right‑click it, then launch the Windows PowerShell(Administrator) program.

  2. Check the Teaming name for the local Subnet.

    Color mode
    PS C:\> Get-NetAdapter
    PS C:\> Get-NetAdapter
    Code block. Check Windows interface

  3. After adding a new Vlan, configure the IP.

    • Enter the Teaming name confirmed in step 2, the Vlan ID, and the local Subnet IP confirmed in the Console.
      Color mode
      PS C:\> Add-NetLbfoTeamNIC -Team bond_bond-mgt -VlanID 20 -Name bond-mgt.20
      PS C:\> Get-NetAdapter
      PS C:\> netsh interface ip set address bond-mgt.20 static 192.168.0.10/24
      PS C:\> Add-NetLbfoTeamNIC -Team bond_bond-mgt -VlanID 20 -Name bond-mgt.20
      PS C:\> Get-NetAdapter
      PS C:\> netsh interface ip set address bond-mgt.20 static 192.168.0.10/24
      Code block. Create Teaming
  4. Run ncpa.cpl from the Windows Run menu to check the interface status.

    Figure

Change IP

The IP address may be changed to carry out migration, server replacement, and similar operations.

Caution
  • If you proceed with changing the IP, you will no longer be able to communicate using that IP, and you cannot cancel the IP change while it is in progress.
  • If the server is running the Load Balancer service, you must delete the old IP from the LB server group and directly add the new IP as a member of the LB server group.
  • Servers using Public NAT and Privat NAT must disable and then reconfigure Public NAT and Privat NAT after an IP change.
    • If you are using Public NAT and Privat NAT, first disable Public NAT and Privat NAT, complete the IP change, and then reconfigure.
    • Whether to use Public NAT and Privat NAT can be changed by clicking the Edit button for Public NAT IP and Privat NAT on the Bare Metal Server Details page.

To change the IP, follow the steps below.

  1. Click the All Services > Compute > Bare Metal Server menu. Navigate to the Service Home page of the Bare Metal Server.

  2. Click the Bare Metal Server menu on the Service Home page. You will be taken to the Bare Metal Server List page.

  3. Bare Metal Server List page, click the server whose IP you want to change. You will be taken to the Bare Metal Server Details page.

  4. On the Bare Metal Server Details page, click the Edit button next to the IP item.

  5. When the popup notifying IP modification opens, click the Confirm button. The IP Change popup opens.

  6. In the IP Change popup, complete Step 1, Step 2, and Step 3 in order.

    information
    • When changing an IP, the detailed configuration method for the IP change step varies depending on the subnet of the IP to be changed. Be sure to refer to the following examples and perform the work for each step.
    • When each step is completed successfully, the task status in the upper right corner is shown as Completed, and you can proceed to the next step.
    • When performing the final check of Step 3, it is recommended to restart the server before proceeding with the inspection.

  7. After confirming that all tasks have completed successfully, click the Confirm button.

Change to an IP in the same Subnet

This document explains how to configure IP settings per operating system when the IP to be changed uses the same subnet.

Linux – centos/redhat operating system

Step 1

Follow the procedure below to carry out Step 1.

  1. Select the Subnet to modify.
  2. Enter the IP address to change.
  3. Click the IP Allocation Request button.
  4. If a popup window notifying you of an IP change opens, click the Confirm button.
    • When the task completes successfully, the task status in the upper right corner is displayed as Completed.
      Caution
      If you proceed with the IP allocation request for Step 1, you cannot cancel or revert the IP change.

Step 2

Follow the procedure below to carry out Step 2.

  1. For the IP change operation, connect to the target server using the NAT IP.

    guide
    To prevent situations where communication becomes impossible during operation, we recommend connecting via another Virtual Server or Bare Metal Server created in the same subnet.

  2. Enter the IP assigned in Step 1 and configure the new IP on the server.

    • In the following example, replace 172.17.34.150 with the assigned IP address.
    • After checking the information of the Interface you want to change on the server, replace it with bond-srv.9 in the following example.
      Color mode
      # nmcli con mod "Vlan bond-srv.9" ipv4.addresses 172.17.34.150/24
      # nmcli con mod "Vlan bond-srv.9" ipv4.method manual
      # nmcli  device reapply bond-srv.9
      # nmcli con mod "Vlan bond-srv.9" ipv4.addresses 172.17.34.150/24
      # nmcli con mod "Vlan bond-srv.9" ipv4.method manual
      # nmcli  device reapply bond-srv.9
      Code block. IP settings to change
      information
      • Setting the IP disconnects the terminal session.
      • Step 2 After completing the task, if the task status changes to Completed, you can reconnect to the terminal.
  3. When all tasks are completed, select the Step 2 completion checkbox in the IP Change popup window.

    • When the task completes successfully, the task status in the upper right corner is displayed as Completed.
      information
      • If the task status of Step 2 has changed to Completed but you still have issues with terminal access, go to the All Services > Management > Support Center Contact Us menu and submit an inquiry.

Step 3

Follow the procedure below to carry out Step 3 work.

  1. Connect to the server subject to IP change using the NAT IP and check the communication status.

    • Use the following command to verify whether any pre‑change configuration remains and whether the change was applied correctly. If you can connect successfully to the target server whose IP was changed, the new IP is communicating properly.
      Color mode
      # bash /usr/local/bin/ip.sh
      # bash /usr/local/bin/ip.sh
      Code block. Communication status check
      Reference
      The NAT IP does not change.
  2. After all tasks are completed, restart the server and perform a final check.

    Reference
    It is recommended to perform the final check after restarting the server.

  3. If there are no issues in the final inspection results, select the work completion checkbox for Step 3 in the IP Change popup window.

Linux – Ubuntu operating system

Step 1

Follow the procedure below to carry out Step 1.

  1. Select the Subnet to modify.
  2. Enter the IP address to change.
  3. IP Allocation Request Click the button.
  4. When a popup indicating IP change verification opens, click the Confirm button.
    • When the task completes successfully, the task status in the upper right corner is displayed as Completed.
      Caution
      If you proceed with the IP allocation request of Step 1, you cannot cancel or revert the IP change.

Step 2

Follow the procedure below to perform Step 2.

  1. To perform the IP change, connect to the target server using its NAT IP.

    Information
    To prevent situations where communication becomes impossible during operation, we recommend connecting via another Virtual Server or Bare Metal Server created in the same subnet.

  2. Enter the IP assigned in Step 1 and configure the new IP on the server.

    • In the following example, replace 172.17.34.150/24 with the assigned IP address.
    • After checking the information of the Interface you want to change on the server, replace it with the following example bond-srv.9.
      Color mode
      [root@localhost ~]# vi /etc/netplan/50-cloud-init.yaml
      network:
          bonds:
          ...................... omitted
          ethernets:
          ...................... omitted
          vlans:
              bond-srv.9:
              addresses:
                  - 172.17.34.150/24   # Enter the IP assigned in Step1.
                  gateway4: 172.17.34.2
                  id: 9
                  link: bond-srv
                  mtu: 1500
              bond-srv.350:
                  addresses:
                  - 172.16.87.150/24
                  routes:
                  - to: 172.17.87.0/24
                    via: 172.16.87.1
      - to: 172.17.87.0/24
                    via: 172.16.87.1
                  id: 350
                  link: bond-srv
      [root@localhost ~]# vi /etc/netplan/50-cloud-init.yaml
      network:
          bonds:
          ...................... omitted
          ethernets:
          ...................... omitted
          vlans:
              bond-srv.9:
              addresses:
                  - 172.17.34.150/24   # Enter the IP assigned in Step1.
                  gateway4: 172.17.34.2
                  id: 9
                  link: bond-srv
                  mtu: 1500
              bond-srv.350:
                  addresses:
                  - 172.16.87.150/24
                  routes:
                  - to: 172.17.87.0/24
                    via: 172.16.87.1
      - to: 172.17.87.0/24
                    via: 172.16.87.1
                  id: 350
                  link: bond-srv
      Code block. Change IP setting
  3. Use the Netplan apply command to apply the changes to the system.

    Color mode
    [root@localhost ~]# netplan apply
    [root@localhost ~]# netplan apply
    Code block. Run Netplan apply
    information
    • Setting the IP disconnects the terminal session.
    • Step 2 After completing the task, if the task status changes to Completed, you can reconnect to the terminal.

  4. When all tasks are completed, select the task completion checkbox for Step 2 in the IP change popup window.

    • When the task completes successfully, the task status in the upper right corner is displayed as Completed.
      information
      • If the task status of Step 2 has changed to Completed but you still experience issues with terminal access, go to the All Services > Management > Support Center Contact Us menu and submit an inquiry.

Step 3

Follow the procedure below to carry out Step 3.

  1. Connect to the server subject to IP change using the NAT IP and check the communication status.

    • Use the following command to verify whether any pre‑change configuration remains and whether the change was applied correctly. If you can connect successfully to the target server whose IP was changed, the new IP is communicating properly.
      Color mode
      # bash /usr/local/bin/ip.sh
      # bash /usr/local/bin/ip.sh
      Code block. Communication status check
      reference
      The NAT IP does not change.
  2. After all tasks are completed, restart the server and then perform a final check.

    Reference
    It is recommended to perform the final check after restarting the server.

  3. If the final inspection results show no issues, select the work completion checkbox for Step 3 in the IP Change popup window.

Windows operating system

Step 1

Follow the procedure below to perform Step 1 work.

  1. Select the Subnet to modify.
  2. Enter the IP address to change.
  3. Click the IP Allocation Request button.
  4. When the pop-up that notifies you of an IP change appears, click the Confirm button.
    • When the task completes successfully, the task status in the upper right corner is displayed as Completed.
      Caution
      If you proceed with the IP allocation request of Step 1, you cannot cancel or revert the IP change.

Step 2

Follow the procedure below to perform Step 2.

  1. To perform the IP change, connect to the target server using its NAT IP.

    Information
    To prevent communication failures during operation, we recommend connecting through another Virtual Server or Bare Metal Server created in the same subnet.

  2. Right-click the Windows Start icon, then run Windows PowerShell(Administrator).

  3. Enter the assigned IP from Step 1 and set the IP to be changed on the server.

    • In the following example, replace 172.17.34.150 with the assigned IP address.
      Color mode
      PS C:\> netsh interface ip set address "bond-srv.20" static 172.17.34.150 255.255.255.0
      PS C:\> netsh interface ip set address "bond-srv.20" static 172.17.34.150 255.255.255.0
      code block. Change IP setting
      information
      • Setting the IP disconnects the terminal session.
      • Step 2 After completing the task, if the task status changes to Completed, you can reconnect to the terminal.
  4. When all tasks are completed, select the task completion checkbox for Step 2 in the IP change popup window.

    • When the task completes successfully, the task status in the upper right corner is displayed as Completed.
      Information
      • If the task status of Step 2 has changed to Completed but you still have issues with terminal access, go to the All Services > Management > Support Center Contact Us menu and submit an inquiry.

Step 3

Follow the procedure below to carry out Step 3.

  1. Connect to the server targeted for IP change using its NAT IP and verify the communication status.

    • Use the following command to verify whether any pre‑change configuration remains and to confirm that the change was applied correctly. If you can connect successfully to the target server whose IP was changed, the new IP is communicating properly.
      Color mode
      PS C:\> Get-NetIPAddress | Format-Table
      PS C:\> Get-NetIPAddress | Format-Table
      Code block. Communication status check
      Reference
      The NAT IP does not change.
  2. After all tasks are completed, restart the server and then perform a final check.

    Reference
    It is recommended to perform the final check after restarting the server.

  3. If there are no issues in the final inspection results, select the work completion checkbox for Step 3 in the IP Change popup window.

Change to an IP of a different Subnet

This explains how to configure IP settings for each operating system when the IP to be changed uses a different subnet.

Linux – centos/redhat operating system

Step 1

Follow the procedure below to carry out Step 1.

  1. Select the Subnet to modify.
  2. Enter the IP address to change.
  3. Click the IP Allocation Request button.
  4. If a popup window notifying you of an IP change opens, click the Confirm button.
    • When the operation completes successfully, Vlan ID verification, Default Gateway verification information is displayed, and the task status in the upper right corner shows Completed.
      Caution
      If you proceed with the IP allocation request for Step 1, you cannot cancel or revert the IP change.

Step 2

Follow the steps below to carry out Step 2.

  1. For the IP change operation, connect to the target server using the NAT IP.

    information
    To prevent situations where communication becomes impossible during operation, we recommend connecting via another Virtual Server or Bare Metal Server created in the same subnet.

  2. To add the IP to the server, add a new VLAN and configure the IP.

    • Add VLAN: Create the interface for the Vlan ID identified in Step 1. In the following example, replace 20 with the assigned ID.
    • IP configuration: Enter the IP assigned in Step 1. In the following example, replace 192.168.0.10/24 with the assigned IP.
      Color mode
      # nmcli conn add type vlan ifname "bond-srv.20" con-name "bond-srv.20" id 20 dev bond-srv
      # nmcli con mod bond-srv.20 con-name "Vlan bond-srv.20"
      # nmcli con mod "Vlan bond-srv.20" ipv4.addresses 192.168.0.10/24
      # nmcli con mod "Vlan bond-srv.20" ipv4.method manual
      # nmcli con mod "Vlan bond-srv.20" ipv6.method "ignore"
      # nmcli con up  "Vlan bond-srv.20"
      # nmcli conn add type vlan ifname "bond-srv.20" con-name "bond-srv.20" id 20 dev bond-srv
      # nmcli con mod bond-srv.20 con-name "Vlan bond-srv.20"
      # nmcli con mod "Vlan bond-srv.20" ipv4.addresses 192.168.0.10/24
      # nmcli con mod "Vlan bond-srv.20" ipv4.method manual
      # nmcli con mod "Vlan bond-srv.20" ipv6.method "ignore"
      # nmcli con up  "Vlan bond-srv.20"
      Code block. IP settings to change
  3. Configure the default gateway for the new VLAN.

    • Default gateway setting: Enter the Default gateway IP assigned in Step 1. In the following example, replace 192.168.0.1 with the assigned Default gateway IP.
      Color mode
      # nmcli con mod "Vlan bond-srv.20"  ipv4.gateway 192.168.0.1
      # nmcli device reapply bond-srv.20
      # nmcli con mod "Vlan bond-srv.20"  ipv4.gateway 192.168.0.1
      # nmcli device reapply bond-srv.20
      Code block. Change IP settings
      Info
      • Setting a Default Gateway on a new VLAN disconnects the terminal session.
      • Step 2 After completing the task, if the task status changes to Completed, you can reconnect to the terminal.
  4. When all tasks are completed, select the task completion checkbox of Step 2 in the IP change popup window.

    • When the task completes successfully, the task status in the upper right corner is displayed as Completed.
      information
      • If the task status of Step 2 has changed to Completed but you still experience issues with terminal access, go to the All Services > Management > Support Center’s Contact Us menu and make an inquiry.

Step 3

Follow the procedure below to proceed with Step 3.

  1. Connect to the server to be changed using the NAT IP.

  2. After verifying the Default Gateway IP of the existing (pre-change) interface, delete it.

    • In the example below, replace 192.168.10.1 with the IP you have verified.
      Color mode
      # ip route del   default  via 192.168.10.1
      # ip route del   default  via 192.168.10.1
      Code block. Delete the Default Gateway IP of the existing interface.
  3. Connect to the server subject to IP change using the NAT IP and check the communication status.

    • Use the following command to verify whether any pre‑change configuration remains and whether the change was applied correctly. If you can connect successfully to the target server whose IP was changed, the new IP is communicating properly.
      Color mode
      # netstat nr
      # bash /usr/local/bin/ip.sh
      # netstat nr
      # bash /usr/local/bin/ip.sh
      Code block. Communication status check
      Reference
      The NAT IP does not change.
  4. Verify the VLAN information of the existing IP and delete it from the server.

    • Enter the verified ID in place of 30 in the following example.
      Color mode
      # nmcli con delete "Vlan bond-srv.30"
      # nmcli con delete "Vlan bond-srv.30"
      Code block. Delete the VLAN information of the existing IP.
  5. After all tasks are completed, restart the server and then perform a final check.

    Reference
    It is recommended to perform the final check after restarting the server.

  6. If the final inspection results show no issues, select the work completion checkbox for Step 3 in the IP Change popup window.

Linux – Ubuntu operating system

Step 1

Follow the procedure below to perform Step 1.

  1. Select the Subnet to modify.
  2. Enter the IP address to change.
  3. Click the IP Allocation Request button.
  4. When a popup notifying you of an IP change opens, click the Confirm button.
    • When the operation completes successfully, Vlan ID verification, Default Gateway verification information is displayed, and the operation status in the upper right corner shows Completed.
      Caution
      If you proceed with the IP allocation request of Step 1, you cannot cancel or revert the IP change.

Step 2

Follow the procedure below to perform Step 2.

  1. To perform the IP change, connect to the target server using its NAT IP.

    Information
    To prevent situations where communication becomes impossible during operation, we recommend connecting via another Virtual Server or Bare Metal Server created in the same subnet.

  2. To add the IP to the server, add a new VLAN and configure the IP and Default Gateway.

    • In the following example, this is the part where content is added at the bottom of the Step 1 task description.
    • In the following example, enter the assigned ID and IP instead of ID and IP.
      Color mode
      [root@localhost ~]# vi /etc/netplan/50-cloud-init.yaml
      network:
          bonds:
          ...................... omitted
          ethernets:
          ...................... omitted
          vlans:
              bond-srv.9:
              addresses:
                  - 172.17.34.150/24
      
                  gateway4: 172.17.34.2
                  id: 9
                  link: bond-srv
                  mtu: 1500
              bond-srv.350:
                  addresses:
                  - 172.16.87.150/24
                  routes:
                  - to: 172.17.87.0/24
                    via: 172.16.87.1
      - to: 172.17.87.0/24
                    via: 172.16.87.1
                  id: 350
                  link: bond-srv
      
      # Create the interface for the Vlan ID identified in Step1.
      # Enter the IP assigned in Step1.
      # Enter the Default gateway IP assigned in Step1.
      bond-srv.20:
              addresses:
                  - 192.168.0.10/24
                  gateway4: 192.168.0.1
                  id: 20
                  link: bond-srv
                  mtu: 1500
      [root@localhost ~]# vi /etc/netplan/50-cloud-init.yaml
      network:
          bonds:
          ...................... omitted
          ethernets:
          ...................... omitted
          vlans:
              bond-srv.9:
              addresses:
                  - 172.17.34.150/24
      
                  gateway4: 172.17.34.2
                  id: 9
                  link: bond-srv
                  mtu: 1500
              bond-srv.350:
                  addresses:
                  - 172.16.87.150/24
                  routes:
                  - to: 172.17.87.0/24
                    via: 172.16.87.1
      - to: 172.17.87.0/24
                    via: 172.16.87.1
                  id: 350
                  link: bond-srv
      
      # Create the interface for the Vlan ID identified in Step1.
      # Enter the IP assigned in Step1.
      # Enter the Default gateway IP assigned in Step1.
      bond-srv.20:
              addresses:
                  - 192.168.0.10/24
                  gateway4: 192.168.0.1
                  id: 20
                  link: bond-srv
                  mtu: 1500
      Code block. Change IP settings
  3. Use the Netplan apply command to apply the changes to the system.

    Color mode
    [root@localhost ~]# netplan apply
    [root@localhost ~]# netplan apply
    Code block. Run Netplan apply
    Info
    • Setting a new Default Gateway disconnects the terminal session.
    • Step 2 After completing the task, if the task status changes to Completed, you can reconnect to the terminal.

  4. When all tasks are completed, select the task completion checkbox of Step 2 in the IP change popup window.

    • When the task completes successfully, the task status in the upper right corner is displayed as Completed.
      information
      • If the task status of Step 2 has changed to Completed but you still experience issues with terminal access, go to the All Services > Management > Support Center’s Contact Us menu and make an inquiry.

Step 3

Follow the procedure below to proceed with Step 3.

  1. Connect to the server to be changed using the NAT IP.

  2. Check the Default Gateway IP of the existing (pre‑change) interface, then delete it.

    • In the following example, the Delete this line row is the part that gets deleted.
      Color mode
      [root@localhost ~]# vi /etc/netplan/50-cloud-init.yaml
      network:
          bonds:
          ...................... omitted
          ethernets:
          ...................... omitted
          vlans:
              bond-srv.9:
              addresses:
                  - 172.17.34.150/24
                  gateway4: 172.17.34.2    #Delete this line
                  id: 9
                  link: bond-srv
                  mtu: 1500
              bond-srv.350:
                  addresses:
                  - 172.16.87.150/24
                  routes:
                  - to: 172.17.87.0/24
                    via: 172.16.87.1
      - to: 172.17.87.0/24
                    via: 172.16.87.1
                  id: 350
                  link: bond-srv
      
      bond-srv.20:
              addresses:
                  - 192.168.0.10/24
                  gateway4: 192.168.0.1
                  id: 20
                  link: bond-srv
                  mtu: 1500
      [root@localhost ~]# vi /etc/netplan/50-cloud-init.yaml
      network:
          bonds:
          ...................... omitted
          ethernets:
          ...................... omitted
          vlans:
              bond-srv.9:
              addresses:
                  - 172.17.34.150/24
                  gateway4: 172.17.34.2    #Delete this line
                  id: 9
                  link: bond-srv
                  mtu: 1500
              bond-srv.350:
                  addresses:
                  - 172.16.87.150/24
                  routes:
                  - to: 172.17.87.0/24
                    via: 172.16.87.1
      - to: 172.17.87.0/24
                    via: 172.16.87.1
                  id: 350
                  link: bond-srv
      
      bond-srv.20:
              addresses:
                  - 192.168.0.10/24
                  gateway4: 192.168.0.1
                  id: 20
                  link: bond-srv
                  mtu: 1500
      Code block. Delete the Default Gateway IP of the existing interface.
  3. Connect to the IP change target server using the NAT IP and check the communication status.

    • Use the following command to verify whether any pre‑change configuration remains and that the change was applied correctly. If you can connect successfully to the target server whose IP was changed, the new IP is communicating properly.
      Color mode
      # netstat nr
      # bash /usr/local/bin/ip.sh
      # netstat nr
      # bash /usr/local/bin/ip.sh
      Code block. Communication status check
      Reference
      The NAT IP does not change.
  4. Delete the existing IP.

    • In the following example, the Delete this line row is the part that gets deleted.
      Color mode
      [root@localhost ~]# vi /etc/netplan/50-cloud-init.yaml
      network:
          bonds:
          ...................... omitted
          ethernets:
          ...................... omitted
          vlans:
              bond-srv.9:                   #Delete this line
              addresses:                    #Delete this line
                  - 172.17.34.150/24        # Delete this line
                  gateway4: 172.17.34.2     #Delete this line
                  id: 9                     # Delete this line
                  link: bond-srv            #Delete this line
                  mtu: 1500                 #Delete this line
              bond-srv.350:
                  addresses:
                  - 172.16.87.150/24
                  routes:
                  - to: 172.17.87.0/24
                    via: 172.16.87.1
      - to: 172.17.87.0/24
                    via: 172.16.87.1
                  id: 350
                  link: bond-srv
      
      bond-srv.20:
              addresses:
                  - 192.168.0.10/24
                  gateway4: 192.168.0.1
                  id: 20
                  link: bond-srv
                  mtu: 1
      [root@localhost ~]# vi /etc/netplan/50-cloud-init.yaml
      network:
          bonds:
          ...................... omitted
          ethernets:
          ...................... omitted
          vlans:
              bond-srv.9:                   #Delete this line
              addresses:                    #Delete this line
                  - 172.17.34.150/24        # Delete this line
                  gateway4: 172.17.34.2     #Delete this line
                  id: 9                     # Delete this line
                  link: bond-srv            #Delete this line
                  mtu: 1500                 #Delete this line
              bond-srv.350:
                  addresses:
                  - 172.16.87.150/24
                  routes:
                  - to: 172.17.87.0/24
                    via: 172.16.87.1
      - to: 172.17.87.0/24
                    via: 172.16.87.1
                  id: 350
                  link: bond-srv
      
      bond-srv.20:
              addresses:
                  - 192.168.0.10/24
                  gateway4: 192.168.0.1
                  id: 20
                  link: bond-srv
                  mtu: 1
      Code block. Delete existing IP
  5. Apply the changes to the system.

    Color mode
    [root@localhost ~]# netplan apply
    [root@localhost ~]#  ip link delete bond-srv.9 # Additional steps when deleting VLAN
    [root@localhost ~]# netplan apply
    [root@localhost ~]#  ip link delete bond-srv.9 # Additional steps when deleting VLAN
    Code block. Apply changes

  6. After all tasks are completed, restart the server and then perform a final check.

Reference
It is recommended to perform the final check after restarting the server.
  1. If there are no issues in the final inspection results, select the work completion checkbox for Step 3 in the IP change popup window.

Windows operating system

Step 1

Follow the procedure below to carry out Step 1.

  1. Select the Subnet to modify.
  2. Enter the IP address to change.
  3. Click the IP Allocation Request button.
  4. If a popup notifying IP change verification opens, click the Confirm button.
    • When the operation completes successfully, Vlan ID verification, Default Gateway verification information is displayed, and the operation status in the upper right corner shows Completed.
      Caution
      If you proceed with the IP allocation request for Step 1, you cannot cancel or revert the IP change.

Step 2

Follow the procedure below to carry out Step 2.

  1. To perform the IP change, connect to the target server using its NAT IP.

    information
    To prevent situations where communication becomes impossible during operation, we recommend connecting via another Virtual Server or Bare Metal Server created in the same subnet.

  2. Windows Start icon, right-click it, then run Windows PowerShell(Administrator).

  3. Add a VLAN and configure the IP and default gateway.

    • Add VLAN: Create the interface for the Vlan ID identified in Step 1. In the following example, replace 20 with the assigned ID.
    • IP configuration: Enter the IP assigned in Step 1. In the following example, replace 46 with the ifindex obtained via Get-NetAdapter, and replace 192.168.0.10 with the assigned IP.
    • Default gateway setting: Enter the Default gateway IP assigned in Step 1. In the following example, replace 192.168.0.1 with the assigned Default gateway IP.
      Color mode
      PS C:\> Add-NetLbfoTeamNIC -Team bond_bond-srv -VlanID 20 -Name bond-srv.20 -Confirm:$false
      PS C:\> Get-NetAdapter
      PS C:\> New-NetIPAddress -InterfaceIndex 46 -IPAddress 192.168.0.10 -PrefixLength 24 defaultgateway 192.168.0.1
      PS C:\> Add-NetLbfoTeamNIC -Team bond_bond-srv -VlanID 20 -Name bond-srv.20 -Confirm:$false
      PS C:\> Get-NetAdapter
      PS C:\> New-NetIPAddress -InterfaceIndex 46 -IPAddress 192.168.0.10 -PrefixLength 24 defaultgateway 192.168.0.1
      code block. Change IP settings
      information
      • Setting a new Default Gateway disconnects the terminal session.
      • Step 2 After completing the task, if the task status changes to Completed, you can reconnect to the terminal.
  4. When all tasks are completed, select the task completion checkbox of Step 2 in the IP change popup window.

    • When the task completes successfully, the task status in the upper right corner is displayed as Completed.
      information
      • If the task status of Step 2 has changed to Completed but you still experience issues with terminal access, go to the All Services > Management > Support Center Contact Us menu and submit an inquiry.

Step 3

Follow the procedure below to carry out Step 3.

  1. Connect to the IP-change target server using the NAT IP.

  2. Run the interface index (ifindex) to check the existing Default Gateway IP.

    Color mode
    PS C:\> Get-NetAdapter
    Name                      InterfaceDescription                    ifIndex Status       MacAddress             LinkSpeed
    ----                      --------------------                    ------- ------       ----------             ---------
    bond-srv.9                Microsoft Network Adapter Multiple...#4      30 Up           40-A6-B7-27-96-D5        50 Gbps
    bond-srv                  Microsoft Network Adapter Multiple...#3      19 Up           40-A6-B7-27-96-D5        50 Gbps
    bond-iscsi                Microsoft Network Adapter Multiple...#2      18 Up           40-A6-B7-27-96-D4        50 Gbps
    bond-backup               Microsoft Network Adapter Multiplexo...      22 Up           68-05-CA-C9-EB-88        20 Gbps
    eno2                      Intel(R) Ethernet Connection X722 fo...      12 Disabled     38-68-DD-36-A0-59         1 Gbps
    ens3f0                    Intel(R) Ethernet Network Adapter XX...      11 Up           40-A6-B7-27-96-D4        25 Gbps
    …………………………………………..  omitted
    PS C:\> Get-NetAdapter
    Name                      InterfaceDescription                    ifIndex Status       MacAddress             LinkSpeed
    ----                      --------------------                    ------- ------       ----------             ---------
    bond-srv.9                Microsoft Network Adapter Multiple...#4      30 Up           40-A6-B7-27-96-D5        50 Gbps
    bond-srv                  Microsoft Network Adapter Multiple...#3      19 Up           40-A6-B7-27-96-D5        50 Gbps
    bond-iscsi                Microsoft Network Adapter Multiple...#2      18 Up           40-A6-B7-27-96-D4        50 Gbps
    bond-backup               Microsoft Network Adapter Multiplexo...      22 Up           68-05-CA-C9-EB-88        20 Gbps
    eno2                      Intel(R) Ethernet Connection X722 fo...      12 Disabled     38-68-DD-36-A0-59         1 Gbps
    ens3f0                    Intel(R) Ethernet Network Adapter XX...      11 Up           40-A6-B7-27-96-D4        25 Gbps
    …………………………………………..  omitted
    code block. Run Get-NetAdapter
    Color mode
    PS C:\> get-netroute -ifindex 30
    
    ifIndex DestinationPrefix                              NextHop                                  RouteMetric PolicyStore
    ------- -----------------                              -------                                  ----------- -----------
    30      255.255.255.255/32                             0.0.0.0                                          256 ActiveStore
    30      224.0.0.0/4                                    0.0.0.0                                          256 ActiveStore
    30      172.17.35.0/24                                 172.17.35.1                                      256 ActiveStore
    30      172.17.34.255/32                               0.0.0.0                                          256 ActiveStore
    30      172.17.34.14/32                                0.0.0.0                                          256 ActiveStore
    30      172.17.34.0/24                                 0.0.0.0                                          256 ActiveStore
    30      0.0.0.0/0                                      172.17.34.1                                        1 ActiveStore
    PS C:\> get-netroute -ifindex 30
    
    ifIndex DestinationPrefix                              NextHop                                  RouteMetric PolicyStore
    ------- -----------------                              -------                                  ----------- -----------
    30      255.255.255.255/32                             0.0.0.0                                          256 ActiveStore
    30      224.0.0.0/4                                    0.0.0.0                                          256 ActiveStore
    30      172.17.35.0/24                                 172.17.35.1                                      256 ActiveStore
    30      172.17.34.255/32                               0.0.0.0                                          256 ActiveStore
    30      172.17.34.14/32                                0.0.0.0                                          256 ActiveStore
    30      172.17.34.0/24                                 0.0.0.0                                          256 ActiveStore
    30      0.0.0.0/0                                      172.17.34.1                                        1 ActiveStore
    code block. Execute -ifindex

  3. Delete the existing Default Gateway IP.

    • In the following example, replace 30 with the ifindex obtained using Get-NetAdapter, and replace 172.17.34.1 with the IP you verified.
      Color mode
      PS C:\> Remove-NetRoute -ifIndex 30 -DestinationPrefix 0.0.0.0/0 -NextHop 172.17.34.1 -Confirm:$false
      PS C:\> Remove-NetRoute -ifIndex 30 -DestinationPrefix 0.0.0.0/0 -NextHop 172.17.34.1 -Confirm:$false
      Code block. Delete Default Gateway IP
      Color mode
      PS C:\> get-netroute -ifindex 30
      
      ifIndex DestinationPrefix                              NextHop                                  RouteMetric PolicyStore
      ------- -----------------                              -------                                  ----------- -----------
      30      255.255.255.255/32                             0.0.0.0                                          256 ActiveStore
      30      224.0.0.0/4                                    0.0.0.0                                          256 ActiveStore
      30      172.17.34.255/32                               0.0.0.0                                          256 ActiveStore
      30      172.17.34.14/32                                0.0.0.0                                          256 ActiveStore
      30      172.17.34.0/24                                 0.0.0.0                                          256 ActiveStore
      PS C:\> get-netroute -ifindex 30
      
      ifIndex DestinationPrefix                              NextHop                                  RouteMetric PolicyStore
      ------- -----------------                              -------                                  ----------- -----------
      30      255.255.255.255/32                             0.0.0.0                                          256 ActiveStore
      30      224.0.0.0/4                                    0.0.0.0                                          256 ActiveStore
      30      172.17.34.255/32                               0.0.0.0                                          256 ActiveStore
      30      172.17.34.14/32                                0.0.0.0                                          256 ActiveStore
      30      172.17.34.0/24                                 0.0.0.0                                          256 ActiveStore
      code block. -ifindex execution
      Information
      • If you delete the existing Default Gateway, the terminal session will be disconnected.
      • Step 2 After completing the task, if the task status changes to Completed, you can reconnect to the terminal.
  4. Connect to the server targeted for IP change using its NAT IP and verify the communication status.

    • Use the following command to verify whether any pre‑change configuration remains and whether the change was applied correctly. If you can connect successfully to the target server whose IP was changed, the new IP is communicating properly.
      Color mode
      PS C:\> netstat nr | findstr Default
      PS C:\> Get-NetIPAddress | Format-Table
      PS C:\> netstat nr | findstr Default
      PS C:\> Get-NetIPAddress | Format-Table
      Code block. Communication status check
      Reference
      The NAT IP does not change.
  5. Check the VLAN information of the existing IP in the Team information.

    Color mode
    PS C:\> Get-NetLbfoTeam
    
    Name                   : bond_bond-srv
    Members                : {ens6f1, ens3f1}
    TeamNics               : {bond-srv, bond-srv.9}
    TeamingMode            : SwitchIndependent
    LoadBalancingAlgorithm : Dynamic
    Status                 : Up
    
    Name                   : bond_bond-iscsi
    Members                : {ens6f0, ens3f0}
    TeamNics               : bond-iscsi
    TeamingMode            : SwitchIndependent
    LoadBalancingAlgorithm : Dynamic
    Status                 : Up
    
    Name                   : bond_bond-backup
    Members                : {ens2f0, ens4f1}
    TeamNics               : bond-backup
    TeamingMode            : SwitchIndependent
    LoadBalancingAlgorithm : Dynamic
    Status                 : Up
    
    PS C:\> Get-NetAdapter
    
    Name                      InterfaceDescription                    ifIndex Status       MacAddress             LinkSpeed
    ----                      --------------------                    ------- ------       ----------             ---------
    bond-srv.9                Microsoft Network Adapter Multiple...#4      30 Up           40-A6-B7-27-96-D5        50 Gbps
    bond-srv                  Microsoft Network Adapter Multiple...#3      19 Up           40-A6-B7-27-96-D5        50 Gbps
    bond-iscsi                Microsoft Network Adapter Multiple...#2      18 Up           40-A6-B7-27-96-D4        50 Gbps
    bond-backup               Microsoft Network Adapter Multiplexo...      22 Up           68-05-CA-C9-EB-88        20 Gbps
    eno2                      Intel(R) Ethernet Connection X722 fo...      12 Disabled     38-68-DD-36-A0-59         1 Gbps
    ens3f0                    Intel(R) Ethernet Network Adapter XX...      11 Up           40-A6-B7-27-96-D4        25 Gbps
    …………………………………………..  omitted
    PS C:\> Get-NetLbfoTeam
    
    Name                   : bond_bond-srv
    Members                : {ens6f1, ens3f1}
    TeamNics               : {bond-srv, bond-srv.9}
    TeamingMode            : SwitchIndependent
    LoadBalancingAlgorithm : Dynamic
    Status                 : Up
    
    Name                   : bond_bond-iscsi
    Members                : {ens6f0, ens3f0}
    TeamNics               : bond-iscsi
    TeamingMode            : SwitchIndependent
    LoadBalancingAlgorithm : Dynamic
    Status                 : Up
    
    Name                   : bond_bond-backup
    Members                : {ens2f0, ens4f1}
    TeamNics               : bond-backup
    TeamingMode            : SwitchIndependent
    LoadBalancingAlgorithm : Dynamic
    Status                 : Up
    
    PS C:\> Get-NetAdapter
    
    Name                      InterfaceDescription                    ifIndex Status       MacAddress             LinkSpeed
    ----                      --------------------                    ------- ------       ----------             ---------
    bond-srv.9                Microsoft Network Adapter Multiple...#4      30 Up           40-A6-B7-27-96-D5        50 Gbps
    bond-srv                  Microsoft Network Adapter Multiple...#3      19 Up           40-A6-B7-27-96-D5        50 Gbps
    bond-iscsi                Microsoft Network Adapter Multiple...#2      18 Up           40-A6-B7-27-96-D4        50 Gbps
    bond-backup               Microsoft Network Adapter Multiplexo...      22 Up           68-05-CA-C9-EB-88        20 Gbps
    eno2                      Intel(R) Ethernet Connection X722 fo...      12 Disabled     38-68-DD-36-A0-59         1 Gbps
    ens3f0                    Intel(R) Ethernet Network Adapter XX...      11 Up           40-A6-B7-27-96-D4        25 Gbps
    …………………………………………..  omitted
    code block. Run Get-NetLbfoTeam

  6. Delete the Vlan information of the existing IP from the server.

    • In the following example, replace 30 with the ID you verified.
      Color mode
      PS C:\> Remove-NetLbfoTeamNic -Team bond_bond-srv -VlanID 30 -Confirm:$false
      
      PS C:\> Get-NetAdapter
      
      Name                      InterfaceDescription                    ifIndex Status       MacAddress             LinkSpeed
      ----                      --------------------                    ------- ------       ----------             ---------
      bond-srv                  Microsoft Network Adapter Multiple...#3      19 Up           40-A6-B7-27-96-D5        50 Gbps
      bond-iscsi                Microsoft Network Adapter Multiple...#2      18 Up           40-A6-B7-27-96-D4        50 Gbps
      bond-backup               Microsoft Network Adapter Multiplexo...      22 Up           68-05-CA-C9-EB-88        20 Gbps
      eno2                      Intel(R) Ethernet Connection X722 fo...      12 Disabled     38-68-DD-36-A0-59         1 Gbps
      ens3f0                    Intel(R) Ethernet Network Adapter XX...      11 Up           40-A6-B7-27-96-D4        25 Gbps
      …………………………………………..  omitted
      PS C:\> Remove-NetLbfoTeamNic -Team bond_bond-srv -VlanID 30 -Confirm:$false
      
      PS C:\> Get-NetAdapter
      
      Name                      InterfaceDescription                    ifIndex Status       MacAddress             LinkSpeed
      ----                      --------------------                    ------- ------       ----------             ---------
      bond-srv                  Microsoft Network Adapter Multiple...#3      19 Up           40-A6-B7-27-96-D5        50 Gbps
      bond-iscsi                Microsoft Network Adapter Multiple...#2      18 Up           40-A6-B7-27-96-D4        50 Gbps
      bond-backup               Microsoft Network Adapter Multiplexo...      22 Up           68-05-CA-C9-EB-88        20 Gbps
      eno2                      Intel(R) Ethernet Connection X722 fo...      12 Disabled     38-68-DD-36-A0-59         1 Gbps
      ens3f0                    Intel(R) Ethernet Network Adapter XX...      11 Up           40-A6-B7-27-96-D4        25 Gbps
      …………………………………………..  omitted
      code block. Run Get-NetLbfoTeam
  7. After all tasks are completed, restart the server and then perform a final check.

    Reference
    It is recommended to perform the final check after restarting the server.

  8. If there are no issues in the final inspection results, select the Step 3 work completion checkbox in the IP Change popup window.

Configuring RHEL Repository

The Samsung Cloud Platform Console provides the SCP RHEL Repository to support user environments where external access is restricted, such as VPC Private Subnets.
You can use the RHEL Repository to install and download the same packages as the official RHEL Repository.

To configure the RHEL Repository, please refer to RHEL Repository Configuration Guide.

Info
  • If a user created RHEL before August 2025 through the Samsung Cloud Platform Console, they must modify the RHEL Repository settings.
  • Since the SCP RHEL Repository synchronizes with each region’s local repository according to an internal schedule, it is recommended to switch to an external public mirror site to apply the latest patches quickly.
  • Samsung Cloud Platform provides the latest repository for the specified major version.

4.2.1 - Install ServiceWatch Agent

Users can install the ServiceWatch Agent on a Bare Metal Server to collect custom metrics and logs.

Reference
Collecting custom metrics/logs via the ServiceWatch Agent is currently available only on Samsung Cloud Platform For Enterprise. It will also be available in other offerings in the future.
Caution
Collecting metrics through the ServiceWatch Agent is classified as custom metrics and, unlike the default collected metrics, incurs charges; therefore, it is recommended to remove or disable unnecessary metric collection settings.

ServiceWatch Agent

On a Bare Metal Server, the agents that need to be installed to collect ServiceWatch’s custom metrics and logs can be divided into two main types. It is a Prometheus Exporter and Open Telemetry Collector.

CategoryDetailed description
Prometheus ExporterProvide metrics of a specific application or service in a format that Prometheus can scrape
  • To collect OS metrics from servers, you can use Node Exporter for Linux servers and Windows Exporter for Windows servers, depending on the OS type.
Open Telemetry CollectorActs as a centralized collector that gathers telemetry data such as metrics and logs from distributed systems, processes (filtering, sampling, etc.) it, and exports it to multiple backends (e.g., Prometheus, Jaeger, Elasticsearch, etc.)
  • Exports data to the ServiceWatch Gateway so that ServiceWatch can collect metric and log data.
Table. Explanation of Prometheus Exporter and Open Telemetry Collector
Reference
The ServiceWatch Agent guide can be used in the same way as Virtual Server. For more details, see Virtual Server > ServiceWatch Agent.

Pre-configuration for Using ServiceWatch Agent

To use the ServiceWatch Agent, please refer to Prerequisite Settings for ServiceWatch Agent and prepare the prerequisite settings.

4.2.2 - Setting up RHEL Repo and WKMS

The Samsung Cloud Platform Console provides the SCP RHEL Repository to support user environments where external access is restricted, such as VPC Private Subnet. You can use the SCP RHEL Repository to install and download the same packages as the official RHEL Repository.

guide
  • If a user created RHEL before August 2025 through the Samsung Cloud Platform Console, they must modify the RHEL Repository settings.
  • Since the SCP RHEL Repository synchronizes with each Region Local Repository according to an internal schedule, it is recommended to switch to an external public mirror site to apply the latest patches quickly.
  • Samsung Cloud Platform provides the latest repository for the specified major version.

RHEL Repository Configuration Guide

When using RHEL, you can configure the SCP RHEL Repository to install and download the same packages as the official RHEL Repository. To set up the RHEL Repository, follow these steps.

  1. On the Virtual Server, as the OS root user, use the cat command to check the /etc/yum.repos.d/scp.rhel8.repo or /etc/yum.repos.d/scp.rhel9.repo configuration.

    Color mode
    cat /etc/yum.repos.d/scp.rhel8.repo
    cat /etc/yum.repos.d/scp.rhel8.repo
    Code block. Verify repo configuration (RHEL8)
    Color mode
    cat /etc/yum.repos.d/scp.rhel9.repo
    cat /etc/yum.repos.d/scp.rhel9.repo
    Code block. Verify repo configuration (RHEL9)

    • When checking the configuration file, the following result is displayed.
      Color mode
      [rhel-8-baseos]
      name=rhel-8-baseos
      gpgcheck=0
      enabled=1
      baseurl=http://scp-rhel8-ip/rhel/8/baseos
      [rhel-8-baseos-debug]
      name=rhel-8-baseos-debug
      gpgcheck=0
      enabled=1
      baseurl=http://scp-rhel8-ip/rhel/8/baseos-debug
      [rhel-8-appstream]
      name=rhel-8-appstream
      gpgcheck=0
      enabled=1
      baseurl=http://scp-rhel8-ip/rhel/8/appstream
      [rhel-8-baseos]
      name=rhel-8-baseos
      gpgcheck=0
      enabled=1
      baseurl=http://scp-rhel8-ip/rhel/8/baseos
      [rhel-8-baseos-debug]
      name=rhel-8-baseos-debug
      gpgcheck=0
      enabled=1
      baseurl=http://scp-rhel8-ip/rhel/8/baseos-debug
      [rhel-8-appstream]
      name=rhel-8-appstream
      gpgcheck=0
      enabled=1
      baseurl=http://scp-rhel8-ip/rhel/8/appstream
      Code block. Check repo configuration (RHEL8)
      Color mode
      [rhel-9-for-x86_64-baseos-rpms]
      name=rhel-9-for-x86_64-baseos-rpms
      baseurl=http://scp-rhel9-ip/rhel/$releasever/x86_64/baseos
      gpgcheck=0
      enabled=1
      [rhel-9-for-x86_64-appstream-rpms]
      name=rhel-9-for-x86_64-appstream-rpms
      baseurl=http://scp-rhel9-ip/rhel/$releasever/x86_64/appstream
      gpgcheck=0
      enabled=1
      [codeready-builder-for-rhel-9-x86_64-rpms]
      name=codeready-builder-for-rhel-9-x86_64-rpms
      baseurl=http://scp-rhel9-ip/rhel/$releasever/x86_64/codeready-builder
      gpgcheck=0
      enabled=1
      [rhel-9-for-x86_64-highavailability-rpms]
      name=rhel-9-for-x86_64-highavailability-rpms
      baseurl=http://scp-rhel9-ip/rhel/$releasever/x86_64/ha
      gpgcheck=0
      enabled=1
      [rhel-9-for-x86_64-supplementary-rpms]
      name=rhel-9-for-x86_64-supplementary-rpms
      baseurl=http://scp-rhel9-ip/rhel/$releasever/x86_64/supplementary
      gpgcheck=0
      enabled=1
      [rhel-9-for-x86_64-baseos-rpms]
      name=rhel-9-for-x86_64-baseos-rpms
      baseurl=http://scp-rhel9-ip/rhel/$releasever/x86_64/baseos
      gpgcheck=0
      enabled=1
      [rhel-9-for-x86_64-appstream-rpms]
      name=rhel-9-for-x86_64-appstream-rpms
      baseurl=http://scp-rhel9-ip/rhel/$releasever/x86_64/appstream
      gpgcheck=0
      enabled=1
      [codeready-builder-for-rhel-9-x86_64-rpms]
      name=codeready-builder-for-rhel-9-x86_64-rpms
      baseurl=http://scp-rhel9-ip/rhel/$releasever/x86_64/codeready-builder
      gpgcheck=0
      enabled=1
      [rhel-9-for-x86_64-highavailability-rpms]
      name=rhel-9-for-x86_64-highavailability-rpms
      baseurl=http://scp-rhel9-ip/rhel/$releasever/x86_64/ha
      gpgcheck=0
      enabled=1
      [rhel-9-for-x86_64-supplementary-rpms]
      name=rhel-9-for-x86_64-supplementary-rpms
      baseurl=http://scp-rhel9-ip/rhel/$releasever/x86_64/supplementary
      gpgcheck=0
      enabled=1
      Code block. Verify repo configuration (RHEL9)
  2. Use a text editor (e.g., vim) to open the /etc/hosts file.

  3. Modify the /etc/hosts file with the following content and save it.

    Color mode
    198.19.2.13 scp-rhel8-ip scp-rhel9-ip scp-rhel-ip
    198.19.2.13 scp-rhel8-ip scp-rhel9-ip scp-rhel-ip
    code block. Change /etc/hosts file settings

  4. Use the yum command to verify the RHEL Repository connection configured on the server.

    Color mode
    yum repolist –v
    yum repolist –v
    Code block. Verify repository connection settings

    • If the RHEL repository is successfully connected, you can view the repository list.
      Color mode
      Repo-id            : rhel-8-appstream
      Repo-name          : rhel-8-appstream
      Repo-revision      : 1718903734
      Repo-updated       : Fri 21 Jun 2024 02:15:34 AM KST
      Repo-pkgs          : 38,260
      Repo-available-pkgs: 25,799
      Repo-size          : 122 G
      Repo-baseurl       : http://scp-rhel8-ip/rhel/8/appstream
      Repo-expire        : 172,800 second(s) (last: Thu 08 Aug 2024 07:27:57 AM KST)
      Repo-filename      : /etc/yum.repos.d/scp.rhel8.repo
      
      Repo-id            : rhel-8-baseos
      Repo-name          : rhel-8-baseos
      Repo-revision      : 1718029433
      Repo-updated       : Mon 10 Jun 2024 11:23:52 PM KST
      Repo-pkgs          : 17,487
      Repo-available-pkgs: 17,487
      Repo-size          : 32 G
      Repo-baseurl       : http://scp-rhel8-ip/rhel/8/baseos
      Repo-expire        : 172,800 second(s) (last: Thu 08 Aug 2024 07:27:57 AM KST)
      Repo-filename      : /etc/yum.repos.d/scp.rhel8.repo
      
      Repo-id            : rhel-8-baseos-debug
      Repo-name          : rhel-8-baseos-debug
      Repo-revision      : 1717662461
      Repo-updated       : Thu 06 Jun 2024 05:27:41 PM KST
      Repo-pkgs          : 17,078
      Repo-available-pkgs: 17,078
      Repo-size          : 100 G
      Repo-baseurl       : http://scp-rhel8-ip/rhel/8/baseos-debug
      Repo-expire        : 172,800 second(s) (last: Thu 08 Aug 2024 07:27:57 AM KST)
      Repo-filename      : /etc/yum.repos.d/scp.rhel8.repo
      Repo-id            : rhel-8-appstream
      Repo-name          : rhel-8-appstream
      Repo-revision      : 1718903734
      Repo-updated       : Fri 21 Jun 2024 02:15:34 AM KST
      Repo-pkgs          : 38,260
      Repo-available-pkgs: 25,799
      Repo-size          : 122 G
      Repo-baseurl       : http://scp-rhel8-ip/rhel/8/appstream
      Repo-expire        : 172,800 second(s) (last: Thu 08 Aug 2024 07:27:57 AM KST)
      Repo-filename      : /etc/yum.repos.d/scp.rhel8.repo
      
      Repo-id            : rhel-8-baseos
      Repo-name          : rhel-8-baseos
      Repo-revision      : 1718029433
      Repo-updated       : Mon 10 Jun 2024 11:23:52 PM KST
      Repo-pkgs          : 17,487
      Repo-available-pkgs: 17,487
      Repo-size          : 32 G
      Repo-baseurl       : http://scp-rhel8-ip/rhel/8/baseos
      Repo-expire        : 172,800 second(s) (last: Thu 08 Aug 2024 07:27:57 AM KST)
      Repo-filename      : /etc/yum.repos.d/scp.rhel8.repo
      
      Repo-id            : rhel-8-baseos-debug
      Repo-name          : rhel-8-baseos-debug
      Repo-revision      : 1717662461
      Repo-updated       : Thu 06 Jun 2024 05:27:41 PM KST
      Repo-pkgs          : 17,078
      Repo-available-pkgs: 17,078
      Repo-size          : 100 G
      Repo-baseurl       : http://scp-rhel8-ip/rhel/8/baseos-debug
      Repo-expire        : 172,800 second(s) (last: Thu 08 Aug 2024 07:27:57 AM KST)
      Repo-filename      : /etc/yum.repos.d/scp.rhel8.repo
      Code block. Check repository list

Windows Key Management Service Configuration Guide

When using Windows Server on Samsung Cloud Platform, you can authenticate genuine licenses by utilizing the Key Management Service provided by Samsung Cloud Platform. To authenticate genuine copies using the Key Management Service, follow these steps.

  1. Right-click the Windows Start icon, then run cmd from Windows PowerShell (Administrator) or the Windows Run menu.

  2. Run the following command in Windows PowerShell(Administrator) or cmd to register the KMS Server.

    Color mode
    slmgr /skms 198.19.2.23:1688
    slmgr /skms 198.19.2.23:1688
    code block. WKMS configuration

  3. Run the KMS Server registration command, verify the notification popup indicating successful registration, and then click the OK button.

    Figure

  4. Run the following command in Windows PowerShell(Administrator) or cmd to activate Windows.

    Color mode
    slmgr /ato
    slmgr /ato
    Code block. Windows Server activation settings

  5. After confirming the notification popup indicating that activation was successful, click the OK button.

    Figure

  6. In Windows PowerShell(Administrator) or cmd, run the following command to verify that the product is properly activated.

    Color mode
    slmgr /dlv
    slmgr /dlv
    Code block. Verify Windows Server activation

  7. After confirming the notification popup indicating that product activation was successful, click the OK button.

    Figure

4.3 - API Reference

API Reference

4.4 - CLI Reference

CLI Reference

4.5 - Release Note

Bare Metal Server

2026.03.19
FEATURE Add new server type
  • The 4th‑generation BM based on the Intel 6th‑generation (Granite Rapids) Processor has been released.
    • Bare Metal Server s4 and h4 server types have been added.
    • Detailed information about the s4/h4 server type can be found in s3/h3 server type.
2025.10.23
FEATURE Add Local disk partition feature
  • Provides local disk partition functionality
    • Now you can create and use up to 10 Local disk partitions.
2025.07.01
FEATURE Add new features and provide additional OS Image
  • You can terminate multiple resources simultaneously from the Bare Metal Server list.
  • You can change the IP of a regular Subnet.
  • OS Image has been added.
    • RHEL 8.10, Ubuntu 24.04
2025.02.27
FEATURE Add Placement Group feature and OS Image, server type
  • Add Bare Metal Server feature
    • Distribute servers belonging to the same Placement group across different racks.
    • Additional OS images provided (RHEL 9.4, Rocky Linux 8.6, Rocky Linux 9.4)
    • Add a 3rd‑generation (s3/h3) server type based on Intel 4th‑generation (Sapphire Rapids) Processor. For more information, refer to Bare Metal Server 서버 타입.
  • Samsung Cloud Platform Common Feature Changes
    • Account, IAM, Service Home, tags, and other common CX changes have been applied.
2024.10.01
NEW Bare Metal Server service official version release
  • We have officially launched the Bare Metal Server service.
  • We have launched a Bare Metal Server service that lets customers use a physical server without virtualization, exclusively for their own use.

5 - Multi-node GPU Cluster

5.1 - Overview

Service Overview

Multi-node GPU Cluster is a service that provides physical GPU servers without virtualization for large-scale high-performance AI computation. You can use two or more Bare Metal Servers equipped with GPUs to cluster multiple GPUs, and conveniently operate GPU servers in conjunction with Samsung Cloud Platform’s high‑performance storage and networking services.

Provided Features

The Multi-node GPU Cluster provides the following features.

  • Auto Provisioning and Management: Through the web-based Console, you can easily provision servers of the standard GPU Bare Metal model equipped with 8 GPUs and manage resources and costs.
  • Network Connection: You can cluster multiple GPUs on two or more Bare Metal Servers via high‑speed interconnects, and by configuring a GPU Direct RDMA (Remote Direct Memory Access) environment, you can directly process data I/O between GPU memories, enabling high‑speed AI/Machine Learning computation.
  • Storage Connection: Provides various additional attached storage besides the OS disk. * High-performance SSD NAS File Storage, Block Storage, and Object Storage directly integrated with a high-speed network can also be used together.
  • Network Configuration Management: The server’s subnet/IP can be easily changed from the values set at initial creation. * NAT IP provides a management feature that allows you to enable or disable it as needed.
  • Monitoring: You can view monitoring information for computing resources such as CPU, GPU, Memory, and Disk through Cloud Monitoring. * To use the Cloud Monitoring service of a Multi-node GPU Cluster, you need to install the Agent. * Please install the Agent to ensure stable service. * For more details, please refer to Multi-node GPU Cluster Monitoring Metrics.
  • Terraform Provision: Provides an IaC environment via Terraform.

Component

Multi-node GPU Cluster provides GPUs as a Bare Metal Sever type with standard images and server types. NVSwitch and NVLink are provided.

Specifications by GPU Type

GPU (Graphic Processing Unit) is specialized for parallel operations that process large amounts of data quickly, enabling large-scale parallel computation in fields such as artificial intelligence (AI) and data analysis.

The following are the specifications of GPU types offered by the Multi-node GPU Cluster service.

CategoryH100 TypeB300 Type
GPU ArchitectureNVIDIA HopperNVIDIA Blackwell Ultra
GPU Memory80 GiB268 GiB
GPU Transistors80 billion 4N TSMC208 billion 4NP TSMC
FP16 Tensor Core (Dense)989 TFLOPs2.25 PFLOPs
FP8 Tensor Core (Dense)1979 TFLOPs4.5 PFLOPs
FP4 Tensor Core (Dense)Not supported13.5 PFLOPs
GPU Memory Bandwidth3,352 GB/s HBM38 TB/s HBM3e
NVLink performanceNVLink 4NVLink 5
NVLink Signaling Rate25 GB/s (x18)50 GB/s (x18)
NVSwitch GPU-to-GPU bandwidth900 GB/s1.8 TB/s
Total NVSwitch aggregate bandwidth7.2 TB/s14.4 TB/s
Table. GPU Type specifications

OS and GPU driver version

The operating systems (OS) supported by the Multi-node GPU Cluster are as follows.

OSOS versionGPU driver version
Ubuntu22.04535.86.10, 535.183.06
Ubuntu24.04580.105.08
Table. Multi-node GPU Cluster OS and GPU driver version

Server type

The format of server types provided by the Multi-node GPU Cluster is as follows.

  • Example: when the server type is g2c96h8_metal
CategoryexampleDetailed description
Server generationg2Provided server generation
  • g2: g means GPU server, and 2 means generation
CPUc96Number of cores
  • c96: Allocated cores are physical cores
GPUh8GPU type and quantity
  • h8: h means GPU type, and 8 means GPU quantity
Table. Multi-node GPU Cluster server type format
Reference
For detailed information about the server types provided by Multi-node GPU Cluster, refer to Multi-node GPU Cluster Server Types.

Preceding Service

This is a list of services that must be pre-configured before creating the service. Please refer to the guide provided for each service and prepare in advance.

Service CategoryserviceDetailed description
NetworkingVPCA service that provides an isolated virtual network in a cloud environment
Table. Multi-node GPU Cluster preliminary service

5.1.1 - Server type

Multi-node GPU Cluster server type

Multi-node GPU Cluster is categorized based on the GPU Type it provides, and the GPU used in a Multi-node GPU Cluster is determined by the server type selected when creating a GPU Node. Select the server type based on the specifications of the application you want to run on a multi-node GPU cluster.

The server types supported by the Multi-node GPU Cluster are as follows.

  • Example: when the server type is g2c96h8_metal.
    CategoryexampleDetailed description
    Server generationg2Provided server generation
    • g2
      • g means GPU server specification
      • 2 means generation
    CPUc96Number of cores
    • c96: Allocated cores are physical cores
    GPUh8GPU type and quantity
    • h8: h means GPU type, and 8 means GPU quantity
    Table. Multi-node GPU Cluster server type format

g2 server type

The g2 server type is a GPU Bare Metal Server that uses NVIDIA H100 SXM GPUs, suitable for large-scale high-performance AI computation.

  • 8 NVIDIA Hopper Architecture-based H100 GPUs provided
  • Provides 1,979 TFLOPS FP8 Tensor Core performance per GPU, 989 TFLOPS FP16 Tensor Core performance.
  • Supports up to 96 vCPUs and 2,048 GB of memory
  • Supports up to 1,600 Gb/s NVIDIA InfiniBand RDMA network.
  • Service network up to 100 Gbps
  • 900 GB/s GPU P2P communication via NVSwitch within a node
Server typeGPUGPU MemoryCPU(Core)MemoryDiskGPU P2P
g2c96h8_metalH100640 GiB96 vCore2 TBSSD (OS) 960 GB * 2, NVMeSSD 3.84 TB * 4900 GB/s NVSwitch
Table. Multi-node GPU Cluster server type specifications > H100 server type

g3 server type

The g3 server type is a GPU Bare Metal Server that uses NVIDIA B300 SXM GPUs, suitable not only for large-scale high-performance AI computation but also for LLM inference and AI deployment for generative AI.

  • 8 NVIDIA Blackwell Ultra Architecture-based B300 GPUs provided
  • Provides 13.5 PFLOPS FP4 Tensor Core and 4.5 PFLOPS FP8 Tensor Core performance per GPU.
  • Supports up to 128 vCPUs and 4,096 GB of memory
  • Supports up to 6,400 Gb/s NVIDIA InfiniBand RDMA network
  • Service network up to 100 Gbps
  • 1.8 TB/s GPU P2P communication via NVSwitch within a node
Server typeGPUGPU MemoryCPU(Core)MemoryDiskGPU P2P
g3c128b8_metalB3002.1 TiB128 vCore4 TBSSD (OS) 960 GB * 2, NVMeSSD 3.84 TB * 41.8 TB/s NVSwitch
Table. Multi-node GPU Cluster server type specifications > B300 server type

5.1.2 - Monitoring Metrics

Cloud Monitoring service termination notice

According to Samsung Cloud Platform’s policy, the Cloud Monitoring service is scheduled to be discontinued in September 2026.
Accordingly, from after the September 2026 release, resource monitoring of the Samsung Cloud Platform via Cloud Monitoring will no longer be possible.

With a new alternative service, you can continuously perform resource monitoring by leveraging ServiceWatch released in October 2025.
ServiceWatch provides more modern and powerful features, replacing Cloud Monitoring to deliver a seamless monitoring environment.

If you are collecting metrics and logs through the Cloud Monitoring Agent, you need to switch to the ServiceWatch Agent.

For more details about ServiceWatch, please refer to ServiceWatch Overview.
Detailed information about ServiceWatch Agent: please refer to the ServiceWatch Agent

Multi-node GPU Cluster Monitoring Metrics

The table below shows the monitoring metrics of a Multi-node GPU Cluster that can be viewed through Cloud Monitoring.

Guide
In a Multi-node GPU Cluster, users must install the Agent themselves via the guide to view monitoring metrics. Before using the stable service, please be sure to install the Agent. For instructions on installing the Agent and detailed usage of Cloud Monitoring, refer to the Cloud Monitoring guide.

Multi-node GPU Cluster [Cluster]

Performance itemsDetailed descriptionunit
Memory Total [Basic]bytes of usable memorybytes
Memory Used [Basic]Current memory usage in bytesbytes
Memory Swap In [Basic]bytes of the replaced memorybytes
Memory Swap Out [Basic]bytes of the replaced memorybytes
Memory Free [Basic]bytes of unused memorybytes
Disk Read Bytes [Basic]Read bytesbytes
Disk Read Requests [Basic]Number of read requestscnt
Disk Write Bytes [Basic]write bytesbytes
Disk Write Requests [Basic]Number of write requestscnt
CPU Usage [Basic]Average system CPU usage over 1 minute%
Instance State [Basic]Instance statusstate
Network In Bytes [Basic]Received bytesbytes
Network In Dropped [Basic]Incoming packet dropcnt
Network In Packets [Basic]Number of received packetscnt
Network Out Bytes [Basic]sent bytesbytes
Network Out Dropped [Basic]Transmit packet dropcnt
Network Out Packets [Basic]Number of transmitted packetscnt
Table. Multi-node GPU Cluster [Cluster] Monitoring Metrics (default)
Performance itemsDetailed descriptionunit
Cluster GPU CountGPU Count SUM in Cluster
  • Sum of GPU Count for nodes in the cluster: calculate the total GPU Count of each node within the same GPU CLUSTER
cnt
Cluster GPU Count In UseNumber of GPUs being used by jobs within the cluster
  • Number of GPUs used by processes within the cluster: sum of GPUs occupied by processes, parsed from the ‘Processes:’ section at the bottom of nvidia-smi output of nodes in the same GPU cluster
cnt
Cluster GPU UsageGPU Utilization AVG within the cluster
  • Cluster node GPU utilization average value: calculate the average of each node’s GPU utilization values within the same GPU cluster
%
Cluster GPU Memory Usage [Avg]Cluster GPU Memory Utilization AVG
  • Average Memory utilization of nodes within the cluster: calculate the average of each node’s Memory utilization values among nodes in the same GPU cluster
%
Table. Multi-node GPU Cluster [Cluster] Additional monitoring metrics (Agent installation required)

Multi-node GPU Cluster [Node]

Performance itemsDetailed descriptionunit
Memory Total [Basic]bytes of usable memorybytes
Memory Used [Basic]Current memory usage in bytesbytes
Memory Swap In [Basic]bytes of the replaced memorybytes
Memory Swap Out [Basic]bytes of the replaced memorybytes
Memory Free [Basic]bytes of unused memorybytes
Disk Read Bytes [Basic]Read bytesbytes
Disk Read Requests [Basic]Number of read requestscnt
Disk Write Bytes [Basic]write bytesbytes
Disk Write Requests [Basic]Number of write requestscnt
CPU Usage [Basic]Average system CPU usage over 1 minute%
Instance State [Basic]Instance statusstate
Network In Bytes [Basic]Received bytesbytes
Network In Dropped [Basic]Incoming packet dropcnt
Network In Packets [Basic]Number of received packetscnt
Network Out Bytes [Basic]sent bytesbytes
Network Out Dropped [Basic]Transmit packet dropcnt
Network Out Packets [Basic]Number of transmitted packetscnt
Table. Multi-node GPU Cluster [Node] Monitoring Metrics (provided by default)
Performance itemsDetailed descriptionunit
GPU CountNumber of GPUscnt
GPU TemperatureGPU temperature
GPU Usageutilization%
GPU Usage [Avg]Overall average GPU utilization (%)%
GPU Power CapMaximum power capacity of the GPUW
GPU Power UsageCurrent GPU power usageW
GPU Memory Usage [Avg]GPU Memory Uti. AVG%
GPU Count in useNumber of GPUs in use by jobs on the nodecnt
Execution Status for nvidia-smiResult of running the nvidia-smi commandstatus
Core Usage [IO Wait]Ratio of CPU time spent in wait state (disk wait)%
Core Usage [System]Proportion of CPU time spent in kernel space%
Core Usage [User]Proportion of CPU time spent in user space%
CPU CoresThe number of CPU cores on the host. The maximum value of the unnormalized ratio is 100%* of a core. The unnormalized ratio already incorporates this value, and its maximum is 100%* of a core.cnt
CPU Usage [Active]Percentage of CPU time used excluding Idle and IOWait states (when all 4 cores are used at 100%: 400%)%
CPU Usage [Idle]It is the proportion of CPU time spent in idle state.%
CPU Usage [IO Wait]This is the proportion of CPU time spent in a waiting state (disk wait).%
CPU Usage [System]Percentage of CPU time used by the kernel (when all 4 cores are used at 100%: 400%)%
CPU Usage [User]Percentage of CPU time used in user space. (If all 4 cores are used at 100%, it is 400%)%
CPU Usage/Core [Active]Percentage of CPU time used excluding Idle and IOWait states (value normalized by the number of cores; 100% when all four cores are fully utilized)%
CPU Usage/Core [Idle]It is the proportion of CPU time spent in idle state.%
CPU Usage/Core [IO Wait]This is the proportion of CPU time spent in a waiting state (disk wait).%
CPU Usage/Core [System]Percentage of CPU time used by the kernel (value normalized by the number of cores; 100% when all 4 cores are fully utilized)%
CPU Usage/Core [User]Percentage of CPU time used in user space. (Value normalized by the number of cores; 100% when all 4 cores are fully utilized)%
Disk CPU Usage [IO Request]It is the proportion of CPU time during which I/O requests for the device were executed (device bandwidth utilization). If this value approaches 100%, the device becomes saturated.%
Disk Queue Size [Avg]The average queue length of requests executed for the device.num
Disk Read BytesThe number of bytes read per second from the device.bytes
Disk Read Bytes [Delta Avg]Average of system.diskio.read.bytes_delta for individual disksbytes
Disk Read Bytes [Delta Max]Maximum system.diskio.read.bytes_delta of individual disksbytes
Disk Read Bytes [Delta Min]Minimum system.diskio.read.bytes_delta of individual disksbytes
Disk Read Bytes [Delta Sum]Sum of the system.diskio.read.bytes_delta of individual disksbytes
Disk Read Bytes [Delta]Delta of the system.diskio.read.bytes value for each diskbytes
Disk Read Bytes [Success]Total number of bytes successfully read. On Linux, assuming a sector size of 512, it is the number of sectors read multiplied by 512.bytes
Disk Read RequestsNumber of read requests to the disk device per secondcnt
Disk Read Requests [Delta Avg]Average of the system.diskio.read.count_delta for individual diskscnt
Disk Read Requests [Delta Max]Maximum system.diskio.read.count_delta for individual diskscnt
Disk Read Requests [Delta Min]Minimum of system.diskio.read.count_delta for individual diskscnt
Disk Read Requests [Delta Sum]Sum of system.diskio.read.count_delta of individual diskscnt
Disk Read Requests [Success Delta]Delta of system.diskio.read.count for each diskcnt
Disk Read Requests [Success]Total number of successful readscnt
Disk Request Size [Avg]Average size of requests executed on the device (unit: sectors).num
Disk Service Time [Avg]Average service time (ms) of input requests executed on the device.ms
Disk Wait Time [Avg]Average time taken for requests executed on the supported device.ms
Disk Wait Time [Read]Average disk wait timems
Disk Wait Time [Write]Average disk wait timems
Disk Write Bytes [Delta Avg]Average of system.diskio.write.bytes_delta for each diskbytes
Disk Write Bytes [Delta Max]Maximum system.diskio.write.bytes_delta of individual disksbytes
Disk Write Bytes [Delta Min]Minimum of system.diskio.write.bytes_delta for individual disksbytes
Disk Write Bytes [Delta Sum]Sum of the system.diskio.write.bytes_delta of individual disksbytes
Disk Write Bytes [Delta]Delta of the system.diskio.write.bytes value for each diskbytes
Disk Write Bytes [Success]Total number of bytes successfully written. On Linux, assuming a sector size of 512, it is the number of sectors written multiplied by 512.bytes
Disk Write RequestsNumber of write requests to the disk device per secondcnt
Disk Write Requests [Delta Avg]Average of system.diskio.write.count_delta for individual diskscnt
Disk Write Requests [Delta Max]Maximum system.diskio.write.count_delta for individual diskscnt
Disk Write Requests [Delta Min]Minimum of system.diskio.write.count_delta for individual diskscnt
Disk Write Requests [Delta Sum]Sum of the system.diskio.write.count_delta of individual diskscnt
Disk Write Requests [Success Delta]Delta of system.diskio.write.count for each diskcnt
Disk Write Requests [Success]Total number of successful writescnt
Disk Writes BytesIt is the number of bytes per second written to the device.bytes
Filesystem Hang Checkfilesystem (local/NFS) hang check (normal:1, abnormal:0)status
Filesystem NodesIt is the total number of file nodes in the file system.cnt
Filesystem Nodes [Free]It is the total number of available file nodes in the file system.cnt
Filesystem Size [Available]Disk space (bytes) that unauthorized users can use.bytes
Filesystem Size [Free]Available disk space (bytes)bytes
Filesystem Size [Total]Total disk space (bytes)bytes
Filesystem UsageUsed disk space percentage%
Filesystem Usage [Avg]Average of individual filesystem.used.pct%
Filesystem Usage [Inode]inode usage%
Filesystem Usage [Max]Maximum among individual filesystem.used.pct%
Filesystem Usage [Min]minimum of individual filesystem.used.pct%
Filesystem Usage [Total]-%
Filesystem UsedUsed disk space (bytes)bytes
Filesystem Used [Inode]inode usagebytes
Memory FreeTotal amount of available memory (bytes). Memory used by system cache and buffers is not included (see system.memory.actual.free).bytes
Memory Free [Actual]Actual usable memory (bytes). The calculation method varies by OS: on Linux, it is MemAvailable from /proc/meminfo, or if meminfo cannot be used, it is calculated from available memory plus cache and buffers. On OSX, it is the sum of usable memory and inactive memory. On Windows, it corresponds to a value such as system.memory.free.bytes
Memory Free [Swap]Available swap memory.bytes
Memory Totaltotal memorybytes
Memory Total [Swap]Total swap memory.bytes
Memory UsagePercentage of used memory
  • ((Memory Total - Memory Free) / Memory Total) * 100
  • Memory Free: the amount of available memory currently free
%
Memory Usage [Actual]Percentage of memory actually used
  • ((Memory Total - Mememory Available) / Memory Total) * 100 or ((Memory Total - (Memmory Free + Buffers + Cached) / MemTotal) * 100
  • Memory Free: the amount of free memory currently available
  • Buffers: the amount of memory used for buffers
  • Cached: the amount of memory used for the page cache
%
Memory Usage [Cache Swap]Cached swap usage rate%
Memory Usage [Swap]Percentage of used swap memory%
Memory Usedused memorybytes
Memory Used [Actual]Actual used memory (bytes). The value obtained by subtracting used memory from total memory. Available memory is calculated differently for each OS (see system.actual.free).bytes
Memory Used [Swap]Used swap memory.bytes
CollisionsNetwork collisioncnt
Network In BytesNumber of received bytesbytes
Network In Bytes [Delta Avg]Average of system.network.in.bytes_delta for each networkbytes
Network In Bytes [Delta Max]Maximum of system.network.in.bytes_delta for each networkbytes
Network In Bytes [Delta Min]Minimum system.network.in.bytes_delta for each networkbytes
Network In Bytes [Delta Sum]Sum of system.network.in.bytes_delta for individual networksbytes
Network In Bytes [Delta]Delta of received byte countbytes
Network In DroppedNumber of deleted packets among incoming packetscnt
Network In ErrorsNumber of errors during receptioncnt
Network In PacketsNumber of received packetscnt
Network In Packets [Delta Avg]Average of system.network.in.packets_delta for individual networkscnt
Network In Packets [Delta Max]Maximum of system.network.in.packets_delta for each networkcnt
Network In Packets [Delta Min]Minimum of system.network.in.packets_delta for each networkcnt
Network In Packets [Delta Sum]Sum of system.network.in.packets_delta for individual networkscnt
Network In Packets [Delta]Delta of received packet countcnt
Network Out BytesNumber of transmitted bytesbytes
Network Out Bytes [Delta Avg]Average of system.network.out.bytes_delta for each networkbytes
Network Out Bytes [Delta Max]Maximum system.network.out.bytes_delta of individual networksbytes
Network Out Bytes [Delta Min]Minimum of system.network.out.bytes_delta for individual networksbytes
Network Out Bytes [Delta Sum]Sum of system.network.out.bytes_delta for individual networksbytes
Network Out Bytes [Delta]Delta of transmitted byte countbytes
Network Out DroppedNumber of deleted packets among outgoing packets. This value is not reported by the operating system, so it is always 0 on Darwin and BSD.cnt
Network Out ErrorsNumber of errors during transmissioncnt
Network Out PacketsNumber of transmitted packetscnt
Network Out Packets [Delta Avg]Average of system.network.out.packets_delta for each networkcnt
Network Out Packets [Delta Max]Maximum of system.network.out.packets_delta for each networkcnt
Network Out Packets [Delta Min]Minimum of system.network.out.packets_delta for each networkcnt
Network Out Packets [Delta Sum]Sum of system.network.out.packets_delta for individual networkscnt
Network Out Packets [Delta]Delta of transmitted packet countcnt
Open Connections [TCP]All open TCP connectionscnt
Open Connections [UDP]All open UDP connectionscnt
Port UsageAvailable port usage rate%
SYN Sent SocketsNumber of sockets in SYN_SENT state (when connecting from local to remote)cnt
Kernel PID Maxkernel.pid_max valuecnt
Kernel Thread Maxkernel.threads-max valuecnt
Process CPU UsagePercentage of CPU time consumed by the process since the last update. This value is similar to the %CPU value shown for the process by the top command on Unix systems.%
Process CPU Usage/CoreThe percentage of CPU time used by the process since the last event. Normalized by the number of cores, with values ranging from 0 to 100%.%
Process Memory UsageProportion of main memory (RAM) occupied by a process%
Process Memory UsedResident Set size. The amount of memory a process occupies in RAM. In Windows, the current working set size.bytes
Process PIDprocess pidPID
Process PPIDparent process PIDPID
Processes [Dead]Number of dead processescnt
Processes [Idle]Number of idle processescnt
Processes [Running]Number of running processescnt
Processes [Sleeping]Number of sleeping processescnt
Processes [Stopped]stopped processes countcnt
Processes [Total]Total number of processescnt
Processes [Unknown]Number of processes with an unknown or unsearchable statuscnt
Processes [Zombie]Number of zombie processescnt
Running Process Usageprocess usage%
Running ProcessesNumber of running processescnt
Running Thread UsageThread usage rate%
Running ThreadsTotal number of threads running in running processescnt
Instance StatusInstance statusstate
Context Switchescontext switch count (per second)cnt
Load/Core [1 min]The load over the last 1 minute divided by the number of corescnt
Load/Core [15 min]The load over the last 15 minutes divided by the number of corescnt
Load/Core [5 min]The load over the last 5 minutes divided by the number of corescnt
Multipaths [Active]External storage connection path status = active countcnt
Multipaths [Failed]External storage connection path status = failed countcnt
Multipaths [Faulty]External storage connection path status = faulty countcnt
NTP Offsetmeasured offset of the last sample (the time difference between the NTP server and the local environment)num
Run Queue LengthExecution queue lengthnum
UptimeOS uptime(uptime). (milliseconds)ms
Context SwitchiesCPU context switch count (per second)cnt
Disk Read Bytes [Sec]Number of bytes read from a Windows logical disk in 1 secondcnt
Disk Read Time [Avg]Average data read time (seconds)sec
Disk Transfer Time [Avg]Disk average wait timesec
Disk UsageDisk usage%
Disk Write Bytes [Sec]Number of bytes written in one second on a Windows logical diskcnt
Disk Write Time [Avg]Average data write time (seconds)sec
Pagingfile UsagePaging file usage%
Pool Used [Non Paged]Nonpaged Pool usage in kernel memorybytes
Pool Used [Paged]Paged Pool usage in kernel memorybytes
Process [Running]Number of currently running processescnt
Threads [Running]Number of currently running threadscnt
Threads [Waiting]Number of threads waiting for processor timecnt
Table. Multi-node GPU Cluster [Node] Additional monitoring metrics (Agent installation required)

5.2 - How-to guides

Users can create the service by entering the required information for the Multi-node GPU Cluster service and selecting detailed options through the Samsung Cloud Platform Console.

Multi-node GPU Cluster Getting Started

You can create and use a Multi-node GPU Cluster service in the Samsung Cloud Platform Console.

This service consists of a GPU Node and a Cluster Fabric service.

Create GPU Node

Multi-node GPU Cluster To create a Multi-node GPU Cluster, follow the steps below.

  1. All Services > Compute > Multi-node GPU Cluster menu, click it. Navigate to the Service Home page of Multi-node GPU Cluster.
  2. On the Service Home page, click the Create GPU Node button. You will be taken to the Create GPU Node page.
  3. On the GPU Node Creation page, enter the information required to create the service and select detailed options.
    • Select the required information in the Image and Version Selection area.
      Category
      required or not
      Detailed description
      imageRequiredSelect the type of image provided
      • Ubuntu
      Image versionRequiredSelect version of the chosen image
      • Provide a list of versions for the supplied server image
      Table. GPU Node image and version selection options
    • In the Service Information Input area, enter or select the required information.
      Category
      Required
      Detailed description
      Number of serversRequiredNumber of GPU Node servers to create simultaneously
      • Only numeric input is allowed, and the minimum number of servers to create is 2.
      • Only during the initial setup can you create 2 or more, and subsequent expansions can be done one at a time.
      Service Type > Server TypeRequiredGPU Node server type
      • Select the desired CPU, Memory, GPU, and Disk specifications
      Service Type > Planned ComputeRequiredStatus of resources with Planned Compute configured
      • In Use: Number of resources with Planned Compute that are currently in use
      • Configured: Number of resources with Planned Compute configured
      • Coverage Preview: Amount applied per resource by Planned Compute
      • Apply for Planned Compute Service: Navigate to the Planned Compute service application page
      Table. GPU Node Service Information Input Items
    • In the Required Information Input area, enter or select the necessary information.
      Category
      Required
      Detailed description
      Administrator accountRequiredSet the administrator account and password to be used when connecting to the server
      • Ubuntu OS is provided with root fixed
      Server name PrefixRequiredEnter a Prefix to distinguish each GPU Node generated when the selected number of servers is 2 or more
      • Automatically generated in the form of user input value (prefix) + ‘-###
      • Must start with a lowercase English letter and be entered using lowercase letters, numbers, and special characters (-) within 3 to 11 characters
      • Must not end with a special character (-)
      Network SettingsRequiredSet the network where the GPU Node will be installed
      • VPC name: select a pre‑created VPC
      • General Subnet name: select a pre‑created general Subnet
        • IP can be auto‑generated or manually entered; if manual input is chosen, the user enters the IP directly
      • NAT: usable only when there is a single server and the VPC is attached to an Internet Gateway. Check to use, and you can select a NAT IP (initially it can be created only with two or more servers, so modify it on the resource detail page)
      • NAT IP: select a NAT IP
        • If no NAT IP is available, click the Create new button to generate a Public IP
        • Click the Refresh button to view and select the created Public IP
        • Creating a Public IP incurs charges according to the Public IP pricing
      Table. Required input fields for GPU Node
    • In the Cluster Selection area, create or select a Cluster Fabric.
      Category
      Required status
      Detailed description
      Cluster FabricRequiredConfigure a group of GPU Node servers that can apply GPU Direct RDMA together
      • Optimal GPU performance and speed can be achieved only within the same Cluster Fabric
      • When creating a new Cluster Fabric, *New Input > select Node pool, then enter the name of the Cluster Fabric to create
      • To add to an existing Cluster Fabric, Existing Input > select Node pool, then select the previously created Cluster Fabric
      Table. GPU Node Cluster Fabric selection items
    • Additional Information Input area, enter or select the required information.
      Category
      Required status
      Detailed description
      LockSelectionUsing a lock prevents accidental actions that could terminate, start, or stop the server.
      Init ScriptSelectionScript to run when the server starts
      • The Init Script must be selected differently depending on the image type
        • For Linux: Choose Shell Script or cloud-init
      tagSelectionAdd Tag
      • Up to 50 can be added per resource
      • After clicking the Add Tag button, enter or select Key, Value values
      Table. GPU Node additional information input fields
  4. Summary Check the detailed information and estimated billing amount generated in the panel, and click the Create button.
    • When creation is complete, check the created resources on the GPU Node List page.
Caution
  • When creating a service, the GPU MIG/ECC settings are reset. However, to ensure the correct settings are applied, perform an initial reboot, verify that the settings have taken effect, and then proceed.
  • For detailed information on resetting GPU MIG/ECC settings, refer to the GPU MIG/ECC Reset Settings Checklist Guide.

Check GPU Node details

The Multi-node GPU Cluster service allows you to view and edit the full resource list and detailed information of GPU nodes.

GPU Node Details page consists of Details, Tags, Job History tabs.

To view detailed information about the GPU Node, follow these steps.

  1. All Services > Compute > Multi-node GPU Cluster > GPU Node menu, click it. Navigate to the Service Home page of Multi-node GPU Cluster.

  2. On the Service Home page, click the GPU Node menu. You will be taken to the GPU Node List page.

    • Resource items beyond the required columns can be added via the Settings button.
      Category
      Required status
      Detailed description
      Resource IDSelectionUser-created GPU Node ID
      Cluster Fabric nameRequiredUser-created Cluster Fabric name
      Server nameRequiredUser-created GPU Node name
      Server typeRequiredServer type of the GPU Node
      • Users can view the number of cores, memory capacity, and GPU type and quantity of the resources they created
      imageRequiredUser-created GPU Node image version
      IPRequiredIP of the GPU node created by the user
      statusRequiredStatus of the user-created GPU node
      Creation date and timeSelectionGPU Node creation timestamp
      Table. GPU Node resource list items
  3. On the GPU Node List page, click the resource for which you want to view detailed information. You will be taken to the GPU Node Details page.

    • GPU Server Details At the top of the page, status information and descriptions of additional features are displayed.
      CategoryDetailed description
      GPU Node statusStatus of user-created GPU Node
      • Creating: server is being created
      • Running:: creation completed and available
      • Editing:: IP is being changed
      • Unknown: error state
      • Starting: server is starting
      • Stopping: server is stopping
      • Stopped: server stopped
      • Terminating: terminating
      • Terminated: termination completed
      Server controlButton to change server status
      • Start: Start a stopped server
      • Stop: Stop a running server
      Service terminationCancel service button
      Table. GPU Node status information and additional features

Detailed Information

On the GPU Node List page’s Details Tab, you can view the detailed information of the selected resource and edit the information if necessary.

CategoryDetailed description
serviceService name
Resource TypeResource Type
SRNUnique resource ID in Samsung Cloud Platform
  • In a GPU Node, it refers to the GPU Node SRN
Resource nameResource Name
  • In the GPU Node service, it refers to the GPU Node name
Resource IDUnique resource ID in the service
constructorUser who created the service
Creation date and timeService creation date and time
editorUser who edited the service information
Modification dateDate and time the service information was modified
Server nameServer name
Node poolA collection of nodes that can be grouped into the same Cluster Fabric
Cluster Fabric nameUser-created Cluster Fabric name
Image/VersionServer OS image and version
Server typeCPU, memory, GPU, information display
Planned ComputeResource status with Planned Compute configured
LockDisplay whether Lock is enabled or disabled
  • When Lock is enabled, it prevents server termination/start/stop operations, avoiding actions caused by mistakes.
  • If you need to change the Lock attribute value, click the Edit button to configure.
NetworkGPU Node network information
  • VPC name, general Subnet name, IP, IP status, NAT IP, NAT IP status
Block StorageBlock Storage information attached to the server
  • Volume name, disk type, capacity, status
Init ScriptView the Init Script content entered when creating the server
Table. GPU Node detailed information tab items

tag

On the GPU Node List page’s Tag Tab, you can view the selected resource’s tag information, and add, modify, or delete it.

CategoryDetailed description
Tag listTag list
  • You can view the Key and Value information of the tag
  • Up to 50 tags can be added per resource
  • When entering a tag, you can search and select from the list of previously created Keys and Values
Table. GPU Node Tag Tab Items

Job History

On the GPU Node List page’s Job History Tab, you can view the job history of the selected resource.

CategoryDetailed description
Task History ListResource Change History
  • Check operation details, operation timestamp, resource type, resource name, event topic, operation result, and operator information
  • Detailed Search button provides detailed search functionality
Table. GPU Node Job History Tab Detailed Information Items

Control GPU Node Operation

If you need server control and management functions for the created GPU Node resources, you can perform tasks on the GPU Node List or GPU Node Details page. You can start and stop the resources of a running GPU node.

Getting Started with GPU Node

You can start a GPU Node that is stopped (Stopped). To start a GPU Node, follow the steps below.

  1. Click the All Services > Compute > Multi-node GPU Cluster menu. Go to the Service Home page of Multi-node GPU Cluster.
  2. On the Service Home page, click the GPU Node menu. You will be taken to the GPU Node List page.
    • On the GPU Node List page, after selecting individual or multiple servers with the checkboxes, you can Start using the More button at the top.
  3. On the GPU Node List page, click the resource. Navigate to the GPU Node Detail page.
    • On the GPU Node Details page, click the Start button at the top to start the server.
  4. Check the server status and complete the status change.

Stopping GPU Node

You can stop a GPU Node that is running (Active). To stop a GPU Node, follow the steps below.

  1. Click the All Services > Compute > Multi-node GPU Cluster menu. Go to the Service Home page of Multi-node GPU Cluster.
  2. On the Service Home page, click the GPU Node menu. You will be taken to the GPU Node List page.
    • GPU Node List page allows you to control individual or multiple servers by selecting the checkboxes and using the Stop button at the top.
  3. On the GPU Node List page, click the resource. You will be taken to the GPU Node Details page.
    • On the GPU Node Details page, click the Stop button at the top to stop the server.
  4. Check the server status and complete the status change.

Terminate GPU Node

You can terminate unused GPU Nodes to reduce operating costs. However, terminating a service may cause the running service to stop immediately, so you should carefully consider the impact of service interruption before proceeding with termination.

Caution
Please note that data cannot be recovered after terminating the service.

To cancel a GPU Node, follow the steps below.

  1. Click the All Services > Compute > Multi-node GPU Server menu. Navigate to the Service Home page of the Multi-node GPU Cluster.
  2. On the Service Home page, click the Cluster Fabric menu. You will be taken to the Cluster Fabric list page.
  3. Cluster Fabric List page, select the resources to terminate, and click the Service Termination button.
    • Resources that use the same Cluster Fabric can be terminated simultaneously.
  4. When termination is complete, check on the GPU Node List page whether the resources have been terminated.
information

The cases where a GPU Node cannot be terminated are as follows.

  • When Block Storage(BM) is connected: Please disconnect the Block Storage(BM) connection first.
  • If File Storage is connected: Please disconnect the File Storage first.
  • When Lock is set: Please change the Lock setting to disabled and try again.
  • If the selection includes a server that cannot be terminated simultaneously: Please re-select only resources that can be terminated.
  • If the server you want to terminate has a different Cluster Fabric: Select only resources that use the same Cluster Fabric.
Reference
If all GPU Nodes in the Cluster Fabric are deleted, the Cluster Fabric is automatically deleted.

5.2.1 - Manage Cluster Fabric

Cluster Fabric is a service that helps manage the servers (GPU Node) included in a GPU Cluster. By using Cluster Fabric, you can move servers between GPU Clusters in the same Node pool and optimize GPU performance and speed within the same GPU Cluster.

Creating Cluster Fabric

Cluster Fabric can be created together with a GPU Node, and it cannot be created or deleted separately. If all GPU Nodes within a Cluster Fabric are terminated, the Cluster Fabric is automatically deleted.
If you have not created a GPU Node, please create a GPU Node first. For more information, see GPU Node 생성하기.

Check Cluster Fabric details

Notice
  • Cluster Fabric can be created together when a GPU node is created, and it cannot be created or deleted independently.
  • If all GPU nodes in the Cluster Fabric are terminated, the Cluster Fabric is automatically deleted.
  • If you have not created a GPU Node, please create a GPU Node first. For more details, refer to GPU Node 생성하기.

On the Cluster Fabric List page and the Cluster Fabric Details page, you can view the generated Cluster Fabric list and details and move the server.

  1. Click the All Services > Compute > Multi-node GPU Server menu. Go to the Service Home page of the Multi-node GPU Cluster.

  2. On the Service Home page, click the Cluster Fabric menu. You will be taken to the Cluster Fabric List page.

    • On the Cluster Fabric List page, you can view the resource list of GPU clusters created by the user.
    • Resource items beyond the required columns can be added via the Settings button.
      Category
      Required
      Detailed description
      Resource IDSelectionUser-created Cluster Fabric ID
      Cluster Fabric nameRequiredUser-created Cluster Fabric name
      Node poolSelectionA collection of nodes that can be grouped into the same Cluster Fabric
      Number of serversSelectionNumber of GPU Nodes
      Server typeSelectionServer type of GPU Node
      • Users can view the number of cores, memory capacity, and GPU type and count of the resources they created
      statusSelectionStatus of the user-created Cluster Fabric
      Creation date and timeSelectCluster Fabric creation timestamp
      Table. Cluster Fabric resource list items
  3. On the Cluster Fabric List page, click the resource to view detailed information. You will be taken to the Cluster Fabric Details page.

    • Cluster Fabric Details At the top of the page, status information and descriptions of additional features are displayed.
      CategoryDetailed description
      Cluster Fabric statusStatus of the user-created Cluster Fabric
      • Creating: State while the cluster is being created
      • Active: State when creation is complete and the cluster is usable
      • Editing: State while the IP is being changed
      • Deleting: State while being terminated
      • Deleted: State after termination is complete
      Add target serverA feature that allows moving a server from another cluster to the target cluster.
      Table. Cluster Fabric status information and additional features

Detailed Information

On the Cluster Fabric List page’s Details Tab, you can view detailed information of the selected resource and retrieve servers from another cluster.

CategoryDetailed description
serviceService name
Resource TypeResource Type
SRNUnique resource ID in Samsung Cloud Platform
  • In Cluster Fabric, it refers to the Cluster Fabric SRN
Resource nameResource name
  • In the Cluster Fabric service, it refers to the Cluster Fabric name
Resource IDUnique resource ID in the service
constructorUser who created the service
Creation date and timeService creation date and time
editorUser who edited the service information
Modification dateDate and time the service information was modified
Cluster Fabric nameUser-created Cluster Fabric name
Node poolA set of nodes that can be grouped into the same Cluster Fabric
target serverGPU Node list bound to Cluster Fabric
  • Server name, server type, IP, status
Table. Cluster Fabric detailed information tab items

Import Cluster Fabric Server

Cluster Fabric Details page’s add target server feature allows you to import servers from another cluster and add them to the selected cluster.

  1. Click the All Services > Compute > Multi-node GPU Server menu. Navigate to the Service Home page of the Multi-node GPU Cluster.
  2. On the Service Home page, click the Cluster Fabric menu. You will be taken to the Cluster Fabric list page.
  3. On the Cluster Fabric List page, click the resource to view detailed information. You will be taken to the Cluster Fabric Details page.
  4. In the target server of the Details tab, click the Add button on the right.
    • The add target server popup window opens.
      • Select a cluster from Cluster Fabric.
      • GPU nodes associated with the selected cluster are listed; select the GPU node you want to retrieve.
      • The selected GPU Node’s name is displayed at the bottom.
      • Press the Confirm button to complete.
      • Pressing the Cancel button cancels the operation.
    • Verify that the GPU node added on the target server is displayed.

Terminate Cluster Fabric

If all GPU Nodes in the Cluster Fabric are terminated, the Cluster Fabric is automatically deleted. For more information, see Terminate GPU Node.

5.2.2 - Install ServiceWatch Agent

Users can install the ServiceWatch Agent on GPU nodes of a Multi-node GPU Cluster to collect custom metrics and logs.

Reference
Collecting custom metrics/logs via the ServiceWatch Agent is currently available only on Samsung Cloud Platform For Enterprise. It will also be available in other offerings in the future.
Caution
Since metric collection through the ServiceWatch Agent is classified as custom metrics and incurs charges unlike the default collected metrics, it is recommended to remove or disable unnecessary metric collection settings.

ServiceWatch Agent

In a Multi-node GPU Cluster, the agents that need to be installed on GPU nodes to collect ServiceWatch custom metrics and logs can be divided into two main types. It is a Prometheus Exporter and Open Telemetry Collector.

CategoryDetailed description
Prometheus ExporterProvide metrics of a specific application or service in a format that Prometheus can scrape
  • For collecting OS metrics on a GPU Node, you can use the Node Exporter for Linux servers and the Windows Exporter for Windows servers, depending on the OS type.
Open Telemetry CollectorActs as a centralized collector that gathers telemetry data such as metrics and logs from distributed systems, processes (filtering, sampling, etc.) it, and exports it to multiple backends (e.g., Prometheus, Jaeger, Elasticsearch, etc.)
  • Exports data to the ServiceWatch Gateway so that ServiceWatch can collect metric and log data.
Table. Explanation of Prometheus Exporter and Open Telemetry Collector
information

If you have configured a Kubernetes Engine on a GPU node, please view the GPU metrics using the metrics provided by the Kubernetes Engine.

  • If you install the DCGM Exporter on a GPU node where Kubernetes Engine is configured, it may not operate correctly.
Reference
The ServiceWatch Agent guide for collecting GPU metrics on a GPU Node can be used the same as on a GPU Server. For more details, refer to GPU Server > ServiceWatch Agent.

Pre-configuration for Using ServiceWatch Agent

To use the ServiceWatch Agent, please refer to Prerequisite Settings for ServiceWatch Agent and prepare the prerequisite settings.

5.2.3 - Multi-node GPU Cluster Service Scope and Inspection Guide

Multi-node GPU Cluster Service Scope

If an IaaS hardware-level issue occurs with the Multi-node GPU Cluster service, you can receive technical support through Contact Us in the Support Center. However, the risks associated with changes such as OS kernel updates or application installations are the user’s responsibility, so technical support is limited; please be mindful when performing tasks such as system updates.

IaaS hardware level issue

  • HW fault event messages generated within the server by the IPMI hardware monitoring console.
  • GPU HW operation error observed in the nvdia-smi command
  • HW error messages that occur during inspection of InfiniBand HCA cards or InfiniBand Switches
Caution
Since the Multi-node GPU Cluster is a service sensitive to software version compatibility of Ubuntu OS / NVDIA / Infiniband, official technical support is unavailable after changes such as a user’s OS kernel update or application installation.

IaaS HW Inspection Guide

After applying for the Multi-node GPU Cluster service, it is recommended to check the IaaS HW level according to the inspection guide.

Intel E810 driver update

Check the version of the Intel E810 driver and, if necessary, refer to the following procedure to perform an update.

Caution
Proceed with the update only if the Multi-node GPU Cluster Node has an Intel E810 Device and is simultaneously using a standard image version 535.86.10 or lower.
Reference

You can use the lspci command to verify whether an E810 NIC device is present. If the E810 NIC is valid, the PCIe device is identified as follows using the E810-C information (if there is no E810 NIC device, this operation is not performed).

<div class="code-block-buttons">
  
  <button class="code-block-download">
    <div class="code-block-download-icon">
      <svg width="14" height="16" viewBox="0 0 14 16" fill="none" xmlns="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg"><path d="M13.999 14.4353v-2.998C13.999 11.0232 13.6602 10.6853 13.2461 10.6853S12.5 11.0232 12.5 11.4373v2.2519H1.5V11.4373C1.5 11.0232 1.16211 10.6853.748047 10.6853.333984 10.6853 976563e-9 11.0232 976562e-9 11.4373v2.998C976562e-9 14.8494.333984 15.1892.748047 15.1892H13.2461c.414099999999999.0.7529-.3398.7529-.7539z" fill="#5135ff"/><path d="M1.41169 6.21654c.25876-.32345.73073-.37589 1.05417-.11713l3.78463 3.0277V1.56104c0-.41422.33578-.750005.75-.750005.41421.0.75.335785.75.750005V9.12208L11.5288 6.09941C11.8523 5.84065 12.3242 5.89309 12.583 6.21654 12.8418 6.53999 12.7893 7.01196 12.4659 7.27071L6.99734 11.6455 1.52882 7.27071c-.32345-.25875-.37589-.73072-.11713-1.05417z" fill="#5135ff"/></svg></div>
    Sample Code Download
  </button>
  
  <button class="code-block-copy">
    <div class="code-block-copy-icon">
      <svg width="14" height="14" viewBox="0 0 14 14" fill="none" xmlns="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg"><path fill-rule="evenodd" clip-rule="evenodd" d="M10 4.00012V1c0-.552285-.44772-1-1-1H1C.447715.0.0.447715.0 1V9c0 .55228.447715 1 1 1H3.99988v3.0001C3.99988 13.5515 4.44849 14 4.99988 14H10.0002l3.9997-3.9995V5c0-.55139-.448600000000001-.99988-1-.99988H10zM1.4 1.4V8.6H3.99988V5c0-.55139.44861-.99988 1-.99988H8.6V1.4H1.4zM5.3999 12.6H9.08295V9.78301C9.08295 9.39641 9.39635 9.08301 9.78295 9.08301H12.5999V5.40015h-7.2V12.6zm6.1375-2.117-1.0545 1.0544V10.483h1.0545z" fill="currentcolor"/></svg></div>
    Copy Code
  </button>
</div>
Color mode
lspci | grep E810
0000:6a:00.0 Ethernet controller: Intel Corporation Ethernet Controller E810-C for QSFP (rev 02) 0000:6a:00.1 Ethernet controller: Intel Corporation Ethernet Controller E810-C for QSFP (rev 02)
lspci | grep E810
0000:6a:00.0 Ethernet controller: Intel Corporation Ethernet Controller E810-C for QSFP (rev 02) 0000:6a:00.1 Ethernet controller: Intel Corporation Ethernet Controller E810-C for QSFP (rev 02)
</div>
Example of checking for the presence of an E810 NIC device

To update the driver, follow the steps below.

  1. Move the base driver tar file to the desired directory.

    Color mode
    /usr/local/src
    /usr/local/src
    Directory navigation example

  2. Untar / unzip the Archiver file.

    • x.x.x is the version number of the driver tar file.
      Color mode
      tar zxf ice-x.x.x.tar.gz
      tar zxf ice-x.x.x.tar.gz
      untar example
  3. Change the driver to the src directory.

    • x.x.x is the version number of the driver tar file.
      Color mode
      cd ice-x.x.x/src/
      cd ice-x.x.x/src/
      Example of changing to the src directory
  4. Compile the driver module.

    Color mode
    make install
    make install
    Driver module compilation example

  5. After the update is complete, check the version.

    Color mode
    lsmod | grep ice
    modinfo ice | grep version
    lsmod | grep ice
    modinfo ice | grep version
    Version check example

Check NVIDIA driver

To check the NVIDIA driver (nvidia-smi topo, IB nv_peer_mem status) and inspect the IaaS hardware level, follow these steps.

Reference
The example of applying MIG is described using an A100 GPU node as the reference.
  1. Check the GPU driver status.

    Color mode
    ~$ nvidia-smi
    ~$ nvidia-smi
    Example code for checking GPU driver status
    Color mode
    Thu Jan 29 14:48:31 2026
    +---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------+
    | NVIDIA-SMI 535.183.06             Driver Version: 535.183.06   CUDA Version: 12.2 |
    |-----------------------------------------+----------------------+----------------------+
    | GPU  Name                 Persistence-M | Bus-Id        Disp.A | Volatile Uncorr. ECC |
    | Fan  Temp   Perf          Pwr:Usage/Cap | Memory-Usage | GPU-Util  Compute M. |
    |  |  | MIG M. |
    | =========================================+======================+====================== |
    | 0  NVIDIA A100-SXM4-80GB          On | 00000000:00:05.0 Off | On |
    | N/A   36C    P0              52W / 400W | 0MiB / 81920MiB | N/A      Default |
    |  |  | Enabled |
    +-----------------------------------------+----------------------+----------------------+
    | 1  NVIDIA A100-SXM4-80GB          On | 00000000:00:06.0 Off | 0 |
    | N/A   36C    P0              61W / 400W | 0MiB / 81920MiB | 0%      Default |
    |  |  | Disabled |
    +-----------------------------------------+----------------------+----------------------+
    | 2  NVIDIA A100-SXM4-80GB          On | 00000000:00:07.0 Off | 0 |
    | N/A   36C    P0              64W / 400W | 0MiB / 81920MiB | 0%      Default |
    |  |  | Disabled |
    +-----------------------------------------+----------------------+----------------------+
    | 3  NVIDIA A100-SXM4-80GB          On | 00000000:00:08.0 Off | 0 |
    | N/A   40C    P0              64W / 400W | 0MiB / 81920MiB | 0%      Default |
    |  |  | Disabled |
    +-----------------------------------------+----------------------+----------------------+
    | 4  NVIDIA A100-SXM4-80GB          On | 00000000:00:09.0 Off | 0 |
    | N/A   36C    P0              63W / 400W | 0MiB / 81920MiB | 0%      Default |
    |  |  | Disabled |
    +-----------------------------------------+----------------------+----------------------+
    | 5  NVIDIA A100-SXM4-80GB          On | 00000000:00:0A.0 Off | 0 |
    | N/A   40C    P0              64W / 400W | 0MiB / 81920MiB | 0%      Default |
    |  |  | Disabled |
    +-----------------------------------------+----------------------+----------------------+
    | 6  NVIDIA A100-SXM4-80GB          On | 00000000:00:0B.0 Off | 0 |
    | N/A   39C    P0              65W / 400W | 0MiB / 81920MiB | 0%      Default |
    |  |  | Disabled |
    +-----------------------------------------+----------------------+----------------------+
    | 7  NVIDIA A100-SXM4-80GB          On | 00000000:00:0C.0 Off | 0 |
    | N/A   39C    P0              60W / 400W | 0MiB / 81920MiB | 0%      Default |
    |  |  | Disabled |
    +-----------------------------------------+----------------------+----------------------+
    
    +---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------+
    | MIG devices: |
    +------------------+--------------------------------+-----------+-----------------------+
    | GPU  GI  CI  MIG | Memory-Usage | Vol | Shared |
    | ID  ID  Dev | BAR1-Usage | SM     Unc | CE ENC DEC OFA JPG |
    |  |  | ECC |  |
    | ==================+================================+===========+======================= |
    | No MIG devices found |
    +---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------+
    
    +---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------+
    | Processes: |
    | GPU   GI   CI        PID   Type   Process name                            GPU Memory |
    | ID   ID                                                             Usage |
    | ======================================================================================= |
    | No running processes found |
    +---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------+
    Thu Jan 29 14:48:31 2026
    +---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------+
    | NVIDIA-SMI 535.183.06             Driver Version: 535.183.06   CUDA Version: 12.2 |
    |-----------------------------------------+----------------------+----------------------+
    | GPU  Name                 Persistence-M | Bus-Id        Disp.A | Volatile Uncorr. ECC |
    | Fan  Temp   Perf          Pwr:Usage/Cap | Memory-Usage | GPU-Util  Compute M. |
    |  |  | MIG M. |
    | =========================================+======================+====================== |
    | 0  NVIDIA A100-SXM4-80GB          On | 00000000:00:05.0 Off | On |
    | N/A   36C    P0              52W / 400W | 0MiB / 81920MiB | N/A      Default |
    |  |  | Enabled |
    +-----------------------------------------+----------------------+----------------------+
    | 1  NVIDIA A100-SXM4-80GB          On | 00000000:00:06.0 Off | 0 |
    | N/A   36C    P0              61W / 400W | 0MiB / 81920MiB | 0%      Default |
    |  |  | Disabled |
    +-----------------------------------------+----------------------+----------------------+
    | 2  NVIDIA A100-SXM4-80GB          On | 00000000:00:07.0 Off | 0 |
    | N/A   36C    P0              64W / 400W | 0MiB / 81920MiB | 0%      Default |
    |  |  | Disabled |
    +-----------------------------------------+----------------------+----------------------+
    | 3  NVIDIA A100-SXM4-80GB          On | 00000000:00:08.0 Off | 0 |
    | N/A   40C    P0              64W / 400W | 0MiB / 81920MiB | 0%      Default |
    |  |  | Disabled |
    +-----------------------------------------+----------------------+----------------------+
    | 4  NVIDIA A100-SXM4-80GB          On | 00000000:00:09.0 Off | 0 |
    | N/A   36C    P0              63W / 400W | 0MiB / 81920MiB | 0%      Default |
    |  |  | Disabled |
    +-----------------------------------------+----------------------+----------------------+
    | 5  NVIDIA A100-SXM4-80GB          On | 00000000:00:0A.0 Off | 0 |
    | N/A   40C    P0              64W / 400W | 0MiB / 81920MiB | 0%      Default |
    |  |  | Disabled |
    +-----------------------------------------+----------------------+----------------------+
    | 6  NVIDIA A100-SXM4-80GB          On | 00000000:00:0B.0 Off | 0 |
    | N/A   39C    P0              65W / 400W | 0MiB / 81920MiB | 0%      Default |
    |  |  | Disabled |
    +-----------------------------------------+----------------------+----------------------+
    | 7  NVIDIA A100-SXM4-80GB          On | 00000000:00:0C.0 Off | 0 |
    | N/A   39C    P0              60W / 400W | 0MiB / 81920MiB | 0%      Default |
    |  |  | Disabled |
    +-----------------------------------------+----------------------+----------------------+
    
    +---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------+
    | MIG devices: |
    +------------------+--------------------------------+-----------+-----------------------+
    | GPU  GI  CI  MIG | Memory-Usage | Vol | Shared |
    | ID  ID  Dev | BAR1-Usage | SM     Unc | CE ENC DEC OFA JPG |
    |  |  | ECC |  |
    | ==================+================================+===========+======================= |
    | No MIG devices found |
    +---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------+
    
    +---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------+
    | Processes: |
    | GPU   GI   CI        PID   Type   Process name                            GPU Memory |
    | ID   ID                                                             Usage |
    | ======================================================================================= |
    | No running processes found |
    +---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------+
    GPU driver status example

  2. Check the NVSwitch and NVLink hardware status.

    • Check NVSwitch status

      Color mode
      ~$ nvidia-smi nvlink --status
      ~$ nvidia-smi nvlink --status
      NVSwitch status check example
      Color mode
      GPU 1: NVIDIA A100-SXM4-80GB (UUID: GPU-64a2f685-bb12-c4af-105c-0726ece9c8d7)
               Link 0: 25 GB/s
               Link 1: 25 GB/s
               Link 2: 25 GB/s
               Link 3: 25 GB/s
               Link 4: 25 GB/s
               Link 5: 25 GB/s
               Link 6: 25 GB/s
               Link 7: 25 GB/s
               Link 8: 25 GB/s
               Link 9: 25 GB/s
               Link 10: 25 GB/s
               Link 11: 25 GB/s
      GPU 2: NVIDIA A100-SXM4-80GB (UUID: GPU-2269851b-71cd-f6c7-50c5-ba1525cf3ce8)
               Link 0: 25 GB/s
               Link 1: 25 GB/s
               Link 2: 25 GB/s
               Link 3: 25 GB/s
               Link 4: 25 GB/s
               Link 5: 25 GB/s
               Link 6: 25 GB/s
               Link 7: 25 GB/s
               Link 8: 25 GB/s
               Link 9: 25 GB/s
               Link 10: 25 GB/s
               Link 11: 25 GB/s
      GPU 3: NVIDIA A100-SXM4-80GB (UUID: GPU-4c397bbf-95fc-5c29-918a-a429cbe45a7a)
               Link 0: 25 GB/s
               Link 1: 25 GB/s
               Link 2: 25 GB/s
               Link 3: 25 GB/s
               Link 4: 25 GB/s
               Link 5: 25 GB/s
               Link 6: 25 GB/s
               Link 7: 25 GB/s
               Link 8: 25 GB/s
               Link 9: 25 GB/s
               Link 10: 25 GB/s
               Link 11: 25 GB/s
      GPU 4: NVIDIA A100-SXM4-80GB (UUID: GPU-0e350204-9fb6-2cbe-538e-8f7849658eb8)
               Link 0: 25 GB/s
               Link 1: 25 GB/s
               Link 2: 25 GB/s
               Link 3: 25 GB/s
               Link 4: 25 GB/s
               Link 5: 25 GB/s
               Link 6: 25 GB/s
               Link 7: 25 GB/s
               Link 8: 25 GB/s
               Link 9: 25 GB/s
               Link 10: 25 GB/s
               Link 11: 25 GB/s
      GPU 5: NVIDIA A100-SXM4-80GB (UUID: GPU-45f0c453-4760-edd4-3af9-25c5ea7473a5)
               Link 0: 25 GB/s
               Link 1: 25 GB/s
               Link 2: 25 GB/s
               Link 3: 25 GB/s
               Link 4: 25 GB/s
               Link 5: 25 GB/s
               Link 6: 25 GB/s
               Link 7: 25 GB/s
               Link 8: 25 GB/s
               Link 9: 25 GB/s
               Link 10: 25 GB/s
               Link 11: 25 GB/s
      GPU 6: NVIDIA A100-SXM4-80GB (UUID: GPU-38409794-bb34-430e-3c50-90b42cb2bb72)
               Link 0: 25 GB/s
               Link 1: 25 GB/s
               Link 2: 25 GB/s
               Link 3: 25 GB/s
               Link 4: 25 GB/s
               Link 5: 25 GB/s
               Link 6: 25 GB/s
               Link 7: 25 GB/s
               Link 8: 25 GB/s
               Link 9: 25 GB/s
               Link 10: 25 GB/s
               Link 11: 25 GB/s
      GPU 7: NVIDIA A100-SXM4-80GB (UUID: GPU-3fb478aa-801b-eb64-55c2-0ffc3f2ce404)
               Link 0: 25 GB/s
               Link 1: 25 GB/s
               Link 2: 25 GB/s
               Link 3: 25 GB/s
               Link 4: 25 GB/s
               Link 5: 25 GB/s
               Link 6: 25 GB/s
               Link 7: 25 GB/s
               Link 8: 25 GB/s
               Link 9: 25 GB/s
               Link 10: 25 GB/s
               Link 11: 25 GB/s
      GPU 1: NVIDIA A100-SXM4-80GB (UUID: GPU-64a2f685-bb12-c4af-105c-0726ece9c8d7)
               Link 0: 25 GB/s
               Link 1: 25 GB/s
               Link 2: 25 GB/s
               Link 3: 25 GB/s
               Link 4: 25 GB/s
               Link 5: 25 GB/s
               Link 6: 25 GB/s
               Link 7: 25 GB/s
               Link 8: 25 GB/s
               Link 9: 25 GB/s
               Link 10: 25 GB/s
               Link 11: 25 GB/s
      GPU 2: NVIDIA A100-SXM4-80GB (UUID: GPU-2269851b-71cd-f6c7-50c5-ba1525cf3ce8)
               Link 0: 25 GB/s
               Link 1: 25 GB/s
               Link 2: 25 GB/s
               Link 3: 25 GB/s
               Link 4: 25 GB/s
               Link 5: 25 GB/s
               Link 6: 25 GB/s
               Link 7: 25 GB/s
               Link 8: 25 GB/s
               Link 9: 25 GB/s
               Link 10: 25 GB/s
               Link 11: 25 GB/s
      GPU 3: NVIDIA A100-SXM4-80GB (UUID: GPU-4c397bbf-95fc-5c29-918a-a429cbe45a7a)
               Link 0: 25 GB/s
               Link 1: 25 GB/s
               Link 2: 25 GB/s
               Link 3: 25 GB/s
               Link 4: 25 GB/s
               Link 5: 25 GB/s
               Link 6: 25 GB/s
               Link 7: 25 GB/s
               Link 8: 25 GB/s
               Link 9: 25 GB/s
               Link 10: 25 GB/s
               Link 11: 25 GB/s
      GPU 4: NVIDIA A100-SXM4-80GB (UUID: GPU-0e350204-9fb6-2cbe-538e-8f7849658eb8)
               Link 0: 25 GB/s
               Link 1: 25 GB/s
               Link 2: 25 GB/s
               Link 3: 25 GB/s
               Link 4: 25 GB/s
               Link 5: 25 GB/s
               Link 6: 25 GB/s
               Link 7: 25 GB/s
               Link 8: 25 GB/s
               Link 9: 25 GB/s
               Link 10: 25 GB/s
               Link 11: 25 GB/s
      GPU 5: NVIDIA A100-SXM4-80GB (UUID: GPU-45f0c453-4760-edd4-3af9-25c5ea7473a5)
               Link 0: 25 GB/s
               Link 1: 25 GB/s
               Link 2: 25 GB/s
               Link 3: 25 GB/s
               Link 4: 25 GB/s
               Link 5: 25 GB/s
               Link 6: 25 GB/s
               Link 7: 25 GB/s
               Link 8: 25 GB/s
               Link 9: 25 GB/s
               Link 10: 25 GB/s
               Link 11: 25 GB/s
      GPU 6: NVIDIA A100-SXM4-80GB (UUID: GPU-38409794-bb34-430e-3c50-90b42cb2bb72)
               Link 0: 25 GB/s
               Link 1: 25 GB/s
               Link 2: 25 GB/s
               Link 3: 25 GB/s
               Link 4: 25 GB/s
               Link 5: 25 GB/s
               Link 6: 25 GB/s
               Link 7: 25 GB/s
               Link 8: 25 GB/s
               Link 9: 25 GB/s
               Link 10: 25 GB/s
               Link 11: 25 GB/s
      GPU 7: NVIDIA A100-SXM4-80GB (UUID: GPU-3fb478aa-801b-eb64-55c2-0ffc3f2ce404)
               Link 0: 25 GB/s
               Link 1: 25 GB/s
               Link 2: 25 GB/s
               Link 3: 25 GB/s
               Link 4: 25 GB/s
               Link 5: 25 GB/s
               Link 6: 25 GB/s
               Link 7: 25 GB/s
               Link 8: 25 GB/s
               Link 9: 25 GB/s
               Link 10: 25 GB/s
               Link 11: 25 GB/s
      NVSwitch status example

    • Check NVLinks hardware status

      Color mode
      ~$ nvidia-smi topo -m
      ~$ nvidia-smi topo -m
      Example code for checking NVLink hardware status
      Color mode
              GPU0    GPU1    GPU2    GPU3    GPU4    GPU5    GPU6    GPU7    CPU Affinity    NUMA Affinity   GPU NUMA ID
      GPU0     X      NV12    NV12    NV12    NV12    NV12    NV12    NV12    0-127   0-7             N/A
      GPU1    NV12	 X      NV12    NV12    NV12    NV12    NV12    NV12    0-127   0-7             N/A
      GPU2    NV12    NV12     X      NV12    NV12    NV12    NV12    NV12    0-127   0-7             N/A
      GPU3    NV12    NV12    NV12     X      NV12    NV12    NV12    NV12    0-127   0-7             N/A
      GPU4    NV12    NV12    NV12    NV12     X      NV12    NV12    NV12    0-127   0-7             N/A
      GPU5    NV12    NV12    NV12    NV12    NV12     X      NV12    NV12    0-127   0-7             N/A
      GPU6    NV12    NV12    NV12    NV12    NV12    NV12     X      NV12    0-127   0-7             N/A
      GPU7    NV12    NV12    NV12    NV12    NV12    NV12    NV12     X      0-127   0-7             N/A
      
      Legend:
      
        X    = Self
        SYS  = Connection traversing PCIe as well as the SMP interconnect between NUMA nodes (e.g., QPI/UPI)
        NODE = Connection traversing PCIe as well as the interconnect between PCIe Host Bridges within a NUMA node
        PHB  = Connection traversing PCIe as well as a PCIe Host Bridge (typically the CPU)
        PXB  = Connection traversing multiple PCIe bridges (without traversing the PCIe Host Bridge)
        PIX  = Connection traversing at most a single PCIe bridge
        NV#  = Connection traversing a bonded set of # NVLinks
              GPU0    GPU1    GPU2    GPU3    GPU4    GPU5    GPU6    GPU7    CPU Affinity    NUMA Affinity   GPU NUMA ID
      GPU0     X      NV12    NV12    NV12    NV12    NV12    NV12    NV12    0-127   0-7             N/A
      GPU1    NV12	 X      NV12    NV12    NV12    NV12    NV12    NV12    0-127   0-7             N/A
      GPU2    NV12    NV12     X      NV12    NV12    NV12    NV12    NV12    0-127   0-7             N/A
      GPU3    NV12    NV12    NV12     X      NV12    NV12    NV12    NV12    0-127   0-7             N/A
      GPU4    NV12    NV12    NV12    NV12     X      NV12    NV12    NV12    0-127   0-7             N/A
      GPU5    NV12    NV12    NV12    NV12    NV12     X      NV12    NV12    0-127   0-7             N/A
      GPU6    NV12    NV12    NV12    NV12    NV12    NV12     X      NV12    0-127   0-7             N/A
      GPU7    NV12    NV12    NV12    NV12    NV12    NV12    NV12     X      0-127   0-7             N/A
      
      Legend:
      
        X    = Self
        SYS  = Connection traversing PCIe as well as the SMP interconnect between NUMA nodes (e.g., QPI/UPI)
        NODE = Connection traversing PCIe as well as the interconnect between PCIe Host Bridges within a NUMA node
        PHB  = Connection traversing PCIe as well as a PCIe Host Bridge (typically the CPU)
        PXB  = Connection traversing multiple PCIe bridges (without traversing the PCIe Host Bridge)
        PIX  = Connection traversing at most a single PCIe bridge
        NV#  = Connection traversing a bonded set of # NVLinks
      NVLink HW status check code example

  3. Check the InfiniBand (IB) HCA card hardware status and link.

    Color mode
    user@bm-dev-001:~$ ibdev2netdev -v
    user@bm-dev-001:~$ ibdev2netdev -v
    HW status check command example
    Color mode
    cat: /sys/class/infiniband/mlx5_0/device/vpd: Permission denied
    0000:45:00.0 mlx5_0 (MT4123 -            )                 fw 20.29.1016 port 1 (ACTIVE) ==> ibs18 (Down)
    cat: /sys/class/infiniband/mlx5_1/device/vpd: Permission denied
    0000:0e:00.0 mlx5_1 (MT4123 -            )                 fw 20.29.1016 port 1 (ACTIVE) ==> ibs17 (Down)
    cat: /sys/class/infiniband/mlx5_2/device/vpd: Permission denied
    0000:c5:00.0 mlx5_2 (MT4123 -            )                 fw 20.29.1016 port 1 (ACTIVE) ==> ibs20 (Down)
    cat: /sys/class/infiniband/mlx5_3/device/vpd: Permission denied
    0000:85:00.0 mlx5_3 (MT4123 -            )                 fw 20.29.1016 port 1 (ACTIVE) ==> ibs19 (Down)
    user@bm-dev-001:~$
    cat: /sys/class/infiniband/mlx5_0/device/vpd: Permission denied
    0000:45:00.0 mlx5_0 (MT4123 -            )                 fw 20.29.1016 port 1 (ACTIVE) ==> ibs18 (Down)
    cat: /sys/class/infiniband/mlx5_1/device/vpd: Permission denied
    0000:0e:00.0 mlx5_1 (MT4123 -            )                 fw 20.29.1016 port 1 (ACTIVE) ==> ibs17 (Down)
    cat: /sys/class/infiniband/mlx5_2/device/vpd: Permission denied
    0000:c5:00.0 mlx5_2 (MT4123 -            )                 fw 20.29.1016 port 1 (ACTIVE) ==> ibs20 (Down)
    cat: /sys/class/infiniband/mlx5_3/device/vpd: Permission denied
    0000:85:00.0 mlx5_3 (MT4123 -            )                 fw 20.29.1016 port 1 (ACTIVE) ==> ibs19 (Down)
    user@bm-dev-001:~$
    Example of HW status check result
    Color mode
    root@bm-dev-001:~# ibstat
    root@bm-dev-001:~# ibstat
    Example of link verification command
    Color mode
    CA 'mlx5_0'
            CA type: MT4123
            Number of ports: 1
            Firmware version: 20.29.1016
            Hardware version: 0
            Node GUID: 0x88e9a4ffff5060ac
            System image GUID: 0x88e9a4ffff5060ac
            Port 1:
                    State: Active
                    Physical state: LinkUp
                    Rate: 200
                    Base lid: 8
                    LMC: 0
                    SM lid: 1
                    Capability mask: 0x2651e848
                    Port GUID: 0x88e9a4ffff5060ac
                    Link layer: InfiniBand
    CA 'mlx5_1'
            CA type: MT4123
            Number of ports: 1
            Firmware version: 20.29.1016
            Hardware version: 0
            Node GUID: 0x88e9a4ffff504080
            System image GUID: 0x88e9a4ffff504080
            Port 1:
                    State: Active
                    Physical state: LinkUp
                    Rate: 200
                    Base lid: 5
                    LMC: 0
                    SM lid: 1
                    Capability mask: 0x2651e848
                    Port GUID: 0x88e9a4ffff504080
                    Link layer: InfiniBand
    CA 'mlx5_2'
            CA type: MT4123
            Number of ports: 1
            Firmware version: 20.29.1016
            Hardware version: 0
            Node GUID: 0x88e9a4ffff505038
            System image GUID: 0x88e9a4ffff505038
            Port 1:
                    State: Active
                    Physical state: LinkUp
                    Rate: 200
                    Base lid: 2
                    LMC: 0
                    SM lid: 1
                    Capability mask: 0x2651e848
                    Port GUID: 0x88e9a4ffff505038
                    Link layer: InfiniBand
    CA 'mlx5_3'
            CA type: MT4123
            Number of ports: 1
            Firmware version: 20.29.1016
            Hardware version: 0
            Node GUID: 0x88e9a4ffff504094
            System image GUID: 0x88e9a4ffff504094
            Port 1:
                    State: Active
                    Physical state: LinkUp
                    Rate: 200
                    Base lid: 7
                    LMC: 0
                    SM lid: 1
                    Capability mask: 0x2651e848
                    Port GUID: 0x88e9a4ffff504094
                    Link layer: InfiniBand
    CA 'mlx5_0'
            CA type: MT4123
            Number of ports: 1
            Firmware version: 20.29.1016
            Hardware version: 0
            Node GUID: 0x88e9a4ffff5060ac
            System image GUID: 0x88e9a4ffff5060ac
            Port 1:
                    State: Active
                    Physical state: LinkUp
                    Rate: 200
                    Base lid: 8
                    LMC: 0
                    SM lid: 1
                    Capability mask: 0x2651e848
                    Port GUID: 0x88e9a4ffff5060ac
                    Link layer: InfiniBand
    CA 'mlx5_1'
            CA type: MT4123
            Number of ports: 1
            Firmware version: 20.29.1016
            Hardware version: 0
            Node GUID: 0x88e9a4ffff504080
            System image GUID: 0x88e9a4ffff504080
            Port 1:
                    State: Active
                    Physical state: LinkUp
                    Rate: 200
                    Base lid: 5
                    LMC: 0
                    SM lid: 1
                    Capability mask: 0x2651e848
                    Port GUID: 0x88e9a4ffff504080
                    Link layer: InfiniBand
    CA 'mlx5_2'
            CA type: MT4123
            Number of ports: 1
            Firmware version: 20.29.1016
            Hardware version: 0
            Node GUID: 0x88e9a4ffff505038
            System image GUID: 0x88e9a4ffff505038
            Port 1:
                    State: Active
                    Physical state: LinkUp
                    Rate: 200
                    Base lid: 2
                    LMC: 0
                    SM lid: 1
                    Capability mask: 0x2651e848
                    Port GUID: 0x88e9a4ffff505038
                    Link layer: InfiniBand
    CA 'mlx5_3'
            CA type: MT4123
            Number of ports: 1
            Firmware version: 20.29.1016
            Hardware version: 0
            Node GUID: 0x88e9a4ffff504094
            System image GUID: 0x88e9a4ffff504094
            Port 1:
                    State: Active
                    Physical state: LinkUp
                    Rate: 200
                    Base lid: 7
                    LMC: 0
                    SM lid: 1
                    Capability mask: 0x2651e848
                    Port GUID: 0x88e9a4ffff504094
                    Link layer: InfiniBand
    Link verification result example

Check IB bandwidth communication

Check the IB bandwidth communication status (ib_send_bw) and follow the steps below to inspect the IaaS hardware level.

  1. Check the name of the IB HCA interface.

    • In the following example, IB ports: mlx5_0, mlx5_4, mlx_5_5, mlx5_8
      Color mode
      ~$ ibdev2netdev -v
      ~$ ibdev2netdev -v
      Example of checking IB HCA interface name
      Color mode
      0000:1a:00.0 mlx5_0 (MT4129 - 1028SN     ) Nvidia ConnectX-7 Single Port Infiniband NDR OSFP Adapter fw 28.38.1002 port 1 (ACTIVE) ==> ibp26s0 (Down)
      0000:1b:00.0 mlx5_1 (MT4123 - 1028SN     ) Mellanox ConnectX-6 Single Port VPI HDR QSFP Adapter fw 20.38.1002 port 1 (ACTIVE) ==> bond-nas (Up)
      0000:3c:00.0 mlx5_2 (MT4129 - 1028SN     ) Nvidia ConnectX-7 Single Port Infiniband NDR OSFP Adapter fw 28.38.1002 port 1 (DOWN  ) ==> ibp60s0 (Down)
      0000:4d:00.0 mlx5_3 (MT4129 - 1028SN     ) Nvidia ConnectX-7 Single Port Infiniband NDR OSFP Adapter fw 28.38.1002 port 1 (DOWN  ) ==> ibp77s0 (Down)
      0000:5e:00.0 mlx5_4 (MT4129 - 1028SN     ) Nvidia ConnectX-7 Single Port Infiniband NDR OSFP Adapter fw 28.38.1002 port 1 (ACTIVE) ==> ibp94s0 (Down)
      0000:9c:00.0 mlx5_5 (MT4129 - 1028SN     ) Nvidia ConnectX-7 Single Port Infiniband NDR OSFP Adapter fw 28.38.1002 port 1 (ACTIVE) ==> ibp156s0 (Down)
      0000:9d:00.0 mlx5_6 (MT4123 - 1028SN     ) Mellanox ConnectX-6 Single Port VPI HDR QSFP Adapter fw 20.38.1002 port 1 (ACTIVE) ==> bond-nas (Up)
      0000:bc:00.0 mlx5_7 (MT4129 - 1028SN     ) Nvidia ConnectX-7 Single Port Infiniband NDR OSFP Adapter fw 28.38.1002 port 1 (DOWN  ) ==> ibp188s0 (Down)
      0000:cc:00.0 mlx5_8 (MT4129 - 1028SN     ) Nvidia ConnectX-7 Single Port Infiniband NDR OSFP Adapter fw 28.38.1002 port 1 (ACTIVE) ==> ibp204s0 (Down)
      0000:dc:00.0 mlx5_9 (MT4129 - 1028SN     ) Nvidia ConnectX-7 Single Port Infiniband NDR OSFP Adapter fw 28.38.1002 port 1 (DOWN  ) ==> ibp220s0 (Down)
      0000:1a:00.0 mlx5_0 (MT4129 - 1028SN     ) Nvidia ConnectX-7 Single Port Infiniband NDR OSFP Adapter fw 28.38.1002 port 1 (ACTIVE) ==> ibp26s0 (Down)
      0000:1b:00.0 mlx5_1 (MT4123 - 1028SN     ) Mellanox ConnectX-6 Single Port VPI HDR QSFP Adapter fw 20.38.1002 port 1 (ACTIVE) ==> bond-nas (Up)
      0000:3c:00.0 mlx5_2 (MT4129 - 1028SN     ) Nvidia ConnectX-7 Single Port Infiniband NDR OSFP Adapter fw 28.38.1002 port 1 (DOWN  ) ==> ibp60s0 (Down)
      0000:4d:00.0 mlx5_3 (MT4129 - 1028SN     ) Nvidia ConnectX-7 Single Port Infiniband NDR OSFP Adapter fw 28.38.1002 port 1 (DOWN  ) ==> ibp77s0 (Down)
      0000:5e:00.0 mlx5_4 (MT4129 - 1028SN     ) Nvidia ConnectX-7 Single Port Infiniband NDR OSFP Adapter fw 28.38.1002 port 1 (ACTIVE) ==> ibp94s0 (Down)
      0000:9c:00.0 mlx5_5 (MT4129 - 1028SN     ) Nvidia ConnectX-7 Single Port Infiniband NDR OSFP Adapter fw 28.38.1002 port 1 (ACTIVE) ==> ibp156s0 (Down)
      0000:9d:00.0 mlx5_6 (MT4123 - 1028SN     ) Mellanox ConnectX-6 Single Port VPI HDR QSFP Adapter fw 20.38.1002 port 1 (ACTIVE) ==> bond-nas (Up)
      0000:bc:00.0 mlx5_7 (MT4129 - 1028SN     ) Nvidia ConnectX-7 Single Port Infiniband NDR OSFP Adapter fw 28.38.1002 port 1 (DOWN  ) ==> ibp188s0 (Down)
      0000:cc:00.0 mlx5_8 (MT4129 - 1028SN     ) Nvidia ConnectX-7 Single Port Infiniband NDR OSFP Adapter fw 28.38.1002 port 1 (ACTIVE) ==> ibp204s0 (Down)
      0000:dc:00.0 mlx5_9 (MT4129 - 1028SN     ) Nvidia ConnectX-7 Single Port Infiniband NDR OSFP Adapter fw 28.38.1002 port 1 (DOWN  ) ==> ibp220s0 (Down)
      Example of IB HCA interface name verification result
  2. Use the SERVER Side command to check the communication status.

    Color mode
    ~$ ib_send_bw -d mlx5_0 -i 1 –F
    ~$ ib_send_bw -d mlx5_0 -i 1 –F
    SERVER Side command example
    Color mode
    ************************************
    * Waiting for client to connect... * *
    ************************************
    ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
                        Send BW Test
     Dual-port       : OFF		Device         : mlx5_0
     Number of qps   : 1		Transport type : IB
     Connection type : RC		Using SRQ      : OFF
     PCIe relax order: ON
     ibv_wr* API     : ON
     TX depth        : 128
     CQ Moderation   : 100
     Mtu             : 4096[B]
     Link type       : IB
     Max inline data : 0[B]
     rdma_cm QPs	 : OFF
     Data ex.  method : Ethernet
    ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
     local address: LID 0x0f QPN 0x6d95 PSN 0xb974a
     remote address: LID 0x01 QPN 0x6dd2 PSN 0xc8a18c
    ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
     #bytes     #iterations    BW peak[MB/sec]    BW average[MB/sec]   MsgRate[Mpps]
     65536      1000             0.00               19827.40                   0.317238
    ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
    ************************************
    * Waiting for client to connect... * *
    ************************************
    ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
                        Send BW Test
     Dual-port       : OFF		Device         : mlx5_0
     Number of qps   : 1		Transport type : IB
     Connection type : RC		Using SRQ      : OFF
     PCIe relax order: ON
     ibv_wr* API     : ON
     TX depth        : 128
     CQ Moderation   : 100
     Mtu             : 4096[B]
     Link type       : IB
     Max inline data : 0[B]
     rdma_cm QPs	 : OFF
     Data ex.  method : Ethernet
    ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
     local address: LID 0x0f QPN 0x6d95 PSN 0xb974a
     remote address: LID 0x01 QPN 0x6dd2 PSN 0xc8a18c
    ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
     #bytes     #iterations    BW peak[MB/sec]    BW average[MB/sec]   MsgRate[Mpps]
     65536      1000             0.00               19827.40                   0.317238
    ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
    Example of mutual communication status check result

  3. Use the CLIENT Side command to check the communication status.

    Color mode
    ~$ ib_send_bw -d mlx5_0 -i 1 -F <SERVER Side IP>
    ~$ ib_send_bw -d mlx5_0 -i 1 -F <SERVER Side IP>
    CLIENT Side command example
    Color mode
    ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
                        Send BW Test
     Dual-port       : OFF		Device         : mlx5_0
     Number of qps   : 1		Transport type : IB
     Connection type : RC		Using SRQ      : OFF
     PCIe relax order: ON
     ibv_wr* API     : ON
     RX depth        : 512
     CQ Moderation   : 100
     Mtu             : 4096[B]
     Link type       : IB
     Max inline data : 0[B]
     rdma_cm QPs	 : OFF
     Data ex.  method : Ethernet
    ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
     local address: LID 0x01 QPN 0x6dd2 PSN 0xc8a18c
     remote address: LID 0x0f QPN 0x6d95 PSN 0xb974a
    ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
     #bytes     #iterations    BW peak[MB/sec]    BW average[MB/sec]   MsgRate[Mpps]
     65536      1000             19008.49            19006.37                  0.304102
    ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
    ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
                        Send BW Test
     Dual-port       : OFF		Device         : mlx5_0
     Number of qps   : 1		Transport type : IB
     Connection type : RC		Using SRQ      : OFF
     PCIe relax order: ON
     ibv_wr* API     : ON
     RX depth        : 512
     CQ Moderation   : 100
     Mtu             : 4096[B]
     Link type       : IB
     Max inline data : 0[B]
     rdma_cm QPs	 : OFF
     Data ex.  method : Ethernet
    ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
     local address: LID 0x01 QPN 0x6dd2 PSN 0xc8a18c
     remote address: LID 0x0f QPN 0x6d95 PSN 0xb974a
    ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
     #bytes     #iterations    BW peak[MB/sec]    BW average[MB/sec]   MsgRate[Mpps]
     65536      1000             19008.49            19006.37                  0.304102
    ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
    Example of mutual communication status check result

Check IB service related kernel modules

Check the relevant kernel modules for the IB service (lsmod) to inspect the IaaS hardware level.

  • Check IB service-related kernel module - nvidia_peermem

    Color mode
    ~$ lsmod | grep nvidia_peermem
    ~$ lsmod | grep nvidia_peermem
    Example command to check nvidia_peermem
    Color mode
    nvidia_peermem         16384  0
    ib_core               425984  9 rdma_cm,ib_ipoib,nvidia_peermem,iw_cm,ib_umad,rdma_ucm,ib_uverbs,mlx5_ib,ib_cm
    nvidia              56524800  451 nvidia_uvm,nvidia_peermem,nvidia_modeset
    nvidia_peermem         16384  0
    ib_core               425984  9 rdma_cm,ib_ipoib,nvidia_peermem,iw_cm,ib_umad,rdma_ucm,ib_uverbs,mlx5_ib,ib_cm
    nvidia              56524800  451 nvidia_uvm,nvidia_peermem,nvidia_modeset
    Example of nvidia_peermem check result

  • Check IB service related kernel modules - IB Card (HCA) driver

    Color mode
    ~$ lsmod|egrep 'ib_|_ib|mlx'
    ~$ lsmod|egrep 'ib_|_ib|mlx'
    Example command to check the IB Card (HCA) driver
    Color mode
    mlx5_ib               393216  0
    ib_uverbs             163840  2 irdma,mlx5_ib
    ib_core               393216  3 irdma,ib_uverbs,mlx5_ib
    mlx5_core            1593344  1 mlx5_ib
    mlxfw                  32768  1 mlx5_core
    psample                20480  1 mlx5_core
    tls                   114688  1 mlx5_core
    pci_hyperv_intf        16384  1 mlx5_core
    ib_ipoib              139264  0
    ib_cm                 131072  2 rdma_cm,ib_ipoib
    ib_umad                40960  0
    mlx5_ib               454656  0
    ib_uverbs             135168  2 rdma_ucm,mlx5_ib
    ib_core               434176  9 rdma_cm,ib_ipoib,nvidia_peermem,iw_cm,ib_umad,rdma_ucm,ib_uverbs,mlx5_ib,ib_cm
    libcrc32c              16384  5 nf_conntrack,nf_nat,btrfs,nf_tables,raid456
    mlx5_core            2064384  1 mlx5_ib
    mlx_compat             69632  11 rdma_cm,ib_ipoib,mlxdevm,iw_cm,ib_umad,ib_core,rdma_ucm,ib_uverbs,mlx5_ib,ib_cm,mlx5_core
    mlx5_ib               393216  0
    ib_uverbs             163840  2 irdma,mlx5_ib
    ib_core               393216  3 irdma,ib_uverbs,mlx5_ib
    mlx5_core            1593344  1 mlx5_ib
    mlxfw                  32768  1 mlx5_core
    psample                20480  1 mlx5_core
    tls                   114688  1 mlx5_core
    pci_hyperv_intf        16384  1 mlx5_core
    ib_ipoib              139264  0
    ib_cm                 131072  2 rdma_cm,ib_ipoib
    ib_umad                40960  0
    mlx5_ib               454656  0
    ib_uverbs             135168  2 rdma_ucm,mlx5_ib
    ib_core               434176  9 rdma_cm,ib_ipoib,nvidia_peermem,iw_cm,ib_umad,rdma_ucm,ib_uverbs,mlx5_ib,ib_cm
    libcrc32c              16384  5 nf_conntrack,nf_nat,btrfs,nf_tables,raid456
    mlx5_core            2064384  1 mlx5_ib
    mlx_compat             69632  11 rdma_cm,ib_ipoib,mlxdevm,iw_cm,ib_umad,ib_core,rdma_ucm,ib_uverbs,mlx5_ib,ib_cm,mlx5_core
    Example of IB Card (HCA) driver verification result

Check storage physical disk resources and Multi-Path

Verify the storage physical disk resources and Multi-Path to assess the IaaS hardware level.

  • Storage Physical Disk Resource Check Results

    Color mode
    root@bm-dev-002:/tmp# fdisk –l
    root@bm-dev-002:/tmp# fdisk –l
    Example of storage physical disk resource check result

  • Multi-Path verification result

    Color mode
    root@bm-dev-002:/tmp# multipath –ll
    root@bm-dev-002:/tmp# multipath –ll
    Example of Multi-Path verification result

Check Service Network after new deployment of Multi-node GPU Cluster

Use the following command to verify that the MII Status of Bonding and Slave Interface is up.

  • Service Network check command

    Color mode
    ~$ cat /proc/net/bonding/bond-srv
    ~$ cat /proc/net/bonding/bond-srv
    Example command to check Service Network

  • Service Network check result

    Color mode
    Ethernet Channel Bonding Driver: v5.15.0-25-generic
    Bonding Mode: fault-tolerance (active-backup)
    Primary Slave: None
    Currently Active Slave: ens9f0
    MII Status: up
    MII Polling Interval (ms): 100
    Up Delay (ms): 0
    Down Delay (ms): 0
    Peer Notification Delay (ms): 0
    
    Slave Interface: ens9f0
    MII Status: up
    Speed: 100000 Mbps
    Duplex: full
    Link Failure Count: 0
    Permanent HW addr: 30:3e:a7:02:35:70
    Slave queue ID: 0
    
    Slave Interface: ens11f0
    MII Status: up
    Speed: 100000 Mbps
    Duplex: full
    Link Failure Count: 0
    Permanent HW addr: 30:3e:a7:02:2f:e8
    Slave queue ID: 0
    Ethernet Channel Bonding Driver: v5.15.0-25-generic
    Bonding Mode: fault-tolerance (active-backup)
    Primary Slave: None
    Currently Active Slave: ens9f0
    MII Status: up
    MII Polling Interval (ms): 100
    Up Delay (ms): 0
    Down Delay (ms): 0
    Peer Notification Delay (ms): 0
    
    Slave Interface: ens9f0
    MII Status: up
    Speed: 100000 Mbps
    Duplex: full
    Link Failure Count: 0
    Permanent HW addr: 30:3e:a7:02:35:70
    Slave queue ID: 0
    
    Slave Interface: ens11f0
    MII Status: up
    Speed: 100000 Mbps
    Duplex: full
    Link Failure Count: 0
    Permanent HW addr: 30:3e:a7:02:2f:e8
    Slave queue ID: 0
    Example of Service Network verification result

Reference
If some Slave Interface is in a down state, use the Contact of the Support Center to report the abnormal situation and receive a response.

Multi-node GPU Cluster: Verify time synchronization with the Time Server after new deployment

The OS image includes the installation of the chrony daemon and configuration for SCP NTP server synchronization. Use the following command to verify whether a line marked with ^* exists in the MS Name column.

  • Command to check the chrony daemon source and synchronization status

    Color mode
    ~$ chronyc sources -V
    ~$ chronyc sources -V
    Example of status check command

  • Result of checking chrony daemon status

    Color mode
    MS Name/IP address         Stratum Poll Reach LastRx Last sample
    ===============================================================================
    ^* 198.19.0.54                   4  10   377  1040    -16us[  -37us] +/- 9982us
    MS Name/IP address         Stratum Poll Reach LastRx Last sample
    ===============================================================================
    ^* 198.19.0.54                   4  10   377  1040    -16us[  -37us] +/- 9982us
    Example of checking the chrony daemon status

5.3 - Release Note

Multi-node GPU Cluster

2026.03.19
FEATURE Add new OS version, server type, and provide Terraform integration
  • The Ubuntu image version 24.04 has been added.
  • The B300 GPU server type has been added.
  • Provides an IaC environment using Terraform.
2025.07.01
FEATURE Add new feature and monitoring integration
  • You can terminate multiple resources simultaneously from the GPU Node list.
    • It must be a node that uses the same DataSet and Cluster Fabric.
  • Integrated with Cloud Monitoring.
    • You can view key performance metrics in real time with Cloud Monitoring.
2025.02.27
NEW Multi-node GPU Cluster service official version release
  • We have launched the Multi-node GPU Cluster service.
    • We provide a service that offers physical GPU servers without virtualization for large-scale, high-performance AI computing.

6 - Cloud Functions

6.1 - Overview

Service Overview

Cloud Functions is a serverless computing-based FaaS (Function as a Service) that lets you easily run function‑based applications without provisioning servers. Users don’t have to hassle with managing servers or containers for scaling, and can focus on writing code and deploying applications.

Features

  • Easy and Convenient Development Environment: Developers can easily create Function resources that connect to events across multiple environments using a Code Editor suitable for the selected runtime, and can write and invoke code with ease.
  • Serverless Computing: You can use a serverless code execution service for development in the Samsung Cloud Platform environment. * The resources required to invoke and run function-based applications are allocated and managed by the Samsung Cloud Platform according to the scale of execution.
  • Efficient Cost Management: The invoked Function aggregates usage (total number of calls, total execution time) and is billed for the time actually used to run the application. * Functions with low usage can have the Cloud Functions scaler adjusted to a scale-to-zero state, so they do not consume resources, enabling efficient cost management.

Service diagram

Diagram
Figure. Cloud_Functions diagram

Provided Features

Cloud Functions provides the following features.

  • Code Development Environment: Create Runtime-optimized functions, write and edit code
  • Function execution, environment management, monitoring: endpoint definition, Token management, access control configuration, trigger configuration, etc., runtime environment/variable definition and modification, artifact invocation/testing for Deploy/Test, service deployment, progress status monitoring/logging
  • Serverless Computing: All elements required for code writing and deployment are managed by Samsung Cloud Platform, with automatic scaling adjustments based on deployment.
  • Sample Code Provided: By providing various sample codes through Blueprint, you can start easily and quickly

Component

Runtime

Cloud Functions currently supports the following runtimes. Additional continuously supported runtimes will also be added.

RuntimeVersionDeprecation date
GO1.212026.7.30
GO1.232026.7.30
GO1.25-
java17-
Node.js182026.7.30
Node.js202026.7.30
Node.js22-
Node.js24-
PHP8.12026.7.30
PHP8.4-
PHP8.5-
Python3.92026.7.30
Python3.10-
Python3.11-
Python3.14-
Table. Supported Runtime Items
Caution

Runtime scheduled for deprecation

  • For Runtime versions slated for deprecation, technical support is expected to end within 60 days (End of Technical Support) (detailed schedule will be announced on the console).
  • When technical support for a Runtime version ends, security patches and updates will no longer be applied to that Runtime version.
    • Already created functions can be used continuously without a call time limit, but they cannot be modified.
    • We do not guarantee bugs, errors, defects, or vulnerabilities that arise in Runtime versions for which technical support has ended.
  • We recommend migrating to and using an alternative version of a function that is scheduled for deprecation to ensure safe usage.

Provision status by region

The Cloud Functions service is available in the environments below.

RegionWhether provided
Korea West 1 (kr-west1)Provide
Korea East 1 (kr-east1)Provided
South Korea 1 (kr-south1)Not provided
South Korea South 2 (kr-south2)Not provided
South Korea 3 (kr-south3)Not provided
Table. Cloud Functions regional availability status

Preceding Service

This is a list of services that can be configured as optional before creating the service. Please refer to the guide provided for each service and prepare in advance.

Service CategoryserviceDetailed description
Application ServiceAPI GatewayA service that easily manages and monitors APIs
Table. Cloud Functions prerequisite service

6.1.1 - ServiceWatch Metrics

Cloud Functions sends metrics to ServiceWatch. The metrics provided by default monitoring are data collected at a 1‑minute interval.

Reference
For how to view metrics in ServiceWatch, refer to the ServiceWatch guide.

Basic Metrics

The following are the basic metrics for the Cloud Functions namespace.

The metrics whose names are displayed in bold below are the metrics selected as key metrics among the default metrics provided by Cloud Functions. The key metrics are used to build service dashboards that are automatically created per service in ServiceWatch. You can also view the key metrics on the Monitoring tab of the Cloud Functions detail page.

Each metric guides users, through the user guide, on which statistical values are meaningful when querying that metric, and among the meaningful statistics, the values displayed in bold are the primary statistics. In the service dashboard or monitoring tab, you can view key metrics using these primary statistics.

Performance itemsDetailed descriptionunitmeaningful statistics
InvocationsAverage number of times the function is called per unit timeCount
  • Total
  • Average
  • Maximum
  • Minimum
Success CallsAverage number of times the runtime code operates correctly and returns a response code per unit time during a function call.Count
  • Total
  • Average
  • Maximum
  • Minimum
Error CallsAverage number of calls per unit time that encounter errors during function invocation, including runtime errors due to response timeouts and logic errors.Count
  • Total
  • Average
  • Maximum
  • Minimum
Memory UsageAverage memory usage per unit time while the function is executingKilobytes
  • Total
  • Average
  • Maximum
  • Minimum
Active OperationsWhen a function is called multiple times simultaneously, the average number of tasks generated per unit time for concurrent processing.Count
  • Total
  • Average
  • Maximum
  • Minimum
Table. Cloud Functions Basic Metrics

6.2 - How-to guides

Users can create the service by entering the required information for Cloud Functions and selecting detailed options through the Samsung Cloud Platform Console.

Creating Cloud Functions

  1. All Services > Compute > Cloud Functions Click the menu. 1. Go to the Service Home page of Cloud Functions.

  2. On the Service Home page, click the Create Cloud Functions button. 2. Go to the Create Cloud Functions page.

  3. On the Create Cloud Functions page, enter the information required to create the service.

    Category
    Required
    Detailed description
    Function nameRequiredEnter the name of the Funtion to create
    • Start with a lowercase English letter and use lowercase English letters, numbers, and special characters (-) to enter between 3 and 64 characters
    RuntimeRequiredSelect Runtime creation method
    • New: Create a new Runtime
    • Start with Blueprint: Write using the Runtime source code provided by the service
    Runtime & VesionEssentialSelect Runtime and Version
    • When Create New is selected
      • For the Java runtime, UI code editing is not supported, but you can import a JAR file from Object Storage and execute it
    • When Start with Blueprint is selected
      • You can view a source code example by clicking the View Source Code button for that Runtime & Version
    • If the Runtime version has reached End of Technical Support (EoTS), it cannot be modified after creation
    Table. Cloud Functions service information input fields

  4. Summary Check the detailed information and estimated charges generated in the panel, and click the Create button.

    • When creation is complete, check the created resources on the Cloud Functions list page.
information
After July 2026, you cannot create new functions for runtimes that are no longer supported. Note that already created user functions are not deleted.

View Cloud Functions details

Cloud Functions Details page consists of Details, Monitoring, Logs, Code, Configuration, Triggers, Tags, Job History tabs.

To view detailed information about the Cloud Functions service, follow these steps.

  1. All Services > Compute > Cloud Functions Click the menu. 1. Navigate to the Service Home page of Cloud Functions.
  2. On the Service Home page, click the Function menu. 2. Function list Go to the page.
  3. On the Function list page, click the resource to view detailed information. 3. Navigate to the Function Details page.
    • Function Details page displays status information and additional feature information, and consists of Details, Monitoring, Logs, Code, Configuration, Triggers, Tags, Job History tabs.
      CategoryDetailed description
      Cloud Functions statusCloud Functions status information
      • Ready: green icon, a state where normal function invocations are possible
      • Not Ready: gray icon, a state where normal function invocations are not possible
      • Deploying: yellow icon, a state where the function is being created or updated, which triggers the next action
        • Function creation and modification
        • Code tab: edit code in the editor
        • Code tab: inspect jar file
        • Trigger tab: add and modify
        • Configuration tab: modify
      • Running: blue icon, a state where normal function invocations are possible and a cold‑start prevention policy is applied
      Service cancellationCancel service button
      Table. Cloud Functions status information and additional features

Detailed Information

Function list page allows you to view detailed information of the selected resource and edit the information if needed.

CategoryDetailed description
serviceService name
Resource TypeResource Type
SRNUnique resource ID in Samsung Cloud Platform
Resource nameResource name
  • In the Cloud Functions service, it means the Function name
Resource IDService’s unique resource ID
ConstructorUser who created the service
Creation date and timeService creation timestamp
ModifierUser who modified the service
Modification dateDate and time of service modification
Function nameName of the Cloud Function
RuntimeRuntime types and versions
  • If the Runtime’s End of Technical Support (EoTS) is scheduled, display in yellow with a warning icon
Table. Cloud Functions Details – Details Tab Items
Caution
  • Even after technical support for the Runtime version ends, functions that have already been created can continue to be used without any call time limit. * However, security patches and updates for that Runtime version will not be applied.
    • Bugs, errors, defects, or vulnerabilities that occur in Runtime versions that are no longer supported are not covered.
  • If support for a Runtime has ended, the user must create a replacement Runtime version and then manually delete the function of the previous version.
    • To use this function safely, create a new instance using the Lastest or Stable version.

Monitoring

Function List page lets you view the Cloud Functions usage information for the selected resource.

CategoryDetailed description
Number of callsAverage number of times the function is called per unit time (instances)
execution timeAverage execution time (seconds) of the function per unit time
Memory usageAverage memory usage (KB) during the function execution per unit time
Current number of tasksWhen the function is called multiple times simultaneously, the average number of tasks (count) generated per unit time for concurrent processing.
Successful call countAverage number of times (cases) the runtime code operated correctly and returned a response code per unit time during a function call.
Failed call countAverage number of calls with errors per unit time during function invocation
  • Including runtime due to response timeouts and logic errors
Table. Cloud Functions Details – Monitoring Tab Items

log

Function list page allows you to view the Cloud Functions logs of the selected resource.

CategoryDetailed description
unit periodSelect the period to view Cloud Functions log information
  • Select in time units (1 hour, 3 hours, 12 hours) or allow the user to set a custom range
log messageFunctions are displayed in order, starting with the most recent occurrence.
Table. Cloud Functions Details – Log Tab Items
Reference
Log messages can be viewed up to the previous 1,000 entries based on the most recent occurrence.

code

Function List page lets you view and edit the Cloud Functions code of the selected resource.

Reference

The way to view and edit source code varies depending on the runtime used.

  • Inline Editor: Node.js, Python, PHP, Go
  • Compressed file (.jar/.zip) execution: Java
CategoryDetailed description
source codeInline editor method
code informationDisplay code information
EditAfter clicking the Edit button, you can modify the code in the inline editor.
Table. Cloud Functions Details – Inline Editor Items in the Code Tab
CategoryDetailed description
source codeExecution method for compressed files (.jar/.zip)
code informationDisplay compressed file information
  • Java Runtime: Java Runtime version information
  • Handler information: Execution class and method information
  • Compressed file name (.jar/.zip): Name of the currently configured compressed file
  • File upload timestamp: Upload timestamp of the currently configured compressed file
  • Transmission status: Compressed file transmission history
    • Transmission succeeded: When the compressed file configuration succeeds
    • Reason for failure when compressed file transmission fails
EditJar file can be modified
  • Cannot be modified after the Runtime version reaches end of support
  • On the Function code edit page, you can modify by clicking the Import from Object Storage button
  • Enter the Private URL of the file in the Object Storage bucket to be imported
Table. Cloud Functions Details - Execution items for compressed files (.jar/.zip) in the Code tab
Reference
  • If technical support for the runtime version has ended, you cannot modify the code. * Also, because security patches and updates are not applied, create and use the function anew with the Latest or Stable version to ensure safe usage.
  • In the case of Java Runtime, it does not provide a UI code editing feature, and you must select a compressed file (.jar/.zip) from a bucket in the Object Storage service.
  • If a user does not have an authentication key generated for the Object Storage service, they cannot execute Import from Object Storage, so they must create an authentication key in advance.
  • The Object Storage bucket for the Cloud Functions service must have its access control set to allow.

Configuration

On the Function list page, you can view the Cloud Functions configuration of the selected resource.

CategoryDetailed description
General configurationMemory and timeout settings of Cloud Function
  • Memory: Maximum memory limit that can be used per function
  • Timeout: Maximum time to wait for a function invocation per function
  • Function execution: Minimum and maximum number of tasks
  • Click the Edit button to modify the General configuration settings
function URLIssue an HTTPS URL address that can access the function
  • Enabled: Whether the function URL is enabled
  • Status: Current state of the function URL
    • Active: In use
    • Inactive: Disabled
    • Creating: Creating
  • Function URL: Click the function URL to navigate
  • Authentication type: When IAM is configured, only authenticated IAM users can access the function URL
  • Access control: When enabled, you can register and manage allowed IP addresses
  • Click the Edit button to configure Enabled status, Authentication type, and Allowed IPs
  • Refer to the OpenAPI of Samsung Cloud Platform
environment variableSet runtime environment variables
  • Environment variable: When used, you can adjust the function’s behavior without updating code
  • Edit button to add or modify environment variable
Private connection configurationCan be used in conjunction with PrivateLink Service
PermissionAdd and manage resource policies for IAM-based functions
  • Click the Edit button to edit the policy
  • Add: If there is no existing resource policy, add a new resource policy
  • Resource policies can be loaded from provided templates or created manually
Table. Cloud Functions Details - Configuration Tab Items
Caution
  • If technical support for the Runtime version has been discontinued, configuration items cannot be modified. * Also, because security patches and updates are not applied, create and use the function anew with the Latest or Stable version to ensure safe usage.
  • If access control is disabled, the registered access information is deleted, making function access control impossible, which can expose the system to security attacks such as external scanning, hacking, etc.
Reference
  • CPU cores proportional to the memory allocation of General configuration are automatically assigned.
  • If the minimum number of executions of General configuration is 1 or more, Cold Start is prevented, but continuous costs are incurred.

Trigger

On the Function List page, you can view and configure the trigger information of the selected resource. By setting a trigger, you can automatically execute the Function when an event occurs.

CategoryDetailed description
CronjobUse Cronjob as a trigger
  • Automatically invoke the function based on time or a scheduled interval
  • Edit button can be clicked to change repeat frequency and time zone
API GatewayUse API Gateway as a trigger
  • You can view the API Gateway name and detailed information
Table. Cloud Functions Details – Trigger Tab Items
Caution
  • If technical support for the Runtime version has ended, you cannot modify the trigger item. * Also, because security patches and updates are not applied, create and use the function anew with the Latest or Stable version to ensure safe usage.
  • If the Cronjob trigger is called before the function’s timeout, the function will execute concurrently, increasing both the execution count and the total time. * Therefore, be cautious because continuous additional costs can lead to high expenses.
Reference
  • If the status is Deploying, it cannot be modified.
  • Refer to Setting up triggers for trigger configuration.

Tag

In the Tag tab, you can view the resource’s tag information, and add, modify, or delete it.

CategoryDetailed description
Tag listTag list
  • You can view the Key, Value information of the tag
  • Up to 50 tags can be added per resource
  • When entering tags, search and select from the list of previously created Keys and Values
Table. Cloud Functions Details – Tag Tab Items

Job History

Job History page allows you to view the resource’s job history.

CategoryDetailed description
Task History ListResource Change History
  • You can view operation details, operation time, resource type, resource name, operation result, and operator information
  • Operation History List When you click the corresponding resource in the list, the Operation History Details popup opens
Table. Cloud Functions Details – Job History Tab Items

Changing Java Runtime code

If you are using Java Runtime, you cannot modify the code directly, so you must select and replace the archive file (.jar/.zip) in the bucket of the Object Storage service.

Reference
If technical support for the runtime version has ended, you cannot modify the code. Also, because security patches and updates are not applied, create and use the function anew with the Latest or Stable version to ensure safe usage.

To modify a compressed file, follow these steps.

  1. All Services > Compute > Cloud Functions menu, click. 1. Navigate to the Service Home page of Cloud Functions.

  2. On the Service Home page, click the Function menu. 2. Go to the Function list page.

  3. On the Function List page, click the resource to change the compressed file in the code. 3. Go to the Function Details page.

  4. Click the Edit button on the Code tab of the Function Details page. 4. Edit Function code Navigate to the page.

  5. Click the Import from Object Storage button. 5. Import from Object Storage The popup window opens.

    CategoryDetailed description
    Java RuntimeJava Runtime Information
    Handler informationHandler information
    • Execution Class: Automatically entered when setting the archive file (.jar/.zip)
    • Execution Method: Automatically entered when setting the archive file (.jar/.zip)
    Compressed file (.jar/.zip)Set the archive file to modify
    • Archive file name (.jar/.zip): Displays the name of the archive file. Import from Object Storage after configuration, it is entered automatically
    • Import from Object Storage: Configure the Object Storage to retrieve the archive file (.jar/.zip)
    Table. Cloud Functions Details - Function Code Modification Items

  6. Enter the URL information of the Object Storage to retrieve the compressed file in Object Storage URL, then click the Confirm button. 6. The notification popup opens.

    • URL information can be found in the Folder List tab of the detailed page of the Object Storage to retrieve, under the File Information > Private URL item.
  7. Click the Confirm button. 7. On the Function code edit page, the name of the imported compressed file is displayed in the Compressed file name (.jar/.zip).

  8. Click the Save button.

Caution
  • Users without a generated authentication key cannot execute Import from Object Storage.
  • If the URL does not exist or the archive file matches any of the following, it cannot be changed.
    • When using an unsupported file extension
    • If there are harmful files inside the compressed file.
    • If the size exceeds the supported limit

Terminate Cloud Functions

To cancel the Cloud Functions service, follow these steps.

  1. Click the All Services > Compute > Cloud Functions menu. 1. Navigate to the Service Home page of Cloud Functions.
  2. On the Service Home page, click the Function menu. 2. Navigate to the Function list page.
  3. On the Function List page, click the resource you want to terminate and then click the Terminate Service button.
  4. When the termination is complete, check on the Function list page whether the resource has been terminated.

6.2.1 - Configure Trigger

Configure Trigger

Note
  • By default, all triggers can be added in Cloud Functions.
  • If it is triggered for a specific product, it should be passed to Cloud Functions.

Setting up Cronjob trigger

To set up a Cronjob trigger, follow these steps.

  1. Click the All Services > Compute > Cloud Functions menu. Navigate to the Service Home page of Cloud Functions.
  2. On the Service Home page, click the Function menu. You will be taken to the Function list page.
  3. Function List page, click the resource for which you want to set a trigger. You will be taken to the Function Details page.
  4. After clicking the Trigger tab, click the Add Trigger button. Set it. The Add Trigger popup window opens.
  5. Add Trigger In the popup, select Cronjob from Trigger Type. A required information input area appears at the bottom.
    CategoryDetailed description
    Cronjob configurationSet the trigger’s repeat frequency
    • Can be set in minutes, hours, days, months, weekdays
    Timezone settingSet the trigger’s reference time zone
    Table. Cronjob Trigger Required Information Items
  6. After entering the required information, click the Confirm button.
  7. When the popup notifying an addition opens, click the Confirm button.

Configure API Gateway Trigger

To set up an API Gateway trigger, follow these steps.

  1. Click the All Services > Compute > Cloud Functions menu. Navigate to the Service Home page of Cloud Functions.
  2. On the Service Home page, click the Function menu. You will be taken to the Function List page.
  3. Click the resource to set the trigger on the Function List page. Go to the Function Details page.
  4. Click the Trigger tab, then click the Add Trigger button. Set it. The Add Trigger popup opens.
  5. In the Add Trigger popup, select API Gateway under Trigger Type. A required information input area appears at the bottom.
    CategoryDetailed description
    API nameSelect API
    • You can select an existing API or create a new one
    StageSelect deployment target
    • You can select an existing stage or create a new one
    Table. API Gateway Trigger Required Information Items
  6. After entering the required information, click the Confirm button.
  7. When the popup notifying the addition opens, click the Confirm button.

Configure Multi-Trigger

You can attach multiple triggers to a single function.

Modify Trigger

To modify the added trigger, follow these steps.

  1. Click the All Services > Compute > Cloud Functions menu. Navigate to the Service Home page of Cloud Functions.
  2. On the Service Home page, click the Function menu. You will be taken to the Function list page.
  3. On the Function List page, click the resource to edit the trigger. You will be taken to the Function Details page.
  4. Click the Trigger tab, then in the trigger list, click the Edit button of the trigger whose settings you want to modify. The Edit Trigger popup window opens.
  5. Edit Trigger After modifying the settings in the popup window, click the Confirm button.
  6. When the edit notification popup appears, click Confirm.

Delete Trigger

To delete a trigger, follow these steps.

Caution
A trigger linked to a specific product manages only the product delivered at the time of linking, and when the Functions are terminated, it must convey a deletion status to that product.
  1. Click the All Services > Compute > Cloud Functions menu. Navigate to the Service Home page of Cloud Functions.
  2. On the Service Home page, click the Function menu. You will be taken to the Function List page.
  3. Function List page, click the resource for which you want to set a trigger. You will be taken to the Function Details page.
  4. In the Trigger tab’s trigger list, select the trigger you want to delete, then click the Delete button.
  5. When the popup notifying you of trigger deletion opens, click the Confirm button.

6.2.2 - Blueprint Detailed Guide

Blueprint Overview

When creating Cloud Functions, you can set a Blueprint to utilize the Runtime source code provided by Cloud Functions. Refer to the following for the Blueprint items provided by Cloud Functions.

CategoryDetailed descriptionRemarks
Hello WorldWhen the function is invoked, it responds with Hello Serverless World!
Execution after timeoutIt outputs code that should run after the function call timeout but does not execute.PHP, Python not supported
HTTP request bodyParse the request body.PHP not supported
Send HTTP requestsThe Cloud function sends an HTTP request.PHP not supported
Print logsLogs the user’s Samsung Cloud Platform Console request.PHP not supported
Throw a custom errorEnter the error logic directly to handle the error.
Using Environment VariableConfigure environment variables within the Cloud function and execute it.
Table. Blueprint Items

Hello World

Hello World Explains the response-receiving configuration and a function call example (using the function URL).

Hello World Setup

To set up Hello World, follow these steps.

  1. Click the All Services > Compute > Cloud Functions menu. Go to the Service Home page of Cloud Functions.

  2. On the Service Home page, click the Function menu. You will be taken to the Function List page.

  3. Function List page, click the resource to be called via URL. You will be taken to the Function Detail page.

  4. After clicking the Configuration tab, click the Edit button for the Function URL item. The Edit Function URL popup window opens.

  5. In the Function URL Edit popup, set Activation status to Enabled, then click the Confirm button.

    CategoryDetailed description
    Enable statusConfigure the use of the function URL
    Authentication typeSelect whether to use IAM authentication for requests to the function URL
    Access controlAdd accessible IPs to enable management
    • Set to Use, then you can input and add a public access IP
    Table. Required input fields when adding a trigger

  6. After navigating to the Code tab, click the Edit button. You will be taken to the Function Code Edit page.

  7. After adding the handling logic for success and failure cases, click the Save button.

    • Node.js source code
      Color mode
      exports.handleRequest = async function (params) {
          /**
          * @description User writing area (Function details)
          */
          const response = {
          statusCode: 200,
          body: JSON.stringify('Hello Serverless World!'),
          };
          return response;
      };
      exports.handleRequest = async function (params) {
          /**
          * @description User writing area (Function details)
          */
          const response = {
          statusCode: 200,
          body: JSON.stringify('Hello Serverless World!'),
          };
          return response;
      };
      Hello World - Node.js source code
    • Python source code
      Color mode
      import json
      
      def handle_request(params):
          # User writing area (Function details)
          return {
          'statusCode': 200,
          'body': json.dumps('Hello Serverless World!')
          }
      import json
      
      def handle_request(params):
          # User writing area (Function details)
          return {
          'statusCode': 200,
          'body': json.dumps('Hello Serverless World!')
          }
      Hello World - Python source code
    • PHP source code
      Color mode
      <?php
      function handle_request() {
          # User writing area (Function details)
          $res = array(
              'statusCode' => 200,
              'body' => 'Hello Serverless World!',
          );
          return $res;
      }
      ?>
      
      <?php
      function handle_request() {
          # User writing area (Function details)
          $res = array(
              'statusCode' => 200,
              'body' => 'Hello Serverless World!',
          );
          return $res;
      }
      ?>
      
      Hello World - PHP source code

Check function call

On the Function Details page, in the Configuration tab, invoke the function URL and then verify the response.

Hello Serverless World!

Execution after timeout

Describes configuring execution after timeout (Execution after timeout) and provides an example of invoking the function (using the function URL).

Configure execution after timeout

To set Execution after timeout, follow these steps.

  1. Click the All Services > Compute > Cloud Functions menu. Navigate to the Service Home page of Cloud Functions.
  2. On the Service Home page, click the Function menu. You will be taken to the Function List page.
  3. On the Function List page, click the resource for which you want to set a trigger. You will be taken to the Function Details page.
  4. After clicking the Trigger tab, click the Add Trigger button. The Add Trigger popup window opens.
  5. Add Trigger In the popup window, after selecting the Trigger Type item, enter the required information displayed at the bottom and click the OK button.
    • Required information varies depending on the trigger type.
      Trigger TypesInput field
      API Gateway
      • API name: Select an existing API or create a new one
      • Stage: Select an existing stage or create a new one
      Cronjob
      • Refer to the example and enter the trigger’s repeat frequency(minute, hour, day, month, day of week)
      • Timezone setting: select the reference time zone to apply
      Table. Required input fields when adding a trigger
  6. After moving to the Code tab, click the Edit button. You will be taken to the Function Code Edit page.
  7. After adding the handling logic for success and failure cases, click the Save button.
    • Node.js source code
      Color mode
      exports.handleRequest = async function (params) {
          /**
           * @description User writing area (Function details)
           */
          console.log("Hello world 3");
          await delay(3000);
      
          const response = {
              statusCode: 200,
              body: JSON.stringify('Hello Serverless World!'),
          };
          return response;
      };
      
      const delay = (ms) => {
          return new Promise(resolve=>{
              setTimeout(resolve,ms)
          })
      }
      exports.handleRequest = async function (params) {
          /**
           * @description User writing area (Function details)
           */
          console.log("Hello world 3");
          await delay(3000);
      
          const response = {
              statusCode: 200,
              body: JSON.stringify('Hello Serverless World!'),
          };
          return response;
      };
      
      const delay = (ms) => {
          return new Promise(resolve=>{
              setTimeout(resolve,ms)
          })
      }
      Execution after timeout - Node.js source code

Check function call

On the Function Detail page’s Configuration tab, invoke the function URL and, after a brief period, check the response.

Hello Serverless World!

HTTP request body

Explains the configuration for parsing the Request Body and an example of calling the function (using the function URL).

Setting HTTP request body

To set the HTTP request body, follow these steps.

  1. Click the All Services > Compute > Cloud Functions menu. Navigate to the Service Home page of Cloud Functions.
  2. On the Service Home page, click the Function menu. You will be taken to the Function List page.
  3. Function List page, click the resource to set the trigger. You will be taken to the Function Details page.
  4. After clicking the Trigger tab, click the Add Trigger button. The Add Trigger popup window opens.
  5. Add Trigger In the popup window, select the Trigger Type option, then fill in the required information shown at the bottom and click the OK button.
    • Required information varies depending on the trigger type.
      Trigger TypesInput field
      API Gateway
      • API name: Select an existing API or create a new one
      • Stage: Select an existing stage or create a new one
      Cronjob
      • Refer to the example and enter the trigger’s repeat frequency (minutes, hours, day, month, day of week)
      • Timezone setting: select the reference time zone to apply
      Table. Required input fields when adding a trigger
  6. After moving to the Code tab, click the Edit button. You will be taken to the Function Code Edit page.
  7. After adding the handling logic for success and failure cases, click the Save button.
    • Node.js source code
      Color mode
      exports.handleRequest = async function (params) {
          /**
          * @description User writing area (Function details)
          */
          const response = {
          statusCode: 200,
          body: JSON.stringify(params.body),
          };
          return response;
      };
      exports.handleRequest = async function (params) {
          /**
          * @description User writing area (Function details)
          */
          const response = {
          statusCode: 200,
          body: JSON.stringify(params.body),
          };
          return response;
      };
      Execution after timeout - Node.js source code
    • Python source code
      Color mode
      import json
      
      def handle_request(params):
          # User writing area (Function details)
          return {
              'statusCode': 200,
              'body': json.dumps(params.json)
      }
      import json
      
      def handle_request(params):
          # User writing area (Function details)
          return {
              'statusCode': 200,
              'body': json.dumps(params.json)
      }
      Execution after timeout - Python source code

Check function call

In the Configuration tab of the Function Details page, after calling the Function URL, check the Body data, request Body value, and response Body value.

  • Request Body value

    Color mode
    {
        "testKey" :"cloud-001",
        "testNames": [
            {
                "name": "Son"
            },
            {
                "name": "Kim"
            }
        ],
        "testCode":"test"
    }
    {
        "testKey" :"cloud-001",
        "testNames": [
            {
                "name": "Son"
            },
            {
                "name": "Kim"
            }
        ],
        "testCode":"test"
    }
    Request Body value

  • Response Body value

    Color mode
    {
        "testKey" :"cloud-001",
        "testNames": [
            {
                "name": "Son"
            },
            {
                "name": "Kim"
            }
        ],
        "testCode":"test"
    }
    {
        "testKey" :"cloud-001",
        "testNames": [
            {
                "name": "Son"
            },
            {
                "name": "Kim"
            }
        ],
        "testCode":"test"
    }
    Response Body value

Send HTTP requests

Explains the HTTP request configuration and an example of calling a function (using the function URL).

Send HTTP requests Configure

To configure Send HTTP requests, follow these steps.

  1. Click the All Services > Compute > Cloud Functions menu. Navigate to the Service Home page of Cloud Functions.
  2. On the Service Home page, click the Function menu. You will be taken to the Function List page.
  3. Click the resource to set the trigger on the Function List page. Go to the Function Details page.
  4. After clicking the Trigger tab, click the Add Trigger button. The Add Trigger popup window opens.
  5. Add Trigger In the popup window, after selecting the Trigger Type item, enter the required information displayed at the bottom and click the OK button.
    • Required information varies depending on the trigger type.
      Trigger TypesInput field
      API Gateway
      • API name: Select an existing API or create a new one
      • Stage: Select an existing stage or create a new one
      Cronjob
      • Refer to the example and enter the trigger’s repeat frequency (minutes, hours, day, month, day of week)
      • Timezone setting: select the reference time zone to apply
      Table. Required input items when adding a trigger
  6. After moving to the Code tab, click the Edit button. You will be taken to the Function Code Edit page.
  7. After adding the handling logic for success and failure cases, click the Save button.
    • Node.js source code
      Color mode
      const request = require('request');
      
      /**
      * @description User writing area (Function details)
      */
      exports.handleRequest = async function (params) {
      return await sendRequest(params);
      };
      
      async function sendRequest(req) {
          return new Promise((resolve, reject) => {
              // Port 80 and Port 443 are available
              url = "https://example.com"; // Destination URL
      
                  const options = {
                  uri: url,
                  method:'GET',
                  json: true,
                  strictSSL: false,
                  rejectUnauthorized: false
              }
              request(options, (error, response, body) => {
                  if (error) {
                      reject(error);
                  } else {
                      resolve({
                          statusCode: response.statusCode,
                          body: JSON.stringify(body)
                      });
                  }
              });
          });
      }
      const request = require('request');
      
      /**
      * @description User writing area (Function details)
      */
      exports.handleRequest = async function (params) {
      return await sendRequest(params);
      };
      
      async function sendRequest(req) {
          return new Promise((resolve, reject) => {
              // Port 80 and Port 443 are available
              url = "https://example.com"; // Destination URL
      
                  const options = {
                  uri: url,
                  method:'GET',
                  json: true,
                  strictSSL: false,
                  rejectUnauthorized: false
              }
              request(options, (error, response, body) => {
                  if (error) {
                      reject(error);
                  } else {
                      resolve({
                          statusCode: response.statusCode,
                          body: JSON.stringify(body)
                      });
                  }
              });
          });
      }
      Send HTTP requests - Node.js source code
    • Python source code
      Color mode
      import json
      import requests
      
      def handle_request(params):
          # User writing area (Function details)
          
          # Port 80 and Port 443 are available
          url = "https://example.com" # Destination URL
      
          try:
              response = requests.get(url, verify=True)
              return {
                  'statusCode': response.status_code,
                  'body': json.dumps(response.text)
              }
          except requests.exceptions.RequestException as e:
              return str(e)
      import json
      import requests
      
      def handle_request(params):
          # User writing area (Function details)
          
          # Port 80 and Port 443 are available
          url = "https://example.com" # Destination URL
      
          try:
              response = requests.get(url, verify=True)
              return {
                  'statusCode': response.status_code,
                  'body': json.dumps(response.text)
              }
          except requests.exceptions.RequestException as e:
              return str(e)
      Send HTTP requests - Python source code

Check Function Call

On the Function Details page, after invoking the function URL in the Configuration tab, verify the response.

Color mode
<!doctype html>
<html>
<head>
    <title>Example Domain</title>

    <meta charset="utf-8" />
    <meta http-equiv="Content-type" content="text/html; charset=utf-8" />
    <meta name="viewport" content="width=device-width, initial-scale=1" />
    <style type="text/css">
    body {
        background-color: #f0f0f2;
        margin: 0;
        padding: 0;
        font-family: -apple-system, system-ui, BlinkMacSystemFont, "Segoe UI", "Open Sans", "Helvetica Neue", Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif;
    }
    div {
        width: 600px;
        margin: 5em auto;
        padding: 2em;
        background-color: #fdfdff;
        border-radius: 0.5em;
        box-shadow: 2px 3px 7px 2px rgba(0,0,0,0.02);
    }
    a:link, a:visited {
        color: #38488f;
        text-decoration: none;
    }
    @media (max-width: 700px) {
        div {
            margin: 0 auto;
            width: auto;
        }
    }
    </style>
</head>

<body>
<div>
    <h1>Example Domain</h1>

    <p>This domain is for use in illustrative examples in documents. You may use this
    domain in literature without prior coordination or asking for permission.</p>
    <p><a href="https://www.iana.org/domains/example">More information...</a></p>
</div>
</body>
</html>
<!doctype html>
<html>
<head>
    <title>Example Domain</title>

    <meta charset="utf-8" />
    <meta http-equiv="Content-type" content="text/html; charset=utf-8" />
    <meta name="viewport" content="width=device-width, initial-scale=1" />
    <style type="text/css">
    body {
        background-color: #f0f0f2;
        margin: 0;
        padding: 0;
        font-family: -apple-system, system-ui, BlinkMacSystemFont, "Segoe UI", "Open Sans", "Helvetica Neue", Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif;
    }
    div {
        width: 600px;
        margin: 5em auto;
        padding: 2em;
        background-color: #fdfdff;
        border-radius: 0.5em;
        box-shadow: 2px 3px 7px 2px rgba(0,0,0,0.02);
    }
    a:link, a:visited {
        color: #38488f;
        text-decoration: none;
    }
    @media (max-width: 700px) {
        div {
            margin: 0 auto;
            width: auto;
        }
    }
    </style>
</head>

<body>
<div>
    <h1>Example Domain</h1>

    <p>This domain is for use in illustrative examples in documents. You may use this
    domain in literature without prior coordination or asking for permission.</p>
    <p><a href="https://www.iana.org/domains/example">More information...</a></p>
</div>
</body>
</html>
Check function call response

Print logs

This explains how to configure log output and an example of calling a function (using the function URL).

Configure Print logs

Print logs To set up response receiving, follow these steps.

  1. Click the All Services > Compute > Cloud Functions menu. Navigate to the Service Home page of Cloud Functions.
  2. On the Service Home page, click the Function menu. You will be taken to the Function List page.
  3. Function List page, click the resource to set the trigger. Function Details page will be displayed.
  4. After clicking the Trigger tab, click the Add Trigger button. The Add Trigger popup window opens.
  5. In the Add Trigger popup, select the Trigger Type item, then enter the required information displayed at the bottom and click the OK button.
    • Required information varies depending on the trigger type.
      Trigger TypesInput field
      API Gateway
      • API name: Select an existing API or create a new one
      • Stage: Select an existing stage or create a new one
      Cronjob
      • Refer to the example and enter the trigger’s repeat frequency(minutes, hours, day, month, day of week)
      • Timezone setting: select the reference time zone to apply
      Table. Required input fields when adding a trigger
  6. After moving to the Code tab, click the Edit button. You will be taken to the Function Code Edit page.
  7. After adding the handling logic for success and failure cases, click the Save button.
    • Node.js source code
      Color mode
      const winston = require('winston');
      
      // Log module setting
      const logger = winston.createLogger({
          format: winston.format.combine(
              winston.format.timestamp(),
              winston.format.printf(info => info.timestamp + ' ' + info.level + ': ' + info.message)
              ),
              transports: [
                  new winston.transports.Console()
                  ]
      });
      
      exports.handleRequest = async function (params) {
          /**
          * @description User writing area (Function details)
          */
          const response = {
              statusCode: 200,
              body: JSON.stringify(params.body),
          };
      
          logger.info(JSON.stringify(response, null, 2));
      
          return response;
      };
      const winston = require('winston');
      
      // Log module setting
      const logger = winston.createLogger({
          format: winston.format.combine(
              winston.format.timestamp(),
              winston.format.printf(info => info.timestamp + ' ' + info.level + ': ' + info.message)
              ),
              transports: [
                  new winston.transports.Console()
                  ]
      });
      
      exports.handleRequest = async function (params) {
          /**
          * @description User writing area (Function details)
          */
          const response = {
              statusCode: 200,
              body: JSON.stringify(params.body),
          };
      
          logger.info(JSON.stringify(response, null, 2));
      
          return response;
      };
      Print logs - Node.js source code
    • Python source code
      Color mode
      import json
      import logging
      
      # Log module setting
      logging.basicConfig(level=logging.INFO)
      
      def handle_request(params):
          # User writing area (Function details)
          response = {
              'statusCode': 200,
              'body': json.dumps(params.json)
          }
      
          logging.info(response)
      
          return response
      import json
      import logging
      
      # Log module setting
      logging.basicConfig(level=logging.INFO)
      
      def handle_request(params):
          # User writing area (Function details)
          response = {
              'statusCode': 200,
              'body': json.dumps(params.json)
          }
      
          logging.info(response)
      
          return response
      Print logs - Python source code

Check Function Call

After calling the function URL in the Configuration tab of the Function Details page, check the log in the Log tab.

Color mode
[2023-09-07] 12:06:23] "host": "scf-xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx",
[2023-09-07] 12:06:23] "ce-id": "xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx",
[2023-09-07] 12:06:23] "ce-source": "xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx",
[2023-09-07] 12:06:23] "host": "scf-xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx",
[2023-09-07] 12:06:23] "ce-id": "xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx",
[2023-09-07] 12:06:23] "ce-source": "xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx",
Check function call response

Throw a custom error

Explains setting up a custom error (Throw a custom error) and an example of calling a function (using a function URL).

Configure Throw a custom error

To configure Throw a custom error, follow these steps.

  1. Click the All Services > Compute > Cloud Functions menu. Navigate to the Service Home page of Cloud Functions.
  2. On the Service Home page, click the Function menu. You will be taken to the Function List page.
  3. Click the resource to set the trigger on the Function List page. Go to the Function Details page.
  4. After clicking the Trigger tab, click the Add Trigger button. The Add Trigger popup window opens.
  5. Add Trigger In the popup window, after selecting the Trigger Type item, enter the required information displayed at the bottom and click the OK button.
    • Required information varies depending on the trigger type.
      Trigger TypesInput field
      API Gateway
      • API name: Select an existing API or create a new one
      • Stage: Select an existing stage or create a new one
      Cronjob
      • Refer to the example and enter the trigger’s repeat frequency (minutes, hours, day, month, day of week)
      • Timezone setting: select the reference time zone to apply
      Table. Required input fields when adding a trigger
  6. After moving to the Code tab, click the Edit button. You will be taken to the Function Code Edit page.
  7. After adding the handling logic for success and failure cases, click the Save button.
    • Node.js source code
      Color mode
      class CustomError extends Error {
          constructor(message) {
              super(message);
              this.name = 'CustomError';
          }
      }
      
      exports.handleRequest = async function (params) {
          /**
          * @description User writing area (Function details)
          */
          throw new CustomError('This is a custom error!');
      };
      class CustomError extends Error {
          constructor(message) {
              super(message);
              this.name = 'CustomError';
          }
      }
      
      exports.handleRequest = async function (params) {
          /**
          * @description User writing area (Function details)
          */
          throw new CustomError('This is a custom error!');
      };
      Throw a custom error - Node.js source code
    • Python source code
      Color mode
      class CustomError(Exception):
          def __init__(self, message):
          self.message = message
      
      def handle_request(parmas):
          raise CustomError('This is a custom error!')
      class CustomError(Exception):
          def __init__(self, message):
          self.message = message
      
      def handle_request(parmas):
          raise CustomError('This is a custom error!')
      Throw a custom error - Python source code
    • PHP source code
      Color mode
      <?php
          class CustomError extends Exception {
              public function __construct($message) {
                  parent::__construct($message);
                  $this->message = $message;
              }
          }
      
          function handle_request() {
              throw new CustomError('This is a custom error!');
          }
      ?>
      
      <?php
          class CustomError extends Exception {
              public function __construct($message) {
                  parent::__construct($message);
                  $this->message = $message;
              }
          }
      
          function handle_request() {
              throw new CustomError('This is a custom error!');
          }
      ?>
      
      Throw a custom error - PHP source code

Check Function Call

On the Function Details page, after calling the Function URL in the Configuration tab, verify whether an error occurred in the Log tab.

Using Environment Variable

Explains the use of environment variables (Using Environment Variable) settings and a function call example (using function URL).

Using Environment Variable Configure

To configure Using Environment Variable, follow these steps.

  1. Click the All Services > Compute > Cloud Functions menu. Navigate to the Service Home page of Cloud Functions.
  2. On the Service Home page, click the Function menu. You will be taken to the Function List page.
  3. Click the resource to set the trigger on the Function List page. Go to the Function Details page.
  4. After clicking the Trigger tab, click the Add Trigger button. The Add Trigger popup window opens.
  5. In the Add Trigger popup, select the Trigger Type item, then enter the required information displayed at the bottom and click the OK button.
    • Required information varies depending on the trigger type.
      Trigger TypesInput field
      API Gateway
      • API name: Select an existing API or create a new one
      • Stage: Select an existing stage or create a new one
      Cronjob
      • Refer to the example and enter the trigger’s repeat frequency(minutes, hours, days, months, day of week)
      • Timezone setting: select the reference time zone to apply
      Table. Required input fields when adding a trigger
  6. After moving to the Code tab, click the Edit button. You will be taken to the Function Code Edit page.
  7. After adding the handling logic for success and failure cases, click the Save button.
    • Node.js source code
      Color mode
      exports.handleRequest = async function (params) {
          /**
          * @description User writing area (Function details)
          */
          return process.env.test;
      };
      exports.handleRequest = async function (params) {
          /**
          * @description User writing area (Function details)
          */
          return process.env.test;
      };
      Using Environment Variable - Node.js source code
    • Python source code
      Color mode
      import json
      
      import os
      
      def handle_request(params):
          # User writing area (Function details)
          return os.environ.get("test")
      import json
      
      import os
      
      def handle_request(params):
          # User writing area (Function details)
          return os.environ.get("test")
      Using Environment Variable - Python source code
    • PHP source code
      Color mode
      import json
      
      def handle_request(params):
          # User writing area (Function details)
          return os.environ.get("test")
      import json
      
      def handle_request(params):
          # User writing area (Function details)
          return os.environ.get("test")
      Using Environment Variable - PHP source code
  8. After moving to the Configuration tab, click the Edit button in the Environment Variables area. The Edit Environment Variables popup will open.
  9. After entering the environment variable information, click the Confirm button.
    CategoryDetailed description
    NameEnter the key value
    valueEnter the value
    Table. Environment Variable Input Items

Check function call

On the Function Details page, after calling the function URL in the Configuration tab, check the environment variable value in the Log tab.

6.2.3 - Integrate PrivateLink Service

By integrating Cloud Functions with the PrivateLink service, you can connect VPCs within the Samsung Cloud Platform to other VPCs, and VPCs to services, without using the external internet.
The data uses only the internal network, providing high security, and does not require public IP, NAT, VPN, or an internet gateway.

Enable PrivateLink Service

To connect the PrivateLink Service, you must first enable the service.

To enable the PrivateLink service, follow these steps.

  1. All Services > Compute > Cloud Functions Click the menu. 1. Navigate to the Service Home page of Cloud Functions.
  2. On the Service Home page, click the Function menu. 2. Go to the Function list page.
  3. On the Function List page, click the resource to associate with PrivateLink. 3. Function Details page.
  4. On the Function Details page, click the Configuration tab.
  5. In Private connection configuration, click the Edit button of PrivateLink Service. 5. PrivateLink Service Edit The popup window opens.
  6. PrivateLink Service Edit In the popup window, after checking the Use item of Activation Status, click the Confirm button. 6. Configuration tab’s Private connection configuration displays PrivateLink Service information.
CategoryDetailed description
Private URLPrivateLink Service URL information
PrivateLink Service IDPrivateLink Service ID information
Request Endpoint ManagementList of PrivateLink Endpoints that requested a PrivateLink Service connection
  • Endpoint ID and approval status
  • Approval Management button can be clicked to change the status
    • Requesting: Endpoint that is requesting a connection. Click the Approve or Reject button to select approval
    • Active: Endpoint with a completed connection. Click the Block button to disconnect
    • Disconnected: Endpoint whose connection has been terminated. Click the Reconnect button to re-establish the connection
    • Reject: Endpoint whose connection request was denied
Table. PrivateLink Service detailed information items

Integrating PrivateLink Service

You can expose the function for private access from another VPC by integrating with PrivateLink Service.

information
Activate the PrivateLink Service first, then proceed with the integration work.

To integrate the PrivateLink service, review the following tasks.

  • Register the domain for the PrivateLink Endpoint IP address and the Private URL address to invoke the issued Private URL.
    192.168.0.13 abc123.scf.private.kr-west1.qa2.samsungsdscloud.com
    
  • When invoking the PrivateLink Service, verify IAM authentication based on the credentials of the Endpoint creator required for the Endpoint.

Create PrivateLink Endpoint

Create an entry point to access the PrivateLink Service of the user VPC.

Caution
Additional costs may be incurred when creating an endpoint.

To create a PrivateLink Endpoint, follow these steps.

  1. Click the All Services > Compute > Cloud Functions menu. 1. Go to the Service Home page of Cloud Functions.
  2. On the Service Home page, click the Function menu. 2. Go to the Function list page.
  3. On the Function list page, click the resource to associate with PrivateLink. 3. Function Details Go to the page.
  4. On the Function Details page, click the Configuration tab.
  5. Click the Add button in Private connection configuration of PrivateLink Endpoint. 5. Add PrivateLink Endpoint The popup window opens.
  6. Add PrivateLink Service in the popup window, after entering the PrivateLink Service ID and Alias information, click the Confirm button.
  7. When the popup indicating creation opens, click the Confirm button. 7. Configuration tab’s Private connection configuration displays PrivateLink Endpoint information.
CategoryDetailed description
PrivateLink Endpoint IDPrivateLink Endpoint ID information
PrivateLink Service IDPrivateLink Service ID information
Aliashostalias information that can be used instead of an IP address for accessing a PrivateLink Endpoint
statusApproval status of PrivateLink Endpoint
  • Requesting: Pending approval
  • Active: Approved and connected
  • Disconnected: Disconnected
  • Reject: Approval rejected. Click the Retry button to retry
  • Delete: Delete the endpoint
Table. PrivateLink Endpoint detailed information items

Integrating APIGW Private EPS

To connect the SCF Endpoint and the APIGW Private Endpoint, you must specify the Private URL in the SCF Endpoint Alias instead of the APIGW EPS resource path.

  • Private URL example: 181b6126ef6d4e4b81370df5.apigw.private.kr-west1.s.samsungsdscloud.com/get/resourcepath

To integrate APIGW Private EPS, refer to the following code.

Color mode
const request = require('request');

/**
 * @description User writing area (Function details)
*/
exports.handleRequest = async function (params) {
    return await sendRequest(params);
};
 
async function sendRequest(req) {
    return new Promise((resolve, reject) => {
        // Port 80 and Port 443 are available
        url = "https://{alias}/{resource_path}"; // Destination URL
        /**
        {alias} is the alias name entered when creating an Endpoint within the function
        {resoure_path} is the resource path (/get/resourcepath) specified in the Private URL of APIGW EPS
        */

        const options = {
            uri: url,
            method:'GET',
            json: true,
            strictSSL: false,
            rejectUnauthorized: false
        }
         
        request(options, (error, response, body) => {
            if (error) {
                reject(error);
            } else {
                resolve({
                    statusCode: response.statusCode,
                    body: JSON.stringify(body)
                });
            }
        });
    });
}
const request = require('request');

/**
 * @description User writing area (Function details)
*/
exports.handleRequest = async function (params) {
    return await sendRequest(params);
};
 
async function sendRequest(req) {
    return new Promise((resolve, reject) => {
        // Port 80 and Port 443 are available
        url = "https://{alias}/{resource_path}"; // Destination URL
        /**
        {alias} is the alias name entered when creating an Endpoint within the function
        {resoure_path} is the resource path (/get/resourcepath) specified in the Private URL of APIGW EPS
        */

        const options = {
            uri: url,
            method:'GET',
            json: true,
            strictSSL: false,
            rejectUnauthorized: false
        }
         
        request(options, (error, response, body) => {
            if (error) {
                reject(error);
            } else {
                resolve({
                    statusCode: response.statusCode,
                    body: JSON.stringify(body)
                });
            }
        });
    });
}
APIGW Private EPS integration code

6.2.4 - Resource-based Policy Guide

Resource-based policy overview

The resource-based policy (Resource-based Policy) of Cloud Functions is a policy granted to a resource that can decide to allow or deny (Effect) an action (Action) on a specific resource for a principal (Principal). You can directly define the principal that can invoke a function by using resource-based policies.

Reference
While a typical IAM policy (Identity-based) grants permissions to a user, a resource-based policy is applied to the function itself to allow external access.

You can allow function calls by defining the following in a resource-based policy.

  • User of the specified Samsung Cloud Platform account
  • Specified source IP address range or CIDR block

A source policy is defined as a JSON policy document attached to the API, which controls whether the specified security principal (typically an IAM role or group) can call the API.

Categorydescriptionexample
PrincipalSpecify the caller of the functionSpecific object storage bucket, API Gateway, other Samsung Cloud Platform accounts, etc.
Task(Action)Define the allowed functionsMostly scf:InvokeFunction
Condition(Condition)Restrict to allow only in specific situationsAllow only requests originating from a bucket with a specific SRN.
Table. Entity that controls API call execution
Reference
  • Cloud Functions’ resource-based policies leverage the rules of IAM’s resource-based policies.
  • For instructions on creating or modifying policies using JSON, refer to the JSON Mode Utilization Guide.

Resource-based policy usage scenario

The primary use cases for resource-based policies are as follows.

Resource-based policy scenario

The resource-based policy scenarios used when a Cloud Functions function runs are as follows.

CategorydescriptionReference example
Function URL - Authentication Type NoneIt is required when generating a function URL for invocation.
  • If there is no resource-based policy, authorization fails, making it impossible to invoke the function using a public URL.
Function URL (Auth Type None) Example
Function URL - Authentication Type IAM
  • Resource-based policy is registered or credential permission is required.
  • If the resource belongs to the same account: you can invoke it if you have a resource-based policy or credential permission (InvokeFunctionUrl).
  • If the resource belongs to a different account: you must have both a resource-based policy and credential permission (InvokeFunction) to invoke it.
Function URL (authentication type IAM) example
API Gateway triggerIt is required when API Gateway calls Lambda to handle external API requests.
  • Resource-based policy registration is required.
  • If a resource-based policy is not present, authorization fails, making it impossible to invoke the function via API Gateway.
API Gateway Trigger Example
PrivateLink connectionYou can connect a PrivateLink Service to define the function for private access from another VPC.
  • It must be registered with a resource-based policy or require credential permissions.
  • When the resource is in the same account: you can invoke it if you have a resource-based policy or credential permission (InvokeFunction).
  • When the resource is in a different account: you must have both a resource-based policy and credential permission (InvokeFunction) to invoke it.
PrivateLink connection example
Table. Resource-based policy scenario

User addition usage scenario

Although it is not automatically registered as a resource-based policy for Cloud Functions, users can add and use it as needed. The scenarios that users can add and utilize are as follows.

  • Cross-Account Access
    • If an IAM user in account A wants to invoke a Lambda in account B, register account A in the function policy of account B.
  • Hybrid Access Control
    • It can be configured so that access is allowed only when both conditions are met—a specific user and a specific IP range—rather than merely restricting by account or IP alone.

Resource-based policy management for Cloud Functions

To view and configure resource-based policies for Cloud Functions, follow these steps.

  1. Click the All Services > Compute > Cloud Functions menu. Navigate to the Service Home page of Cloud Functions.
  2. On the Service Home page, click the Function menu. You will be taken to the Function list page.
  3. On the Function List page, click the resource for which you want to set a policy. You will be taken to the Function Details page.
  4. Click the Configuration tab on the Function Details page.
  5. Click the Edit button of the Resource-based policy permission item. The Resource policy edit popup window opens.
  6. In the Resource Policy edit popup, after selecting the Policy Template, write the policy.
  7. When the writing is complete, click the Confirm button.
    • Click the Delete button to delete the registered policy.

Example of resource-based policy

Users can define additional resource-based policies as needed or modify existing policies for use.

Reference
  • For some features, a resource‑based policy (or credential) must be registered to use them in Cloud Functions.
  • In the resource-based policy examples described in this guide, Cloud Functions automatically registers the example resource-based policies when each feature is enabled or linked.

Function URL - Authentication Type None

Principal is /* a policy that allows public calls.

Policy Template

Color mode
{
    "Statement": [
        {
        	"Action": ["scf:InvokeFunctionUrl"],
        	"Condition": {
            	"StringEquals": {
                	"scf:CloudFunctionAuthType": ["NONE"]
            	}
        	},
        	"Effect": "Allow"
        	"Principal": "*"
            "Resource": ["{{CloudFunctionSrn}}"],
            "Sid": "InvokeFunctionURLAllowPublicAccess"
        }
    ],
    "Version": "2024-07-01"
}
{
    "Statement": [
        {
        	"Action": ["scf:InvokeFunctionUrl"],
        	"Condition": {
            	"StringEquals": {
                	"scf:CloudFunctionAuthType": ["NONE"]
            	}
        	},
        	"Effect": "Allow"
        	"Principal": "*"
            "Resource": ["{{CloudFunctionSrn}}"],
            "Sid": "InvokeFunctionURLAllowPublicAccess"
        }
    ],
    "Version": "2024-07-01"
}
Function URL – Authentication Type None Policy Template Example

Policy example

Color mode
{
    "Statement": [
        {
            "Action": ["scf:InvokeFunctionUrl"],
            "Condition": {
                "StringEquals": {
                    "scf:CloudFunctionAuthType": ["NONE"]
                }
            },
            "Effect": "Allow"
            "Principal": "*"
            "Resource": ["srn:e::accountID:kr-west1::scf:cloud-function/functionsID"],
            "Sid": "InvokeFunctionURLAllowPublicAccess"
        }
    ],
    "Version": "2024-07-01"
}
{
    "Statement": [
        {
            "Action": ["scf:InvokeFunctionUrl"],
            "Condition": {
                "StringEquals": {
                    "scf:CloudFunctionAuthType": ["NONE"]
                }
            },
            "Effect": "Allow"
            "Principal": "*"
            "Resource": ["srn:e::accountID:kr-west1::scf:cloud-function/functionsID"],
            "Sid": "InvokeFunctionURLAllowPublicAccess"
        }
    ],
    "Version": "2024-07-01"
}
Function URL - Authentication Type None Policy Example

Function URL - Authentication Type IAM

This policy permits a specific user to invoke a public URL.

Policy Template

Color mode
{
    "Statement": [
        {
            "Action": ["scf:InvokeFunctionUrl"],
            "Condition": {
                "StringEquals": {
                    "scf:CloudFunctionAuthType": ["SCP_IAM"]
                }
            },
            "Effect": "Allow"
            "Principal": {
                "scp": ["srn:{{Environment}}::{{AccountID}}:::iam:user/{{UserId}}"]
            },
            "Resource": ["{{CloudFunctionSrn}}"],
            "Sid": "Statement1"
        }
    ],
    "Version": "2024-07-01"
}
{
    "Statement": [
        {
            "Action": ["scf:InvokeFunctionUrl"],
            "Condition": {
                "StringEquals": {
                    "scf:CloudFunctionAuthType": ["SCP_IAM"]
                }
            },
            "Effect": "Allow"
            "Principal": {
                "scp": ["srn:{{Environment}}::{{AccountID}}:::iam:user/{{UserId}}"]
            },
            "Resource": ["{{CloudFunctionSrn}}"],
            "Sid": "Statement1"
        }
    ],
    "Version": "2024-07-01"
}
Function URL - Authentication Type IAM Policy Template Example

Policy Example

Color mode
{
    "Statement": [
        {
            "Action": ["scf:InvokeFunctionUrl"],
            "Condition": {
                "StringEquals": {
                    "scf:CloudFunctionAuthType": ["SCP_IAM"]
                }
            },
            "Effect": "Allow"
            "Principal": "*",
            "Resource":  ["srn:e::accountID:kr-west1::scf:cloud-function/functionsID"],
            "Sid": "accountID-iam-invokefunctionurl"
        }
    ],
    "Version": "2024-07-01"
}
{
    "Statement": [
        {
            "Action": ["scf:InvokeFunctionUrl"],
            "Condition": {
                "StringEquals": {
                    "scf:CloudFunctionAuthType": ["SCP_IAM"]
                }
            },
            "Effect": "Allow"
            "Principal": "*",
            "Resource":  ["srn:e::accountID:kr-west1::scf:cloud-function/functionsID"],
            "Sid": "accountID-iam-invokefunctionurl"
        }
    ],
    "Version": "2024-07-01"
}
Function URL - Authentication Type IAM Policy Example

API Gateway trigger

Principal is a policy that permits public calls with a * principal.

Policy Template

Color mode
{
    "Statement": [
        {
            "Action": ["scf:InvokeFunction"],
            "Condition": {
                "SrnLike": {
                    "scp:RequestAttribute/body['x-scf-request-obj-srn']": ["{{ApiGatewayMethodSrn}}"]
                }
            },
            "Effect": "Allow",
            "Principal": {
                "Service": ["apigateway.samsungsdscloud.com"]
            },
            "Resource": ["{{CloudFunctionSrn}}"],
            "Sid": "Statement1"
        }
    ],
    "Version": "2024-07-01"
}
{
    "Statement": [
        {
            "Action": ["scf:InvokeFunction"],
            "Condition": {
                "SrnLike": {
                    "scp:RequestAttribute/body['x-scf-request-obj-srn']": ["{{ApiGatewayMethodSrn}}"]
                }
            },
            "Effect": "Allow",
            "Principal": {
                "Service": ["apigateway.samsungsdscloud.com"]
            },
            "Resource": ["{{CloudFunctionSrn}}"],
            "Sid": "Statement1"
        }
    ],
    "Version": "2024-07-01"
}
API Gateway trigger policy template example

Policy Example

Color mode
{
    "Statement": [
        {
            "Action": [
                scf:InvokeFunction
            ],
            "Condition": {
                "SrnLike": {
                    "scp:RequestAttribute/body['x-scf-request-obj-srn']": [
                        srn:e::accountID:kr-west1::apigateway:method/MethodID/*/GET/test
                    ]
                }
            },
            "Effect": "Allow"
            "Principal": {
                "Service": [
                    "apigateway.samsungsdscloud.com"
                ]
            },
            "Resource": [
                srn:e::accountID:kr-west1::scf:cloud-function/functionID
            ],
            "Sid": "999e9a9999de4d4683c9e10c74ee999z"
        }
    ],
    "Version": "2024-07-01"
}
{
    "Statement": [
        {
            "Action": [
                scf:InvokeFunction
            ],
            "Condition": {
                "SrnLike": {
                    "scp:RequestAttribute/body['x-scf-request-obj-srn']": [
                        srn:e::accountID:kr-west1::apigateway:method/MethodID/*/GET/test
                    ]
                }
            },
            "Effect": "Allow"
            "Principal": {
                "Service": [
                    "apigateway.samsungsdscloud.com"
                ]
            },
            "Resource": [
                srn:e::accountID:kr-west1::scf:cloud-function/functionID
            ],
            "Sid": "999e9a9999de4d4683c9e10c74ee999z"
        }
    ],
    "Version": "2024-07-01"
}
API Gateway trigger policy example

PrivateLink connection

This is a policy that allows function calls through a Privatelink Endpoint for specific users.

Policy Template

Color mode
{
    "Statement": [
        {
            "Action": ["scf:InvokeFunction"],
            "Condition": {
                "StringEquals": {
           			"scf:CloudFunctionPrivatelinkServiceAuthType": ["SCP_IAM"]
                }
            },
            "Effect": "Allow"
            "Principal": {
                "scp": ["srn:{{Environment}}::{{AccountID}}:::iam:user/{{UserId}}"]
            },
            "Resource": ["{{CloudFunctionSrn}}"],
            "Sid": "Statement1"
        }
    ],
    "Version": "2024-07-01"
}
{
    "Statement": [
        {
            "Action": ["scf:InvokeFunction"],
            "Condition": {
                "StringEquals": {
           			"scf:CloudFunctionPrivatelinkServiceAuthType": ["SCP_IAM"]
                }
            },
            "Effect": "Allow"
            "Principal": {
                "scp": ["srn:{{Environment}}::{{AccountID}}:::iam:user/{{UserId}}"]
            },
            "Resource": ["{{CloudFunctionSrn}}"],
            "Sid": "Statement1"
        }
    ],
    "Version": "2024-07-01"
}
Example of a PrivateLink connection policy template

Policy Example

Color mode
{
    "Statement": [
        {
            "Action": [
                scf:InvokeFunction
            ],
            "Condition": {
                "StringEquals": {
                    "scf:CloudFunctionAuthType": [
                        SCP_IAM
                    ]
                }
            },
            "Effect": "Allow",
            "Principal": {
                "scp": [
                    srn:e::accountID:::iam:user/userID
                ]
            },
            "Resource": [
                srn:e::accountID:kr-west1::scf:cloud-function/functionID
            ],
"Sid": "rrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrr-privatelink-invokefunction"
        }
    ],
    "Version": "2024-07-01"
}
{
    "Statement": [
        {
            "Action": [
                scf:InvokeFunction
            ],
            "Condition": {
                "StringEquals": {
                    "scf:CloudFunctionAuthType": [
                        SCP_IAM
                    ]
                }
            },
            "Effect": "Allow",
            "Principal": {
                "scp": [
                    srn:e::accountID:::iam:user/userID
                ]
            },
            "Resource": [
                srn:e::accountID:kr-west1::scf:cloud-function/functionID
            ],
"Sid": "rrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrr-privatelink-invokefunction"
        }
    ],
    "Version": "2024-07-01"
}
Example of PrivateLink connection policy

6.3 - API Reference

API Reference

6.4 - CLI Reference

CLI Reference

6.5 - Release Note

Cloud Functions

2026.05.21
CHANGED Add termination of support information per Runtime version and discontinue AIOS integration
  • Technical support end-of-life information (EoTS) for the Runtime version is provided.
    • When technical support ends, security patches and updates for that Runtime version will no longer be applied.
    • Already created functions can be used continuously without any call time limit. * However, we do not guarantee bugs, errors, defects, or vulnerabilities that occur in Runtime versions for which technical support has ended.
    • Technical support will be discontinued. The Runtime versions are as follows (see the full supported Runtime versions at Rutime version).
      • GO: 1.21, 1.23
      • Node.js: 18, 20
      • PHP 8.1
      • Python: 3.9
    • Including runtime of additionally excluded functions
  • The AIOS service integration has been stopped.
    • Since the AIOS service has been discontinued, the AIOS integration service has been removed from Cloud Functions.
2026.03.19
FEATURE Add resource-based policy feature
  • You can set a resource-based policy on a function.
    • Resource-based policies are policies applied to the function itself that allow external access.
    • You can use resource-based policies to allow or deny actions on specific resources to a specific principal (Principal).
2025.12.16
FEATURE AIOS, PrivateLink service integration
  • You can use functions in conjunction with the AIOS service.
    • You can integrate Cloud Functions with AIOS to leverage LLMs.
  • You can use functions in conjunction with the PrivateLink service.
    • Through a Private connection (PrivateLink), you can establish internal connections between VPCs and between a VPC and services on the Samsung Cloud Platform without traversing the Internet.
2025.10.23
FEATURE Add Java Runtime executable file upload feature
  • The feature to upload Java Runtime executable files has been added.
    • You can import and configure a Java Runtime executable archive file (.jar/.zip) in Object Storage.
2025.07.01
NEW Cloud Functions service official version launch
  • We have officially launched the Cloud Functions service.
    • It is a serverless computing‑based FaaS (Function as a Service) that lets you easily run function‑style applications without server provisioning.

7 - Virtual Server DR

When the system is disrupted due to various disaster situations and risk factors, you can replicate the Block Storage attached to a Virtual Server in another region to restore normal operation quickly.

7.1 - Overview

Service Overview

Virtual Server DR is a service that quickly restores the system by replicating the Virtual Server and its attached Block Storage to a region different from the one currently in use. Even if the system is disrupted due to various disaster situations or unexpected events, you can quickly restore normal operation by using Virtual Server DR.

Notice
  • The Virtual Server DR service can be configured using partner solutions sold on the Samsung Cloud Platform Marketplace.
  • For detailed information on using the Marketplace, please refer to Marketplace.
Caution
  • When you purchase and use a service sold on the Marketplace, a delegated tax invoice is issued in accordance with a separate agreement with the Marketplace software supplier.
  • If you request a partner solution product for Virtual Server DR from the Marketplace, the request information will be emailed to the responsible person. Coordinate product details and schedule with the person in charge. Software installation and charges will be billed based on the confirmed date.
  • The services sold in the Marketplace of Samsung Cloud Platform are offered by individual sellers, and Samsung SDS serves as an e‑commerce intermediary, not a party to the sales. Accordingly, Samsung SDS does not guarantee or assume responsibility for the service information or transactions conducted by individual sellers.

Features

  • Easy DR Environment Setup: You can easily configure a Virtual Server for DR setup through partner solutions in the Marketplace of Samsung Cloud Platform.
  • Various Environment Configurations: Using partner solutions, you can configure various environments such as physical to virtual (P2V) and virtual to virtual (V2V) environments, and it supports multiple operating systems (Windows, Linux).

Service Architecture Diagram

Diagram
Figure. Virtual Server DR Diagram

Provided features

For the main features, please refer to the Product Catalog Details page of the partner solution sold on the Samsung Cloud Platform Marketplace.

Note
For detailed information on using the Marketplace, see Marketplace.

Preliminary Service

This is a list of services that must be pre-configured before creating the service. Please refer to the guide provided for each service and prepare accordingly.

Service CategoryserviceDetailed description
NetworkingVPCA service that provides an isolated virtual network in a cloud environment
NetworkingSecurity GroupVirtual firewall that controls server traffic
ComputeVirtual ServerVirtual server optimized for cloud computing
Table. Virtual Server DR Preliminary Service

7.2 - Release Note

Virtual Server DR

2025.07.01
NEW Official launch of Virtual Server DR service
  • We have officially launched the Virtual Server DR service.
    • When the system is interrupted by various disaster scenarios and risk factors, it can be restored to normal operation in a short time.

8 - Block Storage

8.1 - Overview

Service Overview

Block Storage is a high-performance storage that stores data in block units arranged in a fixed size and layout.
Suitable for large-scale, high-performance requirements such as databases and mail servers, and users can directly allocate volumes on the server for use.

Features

  • Large Volume Provisioning: OS configuration volumes are created with at least the minimum size per image and can be expanded up to 12 TB, and data storage volumes outside the OS can be created and expanded from a minimum of 8 GB to a maximum of 12 TB. Capacity expansion is performed reliably while online.
  • High-Performance Full SSD Offering: It provides high durability and availability based on redundant controllers and Disk Array RAID. Since a Full SSD disk is provided by default, it is suitable for high-speed data processing tasks such as database workloads.
  • Snapshot Backup: Data that has been modified or deleted can be recovered using the image snapshot feature. The user selects a snapshot created at the desired point in time from the list and performs the recovery.

Service Architecture Diagram

Diagram
Figure. Block Storage diagram

Provided features

Block Storage provides the following features.

  • Volume Name: Users can set or modify the name for each volume.
  • Capacity: Volumes can be created with sizes from a minimum of 8 GB up to a maximum of 12 TB, and can be expanded while in use. The OS default volume can be created with at least the minimum size for each image.
  • Connection Server: You can select a Virtual Server to connect or disconnect.
    • Multi-Server Connection (Multi Attach): Connect to two or more servers, with no limit on the number of servers per volume, and a Virtual Server can connect up to 26 volumes.
  • Encryption: All volumes of Block Storage have AES-256 algorithm encryption applied by default, and when a volume is of HDD/SSD_KMS disk type, additional in‑transit encryption is provided for the segment between the instance and the Block Storage attached to the instance.
  • Snapshot: The image snapshot feature allows recovery of modified or deleted data. Users select a snapshot created at the desired point in time from the list to restore it.
  • Volume Transfer: You can transfer a volume to another Account using the volume transfer feature.
  • Monitoring: IOPS, Latency, Throughput, etc. monitoring information can be viewed through the Cloud Monitoring service.

Component

You can create a volume by entering the capacity and selecting the disk type according to the user’s service scale and performance requirements. When using the snapshot feature, you can restore data to the desired point in time.

Volume

A volume (Volume) is the basic creation unit of the Block Storage service and is used as data storage space. Users select a name, capacity, and disk type to create a volume, then attach it to a Virtual Server for use.
The volume name generation rules are as follows.

Reference
Enter using letters, numbers, spaces, and special characters (-, _) within 255 characters.

snapshot

A snapshot (Snapshot) is an image backup of a volume at a specific point in time. Users can view the snapshot name and creation timestamp in the snapshot list to select the snapshot they want to restore, and through that snapshot they can recover data that was changed or deleted.
The following considerations apply when using snapshots.

Reference
  • The snapshot creation time is based on Asia/Seoul (GMT +09:00).
  • Select the snapshot recovery button to restore the Block Storage volume to the latest snapshot.
  • If you select a specific snapshot from the snapshot list, you can recover by creating a new volume based on the snapshot.
  • Snapshots are billed based on the size of the original Block Storage, so please delete any unnecessary snapshots.

Preliminary Service

This is a list of services that must be pre-configured before creating the service. Please refer to the guide provided for each service for details and prepare in advance.

Service CategoryserviceDetailed description
ComputeVirtual ServerVirtual server optimized for cloud computing
Table. Block Storage Prerequisite Services

8.1.1 - Monitoring Metrics

Cloud Monitoring service termination notice

According to Samsung Cloud Platform’s policy, the Cloud Monitoring service is scheduled to be discontinued in September 2026.
Accordingly, after the September 2026 release, resource monitoring of the Samsung Cloud Platform via Cloud Monitoring will no longer be possible.

With the new alternative service, you can continuously perform resource monitoring by leveraging ServiceWatch released in October 2025.
ServiceWatch provides more modern and powerful features, replacing Cloud Monitoring to deliver a seamless monitoring environment.

Block Storage planned to be integrated with ServiceWatch from the July 2026 release onward is.
Detailed information about ServiceWatch is available in the ServiceWatch Overview.

Block Storage Monitoring Metrics

The table below shows the monitoring metrics for Block Storage that can be viewed in Cloud Monitoring. For detailed usage of Cloud Monitoring, refer to the Cloud Monitoring guide.

Performance Item NameExplanationunit
Volume TotalTotal byte countbytes
IOPS [Read]iops(read)iops
IOPS [Write]iops(write)iops
Latency Time [Read]Read latencyusec
Latency Time [write]Latency (write)usec
Throughput [Read]Throughput (read)bytes/s
Throughput [Write]Throughput (write)bytes/s
Table. Block Storage Monitoring Metrics

8.2 - How-to guides

Users can create the service by entering the required information for Block Storage and selecting detailed options through the Samsung Cloud Platform Console.

Create Block Storage

You can create and use the Block Storage service in the Samsung Cloud Platform Console.

To create a Block Storage, follow these steps.

  1. Click the All Services > Compute > Virtual Server menu. Navigate to the Service Home page of Virtual Server.

  2. Click the Block Storage menu. Go to the Block Storage List page.

  3. On the Block Storage page, click the Create Service button. You will be taken to the Block Storage Creation page.

  4. On the Block Storage Creation page, enter the information required to create the service and select detailed options.

    Category
    Required or not
    Detailed description
    Volume nameRequiredVolume name
    • English letters, numbers, spaces, and special characters(-, _) using to input up to 255 characters
    snapshotSelectionSelect the snapshot to use when creating a volume from a snapshot
    • After checking the Use option, snapshot selection is possible
    • When creating a service via snapshot recovery volume creation, provide the recovery snapshot name
    • If not selected, an empty volume is created
    Disk typeRequiredSelect Disk Type
    • SSD_Provisioned: SSD volume with configurable IOPS and throughput
    • SSD/HDD: Standard SSD/HDD volume
    • SSD/HDD_KMS: Additional encrypted volume
    • SSD/HDD_MultiAttach: Volume that can be attached to more than one server
    • Cannot be modified after service creation
    • When creating a service via snapshot recovery volume creation, it is set identical to the original and cannot be modified
    capacitySelectionCapacity setting
    • Can be created within 8~12,228GB
    • Enter the number of units provided in 8GB increments
    • Enter a capacity that is equal to or larger than the original when creating the service via snapshot recovery volume creation
    Max IOPSRequiredEnter the maximum IOPS value between 5,000 and 20,000
    • Can be set only when disk type is SSD_Provisioned
    Max ThroughputRequiredEnter the maximum Throughput value between 250 and 1,000
    • Can be set only when the disk type is SSD_Provisioned
    Table. Block Storage Service Information Input Items

  5. Check the detailed information and estimated billing amount generated in the Summary panel, and click the Create button.

    • When creation is complete, check the created resource on the Block Storage List page.
Reference
  • All volumes of Block Storage are encrypted by default with the AES-256 algorithm.
  • Windows-based Virtual Servers cannot use MultiAttach disks. Use a separate replication method or solution.
  • If the volume is of HDD/SSD_KMS disk type, we additionally provide in‑transit encryption for the block storage segment connected to the instance.
Caution
When using the HDD/SSD_KMS disk type, performance may degrade by approximately 60%.

View Block Storage Details

The Block Storage service allows you to view and edit the full resource list and detailed information. Block Storage Detail page consists of Detail Information, Snapshot List, Tags, Operation History tabs.

Follow these steps to view detailed information about the Block Storage service.

  1. Click the All Services > Compute > Virtual Server menu. Navigate to the Service Home page of Virtual Server.
  2. Click the Block Storage menu. Navigate to the Block Storage List page.
  3. On the Block Storage List page, click the resource for which you want to view detailed information. You will be taken to the Block Storage Details page.
    • Block Storage Details page displays status information and additional feature information, and consists of Details, Snapshot List, Tags, Activity History tabs.
      CategoryDetailed description
      Volume statusVolume status
      • Creating: In progress
      • Downloading: In progress (applying OS image)
      • Available: Created, server connection available
      • Reserved: Waiting for server connection
      • Attaching: Connecting to server
      • Detaching: Server connection detached
      • In Use: Server connection established
      • Deleting: Terminating service
      • Awaiting Transfer: Waiting for volume transfer
      • Extending: Expanding capacity
      • Error Extending: Abnormal state during capacity expansion
      • Backing Up: Backing up volume
      • Restoring Backup: Restoring volume backup
      • Error Backing Up: Abnormal state during volume backup
      • Error Restoring: Abnormal state during volume backup restoration
      • Error Deleting: Abnormal state during deletion
      • Error Managing: Abnormal state
      • Error: Abnormal state
      • Maintenance: Temporary maintenance state
      • Reverting: Restoring snapshot
      Previous volumeMove the volume to another Account
      Create snapshotImmediately create a snapshot at the time of creation
      Snapshot recoveryRecover the volume using the latest snapshot in Available state
      Service terminationCancel service button
      Table. Status Information and Additional Features

Detailed information

Block Storage List page lets you view detailed information of the selected resource and edit the information if needed.

CategoryDetailed description
serviceservice group
Resource TypeResource Type
SRNUnique resource ID in Samsung Cloud Platform
  • In the Block Storage service, it refers to the volume SRN
Resource nameResource Name
  • In the Block Storage service, it refers to the volume name
Resource IDService’s unique resource ID
constructorUser who created the service
Creation date and timeService creation date and time
editorUser who modified the service
Modification dateDate and time the service was modified
Volume nameVolume name
  • If you need to edit the volume name, click the Edit button
Volume IDVolume unique ID
Disk typeDisk type
typeClassification by volume creation method and usage
capacityVolume capacity
  • Can be expanded up to 12,288GB in increments of 8
  • Capacity reduction is not allowed
  • If capacity expansion is required, click the Edit button
Max IOPSRequired
Max ThroughputRequired
Connection serverConnected Virtual Server
  • Server ID: Unique server ID
  • Server Name: Server name
  • Status: Server status
  • Connection Information: Connection information of the volume for server connection
  • When adding a Virtual Server connection, click the Add button
  • When removing a Virtual Server connection, click the Disconnect button
Table. Block Storage detailed information items
Reference
Volumes that contain vProtect are temporary volumes created when using the Backup service and are not charged.

Snapshot List

Block Storage List page allows you to view the snapshot of the selected resource.

CategoryDetailed description
Snapshot nameSnapshot name
ExplanationSnapshot description
Volume capacitySnapshot target Block Storage original volume capacity
  • If the original volume capacity and the snapshot volume capacity differ, only recovery using the recovery volume creation method is possible
Creation timestampSnapshot creation time
statusSnapshot status
  • Available: Creation completed, recoverable
  • Creating: Creating
  • Error: Abnormal state
  • Deleting: Deleting
  • Error Deleting: Deleting with abnormal state
  • Restoring: Restoring
  • Backing Up: Backing up
Additional features > MoreSnapshot management button
DeleteSelect the snapshots to delete from the snapshot list and delete them all at once.
Table. Snapshot List Tab Detailed Information Items
Caution

Snapshots can affect volume capacity management. Delete unnecessary snapshots after use.

  • Snapshot recovery can be performed while the server is not connected.
Reference
  • The snapshot creation time is based on Asia/Seoul (GMT +09:00).
  • When the snapshot recovery button is clicked, the volume is restored to the latest snapshot in the Available state.
  • When you select Create recovery volume on the snapshot list page, a new volume based on the snapshot is created without modifying the existing volume.
  • Snapshots that contain vProtect are temporary snapshots created when using the Backup service and are not charged.

tag

Block Storage List page lets you view the tag information of the selected resource, and add, modify, or delete it.

CategoryDetailed description
Tag listTag list
  • You can view the Key and Value information of the tag
  • Up to 50 tags can be added per resource
  • When entering a tag, you can search and select from the list of previously created Keys and Values
Table. Block Storage Tag Tab Items

Work History

On the Block Storage List page, you can view the operation history of the selected resource.

CategoryDetailed description
Task History ListResource Change History
  • Operation Time, Resource Type, Resource ID, Resource Name, Operation Details, Event Topic, Operation Result, Operator Information Check
  • Click the detailed search button to perform an advanced search
Table. Work History Tab Detailed Information Items

Managing Block Storage Resources

If you need to modify the settings of a created Block Storage or add or remove connected servers, you can perform the tasks on the Block Storage Details page.

Edit volume name

You can rename a volume. To rename a volume, follow these steps.

  1. Click the All Services > Compute > Virtual Server menu. Navigate to the Service Home page of Virtual Server.
  2. Click the Block Storage menu. Navigate to the Block Storage list page.
  3. On the Block Storage List page, click the resource whose volume name you want to edit. You will be taken to the Block Storage Details page.
  4. Click the Edit button of the Volume name. The Edit Volume Name popup window opens.
  5. Enter the volume name and click the Confirm button.
Reference
Enter within 255 characters using letters, numbers, spaces, and special characters(-, _)

Increase capacity

You can expand the volume capacity. To expand the capacity, follow the steps below.

  1. Click the All Services > Compute > Virtual Server menu. Navigate to the Service Home page of Virtual Server.
  2. Click the Block Storage menu. Go to the Block Storage List page.
  3. Block Storage List page, click the resource to expand capacity. You will be taken to the Block Storage Details page.
  4. Click the Capacity Edit button. The Capacity Edit popup window opens.
  5. Enter the capacity and click the Confirm button.
Caution
  • Size reduction is not provided.
  • After expanding the capacity, you cannot restore from snapshots taken before the expansion.
  • Snapshots created before the capacity expansion can only be used to recover by creating a new volume.
Reference
  • Expansion to a larger capacity than the current one is possible within the range of 8 to 12,228 GB.
  • Enter the number of Units provided in 8GB increments.

Modify connection server

You can connect to or disconnect from the server. To modify the connected server, follow these steps.

  1. Click the All Services > Compute > Virtual Server menu. Navigate to the Service Home page of Virtual Server.
  2. Click the Block Storage menu. Go to the Block Storage List page.
  3. Block Storage List page, click the resource to edit the attached server. You will be taken to the Block Storage Details page.
  4. When adding a Virtual Server connection, click the Add button in the Connection Server field. The Add Connection Server popup window will open.
  5. After selecting the Virtual Server you want to connect to, click the Confirm button.
  6. If you are disconnecting the Virtual Server, click the Connection Server item’s Disconnect button.
    • Be sure to perform the disconnect operation (Umount, Disk Offline) on the server before proceeding with the release.
Caution
Connect to the server and be sure to perform the disconnect operations (Umount, Disk Offline) before detaching the connected server. Detaching without OS operations may cause a status error (Hang) on the connected server. For detailed information on detaching a server, see Detach Server.
Reference
  • You can connect a Virtual Server created in the same location as the Block Storage.
  • A Virtual Server that uses a Partition with a Server Group policy cannot be connected.
  • HDD/SSD_MultiAttach disk type can be attached to two or more Virtual Servers, and there is no limit on the number of connections.
    • A Windows-based Virtual Server cannot use MultiAttach disks and must use a separate replication method or solution.
  • A Virtual Server can attach up to 26 volumes, including the OS by default.
  • The OS default volume cannot be modified on the connected server, and the service cannot be terminated.
  • When adding a connected server, it can be used after performing the connection tasks (Mount, Disk Online) on the server. For detailed information about server connections, refer to Connecting to Server.

Cancel Block Storage

You can reduce operating costs by terminating unused Block Storage. However, terminating the service may cause the running service to stop immediately, so you should carefully consider the impact of service interruption before proceeding with the termination.

Caution
  • Please note that data cannot be recovered after termination.
  • In the following cases, you cannot delete a Block Storage volume.
    • Connecting to server
    • OS default volume
    • Connect Custom image to Virtual Server
    • When the volume status is not Available, Error, Error Extending, Error Restoring, or Error Managing
  • If you select two or more volumes to cancel, only the volumes that can be canceled will be canceled.

To cancel Block Storage, follow the steps below.

  1. Click the All Services > Compute > Virtual Server menu. Navigate to the Service Home page of Virtual Server.
  2. Click the Block Storage menu. Go to the Block Storage List page.
  3. On the Block Storage List page, select the resource to terminate, and click the Terminate Service button.
  4. After termination is complete, verify on the Block Storage List page that the resource has been terminated.

8.2.1 - Connect to Server

When using a volume on the server, a connect or disconnect operation is required.
On the Block Storage Details page, add a connected server, then access the server to perform connection operations (Mount, Disk Online). After use, perform disconnection operations (Umount, Disk Offline) and then remove the connected server.

Connect to Server (Mount, Disk Online)

To use the volume added to the connected server, you must log into the server and perform the connection tasks (Mount, Disk Online). Follow the steps below.

Linux operating system

Example configuration for server connection
  • Server OS: LINUX
  • Mount location: /data
  • Volume size: 24 GB
  • File system: ext3, ext4, xfs etc
  • Additional allocated disk: /dev/vdb
  1. Click the All Services > Compute > Virtual Server menu. Navigate to the Service Home page of Virtual Server.
  2. Click the Block Storage menu. Go to the Block Storage List page.
  3. On the Block Storage List page, click the resource to be used on the connected server. Navigate to the Block Storage Details page.
  4. After verifying the server in the Connection Server item, connect.
  5. Refer to the steps below to mount the volume (Mount).
  • Switch to root privileges

    $ sudo -i
    
  • Check Disk

    # lsblk
    NAME    MAJ:MIN  RM   SIZE RO TYPE MOUNTPOINT
    vda       252:0   0    24G  0 disk
    ├─vda1    252:1   0  23.9G  0 part [SWAP]
    └─vda14   252:14  0     4M  0 part /
    └─vda15   252:15  0   106M  0 part /boot/efi
    vdb       252:16  0    24G  0 disk
    
  • Create partition

    # fdisk /dev/vdb
    Command (m for help): n
    
    Partition type:
       p   primary (0 primary, 0 extended, 4 free)
       e   extended
    Select (default p): p
    Partition number (1-4, default 1): 1
    First sector (2048-50331646, default 2048):
    Last sector, +/-sectors or +/-size{K,M,G,T,P} (2048-50331646, default 50331646):
    
    Created a new partition 1 of type 'Linux' and of size 24 GiB.
    
    Command (m for help): w
    The partition table has been altered!
    Calling ioctl() to re-read partition table.
    Syncing disks.
    
  • Partition format setting (example: ext4)

    # lsblk
    NAME    MAJ:MIN  RM   SIZE RO TYPE MOUNTPOINT
    vda       252:0   0    24G  0 disk
    ├─vda1    252:1   0  23.9G  0 part [SWAP]
    └─vda14   252:14  0     4M  0 part /
    └─vda15   252:15  0   106M  0 part /boot/efi
    vdb       252:16  0    24G  0 disk
    └─vdb1    252:17  0    24G  0 part
    
    # mkfs.ext4 /dev/vdb1
    mke2fs 1.46.5 (30-Dec-2021)
    ...
    Writing superblocks and filesystem accounting information: done
    
  • Volume Mount

    # mkdir /data
    
    # mount /dev/vdb1 /data
    
    # lsblk
    NAME    MAJ:MIN  RM   SIZE RO TYPE MOUNTPOINT
    vda       252:0   0    24G  0 disk
    ├─vda1    252:1   0  23.9G  0 part [SWAP]
    └─vda14   252:14  0     4M  0 part /
    └─vda15   252:15  0   106M  0 part /boot/efi
    vdb       252:16  0    24G  0 disk
    └─vdb1    252:17  0    24G  0 part /data
    
    # vi /etc/fstab
    (추가) /dev/vdb1     /data       ext4     defaults   0 0
    

ItemExplanation
cat /etc/fstabFile system information file
  • Used when the server is running
df -hCheck the total disk usage of mounted disks
fdisk -lCheck partition information
  • Physical disks are represented by letters such as a, b, c like /dev/sda, /dev/sdb, /dev/sdc. Disk partitions are represented by numbers such as 1, 2, 3 like /dev/sda1, /dev/sda2, /dev/sda3
Table. Mount command reference
commandExplanation
mCheck the usage of the fdisk command
nCreate a new partition
pVerify the updated partition information
tChange the system ID of the partition
wSave partition information and exit fdisk.
Table. Partition creation command (fdisk) reference

Windows operating system

  1. Click the All Services > Compute > Virtual Server menu. Navigate to the Virtual Server Service Home page.
  2. Click the Block Storage menu. You will be taken to the Block Storage List page.
  3. On the Block Storage List page, click the resource to be used on the connected server. You will be taken to the Block Storage Details page.
  4. Connection Server item, verify the server and then connect.
  5. Refer to the steps below to connect the volume (Disk Online).
  • After right-clicking the Windows Start icon, run Computer Management.

  • In the Computer Management tree structure, select Storage > Disk Management

  • Check Disk

    Mount

  • Disk Online

    Mount

  • Disk initialization

    Mount

    Mount
  • Partition format

    Mount

    Mount
    Mount
  • Check volume

    Mount

Disconnect server (Umount, Disk Offline)

Access the server, perform the disconnect operations (Umount, Disk Offline), and then disconnect the server from the Console.

Follow the next procedure.

Caution
  • If you disconnect the server from the console without performing the disconnect operations (Umount, Disk Offlline) on the server, a server state error (Hang) may occur.
    • Be sure to perform the OS tasks first.
  • For the OS default volume, you cannot modify the connected server or cancel the service.

Linux operating system

  1. Click the All Services > Compute > Virtual Server menu. Navigate to the Service Home page of Virtual Server.
  2. Click the Block Storage menu. Navigate to the Block Storage List page.
  3. On the Block Storage List page, click the resource to detach the attached server. You will be taken to the Block Storage Details page.
  4. After verifying the server in the Connection Server item, connect.
  5. Refer to the steps below to unmount the volume(Umount).
    • Volume Umount
  # umount /dev/vdb1 /data

  # lsblk
  NAME    MAJ:MIN  RM   SIZE RO TYPE MOUNTPOINT
  vda       252:0   0    24G  0 disk
  ├─vda1    252:1   0  23.9G  0 part [SWAP]
  └─vda14   252:14  0     4M  0 part /
  └─vda15   252:15  0   106M  0 part /boot/efi
  vdb       252:16  0    24G  0 disk
  └─vdb1    252:17  0    24G  0 part

  # vi /etc/fstab
  (삭제) /dev/vdb1     /data       ext4     defaults   0 0

Windows operating system

  1. Click the All Services > Compute > Virtual Server menu. Navigate to the Service Home page of Virtual Server.

  2. Click the Block Storage menu. Go to the Block Storage List page.

  3. Block Storage List page, click the resource to detach the connected server. Navigate to the Block Storage Details page.

  4. In the Connection Server field, verify the server before connecting.

  5. Unmount the mounted file system.

  6. Please follow the procedure below to detach the volume (Disk Offline).

    • Right-click the Windows Start icon, then run Computer Management.

    • In the Computer Management tree structure, select Storage > Disk Management

    • Right-click the disk to be removed, then run Offline

      Umount
    • Check disk status

      Umount

8.2.2 - Use Snapshot

You can create, delete, or restore snapshots of a created Block Storage using snapshots. You can perform these actions on the Block Storage Details page and the Snapshot List page.

Creating a Snapshot

You can create a snapshot of the current point in time. To create a snapshot, follow these steps.

  1. Click the All Services > Compute > Virtual Server menu. Navigate to the Service Home page of Virtual Server.
  2. Click the Block Storage menu. Go to the Block Storage List page.
  3. On the Block Storage List page, click the resource for which you want to create a snapshot. You will be taken to the Block Storage Details page.
  4. Click the Create Snapshot button. The Create Snapshot popup window opens.
  5. Enter the Snapshot name and description, then click the Confirm button. This creates a snapshot of the current point in time.
  6. Click the Snapshot List button. You will be taken to the Block Storage Snapshot List page.
  7. Check the generated snapshot.
Caution
Snapshots are billed based on the size of the original Block Storage, so please delete any unnecessary snapshots.
Reference
The snapshot creation time is based on Asia/Seoul (GMT +09:00).

Edit Snapshot

You can edit snapshot information. To modify the snapshot name or description, follow these steps.

  1. Click the All Services > Compute > Virtual Server menu. Go to the Service Home page of Virtual Server.
  2. Click the Block Storage menu. Navigate to the Block Storage List page.
  3. Block Storage List page, click the resource to edit the snapshot information. You will be taken to the Block Storage Details page.
  4. Click the Snapshot List button. You will be taken to the Block Storage Snapshot List page.
  5. After confirming the snapshot to edit, click the More button.
  6. Click the Edit button. The Snapshot Edit popup window opens.
  7. Enter the Snapshot name or Description, and click the Confirm button.

Recover snapshot

Block Storage volumes can be restored to the latest snapshot while in the Available state. To restore a snapshot, follow the steps below.

  1. Click the All Services > Compute > Virtual Server menu. Navigate to the Service Home page of Virtual Server.
  2. Click the Block Storage menu. Go to the Block Storage List page.
  3. On the Block Storage List page, click the resource to restore from a snapshot. You will be taken to the Block Storage Details page.
  4. If there are servers added in the Connected Server item, connect to the server and perform the disconnect operations (Umount, Disk Offline).
  5. On the Block Storage Details page, click the Disconnect button in the Connected Server item to remove the server. The connected server will be removed.
  6. Click the Snapshot List button. You will be taken to the Block Storage Snapshot List page.
  7. Check the latest snapshot in the Available state. The volume will be restored from that snapshot.
  8. Click the Snapshot Recovery button. The Snapshot Recovery popup window opens.
  9. After verifying the Snapshot name and Creation timestamp, click the Confirm button.
    • When recovery starts, the status becomes Reverting, and when it completes, it becomes Available.
  10. Detailed Information page button, click it. It navigates to the Block Storage Detailed Page.
  11. Click the Add button of the Connection Server. Reconnect the Virtual Server.
  12. After connecting to the added server, perform the connection tasks (Mount, Disk Online) according to the operating system.
Caution
  • Snapshot recovery can be performed while the server is not connected.
  • If you want to restore from a snapshot that is not the latest, you can recover by creating a recovery volume.
  • Recovery is not possible in the following situations.
    • When a Block Storage volume is not in the Available state.
    • If a server is attached to a Block Storage volume
    • If there are no recoverable snapshots.
    • If the latest snapshot changes while creating a recovery.
    • If the latest snapshot is not in the Available state.
    • When the snapshot’s volume size differs from the Block Storage volume size (in case the volume was expanded)

Create a snapshot recovery volume

You can create a volume using a snapshot. To create a snapshot recovery volume, follow these steps.

  1. Click the All Services > Compute > Virtual Server menu. Go to the Service Home page of Virtual Server.
  2. Click the Block Storage menu. Go to the Block Storage List page.
  3. On the Block Storage List page, click the resource to create a snapshot recovery volume. You will be taken to the Block Storage Details page.
  4. Click the Snapshot List button. You will be taken to the Block Storage Snapshot List page.
  5. After checking the Snapshot Name, Description and Creation Time, click the More button of the snapshot you want to restore.
  6. Click Create recovery volume. The Create snapshot recovery volume popup opens.
  7. Click the Confirm button. Go to the Create Block Storage page.
  8. On the Block Storage Creation page, enter the information required to create the service and select detailed options.
    • Enter the volume name and size. You can specify a size that is greater than or equal to the original volume.
    • The disk type is set to match the original and cannot be modified.
      Category
      Required
      Detailed description
      Volume nameRequiredVolume name
      • Enter up to 255 characters using English letters, numbers, spaces, and special characters (-, _)
      Disk typeRequiredSelect Disk Type
      • SSD_Provisioned: SSD volume with configurable IOPS and Throughput
      • SSD/HDD: Standard SSD/HDD volume
      • SSD/HDD_KMS: Additional encrypted volume
      • SSD/HDD_MultiAttach: Volume that can be attached to more than one server
      • Cannot be modified after service creation
      • SSD_Provisioned: SSD volume with configurable IOPS and Throughput
      • When creating the service via snapshot recovery volume creation, it is set identical to the original and cannot be modified
      capacitySelectionCapacity setting
      • Can be created within 8~12,228 GB
      • Enter the number of units provided in 8 GB increments
      • Enter a capacity equal to or larger than the original when creating the service via snapshot recovery volume creation
      Max IOPSRequiredEnter the maximum IOPS value between 5,000 and 20,000
      • Can be configured only when Disk type is SSD_Provisioned
      Max ThroughputRequiredEnter the maximum Throughput value between 250 and 1,000
      • Disk type can be set only when it is SSD_Provisioned
      Recovery snapshot nameSelectionName of the recovery snapshot used when creating the volume
      • Provide the recovery snapshot name when creating a service via snapshot recovery volume creation
      Table. Block Storage Service Information Input Items
  9. Summary Check the detailed information and estimated billing amount generated in the panel, and click the Create button.
    • When creation is complete, check the created resource on the Block Storage List page.

Delete Snapshot

You can select a snapshot to delete. To delete a snapshot, follow these steps.

  1. Click the All Services > Compute > Virtual Server menu. Navigate to the Service Home page of Virtual Server.
  2. Click the Block Storage menu. You will be taken to the Block Storage list page.
  3. On the Block Storage List page, click the resource to delete the snapshot. You will be taken to the Block Storage Details page.
  4. Click the Snapshot List button. You will be taken to the Block Storage Snapshot List page.
  5. After checking Snapshot Name, Description and Creation Time, click the More button of the snapshot you want to delete.
  6. Click the Delete button. The snapshot will be removed from the Snapshot List page.

8.2.3 - Move Volume

You can transfer a volume to another account, and when you do, the volume is removed from its original location. You can perform volume transfer on the Block Storage List or Block Storage Details page.

Previous volume

You can transfer a volume to another Account within the same region. To transfer a volume, follow the steps below.

  1. Click the All Services > Compute > Virtual Server menu. Navigate to the Service Home page of Virtual Server.
  2. Click the Block Storage menu. Go to the Block Storage List page.
  3. On the Block Storage List page, after selecting the resource to migrate, click the More > Migrate Volume button at the top left of the list.
    • Or click the Volume Migration button at the top of the Block Storage Details page of the resource to be migrated.
  4. When the popup indicating volume transfer opens, verify the volume name you want to transfer, then click the Confirm button.
  5. When the pop‑up for previous completion opens, click the Confirm button. The Volume Transfer ID and Approval Key information will be downloaded as a text file.
  6. The volume changes to Awaiting Transfer state.
Caution
  • Volume migration is possible within the same region.
  • Volume migration is possible only when the volume is in Available state. If it is in In Use state, disconnect all attached servers.

Cancel previous volume

You can cancel after creating a volume migration. To cancel a volume migration, follow the steps below.

  1. Click the All Services > Compute > Virtual Server menu. Navigate to the Service Home page of Virtual Server.
  2. Click the Block Storage menu. Go to the Block Storage List page.
  3. Block Storage List page, click the resource to cancel the volume migration. You will be taken to the Block Storage Details page.
    • If the volume is in Awaiting Transfer status, it can be canceled.
  4. Click the Cancel previous volume button. The Cancel previous volume popup will open.
  5. After confirming the volume name for which you want to cancel the volume transfer, click the Confirm button.
  6. The volume changes to Available state.

Get previous volume

You can receive a volume from another Account within the same region. To receive a volume, follow these steps.

  1. Click the All Services > Compute > Virtual Server menu. Navigate to the Service Home page of Virtual Server.
  2. Click the Block Storage menu. Navigate to the Block Storage List page.
  3. On the Block Storage List page, click the More > Receive Volume Transfer button at the top left of the list. The Receive Volume Transfer popup opens.
  4. Volume Migration: Enter the Volume Migration ID and Approval Key provided when creating it.
  5. A volume is created on the Block Storage list page.
information
  • It takes time for the changes to be applied.
  • The transferred volume is removed from the account that initiated the volume transfer.

8.3 - API Reference

API Reference

8.4 - CLI Reference

CLI Reference

8.5 - Release Note

Block Storage

2026.03.19
FEATURE Add SSD_Provisioned disk type
  • An SSD volume with configurable IOPS and throughput has been added.
    • When creating Block Storage, you can select the SSD_Provisioned disk type.
    • You can set the IOPS and Throughput range.
      • IOPS: 5,000 ~ 20,000
      • Throughput: 250 ~ 1,000
    • During the preview period, there is no additional charge; charges will be applied later.
2025.07.01
FEATURE Snapshot pricing policy change and monitoring integration
  • Snapshots are billed based on the size of the original Block Storage.
  • Integrated with Cloud Monitoring.
    • You can view IOPS, Latency, and Throughput information in Cloud Monitoring.
2025.02.27
FEATURE Block Storage Add disk type
  • Block Storage feature change
    • HDD disk types have been added, and you can select the added type (HDD, HDD_MultiAttach, HDD_KMS) according to your purpose.
  • Samsung Cloud Platform common feature changes
    • Account, IAM, Service Home, tags, and other common CX changes have been applied.
2024.10.01
NEW Block Storage service official version release
  • Added the SSD_KMS disk type.
    • When SSD_KMS is selected, encryption using a KMS (Key Management Service) encryption key is added.
  • We have launched a high‑performance storage service suitable for handling large‑scale data and database workloads.
2024.07.02
NEW Beta version release
  • We have launched a high-performance storage service suitable for handling large-scale data and database workloads.